Garmin | Cirrus Perspective SR20 | Garmin Cirrus Perspective SR20 Cirrus Perspective Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22

Garmin Cirrus Perspective SR20 Cirrus Perspective Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
®
Cirrus Perspective by Garmin
®®
Garmin AT, Inc.
2345 Turner Road SE
Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
p:503.391.3411
f:503.364.2138
Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House, Bulls Copse Road
Houndsdown Business Park
Southampton, SO40 9RB, U.K.
p:44/0870.8501241
f:44/0870.8501251
Garmin Corporation
No. 68, Jangshu 2nd Road
Shijr, Taipei County, Taiwan
p:886/02.2642.9199
f:886/02.2642.9099
Cirrus SR20/SR22
Garmin International, Inc.
1200 East 151st Street
Olathe, KS 66062, U.S.A.
p:913.397.8200
f:913.397.8282
www.garmin.com
190-00820-03
Revision 1TP
Cirrus SR20/SR22
Integrated Avionics System
Pilot’s Guide
System Software 0764.06 or later
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
AUDIO PANEL & CNS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Copyright © 2008, 2009 Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
This manual reflects the operation of System Software version 0764.06 or later for the Cirrus SR20, SR22 and SR22TN. Some differences
in operation may be observed when comparing the information in this manual to earlier or later software versions.
Garmin International, Inc., 1200 East 151st Street, Olathe, Kansas 66062, U.S.A.
Tel: 913/397.8200
Fax: 913/397.8282
Garmin AT, Inc., 2345 Turner Road SE, Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
Tel: 503/391.3411
Fax: 503/364.2138
Garmin (Europe) Ltd., Liberty House, Bulls Copse Road, Hounsdown Business Park, Southampton, SO40 9RB, U.K
Tel: 44/0870.8501241
Fax: 44/0870.8501251
Garmin Corporation, No. 68, Jangshu 2nd Road, Shijr, Taipei County, Taiwan
Tel: 886/02.2642.9199
Fax: 886/02.2642.9099
Website Address: www.garmin.com
Except as expressly provided herein, no part of this manual may be reproduced, copied, transmitted, disseminated, downloaded or stored
in any storage medium, for any purpose without the express written permission of Garmin. Garmin hereby grants permission to download
a single copy of this manual and of any revision to this manual onto a hard drive or other electronic storage medium to be viewed for
personal use, provided that such electronic or printed copy of this manual or revision must contain the complete text of this copyright notice
and provided further that any unauthorized commercial distribution of this manual or any revision hereto is strictly prohibited.
Garmin® is a registered trademark of Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. FliteCharts®, and SafeTaxi® are trademarks of Garmin Ltd. or its
subsidiaries. These trademarks may not be used without the express permission of Garmin.
Perspective® is a registered trademark of Cirrus Design Corporation; Bendix/King® and Honeywell® are registered trademarks of Honeywell
International, Inc.; NavData® is a registered trademark of Jeppesen, Inc.; XM® is a registered trademark of XM Satellite Radio, Inc.;
Skywatch® and Stormscope® is a registered trademark of L-3 Communications.
June 2009
Printed in the U.S.A.
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Limited Warranty
LIMITED WARRANTY
This Garmin product is warranted to be free from defects in materials or workmanship for two years from the date of purchase. Within this
period, Garmin will, at its sole option, repair or replace any components that fail in normal use. Such repairs or replacement will be made
at no charge to the customer for parts and labor, provided that the customer shall be responsible for any transportation cost. This warranty
does not cover failures due to abuse, misuse, accident, or unauthorized alterations or repairs.
THE WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES CONTAINED HEREIN ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING ANY LIABILITY ARISING UNDER ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE. THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, WHICH MAY VARY FROM STATE TO
STATE.
IN NO EVENT SHALL GARMIN BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER
RESULTING FROM THE USE, MISUSE, OR INABILITY TO USE THIS PRODUCT OR FROM DEFECTS IN THE PRODUCT. Some states do not
allow the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitations may not apply to you.
Garmin retains the exclusive right to repair or replace the unit or software, or to offer a full refund of the purchase price, at its sole
discretion. SUCH REMEDY SHALL BE YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY.
To obtain warranty service, contact your local Garmin Authorized Service Center. For assistance in locating a Service Center near you, visit
the Garmin Website at “http://www.garmin.com” or contact Garmin Customer Service at 800-800-1020.
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
i
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
WARNING: Navigation and terrain separation must NOT be predicated upon the use of the terrain avoidance
feature. The terrain avoidance feature is NOT intended to be used as a primary reference for terrain avoidance
and does not relieve the pilot from the responsibility of being aware of surroundings during flight. The
terrain avoidance feature is only to be used as an aid for terrain avoidance. Terrain data is obtained from
third party sources. Garmin is not able to independently verify the accuracy of the terrain data.
WARNING: The displayed minimum safe altitudes (MSAs) are only advisory in nature and should not be
relied upon as the sole source of obstacle and terrain avoidance information. Always refer to current
aeronautical charts for appropriate minimum clearance altitudes.
WARNING: The altitude calculated by the GPS receivers is geometric height above Mean Sea Level and
could vary significantly from the altitude displayed by pressure altimeters, such as the Air Data Computer, or
other altimeters in aircraft. GPS altitude should never be used for vertical navigation. Always use pressure
altitude displayed by the Perspective® PFD or other pressure altimeters in aircraft.
WARNING: Do not use outdated database information. Databases used in the Perspective® system must
be updated regularly in order to ensure that the information remains current. Pilots using any outdated
database do so entirely at their own risk.
WARNING: Do not use basemap (land and water data) information for primary navigation. Basemap data
is intended only to supplement other approved navigation data sources and should be considered as an aid
to enhance situational awareness.
WARNING: Traffic information shown on system displays is provided as an aid in visually acquiring traffic.
Pilots must maneuver the aircraft based only upon ATC guidance or positive visual acquisition of conflicting
traffic.
WARNING: Use of the L-3 WX-500 Stormscope® is not intended for hazardous weather penetration
(thunderstorm penetration). Stormscope information, as displayed on the Perspective®, is to be used only
for weather avoidance, not penetration.
WARNING: XM Weather should not be used for hazardous weather penetration. Weather information
provided by the GDL 69A is approved only for weather avoidance, not penetration.
Warning: NEXRAD weather data is to be used for long-range planning purposes only. Due to inherent
delays in data transmission and the relative age of the data, NEXRAD weather data should not be used for
short-range weather avoidance.
ii
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
WARNING: The Perspective® has a very high degree of functional integrity. However, the pilot must recognize
that providing monitoring and/or self-test capability for all conceivable system failures is not practical.
Although unlikely, it may be possible for erroneous operation to occur without a fault indication shown by
the Perspective®. It is thus the responsibility of the pilot to detect such an occurrence by means of crosschecking with all redundant or correlated information available in the cockpit.
WARNING: For safety reasons, Perspective® operational procedures must be learned on the ground.
WARNING: The United States government operates the Global Positioning System and is solely responsible
for its accuracy and maintenance. The GPS system is subject to changes which could affect the accuracy
and performance of all GPS equipment. Portions of the Perspective® utilize GPS as a precision electronic
NAVigation AID (NAVAID). Therefore, as with all NAVAIDs, information presented by the Perspective® can
be misused or misinterpreted and, therefore, become unsafe.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of unsafe operation, carefully review and understand all aspects of the
Perspective® Pilot’s Guide documentation and the Pilot’s Operating Handbook. Thoroughly practice basic
operation prior to actual use. During flight operations, carefully compare indications from the Perspective®
to all available navigation sources, including the information from other NAVAIDs, visual sightings, charts,
etc. For safety purposes, always resolve any discrepancies before continuing navigation.
WARNING: The illustrations in this guide are only examples. Never use the Perspective® to attempt to
penetrate a thunderstorm. Both the FAA Advisory Circular, Subject: Thunderstorms, and the Aeronautical
Information Manual (AIM) recommend avoiding “by at least 20 miles any thunderstorm identified as severe
or giving an intense radar echo.”
WARNING: Lamp(s) inside this product may contain mercury (HG) and must be recycled or disposed of
according to local, state, or federal laws. For more information, refer to our website at www.garmin.com/
aboutGarmin/environment/disposal.jsp.
WARNING: Because of variation in the earth’s magnetic field, operating the system within the following
areas could result in loss of reliable attitude and heading indications. North of 72° North latitude at all
longitudes. South of 70° South latitude at all longitudes. North of 65° North latitude between longitude
75° W and 120° W. (Northern Canada). North of 70° North latitude between longitude 70° W and 128° W.
(Northern Canada). North of 70° North latitude between longitude 85° E and 114° E. (Northern Russia).
South of 55° South latitude between longitude 120° E and 165° E. (Region south of Australia and New
Zealand).
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
iii
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
CAUTION: The PFD and MFD displays use a lens coated with a special anti-reflective coating that is very
sensitive to skin oils, waxes, and abrasive cleaners. CLEANERS CONTAINING AMMONIA WILL HARM THE
ANTI-REFLECTIVE COATING. It is very important to clean the lens using a clean, lint-free cloth and an
eyeglass lens cleaner that is specified as safe for anti-reflective coatings.
CAUTION: The Perspective® does not contain any user-serviceable parts. Repairs should only be made by an
authorized Garmin service center. Unauthorized repairs or modifications could void both the warranty and
the pilot’s authority to operate this device under FAA/FCC regulations.
NOTE: When using Stormscope, there are several atmospheric phenomena in addition to nearby thunderstorms
that can cause isolated discharge points in the strike display mode. However, clusters of two or more
discharge points in the strike display mode do indicate thunderstorm activity if these points reappear after
the screen has been cleared.
NOTE: All visual depictions contained within this document, including screen images of the Perspective® panel
and displays, are subject to change, and may not reflect the most current Perspective® system. Depictions
of equipment may differ slightly from the actual equipment.
NOTE: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Interference from GPS repeaters operating inside nearby hangars can cause an intermittent loss of
attitude and heading displays while the aircraft is on the ground. Moving the aircraft more than 100 feet
away from the source of the interference should alleviate the condition.
NOTE: Use of polarized eyewear may cause the flight displays to appear dim or blank.
NOTE: This product, its packaging, and its components contain chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer, birth defects, or reproductive harm. This notice is being provided in accordance with
California’s Proposition 65. For additional information, refer to the website at www.garmin.com/prop65.
iv
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Revision Information
Record of Revisions
Part Number
190-00820-00
Revision
A
B
Date
04/11/08
05/02/08
190-00820-01
C
D
A
05/12/08
06/04/08
09/29/08
Page Range
ALL
408 through
421
v
184 and I-1
i – I-6
190-00820-02
A
11/17/08
i – I-6
190-00820-03
1TP
6/30/09
i – I-6
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Description
Initial release
Made clerical changes
Made clerical changes
Made update to optional equipment and made clerical changes
Added Enhanced Vision System
Added changes in page navigation
Added new procedures for creating user waypoints
Added importing and exporting flight plans
Updated Warning, Caution and Advisory Alerts
Added other GDU 9.12 parameters
Added Flight Into Known Icing (FIKI)
Added the SR20
Added other GDU 9.12 parameters
Added AOPA Airport Directory
Added dual navigation database capability
Added database synchronization
Added other GDU 10.00 parameters
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
v
Revision Information
Blank Page
vi
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Table of Contents
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
Section 1 System Overview
Line Replaceable Units (LRU).................................. 2
Perspective® Controls.............................................. 7
PFD/MFD Controls......................................................... 7
PFD/MFD Control Unit. .................................................. 9
AFCS Controls............................................................. 11
Audio Panel Controls................................................... 12
Softkey Function. ........................................................ 14
Secure Digital Cards.............................................. 21
System Power-up.................................................... 22
System Operation................................................... 23
Display Operation. ...................................................... 23
Perspective® System Annunciations............................... 25
System Status............................................................. 26
AHRS Operation.......................................................... 28
GPS Receiver Operation............................................... 29
Accessing Perspective® Functionality.................. 33
Menus. ...................................................................... 33
Page Groups............................................................... 34
System Settings. ......................................................... 38
Timers........................................................................ 44
Display Backlighting.............................................. 47
Section 2 Flight Instruments
2.1 Flight Instruments.................................................. 52
Airspeed Indicator....................................................... 52
Attitude Indicator........................................................ 54
Altimeter.................................................................... 55
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI). ...................................... 58
Vertical Deviation........................................................ 58
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)............................... 59
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)................................... 64
2.2 Supplemental Flight Data..................................... 71
Temperature Display.................................................... 71
Wind Data.................................................................. 73
Vertical Navigation (VNV) Indications. .......................... 74
2.3 PFD Annunciations and Alerting Functions......... 75
Marker Beacon Annunciations...................................... 75
Traffic Annunciation. ................................................... 75
TAWS Annunciations. .................................................. 76
Altitude Alerting. ........................................................ 77
Low Altitude Annunciation........................................... 77
Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height Alerting....... 78
190-00820-03 Rev. A
2.4 Abnormal Operations............................................ 79
Abnormal GPS Conditions............................................ 79
Unusual Attitudes. ...................................................... 80
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
Section 3 Engine Indication System
EIS Display............................................................... 82
Engine Page............................................................ 84
Fuel Calculations......................................................... 88
Ice Protection Systems................................................. 90
Leaning Assist Mode.............................................. 93
EIS Display in Reversionary Mode........................ 94
System Display............................................................ 95
Section 4 Audio Panel and CNS
Overview................................................................. 97
MFD/PFD Controls and Frequency Display...................... 98
GMA 347 Audio Panel Controls. ................................. 100
Control Unit.............................................................. 102
COM Operation..................................................... 104
COM Transceiver Selection and Activation. .................. 104
COM Transceiver Manual Tuning................................. 105
Quick-tuning and Activating 121.500 MHz. ................. 107
Auto-tuning the COM Frequency. ............................... 108
Frequency Spacing. ................................................... 112
Automatic Squelch.................................................... 113
Volume. ................................................................... 113
NAV Operation...................................................... 114
NAV Radio Selection and Activation............................ 114
NAV Receiver Manual Tuning. .................................... 115
Auto-tuning a NAV Frequency from the MFD. .............. 117
Auto-tuning NAV Frequencies on Approach Activation.. 121
Marker Beacon Receiver. ........................................... 122
DME Tuning.............................................................. 123
GTX 32 & GTX 33 Mode S Transponder............. 124
Transponder Controls. ............................................... 124
Transponder Mode Selection. ..................................... 125
Entering a Transponder Code...................................... 128
IDENT Function......................................................... 130
Additional Audio Panel Functions...................... 131
Power-Up. ................................................................ 131
Mono/Stereo Headsets. ............................................. 131
Speaker.................................................................... 131
Intercom. ................................................................. 132
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
vii
Table of Contents
Passenger Address (PA) System. ................................. 134
Clearance Recorder and Player................................... 134
Split COM................................................................. 134
Entertainment Inputs................................................. 135
Multifunction Controls............................................... 136
4.6 Audio Panel Preflight Procedure........................ 137
4.7 Abnormal Operation............................................ 138
Audio Panel Fail-safe Operation.................................. 138
Stuck Microphone..................................................... 138
COM Tuning Failure................................................... 138
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
viii
Section 5 Flight Management
Introduction ......................................................... 139
Navigation Status Box............................................... 141
Using Map Displays.............................................. 142
Map Orientation. ...................................................... 142
Map Range............................................................... 144
Map Panning............................................................ 147
Measuring Bearing and Distance. ............................... 152
Topography. ............................................................. 153
Map Symbols............................................................ 156
Airways.................................................................... 162
Track Vector.............................................................. 164
Wind Vector.............................................................. 165
Nav Range Ring........................................................ 166
Fuel Range Ring........................................................ 167
Field of View (SVS). ................................................... 168
Destination Airport Information.................................. 169
Waypoints.............................................................. 170
Airports.................................................................... 171
Intersections............................................................. 178
NDBs. ...................................................................... 180
VORs........................................................................ 182
User Waypoints......................................................... 184
Airspaces............................................................... 190
Direct-to-Navigation . ......................................... 194
Flight Planning...................................................... 199
Flight Plan Creation................................................... 200
Adding Waypoints to an Existing Flight Plan................ 206
Adding Airways to a Flight Plan.................................. 208
Adding Procedures to a Stored Flight Plan................... 211
Flight Plan Storage.................................................... 218
Flight Plan Editing..................................................... 220
Along Track Offsets. .................................................. 223
Parallel Track. ........................................................... 225
Activating a Flight Plan Leg........................................ 228
Inverting a Flight Plan. .............................................. 229
Flight Plan Views....................................................... 230
Closest Point of FPL................................................... 232
5.7 Vertical Navigation.............................................. 233
Altitude Constraints. ................................................. 235
5.8 Procedures............................................................ 239
Departures. .............................................................. 239
Arrivals . .................................................................. 242
Approaches . ............................................................ 244
5.9 Trip Planning......................................................... 250
Trip Planning. ........................................................... 250
5.10 RAIM Prediction................................................... 254
5.11 Navigating a Flight Plan...................................... 257
5.12 Abnormal Operation............................................ 285
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
Section 6 Hazard Avoidance
XM Satellite Weather (Optional)........................ 287
Activating Services.................................................... 288
Using XM Satellite Weather Products.......................... 289
L-3 WX500 Stormscope (Optional).................... 316
Setting Up Stormscope on the Navigation Map............ 316
Selecting the Stormscope Page................................... 320
Terrain Proximity.................................................. 321
Displaying Terrain Proximity Data. .............................. 322
Terrain Proximity Page............................................... 324
Terrain-SVS (Optional)......................................... 326
TERRAIN-SVS Page.................................................... 330
TERRAIN-SVS Alerts................................................... 332
Terrain Awareness & Warning System............... 336
TAWS-B Page............................................................ 340
TAWS Alerts.............................................................. 342
System Status........................................................... 348
Avidyne TAS600 Series (Optional)........................... 349
TAS Symbology......................................................... 349
Displaying Traffic Data............................................... 349
Altitude Display. ....................................................... 352
Traffic Map Page Display Range.................................. 352
TAS Alerts................................................................. 354
System Status........................................................... 355
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Table of Contents
6.7 L-3 Skywatch (Optional)...................................... 357
TAS Symbology......................................................... 357
Operation................................................................. 358
Altitude Display. ....................................................... 361
Traffic Map Page Display Range.................................. 361
TAS Alerts................................................................. 363
System Status........................................................... 363
Section 7 Automatic Flight Control System
7.1 GFC 700 (Optional)............................................... 365
GFC 700 Controls...................................................... 366
Flight Director Operation. .......................................... 368
Vertical Modes.......................................................... 371
Lateral Modes........................................................... 386
Autopilot and Yaw Damper Operation......................... 394
Example Flight Plan................................................... 397
AFCS Annunciations and Alerts................................... 411
7.2 S-TEC Fifty Five X Autopilot (Optional)............. 412
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
Section 8 Additional Features
Synthetic Vision System (SVS)............................ 414
SVS Operation. ......................................................... 415
SVS Features............................................................. 417
Field of View............................................................. 426
Enhanced Vision System (EVS)............................ 428
Image Quality and Interpretation................................ 428
EVS Softkeys............................................................. 428
SafeTaxi................................................................. 431
SafeTaxi Cycle Number and Revision........................... 434
ChartView.............................................................. 437
ChartView Softkeys. .................................................. 437
Terminal Procedures Charts........................................ 438
Chart Options........................................................... 446
Day/Night View......................................................... 452
ChartView Cycle Number and Expiration Date. ............ 454
FliteCharts............................................................. 457
FliteCharts Softkeys................................................... 457
Terminal Procedures Charts........................................ 458
Chart Options........................................................... 465
Day/Night View......................................................... 468
FliteCharts Cycle Number and Expiration Date............. 470
AOPA Airport Directory........................................ 473
AOPA Database Cycle Number and Revision................ 473
190-00820-03 Rev. A
8.7 XM Radio Entertainment..................................... 475
Activating XM Satellite Radio Services. ....................... 475
Using XM Radio........................................................ 477
8.8 Scheduler............................................................... 480
8.9 Electronic Checklists............................................ 482
8.10 Flight Data Logging............................................. 485
8.11 Abnormal Operation............................................ 487
SVS Troubleshooting.................................................. 487
Reversionary Mode. .................................................. 487
Unusual Attitudes. .................................................... 488
Appendices
Annunciations and Alerts.............................................. 491
Alert Level Definitions. .............................................. 493
Aircraft Alerts. .......................................................... 494
Voice Alerts. ............................................................. 497
Perspective® System Annunciations............................. 498
Perspective® System Message Advisories..................... 500
AFCS Status Annunciations. ....................................... 510
Terrain-SVS Alerts...................................................... 511
Terrain-SVS Status Annunciations. .............................. 511
Flight plan Import/Export Messages............................ 513
SD Card Use and Databases.......................................... 515
Jeppesen Databases.................................................. 515
Garmin Databases..................................................... 517
Glossary........................................................................... 524
Frequently Asked Questions......................................... 530
Map Symbols.................................................................. 535
Index
Index . ...............................................................................I-1
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
ix
Table of Contents
Blank Page
x
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Section 1 System Overview
• GDU 1240A Multi Function Display (MFD)
• GRC 10 Remote Control (option with GDL 69A)
• GDU 1040A Primary Flight Display (optional)
• GDU 1040A Multi Function Display (optional)
• GRT 10 XM Radio Remote Transceiver (option with
GDL 69A)
• GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Unit
• GCU 478 PFD/MFD Control Unit
• GDC 74A Air Data Computer (ADC)
• GMC 705 AFCS Control Unit (if GFC 700 is
installed)
• GEA 71 Engine/Airframe Unit
• GTP 59 Outside Air Temperature (OAT) Probe
• GSA 80 AFCS Yaw Servo (if GFC 700 is installed)
• GMU 44 Magnetometer
• GSA 81 AFCS Pitch and Roll Servos (if GFC 700 is
installed)
• GTA 82 Pitch Trim Adapter (if GFC 700 is installed)
• GSM 85 Servo Gearboxes (if GFC 700 is installed)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• GTX 32 Transponder
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• GRS 77 Attitude and Heading Reference System
(AHRS)
• GMA 347 Audio Panel with Integrated Marker
Beacon Receiver
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• GDL 69/69A Satellite Data Link Receiver (optional)
EIS
• GDU 1240A Primary Flight Display (PFD)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Perspective® is an integrated flight control system that presents flight instrumentation, position, navigation,
communication, and identification information to the pilot through large-format displays. The system consists of
the following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
• GTX 33 Mode S Transponder (option without
TIS-A)
A top-level system block diagram is shown in Figure 1-1 (it does not include the GSM 85, GTA 82, GRC 10,
or GRT 10).
AFCS
NOTE: Refer to the AFCS section for details on the GFC 700 AFCS.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
In the Cirrus SR20, SR22 and SR22TN, the optional GFC 700 Automated Flight Control System (AFCS) provides
the flight director (FD), autopilot (AP), yaw damper (YD - optional), and manual electric trim (MET) functions of
the Perspective® system.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
1
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
1.1 Line Replaceable Units (LRU)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• GDU 1240A-30/1040A-30 (1) – This unit is configured as a PFD that features a 12 or 10.4-inch LCD with
1024 x 768 resolution. The unit installed on the left/pilot side is designated as PFD. This unit communicates
with the GDU 1240A-20/1040A-20 (MFD), and with the on-side GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Unit through a
High-Speed Data Bus (HSDB) connection.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• GDU 1240A-20/1040A-20 (1) – This unit is configured as a MFD that features a 12 or 10.4-inch LCD with 1024
x 768 resolution. The unit installed on the right/copilot side is designated as MFD. This unit communicates
with the GDU 1240A-30/1040A-30 (PFD), and with the on-side GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Unit through a
High-Speed Data Bus (HSDB) connection.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• GIA 63W (2) – The Integrated Avionics Units (IAU) function as the main communication hub, linking all LRUs
with the PFD. Each GIA 63W contains a GPS WAAS receiver, VHF COM/NAV/GS receivers, a flight director
(FD; if GFC 700 is installed) and system integration microprocessors. Each GIA 63W is paired with the on-side
display via an HSDB connection. The GIA 63Ws are not paired together and do not communicate with each
other directly.
2
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
• GDC 74A (1 or 2) – The Air Data Computer (ADC) processes data from the pitot/static system and outside air
temperature (OAT) sensor. This unit provides pressure altitude, airspeed, vertical speed and OAT information
to the system, and it communicates with the primary GIA 63W, GDU 1240A and GRS 77, using an ARINC 429
digital interface (it also interfaces directly with the primary GTP 59).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• GEA 71 (1) – Receives and processes signals from the engine and airframe sensors. This unit communicates
with both GIA 63Ws using an RS-485 digital interface.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• GRS 77 (1 or 2) – The Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS) provides aircraft attitude and heading
information via ARINC 429 to both GDUs and the primary GIA 63W. The GRS 77 contains advanced sensors
(including accelerometers and rate sensors) and interfaces with the primary GMU 44 to obtain magnetic field
information, with the GDC 74A to obtain air data, and with both GIA 63Ws to obtain GPS information. AHRS
modes of operation are discussed later in this document.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• GMU 44 (1 or 2) – The Magnetometer measures local magnetic field and sends the data to the GRS 77 for
processing to determine aircraft magnetic heading. This unit receives power directly from the GRS 77 and
communicates with the GRS 77, using an RS-485 digital interface.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
3
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• GMA 347 (1) – The Audio Panel integrates NAV/COM digital audio, intercom and marker beacon controls
(refer to the Audio Panel & CNS Section). This unit communicates with both GIA 63Ws, using an RS-232
digital interface.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
• GTX 32 (1) or GTX 33 (1) – The GTX 32 solid-state transponder provides Modes A and C capability. The GTX
33 solid-state transponder provides Modes A, B, and S capability. Either transponder can be controlled from
the PFD. The transponder communicates with the primary GIA 63W through an RS-232 digital interface.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• GDL 69/69A (1) – The Data Link Satellite Radio Receiver provides real-time weather information to the
MFD (and, indirectly, to the inset map of the PFD) as well as digital audio entertainment. The GDL 69/69A
communicates with the MFD via an HSDB connection. A subscription to the XM Satellite Radio service is
required to enable the GDL 69/69A capability.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• GCU 478 (1) – Provides the Flight Management System (FMS) controls for the PFD and MFD through an
RS-232 digital interface.
INDEX
• GMC 705 (1) – Provides the controls for the GFC 700 AFCS through an RS-232 digital interface allowing
communication with the PFD and MFD.
4
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
• GTP 59 (2) – The Temperature Probe provides Outside Air Temperature (OAT) data to the primary GDC 74A.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• GSA 80 (1), GSA 81 (2), and GSM 85A (3) – The GSA 80 servo is used for the automatic control of yaw, while
the GSA 81 servos are used for the automatic control of pitch and roll. These units interface with each GIA
63W.
EIS
The GSM 85A servo gearbox is responsible for transferring the output torque of the GSA 80/81 servo actuator
to the mechanical flight-control surface linkage.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• GTA 82 (1) – The Pitch Trim Adapter takes input from the trim switches, GIA 63W and GSA 81 to control the
DC motor to drive the aircraft trim system.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
5
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
GMC 705
EIS
GCU 478
GDL 69/69A
GDU 1240A
GDU 1040A
(MFD)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
(PFD)
GDU 1240A
GDU 1040A
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GMA 347
GMU 44 #2
(optional)
GMU 44 #1
GRS 77 #1
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GRS 77 #2
(optional)
AFCS
GIA 63W #1
GIA 63W #2
VHF COM
VHF NAV/LOC
GPS/WAAS
G/S
GDC 74A #1
AFCS Mode Logic
Flight Director
Servo Management
GTP 59 #1
GSA 82
(Pitch Trim)
GSA 81
GDC 74A #2
(optional)
GTP 59 #2
(optional)
(Pitch & Roll)
VHF COM
VHF NAV/LOC
GPS/WAAS
G/S
AFCS Mode Logic
Flight Director
Servo Management
GSA 80
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
(Yaw)
GEA 71 #1
APPENDICES
GTX 32/33
INDEX
Figure 1-1 Perspective® System (LRU Configuration)
6
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1.2 Perspective® Controls
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The Audio Panel (GMA 347) and AFCS controls (GMC 705) are described in the Audio Panel & CNS
and AFCS sections respectively.
The Perspective® system controls are located on the PFD and MFD bezels, PFD/MFD Control Unit, AFCS
Control Unit and audio panel. The controls for the PFD and MFD are discussed within the following pages of
this section.
EIS
PFD/MFD Controls
PFD
1
2
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4
13
MFD
16
AFCS
15
5
6
11
7
10
8
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
14
12
APPENDICES
9
13
INDEX
Figure 1-2 PFD & MFD Controls
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
7
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
1
COM Frequency Transfer Key – Toggles the standby and active COM frequencies. Press and hold this
key for two seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.5 MHz) automatically into the active frequency
field.
2
COM VOL/SQ Knob – Controls COM audio volume level. Volume level is shown in the COM frequency
field as a percentage. Press to turn the COM automatic squelch ON and OFF.
3
Dual COM Knob – Tunes the standby frequencies for the COM transceiver (large knob for MHz; small
knob for kHz). Press to switch the light blue tuning arrow
between COM1 and COM2.
4
BARO Knob – Sets the altimeter barometric pressure. Press to enter standard pressure (29.92).
5
Joystick – Changes the map range when rotated. Activates the map pointer when pressed.
6
MENU Key – Displays a context-sensitive list of options. This list allows the user to access additional
features or make setting changes that relate to particular pages.
7
PROC Key – Gives access to IFR departure procedures (DPs), arrival procedures (STARs) and approach
procedures (IAPs) for a flight plan. If a flight plan is used, available procedures for the departure and/or
arrival airport are automatically suggested. These procedures can then be loaded into the active flight plan.
If a flight plan is not used, both the desired airport and the desired procedure may be selected.
8
ENT Key – Validates or confirms a menu selection or data entry.
9
Dual FMS Knob – Flight Management System Knob. Press the FMS Knob to turn the selection cursor
ON and OFF. When the cursor is ON, data may be entered in the applicable window by turning the small
and large knobs. The large knob moves the cursor on the page, while the small knob selects individual
characters for the highlighted cursor location.
10
CLR Key – Erases information, cancels entries, or removes page menus.
11
FPL Key – Displays the active Flight Plan Page for creating and editing the active flight plan.
12
Direct-to Key ( ) – Allows the user to enter a destination waypoint and establish a direct course to the
selected destination (the destination is either specified by the identifier, chosen from the active route, or
taken from the map pointer position).
13
Bezel Keys – Used to select the appropriate softkey to access additional functionality.
14
Dual NAV Knob – Tunes the standby frequencies for the NAV receiver (large knob for MHz; small knob for
kHz). Press to switch the light blue tuning arrow
between NAV1 and NAV2.
15
NAV VOL/ID Knob – Controls NAV audio volume level. Press to toggle the Morse code identifier audio ON
and OFF. Volume level is shown in the NAV frequency field as a percentage.
16
NAV Frequency Transfer Key – Toggles the standby and active NAV frequencies.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following list provides an overview of the controls located on the PFD and MFD bezel (see Figure 1-2).
8
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PFD/MFD Control Unit
The additional controls for the PFD and MFD are located on the PFD/MFD Control Unit (GCU 478). The
following list provides an overview of the controls located on the PFD/MFD Control Unit:
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
11
21
12
EIS
13
20
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
14
19
17
16
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
18
15
Figure 1-3 PFD/MFD Control Unit (GCU 478)
Direct-to Key ( ) – Allows the user to enter a destination waypoint and establish a direct course to the
selected destination (the destination is either specified by the identifier, chosen from the active route, or
taken from the map pointer position).
4
MENU Key – Displays a context-sensitive list of options. This list allows the user to access additional
features or make setting changes that relate to particular pages.
5
PROC Key – Gives access to IFR departure procedures (DPs), arrival procedures (STARs) and approach
procedures (IAPs) for a flight plan. If a flight plan is used, available procedures for the departure and/or
arrival airport are automatically suggested. Theses procedures can then be loaded into the active flight
plan. If a flight plan is not used, both the desired airport and the desired procedure may be selected.
6
ENT Key – Validates or confirms a menu selection or data entry.
7
FMS/XPDR/COM/NAV Key – Acts as the FMS Knob for the MFD. Sets the transponder code when in
XPDR mode. Acts as the COM Knob when in COM tuning mode. Acts as the NAV Knob when in NAV
tuning mode.
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
INDEX
3
APPENDICES
FPL Key – Displays the active Flight Plan Page for creating and editing the active flight plan, or for
accessing stored flight plans.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2
AFCS
CLR Key – Erases information, cancels entries, or removes page menus. Pressing and holding this key
displays the Navigation Map Page automatically.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1
9
8
FMS Key – Selects/deselects FMS mode.
9
COM Key – Selects/deselects COM tuning mode.
10
XPDR Key – Selects/deselects XPDR mode.
11
NAV Key – Selects/deselects NAV tuning mode.
12
Joystick – Changes the map range when rotated. Activates the map pointer when pressed.
13
Frequency Transfer Key (EMERG) – Transfers between active and standby COM or NAV tuning frequencies.
Selects/deselects NAV tuning mode. Press and hold 2 seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.5
MHz) automatically into the active frequency field.
14
Alphanumeric Keys – Allow the user to enter data quickly, without having to select individual characters
with the FMS Knob.
15
Plus (+) Minus (-) Key – Toggles a (+) or (-) character.
16
Decimal Key – Enters a decimal point.
17
BKSP Key – Moves the cursor back one character space.
18
SPC Key – Adds a space character.
19
ALT SEL Knob – Sets the selected altitude in the Selected Altitude Box. Pressing this knob synchronizes
the selected altitude to the current altitude. In addition to providing the standard altitude alerter function,
selected altitude provides an altitude setting for the Altitude Capture/Hold mode of the AFCS.
20
CRS Knob – Sets the selected course on the HSI when the VOR1, VOR2, or OBS/SUSP mode is selected.
Pressing this knob centers the CDI on the currently selected VOR. The selected course provides course
reference to the flight director when operating in Navigation and Approach modes.
21
HDG Knob – Sets the selected heading on the HSI. Pressing this knob synchronizes the heading bug to
the current heading. When operating in Heading Select mode, this knob provides the heading reference
to the flight director.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
10
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AFCS Controls
1
3
4
12
11
10
5
6
7
9
8
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2
EIS
Figure 1-4 GMC 705 AFCS Control Unit
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: If a key is selected, its respective annunciator is illuminated.
The GFC 700 AFCS is mainly controlled through the GMC 705 AFCS Control Unit. The AFCS Control Unit
consists of the following controls:
AP Key – Engages/disengages the autopilot.
4
LVL Key – Engages the autopilot in level vertical and lateral modes.
5
NOSE UP/DN Wheel – Controls the active mode reference for the Pitch, Vertical Speed, and Indicated
Airspeed modes.
6
IAS Key – Selects/deselects Indicated Airspeed Mode.
7
ALT Key – Selects/deselects Altitude Hold Mode.
8
VNV Key – Selects/deselects Vertical Navigation mode.
9
VS Key – Selects/deselects Vertical Speed Mode.
10
YD Key (optional) – Engages/disengages the yaw damper.
11
FD Key – Activates/deactivates the flight director in the default pitch and roll modes. If the autopilot is
engaged, the FD Key is disabled.
12
APR Key – Selects/deselects Approach Mode.
APPENDICES
3
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NAV Key – Selects/deselects Navigation Mode.
AFCS
2
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
HDG Key – Selects/deselects Heading Select Mode.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1
Additional AFCS Controls
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
INDEX
The AP DISC (Autopilot Disconnect) Switch, GO AROUND Button, and MET (Manual Electric Trim) Switch
are additional AFCS controls and are located in the cockpit, separately from the AFCS Control Unit. These are
discussed in detail in the AFCS section.
11
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
Audio Panel Controls
2
3
4
5
6
16
17
18
19
7
8
10
9
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
11
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
12
13
14
15
20
21
22
23
24
25
Figure 1-5 GMA 347 Audio Panel Controls
1
Marker Beacon Annunciators – Each annunciator lights independently when flying over the associated
marker beacon station.
2
MKR/MUTE – Selects marker beacon receiver audio. Mutes the currently received marker beacon receiver
audio. Unmutes automatically when new marker beacon audio is received. Also, stops play of recorded
COM audio and allows music mute option.
3
COM1 – When selected, audio from the #1 COM receiver can be heard.
4
COM2 – When selected, audio from the #2 COM receiver can be heard.
5
COM3 – Reserved for optional COM radio.
6
NAV1 – When selected, audio from the #1 NAV receiver can be heard.
7
NAV2 – When selected, audio from the #2 NAV receiver can be heard.
8
DME – Turns optional DME audio on or off.
9
ADF – Turns optional ADF receiver audio on or off.
10
PLAY – Press once to play the last recorded COM audio. Press again while audio is playing and the
previous block of recorded audio will be played. Each subsequent press plays each previously recorded
block. Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key during play of a memory block stops play.
11
PILOT Squelch – Turn to adjust Pilot’s squelch. The Pilots volume knob must be pressed to allow manual
squelch adjustment.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: When a key is selected, an annunciator in the key is illuminated.
12
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
System Overview
16
COM1 MIC – Selects the #1 transmitter for transmitting. COM1 receive is simultaneously selected when
this key is pressed allowing received audio from the #1 COM receiver to be heard. COM2 receive can be
added by pressing the COM2 Key.
17
COM2 MIC – Selects the #2 transmitter for transmitting. COM2 receive is simultaneously selected when
this key is pressed allowing received audio from the #2 COM receiver to be heard. COM1 receive can be
added by pressing the COM1 Key.
18
COM3 MIC – Reserved for optional COM radio.
19
COM 1/2 – Split COM operation key. When selected, the pilot uses the COM 1 transceiver and the copilot
uses COM 2.
20
SPKR – Selects and deselects the cabin speaker. COM and NAV receiver audio can be heard on the
speaker. Press and hold for 2 seconds for Passenger Address (PA). The SPKR key flashes during PA.
21
TEL – Not used.
22
COPLT – Selects and deselects the copilot intercom isolation.
23
PILOT – Selects and deselects the pilot intercom isolation.
24
COPILOT/PASS Volume – Turn to adjust Copilot/Passenger intercom volume or squelch. Pulling the right
volume knob controls passenger volume, pushing in controls Copilot volume.
25
COPILOT/PASS Squelch – Copilot and passenger share the squelch knob.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
HI SENS Annunciator – Indicates marker beacon receiver sensitivity, high sensitivity when illuminated,
low sensitivity when extinguished.
AFCS
15
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SENS – Press to increase marker beacon receiver sensitivity as indicated by illumination of the HI SENS
annunciator. Press again to return to low sensitivity and extinguish the HI SENS annunciator.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
14
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MAN SQ – Manual Squelch annunciator. When lit, pilot and copilot squelch knobs control manual
squelch.
EIS
13
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
PILOT Volume – Turn the left (Pilot) volume knob to control pilot’s intercom volume and the ON and OFF
function. (Full CCW detent is OFF) Press to switch between manual and automatic squelch control as
indicated by illumination of the MAN SQ annunciator.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
12
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
13
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
Softkey Function
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The softkeys are located along the bottoms of the displays. The softkeys shown depend on the softkey level
or page being displayed. The bezel keys below the softkeys can be used to select the appropriate softkey. When
a softkey is selected, its color changes to black text on gray background and remains this way until it is turned
off, at which time it reverts to white text on black background. When a softkey function is disabled, the softkey
label is subdued (dimmed).
Softkeys revert to the previous level after 45 seconds of inactivity.
Softkey
On
EIS
Bezel-Mounted
Softkeys (Press)
Softkey Names
(Displayed)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 1-6 Softkeys (Second-Level PFD Configuration)
In the following descriptions, top level softkeys are denoted with bullets.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
PFD Softkeys
The CDI, IDENT, TMR/REF, NRST, and ALERTS softkeys undergo a momentary change to black text on
gray background and automatically switch back to white text on black background when selected.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The PFD softkeys provide control over flight management functions, including GPS, NAV, terrain, traffic,
and weather data (optional). Each softkey sublevel has a BACK Softkey which can be selected to return to
the previous level. The ALERTS Softkey is visible at all softkey levels (label changes if messages are issued).
(optional)
INSET
SENSOR
PFD
OBS
CDI
DME
XPDR
IDENT
TMR/REF
NRST
ALERTS
BACK
ALERTS
AFCS
Press the CDI Softkey to cycle through
navigation sources:
- GPS
- NAV1 (VOR/LOC)
- NAV2 (VOR/LOC)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 1-7 Top Level PFD Softkeys
APPENDICES
INSET
(optional) (optional) (optional)
INDEX
OFF
DCLTR
TRAFFIC
DCLTR-1
TRFC-1
DCLTR-2
TRFC-2
TOPO
TERRAIN STRMSCP NEXRAD XM LTNG
Press the OFF or BACK Softkey
to return to the top-level softkeys.
DCLTR-3
14
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displays Inset Map in PFD lower left corner
Removes Inset Map
Selects desired amount of map detail; cycles through declutter levels:
DCLTR (No Declutter): All map features visible
DCLTR-1: Removes land data
DCLTR-2: Removes land and SUA data
DCLTR-3: Removes everything except
active flight plan
(optional)
INSET
SENSOR
PFD
CDI
XPDR
IDENT TMR/REF
NRST
ALERTS
traffic OBS
information
onDME
Inset Map
TRAFFIC (2) Displays/removes
TRFC-1: Displays traffic on Inset Map.
Press
the CDI
Softkey to cycle through
TRFC-2: Removes everything
except
traffic.
navigation sources:
- GPS
Displays/removes topographical data
(e.g., coastlines, terrain, rivers, lakes) on Inset Map
TOPO
- NAV1 (VOR/LOC)
Displays/removes terrain information
on(VOR/LOC)
Inset Map
TERRAIN
- NAV2
Displays/removes Stormscope lightning information on Inset Map (optional)
STRMSCP
Displays/removes NEXRAD weather and coverage information on Inset Map (optional)
NEXRAD
Displays/removes XM lightning information on Inset Map (optional)
XM LTNG
• INSET
OFF
DCLTR (3)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
INSET
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
(optional) (optional) (optional)
OFF
TRAFFIC
DCLTR-1
TRFC-1
DCLTR-2
TRFC-2
TOPO
TERRAIN STRMSCP NEXRAD XM LTNG
BACK
ALERTS
Press the OFF or BACK Softkey
to return to the top-level softkeys.
AFCS
DCLTR
DCLTR-3
Figure 1-8 INSET Softkeys
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
SENSOR
ADC1
ADC2
AHRS1
AHRS2
BACK
ALERTS
INDEX
Press the BACK Softkey to
return to the top-level softkeys.
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
15
OFF
TRAFFIC
DCLTR
TRFC-1
DCLTR-2
TRFC-2
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System OverviewDCLTR-1
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• SENSOR
ADC1
ADC2
AHRS1
AHRS2
TOPO
TERRAIN STRMSCP NEXRAD XM LTNG
BACK
ALERTS
Press the OFF or BACK Softkey
to return to the top-level softkeys.
Displays second-level softkeys for ADC and AHRS sensors
Selects ADC1
Selects ADC2 (optional)
DCLTR-3
Selects AHRS1
Selects AHRS2 (optional)
EIS
SENSOR
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ADC1
ADC2
AHRS1
AHRS2
BACK
ALERTS
Press the BACK Softkey to
return to the top-level softkeys.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 1-9 SENSOR Softkeys
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• PFD
SYN VIS
PATHWAY
AFCS
SYN TERR
HRZN HDG
APTSIGNS
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
DFLTS
WIND
OPTN1
OPTN2
OFF
DME
BRG
INDEX
HSI FMT
360 HSI
ARC HSI
16
Displays second-level softkeys for additional PFD configuration
Displays the softkeys for enabling or disabling Synthetic Vision features
Displays rectangular boxes representing the horizontal and vertical flight path of the
active flight plan
Enables synthetic terrain depiction
Displays compass heading along the Zero-Pitch line
Displays position markers for airports within approximately 15 nm of the current aircraft
position. Airport identifiers are displayed when the airport is within approximately
9nm.
Resets PFD to default settings, including changing units to standard
Displays softkeys to select and configure wind data
Displays wind data total direction and speed and heading in degrees
Displays wind data in longitudinal and lateral components
Removes wind information from display
Displays/removes DME Information Window (optional)
Displays the Bearing Information Window and cycles through:
NAV1: Waypoint frequency/identifier and DME information
NAV2: Waypoint frequency/identifier and DME information
GPS: Waypoint identifier and GPS distance information
Off: Removes window
Displays softkeys to select the HSI format
Displays HSI as a 360° compass rose
Displays HSI as a 140° viewable arc (Bearing Information window unavailable)
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
System Overview
EIS
• DME
Displays softkeys for changing the Altimeter barometric setting and altitude displays to
metric units
Displays the current and Selected altitudes in meters in addition to feet, when selected
Displays the Altimeter barometric setting in inches of mercury (in Hg)
Displays the Altimeter barometric setting in hectopascals (hPa)
Sets barometric pressure to 29.92 in Hg (1013 hPa if metric display is selected)
Selects OBS Mode on the CDI when navigating by GPS (only available with active leg)
Cycles CDI through GPS, NAV1 (VOR/LOC), and NAV2 (VOR/LOC) navigation
sources
Displays/removes the DME Radio Tuning Window (optional)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
METERS
IN
HPA
STD BARO
• OBS
• CDI
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ALT UNIT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
PFD
DFLTS
WIND
DME
BRG
ALT UNIT STD BARO
HSI FMT
Press the BRGsoftkeys
to display/remove
the Bearing Information
window and cycle through
bearing sources:
- NAV1/NAV2
- GPS
- ADF (optional)
Press the STD BARO or BACK
Softkey to return to the top-level
softkeys.
OFF
OPTN2
METERS
IN
HPA
ALERTS
BACK
ALERTS
BACK
ALERTS
BACK
ALERTS
BACK
ALERTS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
ARC HSI
BACK
AFCS
PATHWAY SYN TERR HRZN HDG APTSIGNS
360 HSI
ALERTS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
OPTN1
BACK
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
(optional)
SYN VIS
APPENDICES
Figure 1-10 PFD Softkeys
INDEX
XPDR
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
STBY
ON
ALT
GND
VFR
CODE
IDENT
17
PFD
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
(optional)
DFLTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• XPDR
STBY
ON
ALT
GND
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
VFR
CODE
0—7
BKSP
• IDENT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• TMR/REF
• NRST
• ALERTS
WIND
DME
BRG
ALT UNIT STD BARO
HSI FMT
BACK
ALERTS
BACK
ALERTS
Displays transponder mode selection softkeys:
Selects standby mode (Transponder does not reply to any interrogations)
Press the BRGsoftkeys
Press the STD BARO or BACK
to display/remove
Selects Mode A (Transponder replies
to interrogations) Softkey to return to the top-level
the Bearing Information
softkeys.
Selects Mode C – altitude reporting
mode
window
and(Transponder
cycle through replies to identification and altitude
bearing sources:
interrogations)
- NAV1/NAV2
Manually selects Ground Mode (Transponder
does not allow Mode A and Mode C
- GPS
ADF
(optional)
replies, but does permit acquisition squitter and replies to discretely addressed Mode S
interrogations)
BACK
ALERTS
OFF
OPTN1
OPTN2
Automatically enters the VFR code (1200 in U.S.A. only)
Displays transponder code selection softkeys 0-7
360 HSI ARC HSI
BACK
ALERTS
Use numbers to enter code
Removes numbers entered, one at a time
METERS
IN
HPA
BACK
ALERTS
Activates the Special Position Identification (SPI) pulse for 18 seconds, identifying the
transponder return on the ATC screen
Displays/removes Timer/References Window
Displays/removes Nearest Airports Window
Displays/removes Alerts Window
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
XPDR
STBY
ON
ALT
GND
VFR
CODE
IDENT
AFCS
Press the BACK Softkey to
return to the top-level softkeys.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
0
IDENT
BKSP
BACK
ALERTS
Press the IDENT or BACK
Softkey to return to the toplevel softkeys.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 1-11 XPDR Softkeys
18
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MFD Softkeys
MFD softkeys vary depending on the page selected. EIS and Navigation Map Page (default MFD page)
DCLTR SHW CHRT CHKLIST
ENGINE
softkeys
are described MAP
here.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The ice protection system (optional) must be operated in accordance
with the approved flight manual
DCLTR-1
limitations. This option is only available on the SR22 and SR22TN.
DCLTR-2
DCLTR-3
EIS
Displays full Engine Page and second-level engine softkeys; press again to return to the
Engine Strip and top-level softkeys (see the EIS Section for more information)
Displays Anti-Ice softkeys (TKS FIKI is optional. See Operational Note above)
ANTI-ICE
ENGINE
Selects manual mode and opens the left tank valve and closes the right tank valve
LEFT
Selects auto tank mode
AUTO
(Optional)
Selects manual mode and opens the right tank
valve and closes the left tank valve
RIGHT
FUEL
CO RST
ASSIST
ENGINE
DCLTR
Removes bars and temperature readouts from the Engine Temperature Box
DCLTR
Identifies
temperature
peaks
ASSIST
Press the ENGINE
Softkey
to
return to the top-level softkeys.
Resets the CO Guardian (optional)
CO RST
UNDO
ENTER
TABS
FULL
Accesses the Initial Usable Fuel Page
FUEL
Resets fuel totalizer to full (usable fuel)
FULL
Press the UNDO or ENTER Softkey to
return to the second-level softkeys.
Resets fuel totalizer to tabs (usable fuel)
TABS
Resets to the initial usable fuel amount shown on the Initial Usable Fuel Page
UNDO
Saves the usable fuel amount as displayed on the Initial Usable Fuel Page
ENTER
• ENGINE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
ENGINE
The ANTI-ICE Softkey and its secondlevel softkeys are only available with the
TKS FIKI system installed.
ANTI-ICE
ASSIST
DCLTR
AFCS
(Optional)
(Optional)
ENGINE
FUEL
CO RST
Press the ENGINE Softkey to
return to the top-level softkeys.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
(Optional) (Optional) (Optional)
LEFT
AUTO
RIGHT
FULL
TABS
BACK
UNDO
ENTER
APPENDICES
Press the UNDO or ENTER Softkey to
return to the second-level softkeys.
Figure 1-12 MFD Softkeys (EIS)
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
19
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
Enables second-level Navigation Map Page softkeys
Displays/removes traffic information on Navigation Map Page
Displays/removes topographical data (e.g., coastlines, terrain, rivers, lakes) on Navigation
Map Page
Displays/removes terrain information on Navigation Map Page
TERRAIN
Selects the desired display of Airways; cycles through:
AIRWAYS
AIRWY ON: All Airways displayed
AIRWY LO: Low Altitude (Victor) Airways displayed
AIRWY HI: High Altitude Airways (Jet Routes) displayed
AIRWAYS: Airways are not displayed
STRMSCP Displays/removes Stormscope lightning information on the Navigation Map (optional)
Displays/removes NEXRAD weather/coverage on Navigation Map Page (optional)
NEXRAD
XM LTNG Displays/removes XM lightning information on Navigation Map Page (optional)
Returns to top-level softkeys
BACK
• DCLTR (3) Selects desired amount of map detail; cycles through declutter levels:
DCLTR (No Declutter): All map features visible
DCLTR-1: Removes land data
DCLTR-2: Removes land and SUA data
DCLTR-3: Removes everything except the active flight plan
• SHW CHRT Displays optional Flite Charts or Chart View charts (optional)
Displays the Checklist Page
• CHKLIST
Selects the highlighted checklist item
DONE
Returns to the top-level softkeys
EXIT
EMERGCY Immediately accesses the emergency procedures
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• MAP
TRAFFIC
TOPO
AFCS
ENGINE
MAP
DCLTR
SHW CHRT CHKLIST
DCLTR-1
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
DCLTR-2
DCLTR-3
APPENDICES
TRAFFIC
TOPO
(optional) (optional) (optional)
TERRAIN AIRWAYS STRMSCP NEXRAD XM LTNG
BACK
Press the BACK softkey to
return to the top-level softkeys.
AIRWY ON
AIRWY LO
AIRWY HI
INDEX
ENGINE
DONE
EXIT
EMERGCY
The DONE Softkey label changes to UNDO
when the checklist item is already checked.
Figure 1-13 MFD Softkeys (Navigation Map and Checklist)
20
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1.3 Secure Digital Cards
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Refer to the Appendices for instructions on updating the aviation databases.
NOTE: Ensure that the system is powered off before inserting the SD card.
EIS
The PFD and MFD data card slots use Secure Digital (SD) cards and are located on the top right portion of the
display bezels. Each display bezel is equipped with two SD card slots. SD cards are used for aviation database
and system software updates as well as terrain database storage.
Install an SD card
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Insert the SD card in the SD card slot, pushing the card in until the spring latch engages. The front of the card
should remain flush with the face of the display bezel.
Remove an SD card
Gently press on the SD card to release the spring latch and eject the card.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
MFD
PFD
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
SD Card Slots
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 1-14 Display Bezel SD Card Slots
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
21
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
1.4 System Power-up
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Refer to the Appendices for AHRS initialization bank angle limitations.
NOTE: See the Appendices for additional information regarding system-specific annunciations and alerts.
NOTE: See the Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) for specific procedures concerning avionics power
EIS
application and emergency power supply operation.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Perspective® system is integrated with the aircraft electrical system and receives power directly from electrical
busses. The PFD, MFD and supporting sub-systems include both power-on and continuous built-in test features
that exercise the processor, RAM, ROM, external inputs and outputs to provide safe operation.
During system initialization, test annunciations are displayed, as shown in Figure 1-15. All system annunciations
should disappear typically within one minute of power-up. Upon power-up, key annunciator lights also become
momentarily illuminated on the audio panels, the control units and the display bezels.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
On the PFD, the AHRS begins to initialize and displays ‘AHRS ALIGN: Keep Wings Level’. The AHRS should
display valid attitude and heading fields typically within one minute of power-up. The AHRS can align itself both
while taxiing and during level flight.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When the MFD powers up (Figure 1-16), the MFD Power-up Page displays the following information:
• System version
• Obstacle database name and version
• Copyright
• Navigation database name, version, and effective
dates
• Land database name and version
• Airport Directory name, version and effective dates
• Safe Taxi database information
• FliteCharts/ChartView database information
• Terrain database name and version
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Current database information includes the valid operating dates, cycle number and database type. When this
information has been reviewed for currency (to ensure that no databases have expired), the pilot is prompted to
continue. Pressing the ENT Key acknowledges this information and the Navigation Map Page is displayed upon
pressing the key a second time. When the system has acquired a sufficient number of satellites to determine a
position, the aircraft’s current position is shown on the Navigation Map Page.
Figure 1-15 PFD Initialization
22
Figure 1-16 MFD Power-up Page
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1.5 System Operation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The displays are connected together via a single Ethernet bus, thus allowing for high-speed communication.
As shown in Figure 1-1, each IAU is connected to the PFD. This section discusses the normal and reversionary
modes of operation as well as the various AHRS modes of the system.
Display Operation
NOTE: In normal operating mode, backlighting can only be adjusted from the PFD. In Reversionary Mode, it
EIS
can be adjusted from the remaining display.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
In normal operating mode, the PFD presents graphical flight instrumentation (attitude, heading, airspeed,
altitude, vertical speed), replacing the traditional flight instrument cluster (see the Flight Instruments Section
for more information). The MFD normally displays a full-color moving map with navigation information (see
the Flight Management Section), while the left portion of the MFD is dedicated to the Engine Indication System
(EIS; see the EIS Section). The PFD offers control for COM frequency selection and the MFD offers control
for NAV frequency selection. The PFD/MFD Control Unit offers control for both COM and NAV frequency
selection.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 1-17 Normal Operation
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
23
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In the event of a display failure, the system automatically switches to reversionary (backup) mode. In
Reversionary Mode, all important flight information from the PFD is presented on the remaining display in the
same format as in normal operating mode, with the addition of the EIS. EIS operation while in Reversionary
Mode is discussed in the EIS Section. As when the PFD is operating normally, windows for flight planning,
nearest airports, and procedures are available. The Inset Map is moved to the right side of the display.
EIS
If a display fails, the appropriate IAU-display Ethernet interface is cut off. Thus, the IAU can no longer
communicate with the remaining display (refer to Figure 1-1), and the NAV and COM functions provided to
the failed display by the IAU are flagged as invalid on the remaining display. The system reverts to backup
paths for the AHRS, ADC, Engine/Airframe Unit, and Transponder, as required. The change to backup paths is
completely automated for all LRUs and no pilot action is required.
If the system fails to detect a display problem, Reversionary Mode may be manually activated by pressing the
red DISPLAY BACKUP Button. Pressing this button again deactivates Reversionary Mode.
NAV1 and COM1 (provided by the
failed PFD) Flagged Invalid
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
DISPLAY BACKUP Button
Manually Activates/Deactivates
Reversionary Mode on Both Displays
APPENDICES
Figure 1-18 Reversionary Mode (Failed PFD)
NOTE: The system alerts the pilot when backup paths are utilized by the LRUs. Refer to the Appendices for
INDEX
further information regarding system-specific alerts.
24
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Perspective® System Annunciations
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When an LRU or an LRU function fails, a large red ‘X’ is typically displayed over the instrument experiencing
failed data (Figure 1-19 displays all possible flags and responsible LRUs). The system alerts the pilot when
backup paths are utilized by the LRUs. Upon power-up, certain instruments remain invalid as equipment
begins to initialize. All instruments should be operational within one minute of power-up. If any instrument
remains flagged, the system should be serviced by a Garmin-authorized repair facility.
NOTE: For a detailed description of all annunciations and alerts, refer to Appendix A. Refer to the Pilot’s
Operating Handbook (POH) for additional information regarding pilot responses to these annunciations.
EIS
GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Units
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GDC 74A
Air Data
Computer
GEA 71 Engine
Airframe Unit
OR GIA 63W
Integrated
Avionics Unit
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Navigation Database
Mismatch in PFD
and MFD
GRS 77 AHRS
OR GMU 44
Magnetometer
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GIA 63W
Integrated
Avionics Units
GTX 32/33 Transponder
OR GIA 63W
Integrated Avionics Units
AFCS
GDC 74A
Air Data
Computer
Figure 1-19 System Failure Annunciations
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
25
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
System Status
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The System Status Page displays the statuses, serial numbers, and software version numbers for all detected
system LRUs. Active LRUs are indicated by green check marks; failed, by red ‘X’s. Failed LRUs should be noted
and a service center or Garmin-authorized dealer informed.
Viewing LRU information:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Status Page.
2) To place the cursor in the ‘LRU Info’ Box,
EIS
a) Press the LRU Softkey.
Or:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) With ‘Select LRU Window’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Use the FMS Knob to scroll through the box to view LRU status information.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 1-20 Example AUX - System Status Page
26
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pertinent information on all system databases is also displayed on this page. Refer to the Appendices and
Additional Features sections for more information about databases.
Viewing database information:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Status Page.
2) To place the cursor in the ‘Database’ Box,
a) Press the DBASE Softkey.
Or:
EIS
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Highlight ‘Select Dbase Window’ and press the ENT Key.
3) Use the FMS Knob to scroll through the box to view database status information.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Perspective™ uses aural tones to convey the priority of airframe-specific alerts. The alerting system’s
annunciation tone may be tested from the System Status Page. Refer to the Appendices for airframe-specific
alerts.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Testing the system annunciation tone:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Status Page.
2) Press the ANN TEST Softkey.
Or:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Highlight ‘Enable Annunciator Test Mode’ and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
27
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AHRS Operation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
System Overview
The Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS) performs attitude, heading, and vertical acceleration
calculations for the system, utilizing GPS, magnetometer, and air data in addition to information from its
internal sensors. Attitude and heading information are updated on the PFD while the AHRS receives appropriate
combinations of information from the external sensor inputs.
Note: Aggressive maneuvering in reversionary mode can degrade AHRS accuracy.
unavailable
available
available
unavailable
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
le
ab
Attitude/Heading Invalid
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AHRS
no-GPS
Mode
ail
av
AHRS no- AHRS no-Mag/
Mag Mode
no-Air Mode
Heading Invalid
Air Data
un
available
Air Data
AHRS Normal
Operation
Magnetometer Data
available
unavailable
available
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Magnetometer Data
unavailable
EIS
GPS Data
AFCS
Figure 1-21 AHRS Operation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Loss of GPS, magnetometer, or air data inputs is communicated to the pilot by message advisory alerts (refer
to Appendix A for specific AHRS alert information). Any failure of the internal AHRS inertial sensors results in
loss of attitude and heading information (indicated by red ‘X’ flags over the corresponding flight instruments).
APPENDICES
Two GPS inputs are provided to the AHRS. If GPS information from one of the inputs fails, the AHRS uses
the remaining GPS input and an alert message is issued to inform the pilot. If both GPS inputs fail, the AHRS
can continue to provide attitude and heading information to the PFD as long as magnetometer and airspeed
data are available and valid.
If the magnetometer input fails, the AHRS continues to output valid attitude information; however, the
heading output on the PFD is flagged as invalid with a red ‘X’.
INDEX
Failure of the air data input has no effect on the AHRS output while AHRS is receiving valid GPS information.
Invalid/unavailable airspeed data in addition to GPS failure results in loss of all attitude and heading
information.
28
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GPS Receiver Operation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Each Integrated Avionics Unit (IAU) contains a GPS receiver. Internal system checking is performed to
ensure both GPS receivers are providing accurate data to the PFD. When both GPS receivers are providing
accurate data, the GPS receiver producing the better solution is used by the system. Information collected by
the specified receiver (GPS1 for the #1 IAU or GPS2 for the #2 IAU) may be viewed on the AUX - GPS Status
Page.
Viewing GPS receiver status information:
EIS
1) Use the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the Auxiliary Page Group (see Section 1.6 for information on
navigating MFD page groups).
2) Use the small FMS Knob to select AUX - GPS Status Page.
3) To change the selected GPS receiver:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Press the desired GPS Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
Satellite Constellation
Diagram
Satellite Signal
Information
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
b) Use the FMS Knob to highlight the receiver which is not selected and press the ENT Key.
GPS Receiver
Status
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
RAIM
Availability
Prediction
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Satellite
Signal
Strength
Bars
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 1-22 GPS Status Page
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
29
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
For WAAS-enabled systems, GPS sensor annunciations are most often seen after system power-up when one
GPS receiver has acquired satellites before the other or one of the GPS receivers has not yet acquired a WAAS
signal. While the aircraft is on the ground, the WAAS signal may be blocked by obstructions causing one GPS
receiver to have difficulty acquiring a good signal. Also, while airborne, turning the aircraft may result in one of
the GPS receivers temporarily losing the WAAS signal. If no failure message exists, check the GPS Status Page
and compare the information for GPS1 and GPS2. Discrepancies may indicate a problem.
GPS Receiver Status
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The GPS solution type (ACQUIRING, 2D NAV, 2D DIFF NAV, 3D NAV, 3D DIFF NAV) for the active
GPS receiver (GPS1 or GPS2) is shown in the upper right of the GPS Status Page. When the receiver is
in the process of acquiring enough satellite signals for navigation, the receiver uses satellite orbital data
(collected continuously from the satellites) and last known position to determine the satellites that should be
in view. ACQUIRING is indicated as the solution until a sufficient number of satellites have been acquired
for computing a solution.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When the receiver is in the process of acquiring a 3D navigational GPS solution, 3D NAV is indicated as the
solution until the 3D differential fix has finished acquisition. Satellite-Based Augmentation System (SBAS)
status should be indicated as INACTIVE at this point. When acquisition is complete, the solution status
changes to 3D DIFF NAV and SBAS becomes active.
In certain situations, such as when the aircraft is outside or on the fringe of the WAAS coverage area, it may
be desirable to disable WAAS (although it is not recommended). When disabled, the SBAS field in the GPS
Status box indicates DISABLED.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Disabling WAAS (for WAAS-enabled systems):
1) Select the GPS Status Page.
2) Press the SBAS Softkey. The RAIM PREDICTION box is replaced by SBAS SELECTION.
3) Press the FMS Knob. ‘WAAS’ is highlighted.
AFCS
4) Press the ENT Key to uncheck the box.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
INDEX
Figure 1-23 Enable/Disable WAAS
30
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
RAIM Prediction
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM) is a GPS receiver function that performs a consistency
check on all tracked satellites. RAIM ensures that the available satellite geometry allows the receiver to
calculate a position within a specified RAIM protection limit (2.0 nautical miles for oceanic and enroute, 1.0
nm for terminal, and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches). During oceanic, enroute, and terminal phases of
flight, RAIM is available nearly 100% of the time.
EIS
The RAIM prediction function also indicates whether RAIM is available at a specified date and time. RAIM
computations predict satellite coverage within ±15 min of the specified arrival date and time. In systems
with WAAS enabled, performing RAIM prediction is not necessary in most cases. However, if the selected
approach is outside the WAAS coverage area, it may be necessary to perform a RAIM prediction for the
intended approach.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Because of the tighter protection limit on approaches, there may be times when RAIM is not available. The
system automatically monitors RAIM and warns with an alert message when it is not available. If RAIM is not
predicted to be available for the final approach course, the approach does not become active, as indicated by
the messages “Approach is not active”. If RAIM is not available when crossing the FAF, the missed approach
procedure must be flown.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Predicting RAIM availability:
1) Select the GPS Status Page.
2) Press the RAIM Softkey.
2) Press the FMS Knob. The ‘WAYPOINT’ field is highlighted.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window.
4) Enter the desired waypoint and press the ENT Key (refer to Section 1.6 for instructions on data entry).
Or:
a) To use the present position, press the MENU Key.
AFCS
b) With ‘Set WPT to Present Position’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
c) Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
6) Enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
7) With the cursor highlighting ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’, press the ENT Key. Once RAIM availability is computed, one
of the following is displayed:
• ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’—RAIM has not been computed for the current waypoint, time, and date combination
• ‘COMPUTING AVAILABILITY’—RAIM calculation in progress
• ‘RAIM AVAILABLE’—RAIM is predicted to be available for the specified waypoint, time, and date
• ‘RAIM NOT AVAILABLE’—RAIM is predicted to be unavailable for the specified waypoint, time, and date
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
31
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
Satellite Information
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Satellites currently in view are shown at their respective positions on a satellite constellation diagram.
This sky view is always oriented north-up, with the outer circle representing the horizon, the inner circle
representing 45° above the horizon, and the center point showing the position directly overhead. Each satellite
is represented by an oval containing the Pseudo-random noise (PRN) number (i.e., satellite identification
number). Satellites whose signals are currently being used are represented by solid ovals.
EIS
The GPS Status Page can be helpful in troubleshooting weak (or missing) signal levels due to poor satellite
coverage or installation problems. As the GPS receiver locks onto satellites, a signal strength bar is displayed
for each satellite in view, with the appropriate satellite PRN number (01-32 or 120-138 for WAAS) below each
bar. The progress of satellite acquisition is indicated by signal bar appearance:
• No signal strength bar—Receiver is looking for the indicated satellite.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Hollow signal strength bar—Receiver has found the satellite and is collecting data. Each satellite has a 30second data transmission that must be collected (signal strength bar is hollow) before the satellite may be
used for navigation (signal strength bar becomes solid).
• Solid signal strength bar—Receiver has collected the necessary data and the satellite signal can be used.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Checkered signal strength bar—Receiver has excluded the satellite (Fault Detection and Exclusion; FDE).
• “D” indication on signal strength bar—Satellite is being used for differential computations.
• Green signal strength bar—Satellites that are actually being used in the position calculation.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Using the current satellite signal information, they system calculates the aircraft’s GPS position, time,
altitude, ground speed, and track for the aircraft (displayed below the satellite signal accuracy measurements
for reference). The following quantities denote the accuracy of the aircraft’s GPS fix:
AFCS
• Blue signal strength bar—Satellite is locked on but not yet being used in the position calculation.
• Horizontal Dilution of Precision (HDOP)—Measures satellite geometry quality (i.e., number of satellites
received and where they are relative to each other) on a range from 0.0 to 9.9, with lower numbers denoting
better accuracy
• Estimated Position Uncertainty (EPU)—A statistical error indication; the radius of a circle centered on an
estimated horizontal position in which actual position has 95% probability of lying
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Horizontal and Vertical Figures of Merit (HFOM and VFOM)—Measures of horizontal and vertical position
uncertainty; the current 95% confidence horizontal and vertical accuracy values reported by the GPS
receiver
32
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1.6 Accessing Perspective® Functionality
Menus
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Perspective® has a dedicated MENU Key that when pressed displays a context-sensitive list of options.
This options list allows the user to access additional features or make settings changes which specifically relate
to the currently displayed window/page. There is no all-encompassing menu. Some menus provide access to
additional submenus that are used to view, edit, select, and review options. Menus display ‘No Options’ when
there are no additional features or settings for the window/page selected.
EIS
Navigating a menu:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the menu.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through a list of available options (a scroll bar always appears to the right of the
window/box when the option list is longer than the window/box).
3) Press the ENT Key to select the desired option.
4) Press the CLR Key or FMS Knob to remove the menu and cancel the operation.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Options for FPL Window
No Options for
NRST Window
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 1-24 Page Menu Examples
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
33
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Page Groups
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
System Overview
Information on the MFD is presented on pages which are grouped according to function. The page group and
active page title are displayed in the upper center of the screen, below the Navigation Status Box. In the bottom
right corner of the screen, the page group tabs are displayed along the bottom. The titles of pages available in
the group are displayed in a list above the page groups. The current page group and current page within the
group are shown in cyan. For some of these pages (Airport/Procedures/Weather Information, XM, Procedure
Loading), the active title of the page changes while the page name in the list remains the same.
EIS
Note: Refer to other supporting sections in this Pilot’s Guide for details on specific pages.
Page Group
Active Page Title
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MFD
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pages in
Current
Group
Page Groups
Figure 1-25 Page Title and Page Groups
AFCS
The main page groups are navigated using the FMS Knob; specific pages within each group can vary depending
on the configuration of optional equipment.
Selecting a page using the FMS Knob:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to display the list of page groups; continue turning the large FMS Knob until the
desired page group is selected
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the desired page within a specific page group.
INDEX
APPENDICES
There are also several pages (Airport/Procedures/Weather Information and XM pages) which are selected first
from within a main page group with the FMS Knob, then with the appropriate softkey at the bottom of the page
(or from the page menu). In this case, the page remains set to the selected page until a different page softkey is
selected, even if a different page group is selected.
34
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Map Pages (MAP)
Navigation Map
Traffic Map
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Stormscope (optional)
Weather Data Link (service
optional)
EIS
Terrain Proximity/
TERRAIN-SVS (optional)/
TAWS-B (optional)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 1-26 Map Pages
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Waypoint Pages (WPT)
Airport/Procedures/Weather Information Pages
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Airport Information
(INFO-1 Softkey)
- Airport Directory
(INFO-2 Softkey)
AFCS
- Departure Information
(DP Softkey)
- Arrival Information
(STAR Softkey)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- Approach Information
(APR Softkey)
- Weather Information (optional)
(WX Softkey)
Airport/Procedures/
Weather Information
Pages
NDB Information
VOR Information
User Waypoint Information
APPENDICES
Intersection Information
Figure 1-27 Waypoint Pages
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
35
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
Auxiliary Pages (AUX)
Trip Planning
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Utility
GPS Status
System Setup
XM Satellite pages (optional)
EIS
- XM Radio
(RADIO Softkey)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- XM Information
(INFO Softkey)
XM
Satellite
Pages
System Status
Video
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 1-28 Auxiliary Pages
Nearest Pages (NRST)
Nearest Airports
Nearest Intersections
AFCS
Nearest NDB
Nearest VOR
Nearest User Waypoints
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Nearest Frequencies
APPENDICES
Nearest Airspaces
INDEX
Figure 1-29 Nearest Pages
36
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
In addition to the main page groups accessed exclusively using the FMS Knobs, the Flight Plan Pages can also
be accessed using the FPL Key on the PFD/MFD Control Unit. Main pages within this group are then selected
by pressing the FMS Key and turning the FMS Knobs. In some instances, softkeys may be used to access the
Procedure Pages.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight Plan Pages (FPL)
Active Flight Plan
- Wide View, Narrow View
(VIEW Softkey)
EIS
Flight Plan Catalog
or
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Stored Flight Plan (NEW Softkey)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Narrow and
Wide View
Figure 1-30 Flight Plan Pages
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Procedure pages may be accessed at any time on the PFD/MFD Control Unit by pressing the PROC Key.
A menu is initialized, and when a departure, approach, or arrival is selected, the appropriate Procedure Loading
Page is opened. Turning the FMS Knob does not scroll through the Procedure pages.
AFCS
Procedure Pages
(PROC)
Departure Loading
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Arrival Loading
Approach Loading
APPENDICES
Figure 1-31 Procedure Pages
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
37
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Settings
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
System Overview
• Date/time
Perspective® system settings are managed from the System Setup Page. The following settings can be
changed:
• COM channel spacing
(see Audio Panel and CNS Section)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
• Display Units
(see Flight Instruments Section)
• Airspace alerts (see Flight Management Section)
• Criteria for displaying nearest airports
(see Flight Management Section)
• Arrival alerts (see Flight Management Section)
• Audio Alerts
• MFD Navigation Status Box fields
(see Flight Management Section)
• Baro Transition alert (see Flight Instruments
Section)
• CDI scaling for GPS navigation source
(see Flight Instruments Section)
• Page Navigation
Restoring system setup defaults:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the DFLTS Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
b) Highlight ‘Restore Defaults’ and press the ENT Key.
Figure 1-32 AUX - System Setup Page
38
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Date/Time
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Perspective® obtains the current Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) date and time directly from the
GPS satellite signals (shown on the AUX - GPS Status Page, Figure 1-22). System time (displayed in the lower
right corner of the PFD) can be displayed in three formats: local 12-hr, local 24-hr, or UTC. Local time is set
by adding/subtracting an offset (hours:minutes) to/from UTC.
PFD
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 1-33 System Time (Local 24-hr Format)
Configuring the system time:
1) Select the AUX - System Setup Page using the FMS Knob.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Time Format’ field.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired format and press the ENT Key to confirm selection. The ‘Time
Offset’ field is highlighted.
AFCS
5) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time offset (±HH:MM) and press the ENT Key to confirm selection.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 1-34 Date/Time Settings
(AUX - System Setup Page)
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
39
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
Display Units
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Units in which various quantities are displayed on the Perspective® screens are listed on the System Setup
Page. The Navigation Angle reference can be set from here (refer to the Flight Instruments Section).
Figure 1-35 Display Unit Settings
(AUX - System Setup Page)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Category
Settings
Affected Quantities
Navigation Angle Magnetic (North) Heading
True (North)
Course
Bearing
Track
Desired Track
Wind direction (Trip Planning Page)
Distance and
Metric
Crosstrack error (HSI)
Speed
Nautical
Bearing distances (information windows)
DME distance (information window)
Flight plan distances
Map ranges
DIS, GS, TAS, XTK fields (Navigation Status Box)
All distances on MFD
Altitude buffer distance (System Setup)
Arrival Alert trigger distance (System Setup)
All speeds on MFD
Altitude and
Feet
All altitudes on MFD
Vertical Speed
Meters
All elevations on MFD
APPENDICES
Temperature
INDEX
Fuel and
Fuel Flow
Weight
Position
Celsius
Fahrenheit
Gallons
Liters
Pounds
Kilograms
HDDD°MM.MM’
HDDD°MM’SS.S”
All temperatures on PFD
Total Air Temperature (Trip Planning Page)
Fuel parameters (Trip Planning Page)
Exceptions
Airspeed Indicator
True Airspeed (PFD)
Wind speed vector
Map range (Traffic Page, Terrain
Proximity/TAWS-B Page)
CDI scaling (System Setup)
Fuel range calculation (EIS)
Altimeter
Vertical Speed Indicator
VNV altitudes (Active Flight Plan)
Engine Indication System (EIS)
Engine Indication System (EIS)
N/A
N/A
All positions
N/A
Table 1-1 Display Units Settings (AUX - System Setup Page)
40
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pilot Profiles
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
System settings may be saved under a pilot profile. When the system is powered on, the last selected pilot
profile is shown on the MFD Power-up Screen (Figure 1-16). The Perspective™ system can store up to 25
profiles; the currently active profile, the number of profiles used, and the number of profiles available are
shown at the top of the System Setup Page in the box labeled ‘Pilot Profile’. From here, pilot profiles may be
created, selected, renamed, or deleted.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 1-36 Pilot Profiles
(AUX - System Setup Page)
Creating a profile:
AFCS
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘CREATE’ in the Pilot Profile Box.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Press the ENT Key. A ‘Create Profile’ window is displayed.
5) Use the FMS Knob to enter a profile name up to 16 characters long and press the ENT Key. Pilot profile names
cannot begin with a blank as the first letter.
APPENDICES
6) In the next field, use the small FMS Knob to select the desired settings upon which to base the new profile.
Profiles can be created based on Garmin factory defaults, default profile settings (initially based on Garmin
factory defaults unless edited by the pilot), or current system settings.
7) Press the ENT Key.
8) With ‘CREATE’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to create the profile
INDEX
Or:
Use the large FMS Knob to select ‘CREATE and ACTIVATE’ and press the ENT Key to activate the new profile.
9) To cancel the process, select ‘CANCEL’ with the large FMS Knob and press the ENT Key.
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
41
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
Selecting an active profile:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the active profile field in the Pilot Profile Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the pilot profile list and highlight the desired profile.
5) Press the ENT Key. The system loads and displays the system settings for the selected profile.
Renaming a profile:
EIS
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘RENAME’ in the Pilot Profile Box.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) In the ‘Rename Profile’ window, turn the FMS Knob to select the profile to rename.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) Press the ENT Key.
7) Use the FMS Knob to enter a new profile name up to 16 characters long and press the ENT Key.
8) With ‘RENAME’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
9) To cancel the process, use the large FMS Knob to select ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Deleting a profile:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘DELETE’ in the Pilot Profile Box.
AFCS
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) In the ‘Delete Profile’ window, turn the FMS Knob to select the profile to delete.
6) Press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
7) With ‘DELETE’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
8) To cancel the process, use the large FMS Knob to select ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
42
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Page Navigation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The large FMS Knob displays the Page Group Tabs and navigates through the tabs. The small FMS Knob
navigates through the pages within a specific group. The number of clicks it takes to display the Page Group
Tabs and change to the next tab can be controlled from the Page Navigation box on the AUX - System Setup
Page.
OFF – Displays the Page Group Tabs with one click of the large FMS Knob.
ON – Displays the Page Group Tabs and navigates to the next tab with one click of the large FMS Knob.
EIS
The pilot can select, from the AUX - System Setup Page, the amount of time the Page Group Tabs are
displayed (in the lower right corner of the MFD). The timeout can range from two to ten seconds.
Selecting page navigation settings:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Change On 1st Click’ field in the Page Navigation Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘OFF’ or ‘ON’.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Timeout Seconds’ field in the Page navigation Box.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired number of seconds
7) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to remove the flashing cursor.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 1-37 Page Navigation Settings
(AUX - System Setup Page)
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
43
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
Timers
The Perspective® timers available include:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Stopwatch-like generic timers (available from the PFD Timer/References Window and on the MFD AUX Utility Page)
• Total-time-in-flight timer (MFD AUX - Utility Page)
• Time since departure (MFD AUX - Utility Page)
EIS
The generic timer can be set to count up or down from a specified time (HH:MM:SS). When the countdown
on the timer reaches zero the digits begin to count up from zero. If the timer is reset before reaching zero
on a countdown, the digits are reset to the initial value. If the timer is counting up when reset, the digits are
zeroed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Setting the generic timer (PFD):
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the timer field (hh/mm/ss).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time and press the ENT Key.
4) With the UP/DN field highlighted, turn the small FMS Knob to select the timer counting direction.
5) Press the ENT Key.
6) With ‘START?’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to start the timer. The field changes to ‘STOP?’.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
7) To stop the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘STOP?’ highlighted. The field changes to ‘RESET?’.
8) To reset the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘RESET?’ highlighted. The field changes back to ‘START?’ and the
digits are reset.
9) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or the TMR/REF Softkey.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
PFD
INDEX
Figure 1-38 Generic Timer (Timer/References Window)
44
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The flight timer can be set to count up from zero starting at system power-up or from the time that the
aircraft lifts off; the timer can also be reset to zero at any time.
Setting the generic timer (MFD AUX - Utility Page):
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the timer counting direction (UP/DN) and press the ENT Key.
4) If a specific starting time is desired:
EIS
a) Use the large FMS Knob to highlight the HH:MM:SS field.
b) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘START?’ and press the ENT Key to start the timer. The field changes to
‘STOP?’.
6) To stop the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘STOP?’ highlighted. The field changes to ‘RESET?’.
7) To reset the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘RESET?’ highlighted. The field changes back to ‘START?’ and the
digits are reset.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 1-39 Timers
(AUX - Utility Page)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Setting the flight timer starting criterion:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
APPENDICES
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the field next to the flight timer.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the starting criterion (PWR-ON or IN-AIR) and press the ENT Key.
Resetting the flight timer:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
INDEX
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Reset Flight Timer’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
45
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system records the time at which departure occurs, depending on whether the pilot prefers the time
to be recorded from system power-up or from aircraft lift off. The displayed departure time can also be reset
to display the current time at the point of reset. The format in which the time is displayed is controlled
from the System Setup Page.
Setting the departure timer starting criterion:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the field next to the departure time.
EIS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the starting criterion (PWR-ON or IN-AIR) and press the ENT Key.
Resetting the departure time:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Use the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Reset Departure Time’ and press the ENT Key.
46
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1.7 Display Backlighting
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The dimming bus is the primary source for backlighting adjustments of the PFD and MFD displays, bezel, Audio
Panel keys, AFCS Control Unit keys, and PFD/MFD Control Unit keys. The automatic backlighting adjustment
for the AFCS Control Unit annunciators and PFD/MFD Control Unit annunciators uses photocell technology to
automatically adjust for ambient lighting conditions. Photocell calibration curves are pre-configured to optimize
display appearance through a broad range of cockpit lighting conditions. Manual backlighting adjustment can
be accomplished using the existing instrument panel dimming bus or the following procedures. In normal
operating mode, backlighting can only be adjusted from the PFD. In Reversionary Mode, it can be adjusted from
the remaining display.
EIS
Adjusting display backlighting:
1) Press the PFD MENU Key to display the PFD Setup Menu. ‘AUTO’ is now highlighted next to ‘PFD DSPL’.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘MANUAL’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The intensity value is now highlighted.
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired backlighting then press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘AUTO’ next to ‘MFD DSPL’ and repeat steps 2-4.
6) To remove the menu, press the CLR or MENU Key.
Adjusting key backlighting:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the PFD MENU Key to display the PFD Setup Menu. ‘AUTO’ is now highlighted next to ‘PFD DSPL’.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘PFD DSPL’.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob in the direction of the green arrowhead to display ‘PFD KEY’.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘AUTO’.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘MANUAL’.
AFCS
6) Press the ENT Key. The intensity value is now highlighted.
7) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired backlighting and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
8) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘MFD DSPL’.
9) Turn the small FMS Knob in the direction of the green arrowhead to display ‘MFD KEY’ and repeat steps 4-7.
10) To remove the menu, press the CLR or MENU Key.
PFD
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 1-40 PFD Setup Menu
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
47
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
Blank Page
48
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Instruments
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Section 2 Flight Instruments
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: If the airspeed, attitude, altitude, or heading indications become unusable, refer to the backup
instruments.
Note: The Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) provides additional readouts and bugs on selected flight
instruments. Refer to the AFCS Section for details on these bugs and readouts, as they appear on the display
during certain AFCS flight director modes.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Increased situational awareness is provided by replacing the traditional instruments on the panel with an easyto-scan Primary Flight Display (PFD) that features a large horizon, airspeed, attitude, altitude, vertical speed, and
course deviation information. In addition to the flight instruments, navigation, communication, terrain, traffic,
and weather information are also presented on the PFD and explained in other sections of this Pilot’s Guide.
• Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
– Turn Rate Indicator
– Reference flags
• Vertical Navigation indications
– Airspeed awareness ranges
• Outside Air Temperature (OAT)
– Bearing pointer and
information window
• Attitude Indicator with slip/skid
indication
• DME Tuning Window
– DME Information Window
• Wind data
– Navigation source
• Altimeter, showing
• System time
– Course Deviation Indicator
(CDI)
– Barometric setting
• Inset Map
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
– True Airspeed
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The following flight instruments and supplemental flight data are displayed on the PFD:
• Airspeed Indicator, showing
• Vertical Deviation, Glideslope,
• Horizontal Situation Indicator,
and
Glidepath
Indicators
showing
– Indicated Airspeed
AFCS
– Selected Altitude
The PFD also displays various alerts and annunciations.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
49
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Instruments
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
22
21
20
19
18
1
17
16
2
EIS
15
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
14
3
13
4
12
5
11
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6
10
9
7
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8
1
Percent Power Box
12
Turn Rate Indicator
2
Airspeed Indicator
13
Barometric Altimeter Setting
3
True Airspeed
14
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
4
Current Heading
15
Selected Altitude Bug
5
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)
16
Altimeter
6
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)
17
Selected Altitude
7
Outside Air Temperature (OAT)
18
COM Frequency Box
8
Softkeys
19
Navigation Status Box
9
System Time
20
AFCS Status Box
10
Transponder Status Box
21
Slip/Skid Indicator
11
Selected Heading Bug
22
Attitude Indicator
INDEX
Figure 2-1 Primary Flight Display (Default)
50
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Instruments
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
15
14
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
13
12
EIS
11
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
10
2
3
9
4
7
1
Traffic Annunciation
9
Flight Plan Window
2
Selected Heading
10
Annunciation Window
3
Wind Data
11
Current Vertical Speed
4
Inset Map
12
Required Vertical Speed Indicator
5
DME Information Window
13
Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI)
6
Bearing Information Window
14
VNV Target Altitude
7
Selected Course
15
AFCS Status Annunciation
8
Barometric Minimums Box
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6
5
8
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 2-2 Primary Flight Display (Additional Information)
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
51
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Instruments
2.1 Flight Instruments
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Airspeed Indicator
Note: Refer to the Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) for speed criteria and Vspeed values.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The Airspeed Indicator displays airspeed on a moving tape rolling number gauge. The true airspeed is
displayed in knots below the Airspeed Indicator. The numeric labels and major tick marks on the moving
tape are marked at intervals of 10 knots. The minor tick marks on the moving tape are marked at intervals of
five knots. Speed indication starts at 20 knots, with 56 knots of airspeed viewable at any time. The indicated
airspeed is displayed inside the black pointer. The pointer remains black until reaching the never-exceed speed
(VNE), at which point it turns red.
Operating Ranges
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Airspeed
Trend
Vector
Low Speed Range
Red and White
Barber Pole at VNE
Vspeed
References
Indicated
Airspeed
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Speed
Ranges
True
Airspeed
AFCS
Figure 2-3 Airspeed Indicator Ranges
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Color coded stripes appear on the Airspeed Indicator to show the operating ranges. The low speed range
stripe is red. Normal operating range is green, caution range is yellow, and the never exceed speed (VNE) begins
with a red and white barber pole. The flap operating range is indicated by a white stripe.
A red low speed awareness band extends up to the low speed awareness velocity, VLSA.
APPENDICES
NOTE: The ice protection system (optional) must be operated in accordance with the approved flight manual
INDEX
limitations. This option is only available on the SR22 and SR22TN.
52
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Instruments
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Airspeed Trend Vector is a vertical magenta line that appears to the right of the color-coded speed range
strip when airspeed is either accelerating or decelerating. One end of the magenta line is anchored to the
tip of the airspeed pointer while the other end moves continuously up or down corresponding to the rate of
acceleration or deceleration. For any constant rate of acceleration or deceleration, the moving end of the line
shows approximately what the indicated airspeed value will be in six seconds. If the trend vector crosses VNE,
the indicated airspeed number changes to yellow. The trend vector is absent if the speed remains constant or if
any data needed to calculate airspeed is not available due to a system failure.
EIS
Vspeeds (Glide, VR, VX, and VY) flags can be turned on/off from the Timer/References Window. VR is categorized
as a takeoff Vspeed. When active (on), the Vspeeds are displayed at their respective locations to the right of the
airspeed scale. By default, all Vspeed flags changes are retained when power is cycled.
Note: VX and VY can only be modified on the SR22.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Changing Vspeeds and turning Vspeed flags on/off:
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ON/OFF field.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to ON or counterclockwise to OFF.
4) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or the TMR/REF Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 2-4 Timer/References Window and Menus
Vspeed flags can be turned on or off all at once or by category (takeoff).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Turning all Vspeed flags on/off:
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
2) Press the MENU Key.
APPENDICES
3) To activate all Vspeed flags, press the ENT Key with All References On highlighted.
4) To remove all Vspeed flags, turn the FMS Knob to highlight All References Off and press the ENT Key.
Restoring all Vspeed defaults:
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
INDEX
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight Restore Defaults and press the ENT Key.
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
53
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Instruments
Attitude Indicator
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Attitude information is displayed over a virtual blue sky and brown ground with a white horizon line. The
Attitude Indicator displays the pitch, roll, and slip/skid information.
9
8
1
7
EIS
2
6
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3
4
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5
1
Roll Pointer
2
Roll Scale
3
Horizon Line
4
Aircraft Symbol
5
Land Representation
6
Pitch Scale
7
Slip/Skid Indicator
8
Sky Representation
9
Roll Scale Zero
Figure 2-5 Attitude Indicator
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The horizon line is part of the pitch scale. Above and below the horizon line, major pitch marks and numeric
labels are shown for every 10˚, up to 80˚. Minor pitch marks are shown for intervening 5˚ increments, up to
25˚ below and 45˚ above the horizon line. Between 20˚ below to 20˚ above the horizon line, minor pitch marks
occur every 2.5˚. When the Synthetic Vision System is activated, the pitch scale is reduced to 10˚ up and 7.5˚
down; refer to the Additional Features section.
AFCS
The inverted white triangle indicates zero on the roll scale. Major tick marks at 30˚ and 60˚ and minor tick
marks at 10˚, 20˚, and 45˚ are shown to the left and right of the zero. Angle of bank is indicated by the position
of the pointer on the roll scale.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Slip/Skid Indicator is the bar beneath the roll pointer. The indicator moves with the roll pointer and
moves laterally away from the pointer to indicate lateral acceleration. Slip/skid is indicated by the location of
the bar relative to the pointer. One bar displacement is equal to one ball displacement on a traditional Slip/Skid
Indicator.
INDEX
Figure 2-6 Slip/Skid Indication
54
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Instruments
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Altimeter
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Altimeter displays 600 feet of barometric altitude values at a time on a moving tape rolling number gauge.
Numeric labels and major tick marks are shown at intervals of 100 feet. Minor tick marks are at intervals of 20
feet. The indicated altitude is displayed inside the black pointer.
The Selected Altitude is displayed above the Altimeter in the box indicated by a selection bug symbol. A bug
corresponding to this altitude is shown on the tape. If the Selected Altitude exceeds the range shown on the
tape, the bug appears at the upper or lower edge of the tape. When the metric value is selected it is displayed
in a separate box above the Selected Altitude.
EIS
Setting the Selected Altitude:
T urn the ALT SEL Knob to set the Selected Altitude in 100-ft increments (increments reduce to 10 feet for
approach) up to the aircraft’s service ceiling.
If set, the Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height (MDA/DH) value is also available for the Selected Altitude.
If desired, press the ALT SEL Knob to synchronize the selected altitude to the displayed altitude to the nearest
10 ft.
Indicated
Altitude
Selected
Altitude
Bug
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Altitude
Trend
Vector
Selected
Altitude
Selected
Altitude
(Meters)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected
Altitude
Bug
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Indicated
Altitude
(Meters)
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Barometric
Setting Box
(Hectopascals)
Barometric
Setting
Figure 2-7 Altimeter Settings, In Hg and Metric
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
55
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Instruments
Altitudes can also be displayed in meters (Figure 2-7). Note that the altitude tape does not change scale.
Displaying altitude in meters:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Press the PFD Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
2) Press the ALT UNIT Softkey.
3) Press the METERS Softkey to turn on metric altitude readouts.
4) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the top-level softkeys.
EIS
A magenta Altitude Trend Vector extends up or down the left of the altitude tape, the end resting at the
approximate altitude to be reached in six seconds at the current vertical speed. The trend vector is not shown
if altitude remains constant or if data needed for calculation is not available due to a system failure.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The barometric pressure setting is displayed below the Altimeter in inches of mercury (in Hg) or hectopascals
(hPa) when metric units are selected. Adjusting the altimeter barometric pressure setting creates discontinuities
in VNV vertical navigation, moving the descent path. For large adjustments, it may take several minutes for the
aircraft to re-establish on the descent path. If the change is made while nearing a waypoint with a VNV Target
Altitude, the aircraft may not re-establish on the descent path in time to meet the vertical constraint.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selecting the altimeter barometric pressure setting:
Turn the BARO Knob to select the desired setting.
Selecting standard barometric pressure:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Press the BARO Knob to select standard pressure; STD BARO is displayed in the Barometric Setting box.
Or:
1) Press the PFD Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
AFCS
2) Press the STD BARO Softkey; STD BARO is displayed in the Barometric Setting box.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 2-8 Standard Barometric Altimeter Setting
Changing altimeter barometric pressure setting units:
1) Press the PFD Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
APPENDICES
2) Press the ALT UNIT Softkey.
3) Press the IN Softkey to display the barometric pressure setting in inches of mercury (in Hg).
Or, press the HPA Softkey to display the barometric pressure setting in hectopascals (hPa).
INDEX
4) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the top-level softkeys.
56
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Instruments
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
A Baro Transition Alert is provided to alert the pilot to change the barometric pressure setting when crossing
the transition altitude (in either direction). This is displayed by the barometric pressure setting flashing light blue
when crossing the transition altitude. The flashing stops when the barometric pressure setting is changed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Setting the Baro Transition Alert:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ON or OFF in the Baro Transition Alert box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to turn the alert OFF or ON and press the ENT Key.
EIS
5) With the altitude field highlighted, turn the small FMS Knob to set desired altitude and press the ENT Key.
6) To cancel the selection, press the FMS Knob.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 2-9 Baro Transition Alert
(AUX - System Setup Page)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
57
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Instruments
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI) displays the aircraft vertical speed with numeric labels and tick marks at
1000 and 2000 fpm in each direction on the non-moving tape. Minor tick marks are at intervals of 500 fpm.
The current vertical speed is displayed in the pointer, which also points to that speed on the non-moving tape.
Digits appear in the pointer when the climb or descent rate is greater than 100 fpm. If the rate of ascent/descent
exceeds 2000 fpm, the pointer appears at the corresponding edge of the tape and the rate appears inside the
pointer.
EIS
A magenta chevron bug is displayed as the Required Vertical Speed Indication (RVSI; Figure 2-10) for reaching
a VNV Target Altitude once the “TOD [Top of Descent] within 1 minute” alert has been generated. See the
Flight Management and AFCS sections for details on VNV features, and refer to Section 2.2, Supplemental
Flight Data, for more information about VNV indications on the PFD.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Vertical Deviation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI; Figure 2-10) uses a magenta chevron to indicate the baro-VNV vertical
deviation when Vertical Navigation (VNV) is being used; the VDI appears in conjunction with the “TOD within
1 minute” alert. Full-scale deflection (two dots) is 1000 feet. The VDI is removed from the display if vertical
deviation becomes invalid. See the Flight Management and AFCS sections for details on VNV features, and refer
to Section 2.2, Supplemental Flight Data, for more information about VNV indications on the PFDs.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Glideslope Indicator (Figure 2-11) appears to the left of the Altimeter whenever an ILS frequency is tuned
in the active NAV field and the aircraft heading and selected course are within 107°. A green diamond acts as
the Glideslope Indicator, like a glideslope needle on a conventional indicator. If a localizer frequency is tuned
and there is no glideslope, “NO GS” is displayed in place of the diamond.
The glidepath is analogous to the glideslope for GPS approaches supporting WAAS vertical guidance (LNAV+V,
L/VNAV, LPV). When an approach of this type is loaded into the flight plan and GPS is the selected navigation
source, the Glidepath Indicator (Figure 2-12) appears as a magenta diamond during the approach. If the
approach type downgrades past the final approach fix (FAF), “NO GP” is displayed in place of the diamond.
AFCS
Full-scale deflection of two dots is 1000 feet.
VNV Target
Altitude
Marker
Beacon
Annunciation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Vertical
Speed
Indicator
APPENDICES
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
Required
Vertical
Speed
Indicator
Glideslope
Indicator
Glidepath
Indicator
INDEX
Vertical
Speed
Pointer
Figure 2-10 Vertical Speed and
Deviation Indicators (VSI and VDI)
58
Figure 2-11 Glideslope Indicator
Figure 2-12 Glidepath Indicator
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Instruments
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) displays a rotating compass card in a heading-up orientation. Letters
indicate the cardinal points and numeric labels occur every 30˚. Major tick marks are at 10˚ intervals and minor
tick marks at 5˚ intervals. A digital reading of the current heading appears on top of the HSI, and the current
track is represented on the HSI by a magenta diamond bug. The HSI also presents turn rate, course deviation,
bearing, and navigation source information and is available in two formats (360˚ compass rose and 140˚ arc).
Changing the HSI display format:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
EIS
2) Press the HSI FRMT Softkey.
3) Press the 360 HSI or ARC HSI Softkey.
13
12
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
14
1
11
10
4
9
5
8
6
7
Course Deviation Indicator
4
Navigation Source
5
To/From Indicator
6
Course Pointer
7
Rotating Compass Rose
Lateral Deviation Scale
9
Aircraft Symbol
10
Flight Phase
11
Selected Heading Bug
12
Lubber Line
13
Current Heading
14
Turn Rate Indicator
APPENDICES
3
8
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2
Turn Rate/Heading
Trend Vector
Current Track Indicator
AFCS
3
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2
1
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The 360˚ HSI contains a Course Deviation Indicator (CDI), with a Course Pointer, To/From Indicator, and a
sliding deviation bar and scale. The course pointer is a single line arrow (GPS, VOR1, and LOC1) or a double
line arrow (VOR2 and LOC2) which points in the direction of the set course. The To/From arrow rotates with
the course pointer and is displayed when the active NAVAID is received.
Figure 2-13 Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
59
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Instruments
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Arc HSI is a 140˚ expanded section of the compass rose. The Arc HSI contains a Course Pointer,
To/From Indicator, a sliding deviation indicator (the To/From and deviation indicators are combined), and a
deviation scale. Upon station passage, the To/From Indicator flips and points to the tail of the aircraft, just like
a conventional To/From flag. Depending on the navigation source, the CDI on the Arc HSI can appear in two
different ways: an arrowhead (GPS, VOR, OBS) or a diamond (LOC).
EIS
Course
Pointer
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigation
Source
Lateral
Deviation
Scale
Flight Phase
Annunciation
Course Deviation
and To/From
Indicator
Figure 2-14 ARC HSI
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Selected Heading is shown to the upper left of the HSI for 3 seconds after being adjusted The light blue
bug on the compass rose corresponds to the Selected Heading. While the HSI is displayed as an arc, if the
Selected Heading Bug is adjusted off the shown portion of the compass rose, the digital reading is displayed.
Adjusting the Selected Heading:
Turn the HDG Knob to set the Selected Heading.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Press the HDG Knob to synchronize the bug to the current heading.
The Selected Course is shown to the upper right of the HSI for 3 seconds after being adjusted. While the
HSI is displayed as an arc, the Selected Course is displayed whenever the Course Pointer is not within the 140˚
currently shown.
AFCS
Adjusting the Selected Course:
Turn the CRS Knob to set the Selected Course.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press the CRS Knob to re-center the CDI and return the course pointer to the bearing of the active waypoint or
navigation station (see OBS Mode for adjusting a GPS course).
Current Track
Indicator
Current
Heading
APPENDICES
Selected
Heading
Selected
Course
INDEX
Heading Bug
Figure 2-15 Heading and Course Indications (Magnetic)
60
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Instruments
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Navigation angles (track, heading, course, bearing) are corrected to the computed magnetic variation (Mag
Var) or referenced to true north (T), set on the AUX - System Setup Page. When an approach referenced to
true north has been loaded into the flight plan, the system generates a message to change the navigation angle
setting to True at the appropriate time.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Figure 2-16 Heading and Course Indications (True)
Changing the navigation angle setting:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight Nav Angle in the Display Units box.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired setting and press the ENT Key.
• TRUE - References angles to true north (T)
• MAGNETIC - Angles corrected to the computed magnetic variation (Mag Var)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 2-17 Navigation Angle Settings
(AUX - System Setup Page)
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
61
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Instruments
Turn Rate Indicator
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Turn Rate Indicator is located directly above the rotating compass card. Tick marks to the left and right
of the lubber line denote half-standard and standard turn rates. A magenta Turn Rate Trend Vector shows the
current turn rate. The end of the trend vector gives the heading predicted in 6 seconds, based on the present
turn rate. A standard-rate turn is shown on the indicator by the trend vector stopping at the standard turn
rate tick mark, corresponding to a predicted heading of 18˚ from the current heading. At rates greater than 4
deg/sec, an arrowhead appears at the end of the magenta trend vector and the prediction is no longer valid.
EIS
Half-standard
Turn Rate
Standard
Turn Rate
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Arrow Shown
for Turn Rate
> 4 deg/sec
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-18 Turn Rate Indicator and Trend Vector
Bearing Pointer and Information Window
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
One bearing pointer and associated information can be displayed on the HSI for NAV, GPS, and ADF
sources. The pointer is a light blue single-line arrow (BRG); an icon is shown in the respective information
window to indicate the pointer. The bearing pointer never override the CDI and is visually separated from
the CDI by a white ring (shown when bearing pointer is selected but not necessarily visible due to data
unavailability).
Tuning Mode
AFCS
Frequency
Distance
Bearing
Pointer
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
DME Information Window
APPENDICES
Distance to
Bearing Source
Bearing
Source
Station
Identifier
Pointer
Icon
Bearing Information Window
INDEX
Figure 2-19 HSI with Bearing and DME Information
62
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Instruments
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
When a bearing pointer is displayed, the associated information window is also displayed. The Bearing
Information Windows are displayed at the lower sides of the HSI and give the following information:
• Station/waypoint identifier (NAV, GPS)
• Pointer icon (BRG = single line)
• GPS-derived great circle distance to bearing
source
• Frequency (NAV, ADF)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Bearing source (NAV, GPS)
EIS
If the NAV radio is the bearing source and is tuned to an ILS frequency (refer to the Audio Panel and CNS
Section for information on tuning the radios), the bearing pointer is removed from the HSI and the frequency
is replaced with “ILS”. When NAV1 or NAV2 is the selected bearing source, the frequency is replaced by the
station identifier when the station is within range. If GPS is the bearing source, the active waypoint identifier
is displayed in lieu of a frequency.
The bearing pointer is removed from the HSI and “NO DATA” is displayed in the information window if:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• The NAV radio is not receiving the tuned VOR station
• GPS is the bearing source and an active waypoint is not selected
Selecting bearing display and changing sources:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the BRG Softkey to display the bearing pointer and information window with NAV1 source.
3) Press the BRG Softkey again to change the bearing source to NAV2.
4) Press the BRG Softkey a third time to change the bearing source to GPS.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) Press the BRG Softkey a fourth time to change the bearing source to ADF (ADF Radio installation is optional).
6) To remove the bearing pointer and information window, press the BRG Softkey again.
DME Information Window
AFCS
The DME Information Window is displayed above the BRG1 Information Window on the 360˚ HSI and in
a box above and along side the Arc HSI. It shows the DME label, tuning mode (NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD),
frequency, and distance. When a signal is invalid, the distance is replaced by –.– – NM Refer to the Audio
Panel and CNS Section for information on tuning the DMEs.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Displaying the DME Information Window:
Displaying the DME Information Window:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
APPENDICES
2) Press the DME Softkey to display the DME Information Window.
3) To remove the DME Information Window, press the DME Softkey again.
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
63
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Instruments
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) moves left or right from the course pointer along a lateral deviation
scale to display aircraft position relative to the course. If the course deviation data is not valid, the CDI is not
displayed.
360˚ HSI
Arc HSI
Flight
Phase
EIS
Navigation
Source
Crosstrack
Error
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
CDI
Navigation
Source
CDI Scale
Flight
Phase
CDI
Scale
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-20 Course Deviation Indicator
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The CDI can display two sources of navigation: GPS or NAV (VOR, localizer). Color indicates the current
navigation source: magenta (for GPS) or green (for VOR and LOC); the Selected Course readout also follows
these color indications. When coupled to GPS, the full scale limits for the CDI are defined by a GPS-derived
distance. When coupled to a VOR or localizer (LOC), the CDI has the same angular limits as a mechanical CDI.
If the CDI exceeds the maximum deviation on the scale (two dots) while coupled to GPS, the crosstrack error
(XTK) is displayed below the white aircraft symbol.
INDEX
Figure 2-21 Navigation Sources
64
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Instruments
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Changing navigation sources:
1) Press the CDI Softkey to change from GPS to VOR1 or LOC1. The NAV1 standby frequency in the upper left
corner of the MFD is light blue.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the CDI Softkey again to change from VOR1 or LOC1 to VOR2 or LOC2. The NAV2 standby frequency in
the upper left corner of the MFD is light blue.
3) Press the CDI Softkey a third time to return to GPS.
NAV1 Selected for Tuning
NAV2 Selected for Tuning
EIS
VOR2
Selected
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
LOC1
Selected
GPS
Selected
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pressing the CDI
Softkey Cycles through
Navigation Sources
Figure 2-22 Selecting a Navigation Source
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The system automatically switches from GPS to LOC navigation source and changes the CDI scaling
accordingly when all of the following occur:
• A localizer or ILS approach has been loaded into the active flight plan
• The Final Approach Fix (FAF) is the active leg, the FAF is less than 15 nm away, and the aircraft is moving
toward the FAF
• A valid localizer frequency has been tuned
AFCS
• The GPS CDI deviation is less than 1.2 times full-scale deflection
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
GPS steering guidance is still provided after the CDI automatically switches to LOC until LOC capture, up
to the Final Approach Fix (FAF) for an ILS approach, or until GPS information becomes invalid. Activating a
Vector-to-Final (see the Flight Management Section) also causes the CDI to switch to LOC navigation source;
GPS steering guidance is not provided after this switch.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
65
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Instruments
GPS CDI Scaling
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When GPS is the selected navigation source, the flight plan legs are sequenced automatically and
annunciations appear on the HSI for the flight phase. Flight phase annunciations are normally shown in
magenta, but when cautionary conditions exist the color changes to yellow. If the current leg in the flight plan
is a heading leg, ‘HDG LEG’ is annunciated in magenta beneath the aircraft symbol.
EIS
The current GPS CDI scale setting is displayed as ‘System CDI’ on the AUX - System Setup Page and the fullscale deflection setting may also be changed (2.0 nm, 1.0 nm, 0.3 nm, or Auto) from this page. If the selected
scaling is smaller than the automatic setting for enroute and terminal phases, the CDI is scaled accordingly and
the selected setting is be displayed rather than the flight phase annunciation. Receiver Autonomous Integrity
Monitoring (RAIM) protection limits follow the selected CDI scale and corresponding flight phases.
Changing the selected GPS CDI setting:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight Selected in the GPS CDI box.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired setting and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) To cancel the selection, press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key.
Figure 2-23 GPS CDI Settings
(AUX - System Setup Page)
INDEX
APPENDICES
When set to ‘Auto’ (default), the GPS CDI scale automatically adjusts to the desired limits based upon the
current phase of flight (Figure 2-24, Table 2-1).
66
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Enroute
(Oceanic if >200 nm
from nearest airport)
Terminal
Approach
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
1.0 nm
2.0 nm
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
Terminal
Refer to accompanying
approach CDI scaling figures
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Departure
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CDI Full-scale Deflection
Flight Instruments
Missed
Approach
EIS
Figure 2-24 Automatic CDI Scaling
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Once a departure procedure is activated, the CDI is scaled for departure (0.3 nm).
• The system switches from departure to terminal CDI scaling (1.0 nm) under the following conditions:
- The next leg in the departure procedure is not aligned with the departure runway
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- The next leg in the departure procedure is not a CA, CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FA, FC, FD, FM, IF, or TF leg
- After any leg in the departure procedure that is not a CA or FA leg
• At 30 nm from the departure airport the enroute phase of flight is automatically entered and CDI scaling
changes to 2.0 nm over a distance of 1.0 nm, except under the following conditions:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- When navigating with an active departure procedure, the flight phase and CDI scale does not change
until the aircraft arrives at the last departure waypoint (if more than 30 nm from the departure airport) or
the leg after the last departure waypoint has been activated or a direct-to waypoint is activated.
• If after completing the departure procedure the nearest airport is more than 200 nm away from the aircraft
and the approach procedure has not yet commenced, the CDI is scaled for oceanic flight (2.0 nm).
AFCS
• Within 31 nm of the destination airport (terminal area), the CDI scale gradually ramps down from 2.0 nm
to 1.0 nm over a distance of 1.0 nm, except under the following conditions:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- When navigating with an active arrival route, the flight phase and CDI scale does not change until the
aircraft arrives at the first waypoint in the arrive route (if within 31 nm from the destination airport).
• During approach, the CDI scale ramps down even further (see Figures 2-25 and 2-26). This transition
normally occurs within 2.0 nm of the Final Approach Fix (FAF). The CDI switches to approach scaling
automatically once the approach procedure is active or if Vectors-To-Final (VTF) are selected.
APPENDICES
- If the active waypoint is the FAF, the ground track and the bearing to the FAF must be within 45° of the
final approach segment course.
- If the active waypoint is part of the missed approach procedure, the active leg and the preceding missed
approach legs must be aligned with the final approach segment course and the aircraft must not have
passed the turn initiation point.
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
67
2 nm
FAF
CDI scale varies if VTF is activated
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
2 nm
FAF
EIS
angle based
on database
information
course width
angle set
by system
CDI Full-scale Deflection
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
CDI scale is set to the smaller of 0.3 nm
or an angle set by the system
350 ft
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
CDI Full-scale Deflection
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Instruments
Landing
Threshold
CDI scale varies if VTF is activated
Figure 2-25 Typical LNAV and LNAV+V Approach CDI Scaling
Figure 2-26 Typical LNAV/VNAV and LPV Approach CDI Scaling
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• When a missed approach is activated, the CDI scale changes to 0.3 nm.
• The system automatically switches back to terminal mode under the following conditions:
- The next leg in the missed approach procedure is not aligned with the final approach path
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- The next leg in the missed approach procedure is not a CA, CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FA, FC, FD, FM, IF, or TF leg
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- After any leg in the missed approach procedure that is not a CA or FA leg
Flight Phase
Departure
Terminal
Enroute
Oceanic
Annunciation*
DPRT
TERM
ENR
OCN
Approach
(Non-precision)
LNAV
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Approach
(Non-precision with
Vertical Guidance)
Approach
(LNAV/VNAV)
Approach
(LPV)
Missed Approach
Automatic CDI Full-scale Deflection
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
2.0 nm
2.0 nm
1.0 nm decreasing to 350 feet depending on
variables (see Figure 2-25)
LNAV + V
L/VNAV
LPV
MAPR
1.0 nm decreasing to a specified course width, then
0.3 nm, depending on variables (see Figure 2-26)
0.3 nm
APPENDICES
* Flight phase annunciations are normally shown in magenta, but when cautionary
conditions exist the color changes to yellow.
INDEX
Table 2-1 Automatic GPS CDI Scaling
68
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Instruments
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
OBS Mode
NOTE: VNV is inhibited while automatic waypoint sequencing has been suspended.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Enabling Omni-bearing Selector (OBS) Mode suspends the automatic sequencing of waypoints in a GPS
flight plan (GPS must be the selected navigation source), but retains the current “active-to” waypoint as the
navigation reference even after passing the waypoint. ‘OBS’ is annunciated to the lower right of the aircraft
symbol when OBS Mode is selected.
EIS
While OBS Mode is enabled, a course line is drawn through the “active-to” waypoint on the moving map.
If desired, the course to/from the waypoint can now be adjusted. When OBS Mode is disabled, the GPS flight
plan returns to normal operation with automatic sequencing of waypoints, following the course set in OBS
Mode. The flight path on the moving map retains the modified course line.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GPS
Selected
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Extended
Course
Line
OBS Mode
Enabled
Pressing the OBS
Softkey Again
Disables OBS Mode
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the OBS
Softkey Enables
OBS Mode
Figure 2-27 Omni-bearing Selector (OBS) Mode
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
69
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Instruments
Enabling/disabling OBS Mode while navigating a GPS flight plan:
1) Press the OBS Softkey to select OBS Mode.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn a CRS Knob to select the desired course to/from the waypoint. Press a CRS Knob to synchronize the
Selected Course with the bearing to the next waypoint.
3) Press the OBS Softkey again to return to automatic waypoint sequencing.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
As the aircraft crosses the missed approach point (MAP), automatic approach waypoint sequencing is
suspended. SUSP appears on the HSI at the lower right of the aircraft symbol. The OBS Softkey label
changes to indicate the suspension is active as shown in Figure 2-28. Pressing the SUSP Softkey, deactivates
the suspension and resumes automatic sequencing of approach waypoints.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the SUSP Softkey Suspends
Automatic Waypoint Sequencing
SUSP
Annunciation
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 2-28 Suspending Automatic Waypoint Sequencing
70
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Instruments
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
2.2 Supplemental Flight Data
Note: Pressing the DFLTS Softkey (a second-level PFD softkey) turns off metric Altimeter display, the Inset
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Map, and wind data display.
In addition to the flight instruments, the PFD also displays various supplemental information, including
temperatures, wind data, and Vertical Navigation (VNV) indications.
Temperature Display
EIS
The Outside Air Temperature (OAT) is displayed in degrees Celsius (°C) by default in the lower left of the PFD
under normal display conditions, or below the true airspeed in reversionary mode. It may also be displayed in
degrees Fahrenheit from the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Normal Display
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Reversionary Mode
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 2-29 Outside Air Temperature
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
71
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Instruments
Changing temperature display units:
1) Select the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD using the FMS Knob.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the TEMP field in the Display Units box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight either CELSIUS or FAHRENHEIT and press the ENT Key to confirm the
selection.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
5) To cancel the selection, press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 2-30 Temperature Selection
(AUX - System Setup Page)
72
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Instruments
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Wind Data
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Wind direction and speed in knots can be displayed relative to the aircraft in a window to the upper left of
the HSI. When the window is selected for display, but wind information is invalid or unavailable, the window
displays NO WIND DATA. Wind data can be displayed in two different ways.
Option 1
EIS
Option 2
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
No Data
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-31 Wind Data
Displaying wind data:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the WIND Softkey to display wind data.
3) Press one of the OPTN softkeys to change how wind data is displayed:
• OPTN 1: Wind direction arrow with numeric True direction and speed
AFCS
• OPTN 2: Wind direction arrows with numeric headwind and crosswind components
4) To remove the window, press the OFF Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
73
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Instruments
Vertical Navigation (VNV) Indications
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When a VNV flight plan has been activated, VNV indications (VNV Target Altitude, RVSI, VDI) appear on the
PFD in conjunction with the “TOD within 1 minute” message and “Vertical track” voice alert. See the Flight
Management and AFCS sections for details on VNV features. VNV indications are removed from the PFD
according to the criteria listed in Table 2-2.
Top of Descent Message
EIS
VNV Target
Altitude
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
Required
Vertical
Speed
Indicator
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GPS is
Selected
Navigation
Source
Terminal
Phase of
Flight
Figure 2-32 Vertical Navigation Indications (PFD)
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
VNV Indication Removed
Criteria
Required Vertical
Vertical
VNV Target
Speed (RVSI)
Deviation (VDI)
Altitude*
Aircraft > 1 min before the next TOD due to flight plan change
X
X
X
VNV cancelled (CNCL VNV Softkey pressed on MFD)
X
X
X
Distance to active waypoint cannot be computed due to
unsupported flight plan leg type (see Flight Management
X
X
X
Section)
Aircraft > 250 feet below active VNV Target Altitude
X
X
X
Current crosstrack or track angle error has exceeded limit
X
X
X
Active altitude-constrained waypoint can not be reached within
X
X
maximum allowed flight path angle and vertical speed
* If the flight director has been engaged to fly a VNV flight plan, the VNV Target Altitude being held remains displayed
while on level flight plan legs.
INDEX
Table 2-2 VNV Indication Removal Criteria
74
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Instruments
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
2.3 PFD Annunciations and Alerting Functions
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following annunciations and alerting functions are displayed on the PFD. Refer to Appendix A for more
information on alerts and annunciations.
Marker Beacon Annunciations
Marker Beacon Annunciations are displayed on the PFD to the left of the Selected Altitude. Outer marker
reception is indicated in blue, middle in amber, and inner in white. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS Section
for more information on Marker Beacon Annunciations.
Middle Marker
EIS
Outer Marker
Inner Marker
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Altimeter
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-33 Marker Beacon Annunciations
Traffic Annunciation
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Perspective® system displays traffic symbolically on the Inset Map (PFD), the Navigation Map Page
(MFD), and various other MFD page maps. Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section for more details about the
optional Traffic Advisory Systems (TAS). When a Traffic Advisory (TA) is detected, the following automatically
occurs:
• The PFD Inset Map is enabled, displaying traffic
AFCS
• A flashing black-on-yellow TRAFFIC annunciation (Figure 2-34) appears to the top left of the Attitude
Indicator for 5 seconds and remains displayed until no TAs are detected in the area
• A single “Traffic” aural alert is generated
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
If additional TAs appear, new aural and visual alerts are generated.
APPENDICES
Traffic
Symbol
Figure 2-34 Traffic Annunciation
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
INDEX
Figure 2-35 Inset Map with Traffic Displayed
75
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Instruments
TAWS Annunciations
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Terrain Awareness and Warning System (TAWS) annunciations appear on the PFD to the upper left of the
Altimeter (also where the marker beacon annunciations appear). Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section and
Appendix for information on TAWS alerts and annunciations.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 2-36 Traffic and Example TAWS Annunciations
76
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Instruments
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Altitude Alerting
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Altitude Alerting function provides the pilot with visual and aural alerts when approaching the Selected
Altitude. Whenever the Selected Altitude is changed, the Altitude Alerter is reset. The Altitude Alerter is
independent of the GFC 700 AFCS. The following occur when approaching the Selected Altitude:
• Upon passing through 1000 feet of the Selected Altitude, the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter)
changes to black text on a light blue background and flashes for 5 seconds.
• When the aircraft passes within 200 ft of the Selected Altitude, the Selected Altitude changes to light blue text
on a black background and flashes for 5 seconds and a single chime is heard.
Within 200 ft
Deviation of ±200 ft
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Within 1000 ft
EIS
• After reaching the Selected Altitude, if the pilot flies outside the deviation band (±200 feet of the Selected
Altitude), the Selected Altitude changes to yellow text on a black background, flashes for 5 seconds, and the
word “Altitude” is heard.
Figure 2-37 Altitude Alerting Visual Annunciations
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Low Altitude Annunciation
NOTE: The Low Altitude Annunciation is available only for aircraft with GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Units
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
when WAAS is available. This annunciation is not shown for systems with TAWS, unless TAWS is inhibited.
When the Final Approach Fix (FAF) is the active waypoint in a GPS WAAS approach using vertical guidance,
a Low Altitude Annunciation may appear if the current aircraft altitude is at least 164 feet below the prescribed
altitude at the FAF. A black-on-yellow ‘LOW ALT’ annunciation appears to the top right of the Altimeter,
flashing for several seconds then remaining displayed until the condition is resolved.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Altimeter
Figure 2-38 Low Altitude on GPS WAAS Approach
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
77
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Instruments
Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height Alerting
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
For altitude awareness, a barometric Minimum Descent Altitude (MDA) or Decision Height (DH), based on
barometric altitude can be set. When active, the altitude setting is displayed to the lower left of the Altimeter
and with a bug at the corresponding altitude along the Altimeter (once the altitude is within the range of the
tape).
The following visual annunciations alert the pilot when approaching the MDA or DH:
• When the aircraft altitude descends to within 2500 feet of the MDA/DH setting, the ‘BARO MIN’ box appears
with the altitude in light blue text. The bug appears on the altitude tape in light blue once in range.
EIS
• When the aircraft passes through 100 feet of the MDA/DH, the bug and text turn white.
• Once the aircraft reaches the MDA/DH, the bug and text turn yellow and the aural alert, “Minimums
Minimums”, is generated.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Alerting is inhibited while the aircraft is on the ground and until the aircraft reaches 150 feet above the setting
for the alert. If the aircraft proceeds to climb after having reached the MDA/DH, once it reaches 50 feet above
the MDA/DH, alerting is disabled.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Within 2500 feet
Within 100 feet
Altitude Reached
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
MDA/DH
Bug
MDA/DH
Setting
Figure 2-39 Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height Alerting Visual Annunciations
AFCS
The MDA/DH may be set from either PFD and is synchronized on both PFDs. The function is reset when the
power is cycled.
Setting the Minimums Descent Altitude/Decision Height:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Minimums field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select BARO. OFF is selected by default. Press the ENT Key or turn the large FMS
Knob to highlight the next field.
APPENDICES
4) Use the small FMS Knob to enter the desired altitude (from zero to 16,000 feet).
5) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or the TMR/REF Softkey.
INDEX
Figure 2-40 MDA/DH Setting (Timer/References Window)
78
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Instruments
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
2.4 Abnormal Operations
Abnormal GPS Conditions
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The annunciations listed in Table 2-3 can appear on the HSI when abnormal GPS conditions occur; see the
figure for examples. Refer to the Flight Management Section for more information on Dead Reckoning Mode.
Annunciation
LOI
INTEG OK
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
DR
Description
Loss of Integrity Monitoring–GPS integrity is insufficient for the current
phase of flight
Integrity OK–GPS integrity has been restored to within normal limits
(annunciation displayed for 5 seconds)
Dead Reckoning–System is using projected position rather than GPS position
to compute navigation data and sequence active flight plan waypoints
EIS
Location
Lower left of
aircraft symbol
Lower left of
aircraft symbol
Upper right of
aircraft symbol
Table 2-3 Abnormal GPS Conditions Annunciated on HSI
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 2-41 Example HSI Annunciations
As a result of operating in DR Mode, all GPS-derived data is computed based upon an estimated position and
is displayed as yellow text on the display to denote degraded navigation source information. This data includes
the following:
AFCS
• Navigation Status Box fields except Active Leg, TAS, and DTK
• Course Deviation Indicator
• GPS Bearing Pointer
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Wind data and pointers in the Wind Data Box on the PFD
• Track Indicator
• All Bearing Pointer Distances
APPENDICES
• Active Flight Plan distances, bearings, and ETE values
Also, while the Perspective® system is in DR Mode, the autopilot will not couple to GPS, and Terrain Proximity,
TERRAIN-SVS, and TAWS are disabled. Additionally, the accuracy of all nearest information (airports, airspaces,
and waypoints) is questionable. Finally, airspace alerts continue to function, but with degraded accuracy.
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
79
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Instruments
Unusual Attitudes
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the aircraft enters an unusual pitch attitude, red extreme pitch warning chevrons pointing toward the
horizon are displayed on the Attitude Indicator, starting at 50˚ above and 30˚ below the horizon line.
Nose Low
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Nose High
Figure 2-42 Pitch Attitude Warnings
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If pitch exceeds +30˚/-20˚ or bank exceeds 65˚, some information displayed on the PFD is removed. The
Altimeter and Airspeed, Attitude, Vertical Speed, and Horizontal Situation indicators remain on the display
and the Bearing Information, Alerts, and Annunciation windows can be displayed during such situations. The
following information is removed from the PFD (and corresponding softkeys are disabled) when the aircraft
experiences unusual attitudes:
• Traffic Annunciations
• System Time
• AFCS Annunciations
• PFD Setup Menu
• Minimum Descent Altitude/
Decision Height readout
• Flight director Command Bars
• Windows displayed in the lower
right corner of the PFD:
• Vertical Deviation, Glideslope,
and Glidepath Indicators
• Outside Air Temperature
– Timer/References
• Altimeter Barometric Setting
• DME Information Window
– Nearest Airports
• Selected Altitude
• Wind data
– Flight Plan
• VNV Target Altitude
• Selected Heading Box
– Alerts
• Selected Course Box
– Procedures
• Transponder Status Box
– DME Tuning
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
• Inset Map
80
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Engine Indication System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Section 3 Engine Indication System
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Engine Indication System (EIS) displays critical engine, electrical, fuel, optional ice protection, and other
system parameters on the left side of the Multi Function Display (MFD) during normal operations (Figure 3-1).
EIS information can be fully expanded to an entire page (EIS - Engine Page) using the ENGINE Softkey. In
Reversionary Mode, the displays are re-configured to present Primary Flight Display (PFD) symbology together
with the EIS.
EIS
EIS Display
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 3-1 MFD (SR22)
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Green bands on the instruments indicate normal ranges of operation; yellow and red bands indicate caution and
warning, respectively. White or uncolored bands indicate areas outside of normal operation not yet in the safe
ranges. When unsafe operating conditions occur, the corresponding readouts, pointers and labels change color
corresponding to the level of the condition; warnings also flash (except fuel at destination). If sensory data to an
instrument becomes invalid or unavailable, a red “X” is displayed across the instrument. However the destination,
range and economy fields in the Fuel Calculation Box underscore the readout rather than display a red “X” when
the data is invalid our out of range.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
81
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Engine Indication System
3.1 EIS Display
1
Percent Power Indicator
(% Pwr)
Displays engine power as a percentage
2
Tachometer (RPM)
Displays propeller speed in revolutions per minute
3
Displays manifold pressure in inches of Mercury to indicate engine
power
Displays the fuel used in gallons
8
Engine Manifold Pressure
Indicator (Man “Hg)
Gallons Used Indicator
(Gal Used)
Fuel Flow Indicator
(FFlow GPH)
Oil Temperature Indicator
(Oil ºF)
Oil Pressure Indicator
(Oil PSI)
Ammeter (Batt1 A)
9
Voltmeter (ESS Bus V)
Displays the essential bus voltage in volts
10
Cylinder Head Temperature Displays the head temperature of the hottest cylinder (CHT; cylinder
number is shown below bar)
Indicator (CHT ºF)
Exhaust Gas Temperature Displays the exhaust gas temperature (cylinder number is shown below
bar) (SR20 & SR22 only)
Indicator (EGT ºF)
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Refer to the Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) for engine operating limitations.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4
7
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6
11
Displays fuel flow in gallons per hour (SR22TN only – displays a light blue
target fuel flow indicator shown at the bottom of the fuel flow indicator)
Displays engine oil temperature in degrees Fahrenheit
Displays pressure of oil supplied to the engine in pounds per square inch
(psi)
Displays the battery 1 load in amperes
AFCS
Exhaust Gas Temperature/ Displays the exhaust gas temperature and turbine inlet temperature
Turbine Inlet Temperature (cylinder number or turbine inlet side is shown below bar) (SR22TN
only)
Indicator (EGT/TIT ºF)
Left and Right Turbine Inlet Displays the temperature at the left (L) and right (R) turbine inlet (SR22TN
only).
Temperature
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
12
82
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Engine Indication System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
5
6
7
7
7
8
8
8
9
9
9
10
10
10
11
11
11
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Target
Fuel Flow
6
6
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
12
SR22TN
AFCS
SR22
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SR20
EIS
1
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
Figure 3-2 EIS Display
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
83
ENGINE
Engine Indication System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE
(Optional)
ASSIST
DCLTR
FUEL
CO RST
3.2 Engine
PageSoftkey to
Press the ENGINE
return to the top-level softkeys.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
TABS
FULL
Pressing the ENGINE
Softkey
accesses the EIS - Engine Page, which displays allUNDO
engine,ENTER
fuel, fuel calculation,
electrical, air data, and optional ice protection information. Pressing the optional ANTI-ICE Softkey accesses the
second-level softkeys. Pressing the FUEL Softkey accesses the second-level
softkeys.
Press
the UNDO or ENTER Softkey to
return to the second-level softkeys.
NOTE: The ice protection system (optional) must be operated in accordance with the approved flight manual
limitations. This option is only available on the SR22 and SR22TN.
EIS
ENGINE
The ANTI-ICE Softkey and its secondlevel softkeys are only available with the
TKS FIKI system installed.
(Optional)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
(Optional)
ENGINE
ANTI-ICE
ASSIST
DCLTR
FUEL
CO RST
Press the ENGINE Softkey to
return to the top-level softkeys.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
(Optional) (Optional) (Optional)
LEFT
AUTO
RIGHT
FULL
TABS
BACK
UNDO
ENTER
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Press the UNDO or ENTER Softkey to
return to the second-level softkeys.
Figure 3-3 Engine Page Softkeys
AFCS
• ENGINE
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
ANTI-ICE
LEFT
AUTO
RIGHT
DCLTR
ASSIST
CO RST
FUEL
FULL
TABS
UNDO
ENTER
84
Displays full Engine Page and second-level engine softkeys; press again to return to the
Engine Strip and top-level softkeys (see the EIS Section for more information)
Displays Anti-Ice softkeys (optional-TKS FIKI only; See Operational Note above)
Selects manual mode and opens the left tank valve and closes the right tank valve
Selects auto tank selection mode
Selects manual mode and opens the right tank valve and closes the left tank valve
Removes bars and temperature readouts from the Engine Temperature Box
Identifies temperature peaks
Resets the CO Guardian (optional)
Accesses the Initial Usable Fuel Page
Resets fuel totalizer to full (usable fuel)
Resets fuel totalizer to tabs (usable fuel)
Resets to the initial usable fuel amount shown on the Initial Usable Fuel Page
Saves the usable fuel amount as displayed on the Initial Usable Fuel Page
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Engine Indication System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NOTE: Refer to the Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) for engine operating limitations.
2
Tachometer (RPM x100) Displays propeller speed in revolutions per minute
3
Engine Manifold
Pressure Indicator
(Man “Hg)
Displays manifold pressure in inches of Mercury to indicate engine power
4
Fuel Flow Indicator
(FFlow GPH)
Oil Temperature and
Pressure Indicators
(Oil °F PSI)
Displays fuel flow in gallons per hour (SR22TN only – displays a light blue
target fuel flow indicator shown on top of the fuel flow gauge)
Displays oil temperature in degrees Fahrenheit (°F) and pressure in pounds
per square inch (psi)
6
Electrical Group
(Electrical)
Displays the alternator and battery current in amperes and the essential and
main bus voltage
7
Fuel Calculation Group Displays calculated fuel at destination, fuel used, fuel remaining, time
remaining, range (in nautical miles) and economy (in nautical miles per
(Fuel Calculation)
gallon) based on the displayed fuel remaining and the fuel flow totalizer
8
Air Data
9
Engine Temperature Group Displays head (CHT) and exhaust gas temperatures (EGT) of all cylinders in °F (all
models) and turbine inlet temperatures (SR22TN only)
(Engine Temperature)
10
Anti-Ice Fluid Quantity TKS NH – Displays the quantity of anti-ice fluid remaining in the single tank
(optional – See Operational Note below).
Indicator (TKS NH
and TKS FIKI)
TKS FIKI – Displays the quantity of anti-ice fluid remaining in the left (L) and
right (R) tanks in gallons (optional – See Operational Note below).
11
Oxygen Pressure
Indicator
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5
EIS
Percent Power Indicator Displays engine power as a percentage
(% Pwr)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Displays density altitude, outside air temperature (OAT) in °F and °C, and
international standard atmosphere (ISA) temperature deviation
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Displays oxygen pressure in tank in pounds per square inch (optional)
NOTE: The ice protection system (optional) must be operated in accordance with the approved flight manual
APPENDICES
limitations. This option is only available on the SR22 and SR22TN.
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
85
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Engine Indication System
2
3
4
5
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
6
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
9
7
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 3-4 Engine Page (SR20)
2
3
4
5
AFCS
1
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6
9
APPENDICES
7
10
8
INDEX
Figure 3-5 Engine Page (SR22)
86
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Engine Indication System
2
3
Target Fuel
Flow Indicator
4
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1
5
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
6
9
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
7
10
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8
11
Figure 3-6 Engine Page (SR22TN)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
87
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Engine Indication System
Fuel Calculations
NOTE: Fuel calculations do not use the aircraft fuel quantity indicators and are calculated from the last time
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
the fuel was reset.
Fuel used (Used), time remaining (Time Rem), range (in nautical miles, Range), and economy (Econ) are
calculated based on the displayed fuel remaining (Rem) and the fuel flow totalizer. The calculated range is
based upon ground speed, distance, economy and fuel remaining. See the Flight Management Section for
information regarding the map feature related to the EIS Fuel Calculations.
EIS
Adjusting the fuel totalizer quantity:
1) Press the ENGINE Softkey to display the Engine Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the FUEL Softkey to access the Initial Usable Fuel Page.
3) Turn the FMS Knob (small knob adjusts in 1 gallon increments and large knob in 10 gallon increments) to
increase or decrease the initial usable fuel displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Calculated
Fuel Used
Fuel
Remaining
Calculated
Time
Remaining
Calculated
Range
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Calculated
Economy
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 3-7 Fuel Calculations Group
INDEX
Figure 3-8 Full Fuel (SR20)
Initial Usable Fuel Page
88
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Engine Indication System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 3-9 Fuel to TABS (SR22)
Initial Usable Fuel Page
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 3-10 Full Fuel (SR22TN)
Initial Usable Fuel Page
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
89
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Engine Indication System
Ice Protection Systems
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Perspective® System interfaces with either of two optional ice protection systems, TKS No-Hazard (NH)
or TKS Flight Into Known Icing (FIKI) anti-ice systems. Refer to the applicable Pilot’s Operating Handbook
(POH) for a detailed system description of the installed ice protection system.
NOTE: The ice protection system (optional) must be operated in accordance with the approved flight manual
limitations. This option is only available on the SR22 and SR22TN.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The TKS NH system displays a single quantity gauge on the full Engine Page to indicate the amount of antiice fluid available.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 3-11 TKS NH System Fluid Quantity Gauge
TKS Flight Into Known Icing (FIKI) Anti-Ice System
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The FIKI system offers five pilot-selectable (external to the Perspective® System) modes of operation and
a more sophisticated quantity indicator located on the full Engine Page. To accommodate the additional
modes, the TKS FIKI system employs several additional sensors. The Perspective® System receives inputs
from these sensors and provides indications as to the status of the TKS FIKI system.
Auto Tank Selection Mode
AFCS
In the default tank selection mode (AUTO), Perspective® assures that the fluid levels of the two tanks are
kept relatively even by periodically closing the tank with the lowest level. Perspective® uses the anti-ice
fluid tank quantities to control the tank shut-off valves. When the system is on and operating in AUTO
mode, the shut-off valves close under the following conditions:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• The left and right tank level imbalance is greater than 0.25 gallons (low tank will be closed until level
balance is within 0.15 gallons)
APPENDICES
• The fluid quantity is empty (indicated from the fluid level sensor and level switch)
While operating in AUTO mode a white box is displayed around the ‘L’ and ‘R’, located on top of each
fluid quantity indicator, when both tanks are open. During normal operation, the white box will highlight
the left or right tanks as the fluid levels change (Figure 3-12).
INDEX
• The fluid quantity is unreliable (a miscompare between the level sensor and level switch or an out of
range level sensor value)
90
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Engine Indication System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Figure 3-12 AUTO Tank Mode (Normal)
EIS
If a fluid level comparison fault is detected (the fluid level sender disagrees with the fluid level switch for
a particular tank) the corresponding fluid quantity indicator is grayed out (Figure 3-13) and that quantity
is not used in the endurance and range calculations. When the fluid level sender is out of range, the fluid
quantity indicator is marked with a red ‘X’ (Figure 3-14).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 3-13 Fluid Level Unreliable
Figure 3-14 Fluid Level Out Of Range
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Manual Tank Mode
AFCS
Manual tank mode allows the pilot to control either tank’s shut-off valve. Manual may be selected by
pressing the ANTI-ICE Softkey to access the second-level softkeys LEFT, AUTO, and RIGHT. A light
blue box is displayed around the selected tank, gallons remaining in the selected tank, and pump operating
mode.
• LEFT Softkey – opens left tank valve and closes right tank valve
• AUTO Softkey – returns to AUTO tank mode
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• RIGHT Softkey – opens right tank valve and closes left tank valve
While operating in manual tank mode, only the selected/open tank’s quantity is used for the range and
endurance calculations.
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 3-15 Manual Tank Mode (Left tank selected)
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
91
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Engine Indication System
Pump Operating Modes
The Ice Protection systems consists of various pump operating modes listed below.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The ice protection system (optional) must be operated in accordance with the approved flight manual
limitations. This option is only available on the SR22 and SR22TN.
EIS
Operating Mode
OFF
NORM
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
HIGH
MAX
(momentary)
PUMP BKUP
System Operation
System Off
Both pumps operate on a timed, repeating cycle
– 30 seconds ON and 90 seconds OFF
A single pump (#1) operates continuously
Both pumps operate continuously for 120
seconds
A single pump (#2) operates continuously
Comments
No modes selected
Provides 50% flow rate for light/moderate icing 
Provides 100% flow rate for moderate icing 
Provides 200% flow rate for severe icing or to
expedite the removal of previous ice buildup 
This mode is used in the event of a timer box failure
or when BKUP mode is selected. Pump #2 provides
100% flow rate, bypassing the timer box 
Figure 3-16 Normal Operating Mode
Figure 3-17 High Operating Mode
Figure 3-18 Max Operating Mode
Figure 3-19 Pump Backup Mode
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
 Refer to the POH for pilot recommended actions
Table 3-1 FIKI System Operating Modes
92
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Engine Indication System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3.3 Leaning Assist Mode
NOTE: The pilot should follow the engine manufacturer’s recommended leaning procedures in the Pilot’s
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Operating Handbook (POH).
A leaning assist function is available on the Engine Page to assist in the leaning process.
Accessing Leaning Assist Mode:
1) Press the ENGINE Softkey to display the Engine Page.
EIS
2) Press the ASSIST Softkey to identify peaks.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
When the ASSIST Softkey is pressed, the system initially highlights the number and places a light blue box
around the EGT readout of the cylinder with the hottest EGT. The ∆ Peak temperature is the difference between
the peak temperature and the present temperature for the peaked cylinder. When the first peak is detected, “1st”
is annunciated below that cylinder’s EGT bar and the temperature is enclosed in a light blue box.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The system continues to detect peak EGTs for each cylinder lean of peak as the fuel flow is decreased, and the
peak of each cylinder’s EGT is indicated by a light blue marker on the graph. Once all cylinders are lean of peak,
the last cylinder to peak is denoted by the “Last” annunciation below its bar on the graph.
Light Blue Box
Represents Peak
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Temperature
Deviation
from Peak
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 3-20 Leaning Assist Mode
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
93
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Engine Indication System
3.4 EIS Display in Reversionary Mode
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In reversionary mode, the remaining display is re-configured to present PFD symbology together with the EIS
Display (refer to the System Overview for information about display Reversionary Mode).
When the displays enter reversionary mode, the EIS is separated into two displays: Engine (identical to the
normal EIS Display on the MFD) and System. For a description of the EIS Display, refer to Section 3.1. The
System Display shows various system parameters and fuel calculations.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
EIS Display
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
(optional)
ENGINE
INSET
SENSOR
PFD
OBS
CDI
DME
XPDR
IDENT
TMR/REF
NRST
ALERTS
AFCS
Figure 3-21 Reversionary Mode (SR22)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
ENGINE
ENGINE
SYSTEM
BACK
ALERTS
APPENDICES
Press the BACK Softkey to
return to the top-level softkeys.
INDEX
Figure 3-22 EIS Softkeys (Reversionary Mode)
94
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Engine Indication System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Display
NOTE: Fuel calculations do not use the aircraft fuel quantity indicators and are calculated anytime the initial
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
usable fuel is changed.
NOTE: Refer to the Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) for limitations.
The EIS System Display shows the engine, fuel calculations, electrical, and various system parameters. Fuel
calculations are based on the displayed fuel remaining and the fuel flow totalizer.
EIS
Accessing the EIS System Display:
1) Press the ENGINE Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the SYSTEM Softkey.
3) To return to the default Engine Display, press the ENGINE or BACK Softkey.
1
3
5
Displays manifold pressure in inches of Mercury to indicate engine
power
Displays calculated fuel at destination, fuel used, fuel remaining, time
remaining, range (in nautical miles) and economy (in nautical miles
per gallon) based on the displayed fuel remaining and the fuel flow
totalizer
Displays the alternator and battery current in amperes and the essential
and main bus voltage
Displays engine hours and anti-ice gallons (optional) and oxygen
pressure (optional)
Electrical Group
(Electrical)
Miscellaneous (Misc)
AFCS
6
Engine Manifold Pressure
Indicator (Man “Hg)
Fuel Calculation Group
(Fuel Calc)
Shows propeller speed in revolutions per minute
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4
Displays engine power as a percentage
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2
Percent Power Indicator
(% Pwr)
Tachometer (RPM)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
95
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
6
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Engine Indication System
SR20
SR22
SR22TN
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 3-23 System Display
96
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Audio Panel and CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Section 4 Audio Panel and CNS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4.1 Overview
The Communication/Navigation/Surveillance (CNS) system includes the Audio Panel, communication radios,
navigation radios, and Mode A/C or Mode S transponder. The System Overview Section provides a block diagram
description of the Audio Panels and CNS system interconnection.
CNS operation in the avionics system is performed by the following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
• Multifunction Display (MFD)
• Mode A/C or Mode S Transponder
• Integrated Avionics Unit (2)
• Control Unit
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Audio Panel
EIS
• Primary Flight Display (PFD)
The MFD/PFD controls are used to tune the communication transceivers and navigation radios.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Audio Panel provides the traditional audio selector functions of microphone and receiver audio selection.
The Audio Panel includes an intercom system (ICS) between the pilot, copilot, and passengers, a marker beacon
system, and a COM clearance recorder. Ambient noise from the aircraft radios is reduced by a feature called
Master Avionics Squelch (MASQ). When no audio is detected, MASQ processing further reduces the amount of
background noise from the radios.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Mode S or Mode A/C transponder is controlled with softkeys and the FMS Knob located on the Primary
Flight Display (PFD) and also the Control Unit. The Transponder Data Box is located to the left of the System
Time Box. The data box displays the active four-digit code, mode, and a reply status (Figures 4-1 and 4-2).
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
97
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Audio Panel and CNS
MFD/PFD Controls and Frequency Display
2
3
4
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
5
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6
7
8
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 4-1 PFD Controls, COM Frequency Tuning Boxes, Transponder Code, and DME Tuning Window
98
1
COM Frequency Box – Displays COM standby and active frequency fields and volume. The selected COM
transceiver frequency is displayed in green.
2
COM Knob – Tunes the standby frequencies for the COM transceiver (large knob for MHz; small knob for
kHz). Press to move the tuning box (light blue box) and Frequency Transfer Arrow between COM1 and
COM2.
3
COM Frequency Transfer Key – Transfers the standby and active COM frequencies. Press and hold
this key for two seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) automatically into the active
frequency field.
4
COM VOL/SQ Knob – Controls COM audio volume level. Press to turn the COM automatic squelch on
and off. Volume level is shown in the COM frequency field as a percentage.
5
DME Tuning Window – Displays DME frequency pairing mode. Display by pressing DME Softkey.
6
ENT Key – Validates or confirms DME pairing mode and Auto-tune selection.
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Audio Panel and CNS
10
11
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
9
12
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 4-2 MFD Controls and NAV Frequency Tuning Boxes
9
NAV VOL/ID Knob – Controls NAV audio volume level. Press to turn the Morse code identifier audio on
and off. Volume level is shown in the NAV frequency field as a percentage.
10
NAV Frequency Transfer Key – Transfers the standby and active NAV frequencies.
11
NAV Knob – Tunes the standby frequencies for the NAV receiver (large knob for MHz; small knob for kHz).
Press to move the tuning box (light blue box) and Frequency Transfer Arrow between NAV1 and NAV2.
12
NAV Frequency Box – Displays NAV standby and active frequency fields, volume, and station ID. The
frequency of the NAV radio selected for navigation is displayed in green.
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
INDEX
Transponder Data Box – Indicates the selected transponder code, operating mode, reply, and ident status
for the applicable transponder.
APPENDICES
8
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
FMS Knob – Flight Management System Knob, used to enter transponder codes, select DME modes, and
Auto-tune entries when DME Tuning Window or NRST Window is present. Press the FMS Knob to turn
the selection cursor on and off. The large knob moves the cursor in the window. The small knob selects
individual characters for the highlighted cursor location.
AFCS
7
99
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Audio Panel and CNS
GMA 347 Audio Panel Controls
2
3
4
5
6
16
17
18
19
7
8
10
9
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
12
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
11
13
14
15
20
21
22
23
24
25
Figure 4-3 GMA 347 Audio Panel Controls
Marker Beacon Annunciators – Each annunciator lights independently when flying over the associated
marker beacon station.
2
MKR/MUTE – Selects marker beacon receiver audio. Mutes the currently received marker beacon receiver
audio. Unmutes automatically when new marker beacon audio is received. Enables Music Mute feature.
Also, stops play of recorded COM audio.
3
COM1 – When selected, audio from the #1 COM receiver can be heard.
4
COM2 – When selected, audio from the #2 COM receiver can be heard.
5
COM3 – Reserved for optional COM radio.
6
NAV1 – When selected, audio from the #1 NAV receiver can be heard.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
7
NAV2 – When selected, audio from the #2 NAV receiver can be heard.
8
DME – Turns optional DME audio on or off.
9
ADF – Turns optional ADF receiver audio on or off.
10
PLAY – Press once to play the last recorded COM audio. Press again while audio is playing and the
previous block of recorded audio will be played. Each subsequent press plays each previously recorded
block. Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key during play of a memory block stops play.
11
PILOT Squelch – Turn to adjust Pilot’s squelch. The Pilots volume knob must be pressed to allow manual
squelch adjustment.
INDEX
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1
APPENDICES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: When a key is selected, an annunciator in the key is illuminated.
100
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Audio Panel and CNS
16
COM1 MIC – Selects the #1 transmitter for transmitting. COM1 receive is simultaneously selected when
this key is pressed allowing received audio from the #1 COM receiver to be heard. COM2 receive can be
added by pressing the COM2 Key.
17
COM2 MIC – Selects the #2 transmitter for transmitting. COM2 receive is simultaneously selected when
this key is pressed allowing received audio from the #2 COM receiver to be heard. COM1 receive can be
added by pressing the COM1 Key.
18
COM3 MIC – Reserved for optional COM radio.
19
COM 1/2 – Split COM operation key. When selected, the pilot uses the COM 1 transceiver and the copilot
uses COM 2.
20
SPKR – Selects and deselects the cabin speaker. COM and NAV receiver audio can be heard on the
speaker. Press and hold for 2 seconds for Passenger Address (PA). The SPKR key flashes during PA.
21
TEL – Selects and deselects telephone audio.
22
COPLT – Selects and deselects the copilot intercom isolation.
23
PILOT – Selects and deselects the pilot intercom isolation.
24
COPILOT/PASS Volume – Turn to adjust Copilot/Passenger intercom volume or squelch. Pulling the right
volume knob controls passenger volume, pushing in controls Copilot volume.
25
COPILOT/PASS Squelch – Copilot and passenger share the squelch knob.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
HI SENS Annunciator – Indicates marker beacon receiver sensitivity, high sensitivity when illuminated,
low sensitivity when extinguished.
AFCS
15
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SENS – Press to increase marker beacon receiver sensitivity as indicated by illumination of the HI SENS
annunciator. Press again to return to low sensitivity and extinguish the HI SENS annunciator.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
14
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MAN SQ – Manual Squelch annunciator. When lit, pilot and copilot squelch knobs control manual
squelch.
EIS
13
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
PILOT Volume – Turn the left (Pilot) volume knob to control pilot’s intercom volume and the ON and OFF
function. (Full CCW detent is OFF) Press to switch between manual and automatic squelch control as
indicated by illumination of the MAN SQ annunciator.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
12
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
101
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Audio Panel and CNS
Control Unit
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Control Unit is a pedestal-mounted interface allowing data entry, COM and NAV tuning, and transponder
control. Many procedures can be performed using the Control Unit rather than the MFD/PFD display bezel
controls. Annunciators above the FMS, XPDR, NAV, and COM keys are illuminated when their respective
control modes are selected.
EIS
COM and NAV radio tuning can be accomplished from the control unit. The appropriate frequency box on
the selected display is outlined by a light blue selection box, which flashes for a few seconds to indicate control
unit activity. Selection of a different display control or radio tuning mode results in cancelation of the previous
radio tuning mode.
2
3
4
6
5
7
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1
9
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
10
12
11
Figure 4-4 Control Unit
APPENDICES
Tuning Selection
Box
INDEX
Figure 4-5 Frequency Tuning with the Control Unit
102
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Audio Panel and CNS
COM Key – Selects COM radio tuning mode on the Control Unit. The COM tuning box is outlined with
a light blue selection line when the COM frequency is active on the control unit (Figure 4‑5).
5
FMS Key – Places Control Unit in Flight Management System (FMS) Mode. FMS Knob is used to enter
transponder codes, select DME modes, and Auto-tune entries when NRST Window is present. Press the
FMS Knob to turn the selection cursor on and off. The large knob moves the cursor in the window. The
small knob selects individual characters for the highlighted cursor location.
6
XPDR Key – Places Control Unit in Transponder Mode. Transponder code entry can be performed with
either the number keypad or FMS/XPDR NAV/COM Knob.
7
NAV Key – Selects NAV radio tuning mode on the Control Unit. The NAV tuning box is outlined with a
light blue selection line when the NAV frequency is active on the control unit.
8
CLR Key – Erases information, cancels entries, or removes menus.
9
Frequency Transfer Key (EMERG) – Transfers the standby and active COM or NAV frequencies. Press
and hold for two seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) automatically into the COM
active frequency field.
10
Alphanumeric Keys – Allows data entry (rather than using the FMS Knob to select characters/
numbers).
11
Decimal Key – Enters a decimal point.
12
BKSP Key – Moves cursor back one character space and removes last character entered.
AFCS
4
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FMS/XPDR NAV/COM Knob – NAV/COM Tuning Modes: Acts as the NAV or COM Knob. XPDR Mode:
Acts as the XPDR Softkey. FMS Control Modes: Acts as the FMS Knob.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ENT Key – Validates or confirms a menu selection or data entry.
EIS
2
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
MENU Key – Displays a list of options for accessing additional features or making setting changes.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
103
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Audio Panel and CNS
4.2 COM Operation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
COM Transceiver Selection and Activation
NOTE: During PA Mode (press and hold SPKR Key) the COM MIC Annunciator is extinguished and the COM
active frequency color changes to white, indicating that neither COM transmitter is active.
NOTE: When turning on the avionics for use, the system remembers the last frequencies used and the active
EIS
COM transceiver state prior to shutdown.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The COM Frequency Box is composed of four fields displayed on the PFD; the two active frequencies are on
the left side and the two standby frequencies are on the right. The COM transceiver is selected for transmitting
by pressing the COM MIC Keys on the Audio Panel. During reception of audio from the COM radio selected
for transmission, audio from the other COM radio is muted.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
An active COM frequency displayed in green indicates that the COM transceiver is selected on the Audio
Panel (COM1 MIC or COM2 MIC Key). Both active COM frequencies appearing in white indicate that no COM
radio is selected for transmitting (SPKR Key is selected and flashing on the Audio Panel).
Frequencies in the standby field are displayed in light blue and white. The standby frequency in the tuning
field is white. The other standby frequency is light blue.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Active
Fields
Standby
Fields
AFCS
Tuning Field
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
COM2 Radio is Selected
on the Audio Panel
APPENDICES
Figure 4-6 Selecting a COM Radio for Transmit
INDEX
COM3 is reserved for an optional COM radio.
104
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Audio Panel and CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Transmit/Receive Indications
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
During COM transmission, a white TX appears by the active COM frequency replacing the Frequency
Transfer Arrow. On the Audio Panel, when the active COM is transmitting, the active transceiver COM MIC
Key Annunciator flashes approximately once per second.
During COM signal reception, a white RX appears by the active COM frequency replacing the Frequency
Transfer Arrow.
EIS
Annunciator
Flashes During
Transmission
Transmit and
Receive Indicators
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-7 COM Radio Transmit and Receive Indications
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
COM Transceiver Manual Tuning
The COM frequency controls and frequency boxes are on the right side of the MFD and PFD.
Manually tuning a COM frequency:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Turn the COM Knob to tune the desired frequency in the COM Tuning Box (large knob for MHz; small knob for
kHz).
2) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the active field.
3) Adjust the volume level with the COM VOL/SQ Knob.
4) Press the COM VOL/SQ Knob to turn automatic squelch on and off.
AFCS
Turn the VOL/SQ Knob to adjust
volume. Press the Knob to Turn
Automatic Squelch On or Off
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press the Frequency Transfer
Key to Transfer COM
Frequencies Between Active
and Standby Frequency Boxes
Turn the COM Knob to
Tune the Frequency in
the Tuning Box
APPENDICES
Figure 4-8 COM Frequency Tuning
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
105
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Audio Panel and CNS
Manual frequency tuning from the Control Unit
1) Press the COM Key to select the COM frequency box.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the FMS/XPDR COM/NAV Knob to tune the desired frequency in the COM Tuning Box (large knob for
MHz; small knob for kHz).
3) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the active field.
EIS
First, Press the COM Key to
Place the Tuning Selection Box
on the COM frequencies and
Activate COM tuning from the
FMS/XPDR COM/NAV Knob
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Second, Turn the COM/NAV Knob
to Enter a Frequency into the
COM Standby Frequency Field
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Third, Press the Frequency
Transfer Key to Move the
Frequency to the Active Field.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 4-9 Frequency Tuning from the Control Unit
106
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Audio Panel and CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting the Radio to be Tuned
Press the small COM Knob to transfer the light blue frequency tuning field and Frequency Transfer Arrow
between the upper and lower radio frequency fields.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Press the COM Knob to
Switch the Tuning Field From
One COM Radio to the Other
EIS
Figure 4-10 Switching COM Tuning Fields
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Quick-tuning and Activating 121.500 MHz
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pressing and holding the COM Frequency Transfer Key for two seconds automatically loads the emergency
COM frequency (121.500 MHz) in the active field of the COM radio selected for tuning (the one with the
transfer arrow). In the example shown, pressing the Audio Panel COM2 MIC Key activates the transceiver.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Press for Two Seconds
to Load 121.500 MHz
Figure 4-11 Quickly Tuning 121.500 MHz
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
107
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Audio Panel and CNS
Auto-tuning the COM Frequency
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
COM frequencies can be automatically tuned from the following:
• Nearest Airports Window (PFD)
• NRST – Nearest Frequencies Page (ARTCC, FSS,
WX)
• WPT – Airport Information Page
• NRST – Nearest Airspaces Page
• NRST – Nearest Airports Page
Auto-tuning from the PFD
EIS
COM frequencies for the nearest airports can be automatically tuned from the Nearest Airports Window on
the PFD. When the desired frequency is entered, it becomes a standby frequency. Pressing the Frequency
Transfer Key places this frequency into the COM Active Frequency Field.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Auto-tuning a COM frequency for a nearby airport from the PFD:
1) Press the NRST Softkey on the PFD to open the Nearest Airports Window. A list of 25 nearest airport identifiers
and COM frequencies is displayed.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the list and highlight the desired COM frequency.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the COM Standby Tuning Box.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.
Press the NRST Softkey to Open
the Nearest Airports Window
INDEX
Figure 4-12 Nearest Airports Window (PFD)
108
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Audio Panel and CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Auto-tuning from the MFD
Frequencies can be automatically loaded into the COM Frequency field from pages in the NRST or WPT
page group by highlighting the frequency and pressing the ENT Key (Figures 4-13, 4-14, and 4-15).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Auto-tuning a COM frequency from the WPT and NRST Pages:
1) From any page that the COM frequency can be auto-tuned, activate the cursor by pressing the FMS Knob or the
appropriate softkey.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired COM frequency (Figure 4-15).
EIS
3) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the standby field of the selected COM radio.
4) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Turn the FMS
Knob to Scroll
Through a List
of Frequencies
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Press the ENT Key to
Load a Highlighted
Frequency into
the COM Standby
Frequency Field
Figure 4-13 Frequency Auto-Tuning from the MFD
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the page menu.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the menu options.
3) Press the ENT Key to place the cursor on the desired selection.
AFCS
4) Scroll through the frequency selections with the FMS Knob or the ENT Key.
5) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the standby field of the selected COM radio.
6) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Nearest Frequencies Menu
INDEX
Nearest Airports Menu
Nearest Airspaces Menu
Figure 4-14 Nearest Pages Menus
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
109
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Audio Panel and CNS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
On the WPT - Airport Information Page, the cursor can be placed on the frequency field by pressing the
FMS Knob and scrolling through the list. The frequency is transferred to the COM Standby Field with the
ENT Key.
EIS
Selected
Airport
Identifier and
Information
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Runway
Information
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Press ENT
Key to load
frequency into
COM Standby
Field. Cursor
then advances
to the next
frequency.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Press INFO-1
Softkey for
AIRPORT,
RUNWAYS, and
FREQUENCIES
Windows
AFCS
COM Frequency Loads into
PFD Standby Frequency Field
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-15 Airport Information Page and PFD Frequency Display
110
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Audio Panel and CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
COM frequencies can also be auto-tuned from the NRST – Nearest Airspaces, NRST – Nearest Frequencies,
and NRST – Nearest Airports Pages on the MFD in a similar manner using the appropriate softkeys or MENU
Key, the FMS Knob, and the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-16 NRST – Nearest Airspaces, NRST – Nearest Airports, and NRST – Nearest Frequencies Pages
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
111
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Audio Panel and CNS
Frequency Spacing
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The COM radios can tune either 25-kHz spacing (118.000 to 136.975 MHz) or 8.33-kHz spacing (118.000
to 136.990 MHz) for 760-channel or 3040-channel configuration. When 8.33-kHz channel spacing is selected,
all of the 25-kHz channel spacing frequencies are also available in the complete 3040-channel list.
COM channel spacing is set on the System Setup Page of the AUX Page Group.
EIS
8.33-kHz Channel
Spacing
25-kHz Channel
Spacing
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Changing COM frequency channel spacing:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 4-17 COM Channel Spacing
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Channel Spacing Field in the COM Configuration Box.
1) Select the AUX – System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the flashing cursor.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired channel spacing.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the channel spacing selection.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
While the COM CONFIG Window is selected, the softkeys are blank.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Select 8.33-kHz
or 25.0-kHz
COM Frequency
Channel Spacing
Figure 4-18 AUX – System Setup Page
112
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Audio Panel and CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Squelch
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Automatic Squelch quiets unwanted static noise when no audio signal is received, while still providing good
sensitivity to weak COM signals. To disable Automatic Squelch, press the VOL/SQ Knob. When Automatic
Squelch is disabled, COM audio reception is always on. Continuous static noise is heard over the headsets and
speaker, if selected. Pressing the VOL/SQ Knob again enables Automatic Squelch.
When Automatic Squelch is disabled, a white SQ appears next to the COM frequency.
EIS
Squelch
Indication
Press the COM VOL/
SQ Knob to turn off
Automatic Squelch.
Press again to restore
Automatic Squelch.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-19 Overriding Automatic Squelch
Volume
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 4-20 COM Volume Level
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
COM radio volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% using the VOL/SQ Knob. Turning the knob
clockwise increases volume, turning the knob counterclockwise decreases volume. When adjusting volume,
the level is displayed in place of the standby frequencies. Volume level indication remains for two seconds after
the change.
COM Volume
Level Remains
for Two Seconds
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
113
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Audio Panel and CNS
4.3 NAV Operation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NAV Radio Selection and Activation
The NAV Frequency Box is composed of four fields displayed on the MFD; two standby fields and two active
fields. The active frequencies are on the right side and the standby frequencies are on the left.
EIS
A NAV radio is selected for navigation by pressing the CDI Softkey located on the PFD. The active NAV
frequency selected for navigation is displayed in green. Pressing the CDI Softkey once selects NAV1 as the
navigation radio. Pressing the CDI Softkey a second time selects NAV2 as the navigation radio. Pressing the
CDI Softkey a third time activates GPS mode. Pressing the CDI Softkey again cycles back to NAV1.
While cycling through the CDI Softkey selections, the light blue NAV tuning field and the Frequency Transfer
Arrow are placed by the active NAV Frequency. The active NAV frequency color changes to green.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The three navigation modes that can be cycled through are:
• VOR1 (or LOC1) – If NAV1 is selected, a green single line arrow (shown) labeled either VOR1 or LOC1 is
displayed on the HSI and the active NAV1 frequency is displayed in green.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• VOR2 (or LOC2) – If NAV2 is selected, a green double line arrow (not shown) labeled either VOR2 or LOC2
is displayed on the HSI and the active NAV2 frequency is displayed in green.
• GPS – If GPS Mode is selected, a magenta single line arrow (not shown) appears on the HSI and neither NAV
radio is selected. Both active NAV frequencies are then displayed in white.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Standby
Fields
Active
Fields
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Tuning Field
The NAV Radio is
Selected by Pressing
the CDI Softkey
Figure 4-21 Selecting a NAV Radio for Navigation
INDEX
APPENDICES
See the Flight Instruments Section for selecting the DME and Bearing Information windows and using VOR
as the source for the bearing pointer.
114
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Audio Panel and CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NAV radios are selected for listening by pressing the corresponding keys on the Audio Panel. Pressing the
NAV1, NAV2, ADF, or DME Key selects and deselects the navigation radio source. Selected audio can be heard over
the headset and the speakers (if selected). All radios can be selected individually or simultaneously.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Figure 4-22 Selecting a NAV Radio Receiver
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NAV Receiver Manual Tuning
The NAV frequency controls and frequency boxes are on the left side of the PFDs.
Manually tuning a NAV frequency:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Turn the NAV Knob to tune the desired frequency in the NAV Tuning Box.
2) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.
3) Adjust the volume level with the NAV VOL/ID Knob.
4) Press the NAV VOL/ID Knob to turn the Morse code identifier audio on and off.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Turn VOL/ID Knob to adjust
volume. Press Knob to Turn
Morse Code On or Off.
Press the Frequency Transfer Key to
Transfer NAV Frequencies Between
Active and Standby Frequency Fields
AFCS
Turn the NAV Knob to
Tune the Frequency in
the Tuning Field
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-23 NAV Frequency Tuning
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
115
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Audio Panel and CNS
Selecting the Radio to be Tuned
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Press the small NAV Knob to transfer the frequency tuning box and Frequency Transfer Arrow between the
upper and lower radio frequency fields.
EIS
Press the NAV Knob to
Switch the Tuning Field From
One NAV Radio to the Other
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-24 Switching NAV Tuning Boxes
VOR/LOC ID
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When the Morse code Identifier audio is on for a NAV radio, a white ID appears to the left of the active
NAV frequency.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
In the example shown, in order to listen to either station identifier, press the NAV1 or NAV2 Key on the
Audio Panel. Pressing the VOL/ID Knob turns off the Morse code audio only in the radio with the NAV
Tuning Box. To turn off both NAV IDs, transfer the NAV Tuning Box between NAV1 and NAV2 with the small
NAV Knob and press the VOL/ID Knob again to turn the Morse code off in the other radio.
The Morse Code Identifier
for the VORs is On
Station
Identifiers
AFCS
Figure 4-25 NAV Radio ID Indication
Volume
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NAV Radio volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% using the VOL/ID Knob. Turning the knob
clockwise increases volume, counterclockwise decreases volume.
APPENDICES
When adjusting, the level is displayed in place of the standby frequencies. Volume level indication remains
for two seconds after the change.
Figure 4-26 NAV Volume Levels
INDEX
NAV Volume
Level Remains
for Two Seconds
116
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Audio Panel and CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Auto-tuning a NAV Frequency from the MFD
NAV frequencies can be selected and loaded from the following MFD pages:
• WPT – Airport Information
• NRST – Nearest VOR
• NRST – Nearest Frequencies (FSS, WX)
• NRST – Nearest Airports
• NRST – Nearest Airspaces
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• WPT – VOR Information
EIS
The MFD provides auto-tuning of NAV frequencies from waypoint and nearest pages. During enroute
navigation, the NAV frequency is entered automatically into the NAV standby frequency field. During approach
activation the NAV frequency is entered automatically into the NAV active frequency field.
Frequencies can be automatically loaded into the NAV Frequency Box from pages in the NRST or WPT page
group by highlighting the frequency and pressing the ENT Key (Figures 4-27, 4-28, and 4-29).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Auto-tuning a NAV frequency from the WPT and NRST Pages:
1) From any page that the NAV frequency can be auto-tuned, activate the cursor by pressing the FMS Knob or the
appropriate softkey.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired NAV identifier or NAV frequency.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) On the Nearest VOR and Nearest Airports pages, press the FREQ Softkey to place the cursor on the NAV
frequency (Figure 4-29).
4) Press the ENT Key to load the NAV frequency into the standby field of the selected NAV radio.
5) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Turn the FMS
Knob to Scroll
Through a List
of Frequencies
Press the ENT
Key to Load
a Highlighted
Frequency into
the NAV Standby
Frequency Field
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-27 NAV Frequency Auto-Tuning from the MFD
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
117
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Audio Panel and CNS
Or:
1) When on the NRST pages, press the MENU Key to display the page menu.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the menu options.
3) Press the ENT Key to place the cursor in the desired window.
4) Scroll through the frequency selections with the FMS Knob or the ENT Key.
5) Press the ENT Key to load the NAV frequency into the standby field of the selected NAV radio.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
6) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.
Nearest Airports Menu
Nearest VOR Menu
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 4-28 Nearest Pages Menus
118
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Audio Panel and CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
In the example shown, the VOR list is selected with the VOR Softkey or from the page menu. The FMS Knob
or ENT Key is used to scroll through the list. The cursor is placed on the frequency with the FREQ Softkey and
loaded into the NAV Tuning Box with the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Press the FREQ Softkey
to Place the Cursor on
the VOR Frequency
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Press the VOR Softkey
to Place the Cursor on
the VOR Identifier
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Press the ENT
Key to Load
the Frequency
into the NAV
Standby Field.
Figure 4-29 Loading the NAV Frequency from the NRST – Nearest VOR Page
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
119
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Audio Panel and CNS
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
While enroute, NAV frequencies can also be auto-tuned from the NRST – Nearest Airports,
WPT – Airport Information, WPT – VOR Information, and NRST – Nearest Frequencies Pages on the MFD in
a similar manner using the appropriate softkeys or MENU Key, the FMS Knob, and the ENT Key.
INDEX
Figure 4-30 NRST – Nearest Frequencies, WPT – VOR Information, WPT – Airport Information, and
NRST – Nearest Airports Pages
120
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Audio Panel and CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Auto-tuning NAV Frequencies on Approach Activation
NOTE: The primary NAV frequency is auto-tuned upon loading a VOR or ILS/Localizer approach.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: When an ILS/LOC approach has been activated in GPS Mode, the system switches to NAV Mode
as the final approach course is intercepted (within 15 nm of the FAF). See the GPS Navigation Section for
details.
NAV frequencies are automatically loaded into the NAV Frequency Box on approach activation.
EIS
When loading or activating a VOR or ILS/LOC approach, the approach frequency is automatically transferred
to a NAV frequency field as follows:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• If the current CDI navigation source is GPS, the approach frequency is transferred to the NAV1 or NAV2
active frequency fields. The frequency that was previously in the NAV1 or NAV2 active frequency fields are
transferred to standby.
• If the current CDI navigation source is GPS, and if the approach frequency is already loaded into the NAV1
or NAV2 standby frequency field, the standby frequency is transferred to active.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• If the current CDI navigation source is NAV1 or NAV2, the approach frequency is transferred to the standby
frequency fields of the selected CDI NAV radio.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
121
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Audio Panel and CNS
Marker Beacon Receiver
NOTE: The marker beacon indicators operate independently of marker beacon audio and cannot be turned
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
off.
The marker beacon receiver is used as part of the ILS. The marker beacon receiver is always on and detects
any marker beacon signals within the reception range of the aircraft.
EIS
The receiver detects the three marker tones – outer, middle, and inner – and provides the marker beacon
annunciations located on the Audio Panel and to the left of the Altimeter on the PFD. Operation of the two
marker beacon indications may not be synchronized.
Middle Marker
Indication
Inner Marker
Indication
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Outer Marker
Indication
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 4-31 Marker Beacon Annunciations on the PFD
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-32 Marker Beacon Keys and Annunciation
APPENDICES
During marker beacon audio reception, pressing the MKR/MUTE Key mutes the audio but does not affect the
marker annunciations. The marker tone is silenced, then waits for the next marker tone. The MKR/MUTE Key
Annunciator is illuminated, indicating audio muting. The audio returns when the next marker beacon signal
is received. If the MKR/MUTE Key is pressed during signal reception (O, M, I indication) while marker beacon
audio is muted, the audio is deselected and the MKR/MUTE Key Annunciator is extinguished.
INDEX
The Audio Panels provide three different states of marker beacon operation; On, Muted, and Deselected.
Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key selects and deselects marker beacon audio. The key annunciator indicates when
marker beacon audio is selected.
Pressing the SENS Key switches between high and low marker beacon receiver sensitivity. The HI SENS
function (annunciator illuminated) is used to provide an earlier indication when nearing a marker during an
approach. The LO SENS function (annunciator extinguished) results in a narrower marker dwell while over a
station.
122
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Audio Panel and CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DME Tuning
NOTE: When another auxiliary window is turned on, the DME Tuning Window is replaced on the PFD.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: When turning on the Avionics for use, the system remembers the last frequency used for DME tuning
and the NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD state prior to shutdown.
The PFD tunes the optional DME transceiver. The UHF DME frequency is tuned by pairing with a VHF NAV
frequency. DME frequency pairing is automatic and only the VHF NAV frequency is shown.
EIS
The DME Tuning Window is located to the right of the HSI in the lower right corner of the PFD. The DME
transceiver is tuned by selecting NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD in the DME Tuning Window. Pressing the DME
Softkey switches the DME Tuning Window on and off.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
DME
Modes
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 4-33 DME Tuning Window
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The following DME transceiver pairing can be selected:
• NAV1 – Pairs the DME frequency from the selected NAV1 frequency.
• NAV2 – Pairs the DME frequency from the selected NAV2 frequency.
AFCS
• HOLD – When in the HOLD position, the DME frequency remains paired with the last selected NAV
frequency.
Selecting DME transceiver pairing:
1) Press the DME Softkey to display the DME Tuning Window.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the DME tuning mode.
3) Press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
APPENDICES
Pressing the CLR Key or FMS Knob while in the process of DME pairing cancels the tuning entry and reverts
back to the previously selected DME tuning state. Pressing the FMS Knob activates/deactivates the cursor in
the DME Tuning Window.
See the Flight Instruments Section for displaying the DME information window.
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
123
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Audio Panel and CNS
4.4 GTX 32 & GTX 33 Mode S Transponder
The GTX 32 Transponder provides Mode A and Mode C interrogation and reply capabilities.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The GTX 33 Mode S Transponder provides Mode A, Mode C, and Mode S interrogation and reply capabilities.
Selective addressing or Mode Select (Mode S) capability includes the following features:
• Level-2 reply data link capability (used to exchange information between aircraft and ATC facilities)
• Surveillance identifier capability
EIS
• Flight ID (Flight Identification) reporting – The Mode S Transponder reports aircraft identification as either the
aircraft registration or a unique Flight ID.
• Altitude reporting
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Airborne status determination
• Transponder capability reporting
• Mode S Enhanced Surveillance (EHS) requirements
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Acquisition squitter – Acquisition squitter, or short squitter, is the transponder 24-bit identification address. The transmission is sent periodically, regardless of the presence of interrogations. The purpose of acquisition
squitter is to enable Mode S ground stations and aircraft equipped with a Traffic Avoidance System (TAS) to
recognize the presence of Mode S-equipped aircraft for selective interrogation.
The Hazard Avoidance Section provides more details on traffic avoidance systems.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Transponder Controls
Transponder function is displayed on three levels of softkeys on the PFD: Top-level, Mode Selection, and
Code Selection. When the top-level XPDR Softkey is pressed, the Mode Selection softkeys appear: STBY, ON,
ALT, VFR, CODE, IDENT, BACK.
AFCS
When the CODE Softkey is pressed, the number softkeys appear: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, IDENT, BKSP,
BACK. The digits 8 and 9 are not used for code entry. Pressing the numbered softkeys in sequence enters
the transponder code. If an error is made, pressing the BKSP Softkey moves the code selection cursor to the
previous digit. Pressing the BKSP Softkey again moves the cursor to the next previous digit.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pressing the BACK Softkey during code selection reverts to the Mode Selection Softkeys. Pressing the BACK
Softkey during mode selection reverts to the top-level softkeys.
APPENDICES
The code can also be entered with the FMS Knob on the PFD or the XPDR Key and numeric keypad or
FMS/XPDR NAV/COM Knob. Code entry must be completed with either the softkeys, numeric keypad, or the
FMS Knob, but not a combination of both.
Pressing the IDENT Softkey while in Mode or Code Selection initiates the ident function and reverts to the
top-level softkeys.
INDEX
After 45 seconds of transponder control inactivity, the system reverts back to the top-level softkeys.
124
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Audio Panel and CNS
ALT
GND
VFR
CODE
IDENT
BACK
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ON
IDENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
STBY
XPDR
ALERTS
Pressing the BACK Softkey
returns to the top-level softkeys.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
IDENT
BKSP
BACK
ALERTS
EIS
0
Pressing the BACK Softkey returns to the mode selection softkeys.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-34 Transponder Softkeys (PFD)
Transponder Mode Selection
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Mode selection can be automatic (Ground and Altitude Modes) or manual (Standby, ON, and Altitude Modes).
The STBY, ON, and ALT Softkeys can be accessed by pressing the XPDR Softkey.
Selecting a transponder mode:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the XPDR Softkey to display the Transponder Mode Selection Softkeys.
2) Press the desired softkey to activate the transponder mode.
Ground Mode
AFCS
Ground Mode is normally selected automatically when the aircraft is on the ground. The transponder
powers up in the last mode it was in when shut down. Ground Mode can be overridden by selecting any one
of the Mode Selection Softkeys. A green GND indication and transponder code appear in the mode field of
the Transponder Data Box. In Ground Mode, the transponder does not allow Mode A and Mode C replies,
but it does permit acquisition squitter and replies to discretely addressed Mode S interrogations.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When Standby Mode has been selected on the ground, the transponder can be returned to Ground Mode
by pressing the GND Softkey.
GND
Mode
APPENDICES
Figure 4-35 Ground Mode
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
125
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Standby Mode (Manual)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Audio Panel and CNS
Standby Mode can be selected at any time by pressing the STBY Softkey. In Standby, the transponder does
not reply to interrogations, but new codes can be entered. When Standby is pressed, a white STBY indication
and transponder code appear in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box. In all other modes, these fields
appear in green.
NOTE: In Standby Mode, the IDENT function is inhibited.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
STBY Mode (White
Code Number and
Mode)
Figure 4-36 Standby Mode
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Manual ON Mode
ON Mode can be selected at any time by pressing the ON Softkey. ON Mode generates Mode A and Mode S
replies, but Mode C altitude reporting is inhibited. In ON Mode, a green ON indication and transponder
code appear in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
ON Mode
(No Altitude
Reporting)
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 4-37 ON Mode
126
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Audio Panel and CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Altitude Mode (Automatic or Manual)
Altitude Mode is automatically selected when the aircraft becomes airborne. Altitude Mode may also be
selected manually by pressing the ALT Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If Altitude Mode is selected, a green ALT indication and transponder code appear in the mode field of the
Transponder Data Box, and all transponder replies requesting altitude information are provided with pressure
altitude information.
ALT Mode
(Mode C Altitude
Reporting)
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-38 Altitude Mode
Reply Status
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When the transponder sends replies to interrogations, a white R indication appears momentarily in the
reply status field of the Transponder Data Box.
Reply to
Interrogation
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 4-39 Reply Indication
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
127
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Audio Panel and CNS
Entering a Transponder Code
Entering a transponder code with softkeys:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Press the XPDR Softkey to display the Transponder Mode Selection Softkeys.
2) Press the CODE Softkey to display the Transponder Code Selection Softkeys, for digit entry.
EIS
3) Press the digit softkeys to enter the code in the code field. When entering the code, the next softkey in sequence
must be pressed within 10 seconds, or the entry is cancelled and restored to the previous code. Pressing the
BKSP Softkey moves the code selection cursor to the previous digit. Five seconds after the fourth digit has been
entered, the transponder code becomes active.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Entering
a Code
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 4-40 Entering a Code with Softkeys
Entering a transponder code with the PFD FMS Knob:
1) Press the XPDR and the CODE Softkey as in the previous procedure to enable code entry.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the first two code digits.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next code field.
4) Enter the last two code digits with the small FMS Knob.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete code digit entry.
AFCS
Pressing the CLR Key or small FMS Knob before code entry is complete cancels code entry and restores the
previous code. Waiting for 10 seconds after code entry is finished activates the code automatically.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Turn the Small
FMS Knob to
Enter Two Code
Digits at a Time
Press the
ENT Key to
Complete
Code Entry
Turn the Large
FMS Knob
to Move the
Cursor to the
Next Code Field
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 4-41 Entering a Code with the FMS Knob
128
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Audio Panel and CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Entering a transponder code with the Control Unit
1) Press the XPDR Key to select the transponder function on the FMS/XPDR COM/NAV Knob.
2) Turn the small FMS/XPDR COM/NAV Knob to enter the first two code digits.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Turn the large FMS/XPDR COM/NAV Knob to move the cursor to the next code field.
4) Enter the last two code digits with the small FMS/XPDR COM/NAV Knob.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete code digit entry.
Or:
Enter a Code with the Numeric Keypad. Five seconds after the fourth digit has been entered, the transponder
code becomes active.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Pressing the CLR Key or small FMS Knob before code entry is complete cancels code entry and restores the
previous code. Waiting for 10 seconds after code entry is finished activates the code automatically.
First, Press the XPDR Key to
Select Transponder Code
Entry from the FMS/XPDR
COM/NAV Knob
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Second, Turn the FMS/XPDR
COM/NAV Knob to Enter a
Code, Small Knob Enters Code
Digits, Large Knob Moves
Cursor to the Next Code Field.
Third, Press the ENT Key
to Complete Code Entry
Or Enter a Code with
the Numeric Keypad
AFCS
Figure 4-42 Entering a Code with the Control Unit
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
129
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Audio Panel and CNS
VFR Code
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The VFR code can be entered either manually or by pressing the XPDR Softkey, then the VFR Softkey.
When the VFR Softkey is pressed, the pre-programmed VFR code is automatically displayed in the code field
of the Transponder Data Box. Pressing the VFR Softkey again restores the previous identification code.
The pre-programmed VFR Code is set at the factory to 1200. If a VFR code change is required, contact a
Garmin-authorized service center for configuration.
EIS
VFR Code
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-43 VFR Code
IDENT Function
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: In Standby Mode, the IDENT Softkey is inoperative.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the IDENT Softkey sends a distinct identity indication to Air Traffic Control (ATC). The indication
distinguishes the identing transponder from all the others on the air traffic controller’s screen. The IDENT
Softkey appears on all levels of transponder softkeys. When the IDENT Softkey is pressed, a green IDNT
indication is displayed in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box for a duration of 18 seconds.
After the IDENT Softkey is pressed while in Mode or Code Selection, the system reverts to the top-level
softkeys.
AFCS
IDNT
Indication
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press the
IDENT Softkey
to Initiate the
ID Function
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 4-44 IDENT Softkey and Indication
130
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Audio Panel and CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4.5 Additional Audio Panel Functions
Power-Up
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Audio Panel performs a self-test during power-up. During the self-test all Audio Panel annunciator lights
illuminate for approximately two seconds. Once the self-test is completed, the settings are restored to those in
use before the unit was last turned off.
Mono/Stereo Headsets
EIS
Stereo headsets are recommended for use.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Using a monaural headset in a stereo jack shorts the right headset channel output to ground. While this does
not damage the Audio Panel, a person listening on a monaural headset hears only the left channel in both ears.
If a monaural headset is used at one of the passenger positions, any other passenger using a stereo headset hears
audio in the left ear only.
Speaker
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
All of the radios can be heard over the cabin speaker. Pressing the SPKR Key selects and deselects the cabin
speaker. Speaker audio is muted when the PTT is pressed. Certain aural alerts and warnings (autopilot, traffic,
altitude) are always heard on the speaker, even when the speaker is not selected.
The speaker volume is adjustable within a nominal range. Contact a Garmin-authorized service center for
volume adjustment.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 4-45 Speaker Key
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
131
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Audio Panel and CNS
Intercom
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Audio Panel includes a four-position intercom system (ICS) and two stereo music inputs for the pilot,
copilot and up to two passengers. The intercom provides Pilot and Copilot isolation from the passengers and
aircraft radios.
Figure 4-46 Intercom Controls
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
PILOT KEY
COPLT KEY
TEL KEY
Annunciator Annunciator Annunciator
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
OFF
INDEX
APPENDICES
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
Pilot
Copilot
Passenger
Input to
Hears
Hears
Hears
Phone
Selected radios,
Selected radios,
Selected radios,
aural alerts, pilot, aural alerts, pilot, aural alerts, pilot,
None
copilot, passengers, copilot, passengers, copilot, passengers,
music1
music1
music2
Selected radios,
Selected radios,
Selected radios,
aural alerts, pilot, aural alerts, pilot, aural alerts, pilot, Pilot, copilot,
copilot, passengers, copilot, passengers, copilot, passengers, passengers
music1, TEL audio music1, TEL audio music2, TEL audio
Copilot,
Copilot,
Copilot,
Selected radios,
passengers,
passengers,
passengers
aural alerts, pilot
music1, TEL audio music2, TEL audio
Selected radios,
Copilot,
Copilot,
Pilot
aural alerts, pilot,
passengers, music1 passengers, music2
TEL audio
Selected radios,
Selected radios,
aural alerts, pilot; Copilot, TEL audio aural alerts, pilot,
passengers, music1
passengers, music2
Selected radios,
aural alerts,
pilot; passengers,
music1, TEL audio
Selected radios,
aural alerts, pilot,
copilot
Selected radios,
aural alerts, pilot,
copilot, TEL audio
Copilot
Copilot
Selected radios,
aural alerts,
pilot, passengers,
music2, TEL audio
Pilot,
passengers
Selected radios,
aural alerts, pilot,
copilot
Passengers,
music2, TEL audio
Passengers
Selected radios,
aural alerts, pilot,
copilot, TEL audio
Passengers, music2 Pilot, copilot
Table 4-1 ICS Isolation Modes & Telepohone Distribution
132
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Audio Panel and CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pilot isolation is selected when the PILOT Annunciator is illuminated. During Pilot isolation, the pilot can
hear the selected radios and aural alerts and warnings. The copilot and passengers can communicate with each
other. The copilot is isolated from aural alerts and warnings.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Copilot isolation is selected when the COPLT Annunciator is illuminated. The copilot is isolated from the
selected radios, aural alerts and warnings, and everyone else. The pilot and passengers can hear the selected
radios, aural alerts, and communicate with each other.
When both the PILOT and COPLT Annunciators are illuminated, the pilot and copilot can hear the selected
radios, aural alerts, and communicate with each other. The passengers are isolated from the pilot and copilot
but can communicate with each other.
EIS
When both the PILOT and COPLT Annunciators are extinguished, everyone hears the selected radios, aural
alerts, and is able to communicate with everyone else.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Intercom Volume and Squelch
Two volume controls, one for the pilot and a combined copilot/passenger control, set intercom audio
level.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Each microphone input has an automatic squelch threshold. Manual squelch is available by pressing the
Pilot side VOL/SQ knob. When the MAN SQ annunciation is lit the large squelch knobs control pilot and
copilot/passenger squelch threshold. Turning either knob clockwise increases the squelch threshold level.
Turning either knob counterclockwise decreases the squelch threshold level.
When the MAN SQ annunciation is not lit, squelch is automatic and the large squelch knobs have no
function.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Manual Squelch Annunciation;
Off for Automatic Squelch, On
for Manual Squelch
Copilot/Passenger Volume and Manual Squelch
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pilot Volume, On/Off, and Manual Squelch
Pulling the right volume
knob controls passenger
volume, pushing in controls
Copilot volume. Copilot and
passenger share the large
squelch knob.
AFCS
Rotating the Pilot Volume Knob
controls ON and OFF function.
(Full CCW detent is OFF)
Pressing the Pilot volume knob
switches between manual and
automatic squelch.
Figure 4-47 Intercom Volume and Squelch Controls
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
133
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Audio Panel and CNS
Passenger Address (PA) System
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A passenger address system is available for delivering voice messages over the cabin speaker. Press and hold
the SPKR Key for two seconds to activate the passenger address. The SPKR Key Annunciator flashes about
once per second when the passenger address is active. A Push-to-Talk (PTT) must be pressed to deliver PA
announcements.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
PA is Selected on
the Audio Panel
Figure 4-48 SPKR Key Selected for PA Announcements
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Clearance Recorder and Player
The Audio Panel contains a digital clearance recorder that records up to 2.5 minutes of the selected COM
radio signal. Recorded COM audio is stored in separate memory blocks. Once 2.5 minutes of recording time
have been reached, the recorder begins recording over the stored memory blocks, starting from the oldest
block.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The PLAY Key controls the play function. Pressing the PLAY Key once plays the latest recorded memory
block. Pressing the PLAY Key while audio is playing begins playing the previously recorded memory block.
Each subsequent press of the PLAY Key selects the previously recorded memory block.
Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key during play of a memory block stops play. If a COM input signal is detected
during play of a recorded memory block, play is halted.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Powering off the unit automatically clears all recorded blocks.
Figure 4-49 Play Key
Split COM
APPENDICES
NOTE: Split COM performance is affected by the distance between the COM antennas and the separation
of the tuned frequencies. If the selected COM1 and COM2 frequencies are too close together, interference
may be heard during transmission on the other radio.
INDEX
During Split COM operation, both the pilot and the copilot can transmit simultaneously over separate radios.
The pilot can still monitor NAV1, NAV2, ADF, DME, and MKR Audio as selected, but the copilot is only able
to monitor COM2.
Pressing the COM 1/2 Key selects Split COM operation. The COM 1/2 Annunciator is illuminated indicating
Split COM operation. COM1 and COM2 frequencies are displayed in green indicating that both transceivers
134
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Audio Panel and CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
are active. Split COM operation is cancelled by pressing the COM 1/2 Key again, at which time the annunciator
is extinguished.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When Split COM operation is selected, COM1 is used by the pilot and COM2 is used by the copilot. The
COM1 MIC Annunciator flashes when the pilot’s microphone PTT is pressed. The COM2 MIC Annunciator
flashes when the copilot’s microphone PTT is pressed.
COM1 Radio is Used
by the Pilot
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
COM2 Radio is Used
by the Copilot
Figure 4-50 Split COM Operation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Entertainment Inputs
NOTE: Music1 and Music2 audio cannot be completely turned off. Audio level for the crew and passengers
can be adjusted by a Garmin-authorized service center.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Audio Panel provides two stereo auxiliary entertainment inputs: Music1 and Music2. The pilot and
copilot hear Music1 and the passengers hear Music2. These inputs are compatible with popular portable
entertainment devices such as MP3 and CD players. Two 3.5-mm stereo phone jacks are installed in convenient
locations for audio connection. The headphone outputs of the entertainment devices are plugged into the
Music1 or Music2 jacks.
AFCS
The current ICS state of isolation affects the distribution of the entertainment input (see Table 4‑1).
Crew Music
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Crew music, either XM Radio or Music1, can be heard by the pilot and copilot when both the PILOT and
the COPLT ICS Annunciators are extinguished. Crew music can also be heard by the pilot when the COPLT
Annunciator is illuminated and by the copilot when the PILOT Annunciator is illuminated.
Music Muting
APPENDICES
Crew music muting occurs when aircraft radio or marker beacon activity is heard. Crew music is always
soft muted when an interruption occurs from these sources. Soft muting is the gradual return of music to
its original volume level. The time required for music volume to return to normal is between one-half and
four seconds.
Music Muting Enable/Disable
INDEX
Pressing and holding the MKR/MUTE Key for three seconds switches crew music muting on and off.
When switching, either one or two beeps are heard; one beep indicates that music muting is enabled, two
beeps indicate music muting is disabled. Crew music muting is reset (enabled) during power up.
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
135
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Audio Panel and CNS
Passenger Music
Passenger music, either XM Radio or Music2, can be heard only by the passengers and is never muted.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
XM Radio Entertainment
XM Radio audio from the Data Link Receiver may be heard by the pilot and passengers simultaneously
(optional: requires subscription to XM Radio Service). Refer to the Additional Features Section for more
details on the Data Link Receiver.
Connecting a stereo input to the audio jack removes the XM Radio Audio from that input.
EIS
Multifunction Controls
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Pilot side volume knob controls the ON and OFF function, the pilot’s intercom volume plus manual and
automatic squelch. When pressed, manual squelch is selected and the MAN SQ LED is ON indicating that
squelch is adjusted manually. When pressed again the MAN SQ LED turns OFF and squelch is automatic.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Copilot side volume knob controls the Copilot and passenger intercom volume level. Pulling the right
volume knob controls passenger volume, pushing in controls Copilot volume.
Pilot Volume, On/Off, and Manual Squelch
Copilot/Passenger Volume and Manual Squelch
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 4-51 Intercom Volume and Squelch Controls
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The MKR/MUTE key selects marker audio and silences the marker signal. It also turns On/Off Music Muting,
plus cancels the COM clearance recorder audio playback.
Figure 4-52 Marker/Mute Key
APPENDICES
The SPKR key turns the cabin speaker ON and OFF. Pressing and holding for 2 seconds selects PA mode.
The SPKR key annunciator blinks when PA is active.
INDEX
Figure 4-53 Speaker Key
136
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Audio Panel and CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4.6 Audio Panel Preflight Procedure
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: If the pilot and/or copilot are using headsets that have a high/low switch or volume control knob,
verify that the switch is in the high position and the volume control on the headsets are at maximum volume
setting. On single‑pilot flights, verify that all other headsets are not connected to avoid excess noise in the
audio system.
NOTE: When the MAN SQ is activated, the ICS squelch can be set manually by the pilot and copilot. If
EIS
manual squelch is set to full open (SQ annunciated and the knobs turned counterclockwise) background
noise is heard in the ICS system as well as during COM transmissions.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Automatic/Manual
Squelch Annunciation
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
After powering up the avionics System, the following steps will aid in maximizing the use of the Audio Panel
as well as prevent pilot and copilot induced issues. These preflight procedures should be performed each time a
pilot boards the aircraft to insure awareness of all audio levels in the Audio Panel and radios.
Pilot and
Copilot ICS
Isolation Keys
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pilot Volume
and Manual
Squelch
Copilot/Passenger
Volume and
Manual Squelch
Figure 4-54 Audio Panel Preflight Controls
AFCS
Setting the Audio Panel during preflight:
1) Verify that the PILOT and COPLT Annunciators are extinguished.
2) Verify that the MAN SQ Annunciator is extinguished.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Turn the PILOT Knob and COPILOT Knob fully clockwise. This will set the headset intercom audio level to max
volume (least amount of attenuation).
4) Adjust radio volume levels (COM, NAV, etc.) to a suitable level.
5) Adjust the PILOT Knob and COPILOT Knob volume to the desired intercom level.
APPENDICES
Once this procedure has been completed, the pilot and copilot can change settings, keeping in mind the notes
above.
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
137
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Audio Panel and CNS
4.7 Abnormal Operation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Abnormal operation includes equipment failures of the avionics components and failure of associated equipment,
including switches and external devices.
Audio Panel Fail-safe Operation
EIS
If there is a failure of the Audio Panel, a fail-safe circuit connects the pilot’s headset and microphone directly
to the COM1 transceiver. Audio is not available on the speaker during fail-safe operation. Fail-safe operation
may be tested by turning the Audio Panel off.
Stuck Microphone
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
If the push-to-talk (PTT) Key becomes stuck, the COM transmitter stops transmitting after 35 seconds of
continuous operation. An alert appears on the PFD to advise the crew of a stuck microphone.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The COM1 MIC or COM2 MIC Key Annunciator on the Audio Panel flashes as long as the PTT Key remains
stuck.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 4-55 Stuck Microphone Alert
COM Tuning Failure
AFCS
Figure 4-56 COM Tuning Failure
INDEX
APPENDICES
Emergency Channel
Loaded Automatically
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
In case of a COM system tuning failure, the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) is automatically tuned in
the radio in which the tuning failure occurred. Depending on the failure mode, a red X may appear on the
frequency display.
138
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Section 5 Flight Management
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5.1 Introduction
Perspective® is an integrated flight, engine, communication, navigation and surveillance system. This section
of the Pilot’s Guide explains flight management using the system.
EIS
The most prominent part of the system are the two full color displays: a Primary Flight Display (PFD) and a
Multi Function Display (MFD). The information to successfully navigate the aircraft using the GPS sensors is
displayed on the PFD and the MFD. See examples in the Figure 5-1 and Figure 5-2. Detailed descriptions of flight
management functions are discussed later in this section.
A brief description of the flight management data on the PFD and MFD follows.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigation mode indicates which sensor is providing the course data (e.g., GPS, VOR) and the flight plan phase
(e.g., Departure (DPRT), Terminal (TERM), Enroute (ENR), Oceanic (OCN), Approach (LNAV, LNAV+V, L/VNAV,
or LPV), or Missed Approach (MAPR)).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Inset Map is a small version of the MFD Navigation Map and can be displayed in the lower left corner of
the PFD. When the system is in reversionary mode, the Inset Map is displayed in the lower right corner. The
Inset Map is displayed by pressing the INSET Softkey. Pressing the INSET Softkey again, then pressing the OFF
Softkey removes the Inset Map.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Navigation Map displays aviation data (e.g., airports, VORs, airways, airspaces), geographic data (e.g.,
cities, lakes, highways, borders), topographic data (map shading indicating elevation), and hazard data (e.g.,
traffic, terrain, weather). The amount of displayed data can be reduced by pressing the DCLTR Softkey. The
Navigation Map can be oriented four different ways: North Up (NORTH UP), Track Up (TRK UP), Desired Track
Up (DTK UP), or Heading Up (HDG UP).
AFCS
An aircraft icon is placed on the Navigation Map at the location corresponding to the calculated present position.
The aircraft position and the flight plan legs are accurately based on GPS calculations. The basemap upon which
these are placed are from a source with less resolution, therefore the relative position of the aircraft to map features
is not exact. The leg of the active flight plan currently being flown is shown as a magenta line on the navigation
map. The other legs are shown in white.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
There are 28 different map ranges available, from 500 feet to 2000 nm. The current range is indicated in the
lower right corner of the map and represents the top-to-bottom distance covered by the map. To change the map
range on any map, turn the Joystick counter-clockwise to zoom in ( -, decreasing), or clockwise to zoom out (+,
increasing).
APPENDICES
The Direct-to Window, the Flight Plan Window, the Procedures Window, and the Nearest Airports Window
can be displayed in the lower right corner of the PFD. Details of these windows are discussed in detail later in
the section.
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
139
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Navigation Status Box
GPS Track
(dashed line)
Navigation Mode
Inset Map
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Location of:
- Direct To Window
- Flight Plan Window
- Procedures Window
- Nearest Airports Window
Figure 5-1 GPS Navigation Information on the PFD
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Navigation Status Box
Destination Airport Info
- Identifier
- Fuel Remaining
- Distance
- Estimated Time Enroute
- Bearing
Navigation Page Title
Navigation Map
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Aviation Data
- Geographic Data
- Topographic Data
- Hazard Data
Map Orientation
Flight Plan Leg
Aircraft Icon
at Present Position
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Active Flight Plan Leg
Map Range
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-2 GPS Navigation Information on the MFD Navigation Page
140
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Navigation Status Box
The Navigation Status Box located at the top of the PFD contains two fields displaying the following
information:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
PFD Navigation Status Box
The Navigation Status Box located at the top of the
MFD contains four data fields, each displaying one of
the following items:
• Distance (DIS) and Bearing (BRG) to the next
waypoint or flight plan annunciations (e.g., ‘TOD
within 1 minute’)
• Bearing (BRG)
Symbol
Description
Active Leg
Right Procedure Turn
Left Procedure Turn
• Endurance (END)
• Enroute Safe Altitude (ESA)
• Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA)
• Estimated Time Enroute (ETE)
• Fuel on Board (FOB)
• Ground Speed (GS)
• Minimum Safe Altitude (MSA)
• True Air Speed (TAS)
Left Holding Pattern
• Track Angle Error (TKE)
Vector to Final
• Track (TRK)
• Vertical Speed Required (VSR)
AFCS
Right DME Arc
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Right Holding Pattern
• Desired Track (DTK)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Direct-to
• Distance (DIS)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The symbols used in the PFD status bar are:
EIS
• Active flight plan leg (e.g., ‘D-> KICT’ or ‘KIXD > KCOS’) or flight plan annunciations (e.g., ‘Turn
right to 021˚ in 8 seconds’)
• Crosstrack Error (XTK)
Left DME Arc
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
MFD Navigation Status Box
APPENDICES
The navigation information displayed in the four data fields can be selected on the MFD Data Bar Fields Box
on the AUX - System Setup Page. The default selections (in order left to right) are GS, DTK, TRK, and ETE.
Changing a field in the MFD Navigation Status Box:
1) Select the System Setup Page.
INDEX
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field number in the MFD Data Bar Fields Box.
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
141
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display and scroll through the data options list.
5) Select the desired data.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
6) Press the ENT Key. Pressing the DFLTS Softkey returns any field to its default setting.
5.2 Using Map Displays
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Map displays are used extensively in Perspective to provide situational awareness in flight. Most Perspective
maps can display the following information:
• Airports, NAVAIDs, airspaces, airways, land data • Icons for enabled map features
(highways, cities, lakes, rivers, borders, etc.) with • Aircraft icon (representing present position)
names
• Nav range ring
• Map Pointer information (distance and bearing to
pointer, location of pointer, name, and other pertinent • Flight plan legs
information)
• User waypoints
• Map range
• Track vector
• Wind direction and speed
• Topography scale
• Map orientation
• Topography data
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The information in this section applies to the following maps unless otherwise noted:
• All Map Group Pages (MAP)
• Flight Plan Pages (FPL)
• All Waypoint Group Pages (WPT)
• Direct-to Window
• AUX - Trip Planning
• PFD Inset Map
• All Nearest Group Pages (NRST)
• Procedure Loading Pages
AFCS
Map Orientation
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Maps are shown in one of four different orientation options, allowing flexibility in determining aircraft
position relative to other items on the map (north up) or for determining where map items are relative to where
the aircraft is going (track up, desired track up, or heading up). The map orientation is shown in the upper
right corner of the map.
Figure 5-3 Map Orientation
142
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
• North up (NORTH UP) aligns the top of the map display to north (default setting).
• Track up (TRK UP) aligns the top of the map display to the current ground track.
• Desired track up (DTK UP) aligns the top of the map display to the desired course.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Heading up (HDG UP) aligns the top of the map display to the current aircraft heading.
Note: When panning or reviewing active flight plan legs in a non-North Up orientation, the map does not
show the map orientation nor the wind direction and speed.
EIS
Note: Map orientation can only be changed on the Navigation Map Page. All other displays (except the
PFD Inset Map) that show navigation data reflect the orientation selected for the Navigation Map Page. The
PFD Inset Map is always Heading Up (if heading is invalid, then track up).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Changing the Navigation Map orientation:
1) With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press the MENU Key. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Map Setup
Selection
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-4 Navigation Map Page Menu Window
2) Press the ENT Key to display the Map Setup Window.
AFCS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob, or press the ENT Key once, to select the ‘ORIENTATION’ field.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
143
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Map Group Selection
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Orientation Field
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-5 Map Setup Menu Window - Map Group
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired orientation.
5) Press the ENT Key to select the new orientation.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the base page.
Map Range
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
There are 28 different map ranges available, from 500 feet to 2000 nm. The current range is indicated in
the lower right corner of the map and represents the top-to-bottom distance covered by the map. When the
map range is decreased to a point that exceeds the capability of Perspective to accurately represent the map,
a magnifying glass icon is shown to the left of the map range. To change the map range turn the Joystick
counter-clockwise to decrease the range, or clockwise to increase the range.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Range Overzoom
APPENDICES
Figure 5-6 Map Range
Auto Zoom
INDEX
Auto zoom allows Perspective to change the map display range to the smallest range clearly showing the
active waypoint. Auto zoom can be overridden by adjusting the range with the Joystick, and remains until
the active waypoint changes, a terrain or traffic alert occurs, the aircraft takes off, or the manual override times
out (timer set on Map Setup Window).
144
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If a terrain caution or warning occurs, any map page displaying TAWS/TERRAIN data automatically adjusts
to the smallest map range clearly showing the highest priority alert. If a new traffic advisory alert occurs, any
map page capable of displaying traffic advisory alerts automatically adjusts to the smallest map range clearly
showing the traffic advisory. When terrain or traffic alerts clear, the map returns to the previous auto zoom
range based on the active waypoint.
The auto zoom function can be turned on or off independently for the PFDs and MFD. Control of the
ranges at which the auto zoom occurs is done by setting the minimum and maximum ‘look forward’ times
(set on the Map Setup Window for the Map Group). These settings determines the minimum and maximum
distance to display based upon the aircraft’s ground speed.
EIS
• Waypoints that are long distances apart cause the map range to increase to a point where many details on
the map are decluttered. If this is not acceptable, lower the maximum look ahead time to a value that limits
the auto zoom to an acceptable range.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Waypoints that are very short distances apart cause the map range to decrease to a point where situational
awareness may not be what is desired. Increase the minimum look ahead time to a value that limits the auto
zoom to a minimum range that provides acceptable situational awareness.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Flight plans that have a combination of long and short legs cause the range to increase and decrease as
waypoints sequence. To avoid this, auto zoom can be disabled or the maximum/minimum times can be
adjusted.
• The ‘time out’ time (configurable on the Map Setup Page for the Map Group) determines how long auto
zoom is overridden by a manual adjustment of the range knob. At the expiration of this time, the auto
zoom range is restored. Setting the ‘time out’ value to zero causes the manual override to never time out.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• When the maximum ‘look forward’ time is set to zero, the upper limit becomes the maximum range available
(2000 nm).
• When the minimum ‘look forward’ time is set to zero, the lower limit becomes 1.5 nm.
Maximum Look Forward Time
Minimum Look Forward Time
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Manual Range Override
Expiration Time
AFCS
Auto Zoom:
Off, MFD Only, PFD Only, All On
APPENDICES
Figure 5-7 Map Setup Menu Window - Map Group, Auto Zoom
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
145
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Configuring automatic zoom:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘AUTO ZOOM’ field.
6) Select ‘Off’, ‘MFD Only’, ‘PFD Only’, or ‘ALL On’.
EIS
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the ‘MAX LOOK FWD’ field.
Times are from zero to 999 minutes.
8) Use the FMS Knobs to set the time. Press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
9) Repeat step 8 for ‘MIN LOOK FWD’ (zero to 99 minutes) and ‘MAX LOOK FWD’ (zero to 999 minutes).
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
10) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
146
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Map Panning
Map panning allows the pilot to:
• View parts of the map outside the displayed range without adjusting the map range
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Highlight and select locations on the map
• Review information for a selected airport, NAVAID or user waypoint
• Designate locations for use in flight planning
• View airspace and airway information
EIS
When the panning function is selected by pressing the Joystick, the Map Pointer flashes on the map display.
A window also appears at the top of the map display showing the latitude/longitude position of the pointer,
the bearing and distance to the pointer from the aircraft’s present position, and the elevation of the land at the
position of the pointer.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Map Pointer Information
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Map Pointer
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-8 Navigation Map - Map Pointer Activated
Note: The map is normally centered on the aircraft’s position. If the map has been panned and there has
APPENDICES
been no pointer movement for about 60 seconds, the map reverts back to centered on the aircraft position
and the flashing pointer is removed.
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
147
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the Map Pointer is placed on an object, the name of the object is highlighted (even if the name was
not originally displayed on the map). When any map feature or object is selected on the map display, pertinent
information is displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Information about Point
of Interest
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Map Pointer on
POI
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-9 Navigation Map - Map Pointer on Point of Interest
148
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
When the Map Pointer crosses an airspace boundary, the boundary is highlighted and airspace information
is shown at the top of the display. The information includes the name and class of airspace, the ceiling in feet
above Mean Sea Level (MSL), and the floor in feet MSL.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Information about
Airspace
EIS
Map Pointer on
Airspace
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-10 Navigation Map - Map Pointer on Airspace
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Panning the map:
1) Press the Joystick to display the Map Pointer.
2) Move the Joystick to move the Map Pointer around the map.
AFCS
3) Press the Joystick to remove the Map Pointer and recenter the map on the aircraft’s current position.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
149
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Reviewing information for an airport, NAVAID, or user waypoint:
1) Place the Map Pointer on a waypoint.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the ENT Key to display the Waypoint Information Page for the selected waypoint.
3) Press the GO BACK Softkey, the CLR Key, or the ENT Key to exit the Waypoint Information Page and return to
the Navigation Map showing the selected waypoint.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
NAVAID
Information
GO BACK Softkey
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 5-11 Navigation Map - Information Window - NAVAID
150
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Viewing airspace information for a special-use or controlled airspace:
1) Place the Map Pointer on an open area within the boundaries of an airspace.
2) Press the ENT Key to display an options menu.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) ‘Review Airspace?’ should already be highlighted, if not select it. Press the ENT Key to display the Airspace
Information Page for the selected airspace.
4) Press the CLR or ENT Key to exit the Airspace Information Page.
EIS
Airspace
Information
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-12 Navigation Map - Information Window - Airspace
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
151
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Measuring Bearing and Distance
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Distance and bearing from the aircraft’s present position to any point on the viewable navigation map may be
calculated using the ‘Measure Bearing and Distance’ selection from Navigation Map page menu. The bearing
and distance tool displays a dashed Measurement Line and a Measure Pointer to aid in graphically identifying
points with which to measure. Lat/Long, distance and elevation data for the Measure Pointer is provided in a
window at the top of the navigation map.
Measuring bearing and distance between any two points:
1) Press the MENU Key (with the Navigation Map Page displayed).
EIS
2) Highlight the ‘Measure Bearing/Distance’ field.
3) Press the ENT Key. A Measure Pointer is displayed on the map at the aircraft’s present position.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Move the Joystick to place the reference pointer at the desired location. The bearing and distance are displayed
at the top of the map. Elevation at the current pointer position is also displayed. Pressing the ENT Key changes
the starting point for measuring.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Measurement Line
Pointer Lat/Long
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Measurement
Information
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) To exit the Measure Bearing/Distance option, press the Joystick; or select ‘Stop Measuring’ from the Page
Menu and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-13 Navigation Map - Measuring Bearing and Distance
152
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Topography
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
All navigation maps can display various shades of topography colors representing land elevation, similar
to aviation sectional charts. Topographic data can be displayed or removed as described in the following
procedures.
Navigation Map
Topographic Data
Navigation Map
Black Background
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TOPO Softkey
Not Enabled
TOPO On
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TOPO Softkey
Enabled
TOPO Off
Figure 5-14 Navigation Map - Topographic Data
Displaying/removing topographic data on all pages displaying navigation maps:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the MAP Softkey (the INSET Softkey for the PFD Inset Map).
2) Press the TOPO Softkey.
3) Press the TOPO Softkey again to remove topographic data from the Navigation Map. When topographic data
is removed from the page, all navigation data is presented on a black background.
AFCS
Displaying/removing topographic data (TOPO DATA) using the Navigation Map Page Menu:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘TOPO DATA’ field.
APPENDICES
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
153
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
TOPO DATA
On/Off
TOPO DATA
Range
Figure 5-15 Navigation Map Setup Menu - TOPO DATA Setup
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The topographic data range is the maximum map range on which topographic data is displayed.
Note: Since the PFD Inset Map is much smaller than the MFD navigation maps, items are removed on the
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
PFD Inset Map two range levels smaller than the range selected in the Map Setup pages (e.g., a setting
of 100 nm removes the item at ranges above 100 nm on MFD navigation maps, while the PFD Inset Map
removes the same item at 50 nm).
Selecting a topographical data range (TOPO DATA):
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
AFCS
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘TOPO DATA’ range field. TOPO ranges are from 500 ft to 2000 nm.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) To change the TOPO range setting, turn the small FMS Knob to display the range list.
7) Select the desired range using the small FMS Knob.
8) Press the ENT Key.
9) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
INDEX
APPENDICES
In addition, the Navigation Map can display a topographic scale (located in the lower right hand side of the
map) showing a scale of the terrain elevation and current elevation values as shown following.
154
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Maximum Displayed Elevation
Minimum Displayed Elevation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Aircraft Altitude (MSL)
Range of
Displayed
Elevations
EIS
Ground Elevation at Map
Pointer Location (only visible
when Map Pointer is displayed)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-16 Navigation Map - TOPO SCALE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Displaying/removing the topographic scale (TOPO SCALE):
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group and select the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Highlight the ‘TOPO SCALE’ field.
5) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
TOPO SCALE
On/Off
Figure 5-17 Navigation Map Setup Menu - TOPO SCALE Setup
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
155
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Map Symbols
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
This section discusses the types of land and aviation symbols that can be displayed. Each listed type of symbol
can be turned on or off, and the maximum range to display each symbol can be set. The decluttering of the
symbols from the map using the DCLTR Softkey is also discussed.
Land Symbols
The following items are configured on the land menu:
Land Symbols
EIS
(Text label size can be None, Small, Medium (Med), or Large
(Lrg)
Symbol
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
Latitude/Longitude (LAT/LON)
Off
2000
Interstate Highway (FREEWAY)
300
800
International Highway (FREEWAY)
300
800
US Highway (NATIONAL HWY)
30
80
State Highway (LOCAL HWY)
15
30
8
15
Railroads (RAILROAD)
15
30
LARGE CITY (> 200,000)
800
1500
MEDIUM CITY (> 50,000)
100
200
SMALL CITY (> 5,000)
States and Provinces (STATE/PROV)
20
800
50
1500
Rivers and Lakes (RIVER/LAKE)
200
500
USER WAYPOINT
150
300
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Highways and Roads
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Local Road (LOCAL ROAD)
N/A
INDEX
APPENDICES
Table 5-1 Land Symbol Information
156
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Aviation Symbols
The following items are configured on the aviation menu:
Aviation Symbols
Symbol
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
2000
500
300
100
20
100
30
Non-directional Beacon (NDB WAYPOINT)
15
30
VOR (VOR WAYPOINT)
150
300
Class B Airspace/TMA (CLASS B/TMA)
200
500
Class C Airspace/TCA (CLASS C/TCA)
200
500
Class D Airspace (CLASS D)
150
300
Restricted Area (RESTRICTED)
200
500
Military Operations Area [MOA(MILITARY)]
200
500
Other/Air Defense Interdiction Zone (OTHER/ADIZ)
200
500
Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR)
500
2000
See Airports, NAVAIDs
See Additional Features
N/A
APPENDICES
2000
250
150
50
3
Off
15
Active Flight Plan Waypoint (ACTIVE FPL WPT)
Large Airports (LARGE APT)
Medium Airports (MEDIUM APT)
Small Airports (SMALL APT)
Taxiways (SAFETAXI)
Runway Extension (RWY EXTENSION)
Intersection (INT WAYPOINT)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2000
AFCS
2000
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Non-active Flight Plan Leg (ACTIVE FPL)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2000
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2000
EIS
Active Flight Plan Leg (ACTIVE FPL)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
(Text label size can be None, Small, Medium (Med),
or Large (Lrg)
Table 5-2 Aviation Symbol Information
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
157
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Symbol Setup
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
All pages with maps can display land symbols (roads, lakes, borders, etc). Land symbols can be removed
totally (turned off).
Displaying/removing all land symbols:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The Page Menu is displayed and the cursor
flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Group Menu is displayed and the cursor flashes on the ‘Map’ option.
EIS
3) Highlight the ‘LAND DATA’ field.
4) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off.’.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
LAND DATA
On/Off
AFCS
Figure 5-18 Navigation Map Setup Menu - LAND DATA Setup
The label size (TEXT) sets the size at which labels appear on the display (none, small, medium, and large).
The range (RNG) sets the maximum range at which items appear on the display.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selecting a ‘Land’ or ‘Aviation’ group item text size and range:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
APPENDICES
3) Select the ‘Land’ or ‘Aviation’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on the first field.
5) Select the desired land option.
6) Select the desired text size.
INDEX
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected size.
6) Select the desired range.
158
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected range.
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Maximum Display Range
EIS
Text Label Size
(None, Small, Med, or Lrg)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-19 Navigation Map Setup Menu - LAND GROUP Setup
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Text Label Size
(None, Small, Med, or Lrg)
Maximum Display Range
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-20 Navigation Map Setup Menu - AVIATION GROUP Setup
APPENDICES
Note: Since the PFD Inset Map is much smaller than the MFD navigation maps, items are removed on the
PFD Inset Map two range levels smaller than the range selected in the Map Setup pages (e.g., a setting
of 100 nm removes the item at ranges above 100 nm on MFD navigation maps, while the PFD Inset Map
removes the same item at 50 nm).
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
159
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Map Declutter
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The declutter feature allows the pilot to progressively step through four levels of removing map information.
The declutter level is displayed in the DCLTR Softkey and next to the Declutter Menu Option.
Declutter Level
EIS
DCLTR Softkey
Navigation Map Page Menu
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-21 Navigation Map - Declutter Level Indications
Decluttering the map:
Press the DCLTR Softkey with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The current declutter level is shown. With
each softkey selection, another level of map information is removed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed.
2) Select ‘Declutter’. The current declutter level is shown.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the ENT Key.
Decluttering the PFD Inset Map:
1) Press the INSET Softkey.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
2) Press the DCLTR Softkey. The current declutter level is shown. With each selection, another level of map
information is removed.
160
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Table 5-3 lists the items displayed at each declutter level. The ‘X’ represents map items displayed for the
various levels of declutter.
Item
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Flight Plan Route Lines
Flight Plan Route Waypoints
Rivers/Lakes
Topography Data
International Borders
Track Vector
Navigation Range Ring
Fuel Range Ring
Terrain Data
Traffic
Airways
NEXRAD
XM Lightning Data
Airports
Runway Labels
Restricted
MOA (Military)
User Waypoints
Latitude/Longitude Grid
NAVAIDs
Class B Airspaces/TMA
Class C Airspaces/TCA
Class D Airspaces
Other Airspaces/ADIZ
TFRs
Obstacles
Land/Country Text
Cities
Roads
Railroads
State/Province Boundaries
River/Lake Names
No Declutter Declutter-1 Declutter-2 Declutter-3
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Table 5-3 Navigation Map Items Displayed by Declutter Level
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
161
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Airways
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
This airways discussion is based upon the North American airway structure. The airway structure in places
other than North America vary by location, etc. and are not discussed in this book. Low Altitude Airways (or
Victor Airways) primarily serve smaller piston-engine, propeller-driven airplanes on shorter routes and at lower
altitudes. Airways are eight nautical miles wide and start 1,200 feet above ground level (AGL) and extend up
to 18,000 feet mean sea level (MSL). Low Altitude Airways are designated with a “V” before the airway number
(hence the name “Victor Airways”) since they run primarily between VORs.
EIS
High Altitude Airways (or Jet Routes) primarily serve airliners, jets, turboprops, and turbocharged piston
aircraft operating above 18,000 feet MSL. Jet Routes start at 18,000 feet MSL and extend upward to 45,000 feet
MSL (altitudes above 18,000 feet are called “flight levels” and are described as FL450 for 45,000 feet MSL). Jet
Routes are designated with a “J” before the route number.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Low Altitude Airways are drawn in gray (the same shade used for roads). High Altitude Airways are drawn
in green. When both types of airways are displayed, High Altitude Airways are drawn on top of Low Altitude
Airways.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When airways are selected for display on the map, the airway waypoints (VORs, NDBs and Intersections) are
also displayed.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Low Altitude
Airway
(Victor Airway)
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
High Altitude
Airway
(Jet Route)
INDEX
Figure 5-22 Airways on MFD Navigation Page
162
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Airways may be displayed on the map at the pilot’s discretion using either a combination of AIRWAYS Softkey
presses, or menu selections using the MENU Key from the Navigation Map Page. The Airway range can also be
programmed to only display Airways on the MFD when the map range is at or below a specific number.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Displaying/removing airways:
1) Select the MAP Softkey.
2) Select the AIRWAYS Softkey. Both High and Low Altitude Airways are displayed (AIRWAY ON).
3) Select the softkey again to display Low Altitude Airways only (AIRWAY LO).
4) Select the softkey again to display High Altitude Airways only (AIRWAY HI).
EIS
5) Select the softkey again to remove High Altitude Airways. No airways are displayed (AIRWAYS).
Or:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Airways’ group, and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘AIRWAYS’ field.
5) Turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Off’, ‘All’, ‘LO Only’, or ‘HI Only’, and press the ENT Key.
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
Off, All, LO Only, HI Only
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Airway Display Selection
Low Altitude Airway Range
High Altitude Airway Range
Figure 5-23 Navigation Map Setup Menu - AIRWAYS Setup
AFCS
The airway range is the maximum map range on which airways are displayed.
Selecting an airway range (LOW ALT AIRWAY or HI ALT AIRWAY):
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Airway’ group.
APPENDICES
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘LOW ALT AIRWAY’ or ‘HI ALT AIRWAY’ range field.
6) To change the range setting, turn the small FMS Knob to display the range list.
7) Select the desired range using the small FMS Knob.
INDEX
8) Press the ENT Key.
9) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
163
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
The following range items are configurable on the airways menu:
Airway Type
Symbol
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Low Altitude Airway (LOW ALT AIRWAY)
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
200
500
High Altitude Airway (HI ALT AIRWAY)
300
500
EIS
Table 5-4 Airway Range Information
Track Vector
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Navigation Map can display a track vector that is useful in minimizing track angle error. The track vector
is a solid light blue line segment extended to a predicted location. The track vector look-ahead time is selectable
(30 sec, 60 sec (default), 2 min, 5 min, 10 min, 20 min) and determines the length of the track vector. The track
vector shows up to 90 degrees of a turn for the 30 and 60 second time settings.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Track Vector
Figure 5-24 Navigation Map -Track Vector
Displaying/removing the track vector:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
AFCS
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘TRACK VECTOR’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’. Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the look
ahead time field. Use the FMS Knob to select the desired time. Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
164
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Nav Range Ring On/Off
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Wind Vector On/Off
Track Vector
- On/Off
- Look Ahead Time
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Fuel Range
- On/Off
- Fuel Reserve Time
Figure 5-25 Navigation Map Setup Menu -TRACK VECTOR, WIND VECTOR, NAV RANGE RING, FUEL RANGE RING Setup
Wind Vector
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The map displays a wind vector arrow in the upper right-hand portion of the screen. Wind vector information
is displayed as a white arrow pointing in the direction in which the wind is moving for wind speeds greater than
or equal to 1 kt.
Wind Direction
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Wind Speed
Figure 5-26 Navigation Map - Wind Vector
AFCS
Note: The wind vector is not displayed until the aircraft is moving. It is not displayed on the Waypoint
Information pages.
Displaying/removing the wind vector:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
APPENDICES
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘WIND VECTOR’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
165
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Nav Range Ring
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Nav Range Ring shows the direction of travel (ground track) on a rotating compass card. The range is
determined by the map range. The range is 1/4 of the map range (e.g., 37.5 nm on a 150 nm map).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Range (radius)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Nav Range Ring
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-27 Navigation Map - Nav Range Ring
Note: The Nav Range Ring is not displayed on the Waypoint Information pages, Nearest pages, or Direct-to
Window map.
AFCS
Displaying/removing the Nav Range Ring:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘NAV RANGE RING’ field.
APPENDICES
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
Note: The Nav Range Ring is referenced to either magnetic or true north, based on the selection on the AUX
INDEX
- System Setup Page.
166
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Fuel Range Ring
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The map can display a fuel range ring which shows the remaining flight distance. A dashed green circle
indicates the selected range to reserve fuel. A solid green circle indicates the total endurance range. If only
reserve fuel remains, the range is indicated by a solid yellow circle.
Total Endurance Range
Time to Reserve Fuel
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Range to Reserve Fuel
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-28 Navigation Map - Fuel Range Ring
Displaying/removing the fuel range ring and selecting a fuel range time:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘FUEL RNG (RSV)’ field.
AFCS
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Highlight the fuel reserve time field. This time should be set to the amount of flight time equal to the amount
of fuel reserve desired.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
8) To change the reserve fuel time, enter a time (00:00 to 23:59; hours:minutes). The default setting is 00:45
minutes.
9) Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
10) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
167
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Field of View (SVS)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The map can display the boundaries of the PFD Synthetic Vision System (SVS) lateral field of view. The field
of view is shown as two dashed lines forming a V shape in front of the aircraft symbol on the map. This is only
available if SVS is installed on the aircraft.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Lateral Field
of View
Boundaries
Figure 5-29 Navigation Map - Field of View
Displaying/removing the field of view:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
AFCS
5) Highlight the ‘FIELD OF VIEW’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
168
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Destination Airport Information
The destination airport for which the information is displayed is determined as follows.
• The destination airport is the last airport in the active flight plan if:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
- No arrival or approach is loaded, or
- An arrival waypoint is part of the active leg and no approach is loaded, or
- The active leg is past the MAP
• The destination airport is the airport prior to the procedure(s) in the active flight plan if:
EIS
- An arrival and/or approach is loaded and neither are active
• The destination airport is the airport associated with the approach if:
- An arrival waypoint is part of the active leg and an approach is loaded, or
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- The approach is active
• The destination airport is the Direct-to waypoint if:
- The Direct-to waypoint is not in the active flight plan and is an airport
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If none of these conditions are met, then the destination airport is undefined and the destination information
fields are shown as dashes.
Valid Destination Airport
Fuel Remaining
at Airport
Estimated
Time Enroute
Bearing
to Airport
AFCS
Enroute
Distance
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Airport
Identifier
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Invalid Destination Airport
Figure 5-30 Destination Airport Information
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
169
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
5.3 Waypoints
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Waypoints are predetermined geographical positions (internal database) or pilot-entered positions, and are
used for all phases of flight planning and navigation.
Communication and navigation frequencies can be tuned “automatically” from various Waypoint Information
(WPT) pages, Nearest (NRST) pages, and the Nearest Airports Window (on PFD). This auto-tuning feature
simplifies frequency entry over manual tuning. Refer to the CNS and Audio Panel section for details on autotuning.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Waypoints can be selected by entering the ICAO identifier, entering the name of the facility, or by entering
the city name. See the System Overview section for detailed instructions on entering data in Perspective. As a
waypoint identifier, facility name, or location is entered, The system’s Spell’N’Find™ feature scrolls through the
database, displaying those waypoints matching the characters which have been entered to that point. A direct-to
navigation leg to the selected waypoint can be initiated by pressing the Direct-to Key on any of the waypoint
pages.
Identifier Entry Field
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
City Entry Field
Facility
Entry Field
Entered Waypoint on
Map
Map Area Showing
Entered Waypoint
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Waypoint Identifier
- Type (symbol)
- Facility Name
- City
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Waypoint Location
APPENDICES
Figure 5-31 Waypoint Information Window
INDEX
If duplicate entries exist for the entered facility name or location, additional entries may be viewed by continuing
to turn the small FMS Knob during the selection process. If duplicate entries exist for an identifier, a Duplicate
Waypoints Window is displayed when the ENT Key is pressed.
170
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Identifier with
Duplicates
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Duplicate
Waypoints
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Duplicate Message
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Airports
Figure 5-32 Waypoint Information Window - Duplicate Identifier
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Note: ‘North Up’ orientation on the Airport Information Page cannot be changed; the pilot needs to be
aware of proper orientation if the Navigation Map orientation is different from the Airport Information Page
Map.
AFCS
The Airport Information Page is the first page in WPT group and allows the pilot to view airport information,
load frequencies (COM, NAV, and lighting), review runways, and review instrument procedures that may be
involved in the flight plan. See the Audio Panel and CNS Section for more information on loading frequencies
(auto-tuning). After engine startup, the Airport Information Page defaults to the airport where the aircraft is
located. After a flight plan has been loaded, it defaults to the destination airport. On a flight plan with multiple
airports, it defaults to the airport which is the current active waypoint.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected airport and surrounding area, the Airport Information
Page displays airport information in three boxes labeled ‘AIRPORT’, ‘RUNWAYS’, and ‘FREQUENCIES’. For
airports with multiple runways, information for each runway is available.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
171
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Airport Information
- ID/Facility/City
- Usage Type/Region
- Lat/Long/Elev
- Fuel Available
- Time Zone (UTC Offset)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
Airport
Runway Information
EIS
- Designation
- Length/Width/Surface
- Lighting Available
COM/NAV Freq. Info.
Airport/Runway
Diagram
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- Identification
- Frequency
- Availability
- Additional Information
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Softkeys
Figure 5-33 Airport Information Page
The following descriptions and abbreviations are used on the Airport Information Page:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Usage type: Public, Military, or Private
• Runway surface type: Hard, Turf, Sealed, Gravel, Dirt, Soft, Unknown, or Water
• Runway lighting type: No Lights, Part Time, Full Time, Unknown, or PCL Freq (for pilot-controlled
lighting)
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
• COM Availability: TX (transmit only), RX (receive only), PT (part time), i (additional information available)
172
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The following are types of AOPA airport directory informantion shown (if available) on the Airport Directory
Page:
• Services Available: Category,
Specific Service
Approaches:
Approach,
• NAVAIDS: Type, Identifier,
Frequency, Radial, Distance
• Noise:
Noise Abatement
Procedures
• Charts: Low Altitude Chart
Number
• Notes: Airport Notes
• Pilot Controlled Lighting:
High/Med/Low Clicks/Second
• FBO:
Type, Frequencies,
Services, Fees, Fuel, Credit
Cards, Phone/Fax Numbers
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Airport Information
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Transportation:
Ground
Transportation Type Available
• Approach: Approach Facility
Name, Frequency, Frequency
Parameter
• Instrument
Published
Frequency
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Frequencies: Type/Frequency
• Runway: Headings, Length,
Width, Obstructions, Surface
• Obstructions: General Airport
Obstructions
• Special
Operations
at
Airport
EIS
• Hours: Facility Hours, Light
Hours, Tower Hours, Beacon
Hours
• Location: Sectional, Magnetic
Variation
• Traffic Patteren Altitudes
(TPA): Aircraft Class/Altitude
• Weather:
Service Type,
Frequency, Phone Number
• Flight Service Station (FSS):
FSS Name, Phone Numbers
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Airport:
Identifier, Site
Number, Name, City, State
• Phones: Phone/Fax Numbers
Airport Directory
Information
- ID/Facility/City
- Usage Type/Region
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Softkeys
Figure 5-34 Airport Directory Page Example
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
173
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Selecting an airport for review by identifier, facility name, or location:
1) From the Airport Information Page, press the FMS Knob.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Use the FMS Knobs and enter an identifier, facility name, or location.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
Selecting a runway:
1) With the Airport Information Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
EIS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the ‘RUNWAYS’ Box, on the runway designator.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the desired runway (if more than one) for the selected airport.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) To remove the flashing cursor, press the FMS Knob.
View a destination airport:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
From the Airport Information Page press the MENU Key. Select ‘View Destination Airport’. The Destination
Airport is displayed.
The Airport Frequencies Box uses the descriptions and abbreviations listed in the following table:
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Communication Frequencies
Pre-Taxi
Approach * Control
CTA *
Radar
Arrival *
ASOS
Departure * Ramp
Gate
Terminal *
ATIS
Ground
TMA *
AWOS
Helicopter
Tower
Center
Multicom
TRSA *
Class B *
Class C *
Other
Unicom
Clearance
Navigation Frequencies
ILS
LOC
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
* May include Additional Information
Table 5-5 Airport Frequency Abbreviations
APPENDICES
A departure, arrival, or approach can be loaded using the softkeys on the Airport Information Page. See the
procedures section for details. METARs or TAFs applicable to the selected airport can be selected for display (see
the Hazard Avoidance section for details about weather.
INDEX
Perspective provides a NRST Softkey on the PFD, which gives the pilot quick access to nearest airport
information (very useful if an immediate need to land is required). The Nearest Airports Window displays a
list of the 25 nearest airports (three entries can be displayed at one time). If there are more than three they are
displayed in a scrollable list. If there are no nearest airports available, “NONE WITHIN 200NM” is displayed.
174
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Bearing/Distance to Airport
Airport Identifier/
Type
Approach Available
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Length of Longest
Runway
COM Freq. Info.
- Identification
- Frequency
Additional Airports
(within 200 nm)
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NRST Softkey
Figure 5-35 Nearest Airports Window on PFD
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pressing the ENT Key displays the PFD Airport Information Window for the highlighted airport. Pressing the
ENT Key again returns to the Nearest Airports Window with the cursor on the next airport in the list. Continued
presses of the ENT Key sequences through the information pages for all airports in the Nearest Airports list.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Airport Information
- ID/Type/City
- Facility
Airport Information
- Usage/Time/Elev
- Region
AFCS
Airport Information
- Lat/Long
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-36 Airport Information Window on PFD
APPENDICES
The Nearest Airports Page on the MFD is first in the group of NRST pages because of its potential use in
the event of an in-flight emergency. In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected airport and
surrounding area, the page displays nearest airport information in five boxes labeled ‘NEAREST AIRPORTS’,
‘INFORMATION’, ‘RUNWAYS’, ‘FREQUENCIES’, and ‘APPROACHES’.
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
INDEX
The selected airport is indicated by a white arrow, and a dashed white line is drawn on the navigation map
from the aircraft position to the nearest airport. Up to five nearest airports, one runway, up to five frequencies,
and up to five approaches are visible at one time. If there are more than can be shown, each list can be scrolled.
175
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If there are no items for display in a boxed area, text indicating that fact is displayed. The currently selected
airport remains in the list until it is unselected.
Nearest Airports
- ID/Type
- Bearing/Distance
Airport Information
EIS
- Facility/City/Elevation
Runway Information
Nearest Airport
- Designation/Surface
- Length/Width
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
COM/NAV Freq. Info.
- Identification
- Frequency
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Navigation Map
Showing Nearest
Airport
Approaches Available
Window Selection
Softkeys
LD APR Softkey (only
available if an approach is
highlighted)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-37 Nearest Airport Page
Viewing information for a nearest airport on the PFD:
1) Press the NRST Softkey to display the Nearest Airports Window.
AFCS
2) Highlight the airport identifier with the FMS Knob and press the ENT Key to display the Airport Information
Window.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) To return to the Nearest Airports Window press the ENT Key (with the cursor on ‘BACK’) or press the CLR
Key. The cursor is now on the next airport in the nearest airports list. (Repeatedly pressing the ENT Key
moves through the airport list, alternating between the Nearest Airports Window and the Airport Information
Window.)
4) Press the CLR Key to close the PFD Nearest Airports Window.
Viewing information for a nearest airport on the MFD:
APPENDICES
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the NRST page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Nearest Airports Page (it is the first page of the group, so it may already
be selected. If there are no Nearest Airports available, “NONE WITHIN 200 NM” is displayed.
INDEX
3) Press the APT Softkey; or press the FMS Knob; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Airport Window’ and
press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘NEAREST AIRPORTS’ Box. The first airport in the nearest airports
list is highlighted.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired airport. (Pressing the ENT Key also moves to the next airport)
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
176
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Viewing runway information for a specific airport:
1) With the Nearest Airports Page displayed, press the RNWY Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select
Runway Window’; and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘RUNWAYS’ Box.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired runway.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
See the Audio Panel and CNS Section for frequency selection and the Procedures section for approaches.
EIS
The Nearest Airports Box on the System Setup Page defines the minimum runway length and surface type
used when determining the 25 nearest airports to display on the MFD Nearest Airports Page. A minimum
runway length and/or surface type can be entered to prevent airports with small runways or runways that are
not appropriately surfaced from being displayed. Default settings are 0 feet (or meters) for runway length and
“HARD/SOFT” for runway surface type.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selecting nearest airport surface matching criteria:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the runway surface field in the Nearest Airports Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired runway option (ANY, HARD ONLY, HARD/SOFT).
5) Press the ENT Key.
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selecting nearest airport minimum runway length matching criteria:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the minimum length field in the Nearest Airport Box.
AFCS
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter the minimum runway length (zero to 25,000 feet) and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Nearest Airport Criteria
- Type of Runway Surface
- Minimum Runway Length
INDEX
Figure 5-38 System Setup Page - Nearest Airport Selection Criteria
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
177
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Intersections
Note: The VOR displayed on the Intersection Information Page is the nearest VOR, not necessarily the VOR
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
used to define the intersection.
The Intersection Information Page is used to view information about intersections. In addition to displaying
a map of the currently selected intersection and surrounding area, the Intersection Information Page displays
intersection information in three boxes labeled ‘INTERSECTION’, ‘INFORMATION’, and ‘NEAREST VOR’.
EIS
Intersection Identifier
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
Intersection
Intersection Info
- Region
- Lat/Long
Nearest VOR Info
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Radial to VOR
- Distance to VOR
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected Intersection
Figure 5-39 Intersection Information Page
AFCS
Select an intersection:
1) With the Intersection Information Page displayed, enter an identifier in the Intersection Box.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the Nearest Intersections Page displayed, press the FMS Knob
APPENDICES
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest Intersection Box.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
INDEX
The Nearest Intersections Page can be used to quickly find an intersection close to the flight path. In addition
to displaying a map of the surrounding area, the page displays information for up to 25 nearest intersections in
three boxes labeled ‘NEAREST INT’, ‘INFORMATION’, and ‘REFERENCE VOR’.
178
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The selected intersection is indicated by a white arrow. Up to eleven intersections are visible at a time. If
there are more than can be shown, the list can be scrolled. If there are no items for display, text indicating that
fact is displayed
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Note: The list only includes waypoints that are within 200 nm.
Intersection Information
EIS
- Identifier/Symbol
- Bearing/Distance to
intersection from
aircraft position
Navigation Map
Showing Nearest
Intersection
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Intersection Lat/Long
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Reference VOR Info
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- VOR Frequency
- Bearing/Distance to VOR
Nearest
Intersection
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-40 Nearest Intersections Page
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
179
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
NDBs
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The NDB Information Page is used to view information about NDBs. In addition to displaying a map of
the currently selected NDB and surrounding area, the page displays NDB information in four boxes labeled
‘NDB’, ‘INFORMATION’, ‘FREQUENCY’, and ‘NEAREST AIRPORT.
NDB Identifier/Type
- Facility Name
- Nearest City
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
NDB
NDB Information
- Type
- Region
- Lat/Long
NDB Frequency
Selected NDB
Nearest Airport Info
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Bearing/Distance to
Airport
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-41 NDB Information Page
Note: Compass locator (LOM): a low power, low or medium frequency radio beacon installed in conjunction
AFCS
with the instrument landing system. When LOM is used, the locator is at the Outer Marker; when LMM is
used, the locator is at the Middle Marker.
Select an NDB:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) With the NDB Information Page displayed, enter an identifier, the name of the NDB, or the city in which it’s
located in the NDB Box.
2) Press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
APPENDICES
Or:
1) With the Nearest NDB Page displayed, press the FMS Knob
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest NDB Box.
INDEX
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
180
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The Nearest NDB Page can be used to quickly find a NDB close to the flight path. In addition to displaying
a map of the surrounding area, the page displays information for up to 25 nearest NDBs in three boxes labeled
‘NEAREST NDB’, ‘INFORMATION’, and ‘FREQUENCY’.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A white arrow before the NDB identifier indicates the selected NDB. Up to eleven NDBs are visible at a time.
If there are more than can be shown, each list can be scrolled. The list only includes waypoints that are within
200nm. If there are no NDBs in the list, text indicating that there are no nearest NDBs is displayed. If there are
no nearest NDBs in the list, the information and frequency fields are dashed.
NDB Identifier/Symbol
EIS
- Bearing/Distance to
NDB from aircraft
position
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
NDB
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Nearest NDB
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NDB Information
- Facility Name/City
- Type
- Lat/Long
NDB Frequency
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-42 Nearest NDB Page
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
181
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
VORs
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The VOR Information Page can be used to view information about VOR and ILS signals (since ILS signals
can be received on a NAV receiver), or to quickly auto-tune a VOR or ILS frequency. Localizer information
cannot be viewed on the VOR Information Page. If a VOR station is combined with a TACAN station it is
listed as a VORTAC on the VOR Information Page and if it includes only DME, it’s displayed as VOR-DME.
EIS
In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected VOR and surrounding area, the VOR Information
Page displays VOR information in four boxes labeled ‘VOR’, ‘INFORMATION’, ‘FREQUENCY’, and ‘NEAREST
AIRPORT’.
VOR Identifier/Type
- Facility Name
- Nearest City
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigation Map
Showing
Selected VOR
VOR Information
- Class/Magnetic Variation
- Region
- Lat/Long
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
VOR Frequency
Nearest Airport Info
Selected VOR
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Bearing/Distance to
Airport
AFCS
Figure 5-43 VOR Information Page
The VOR classes used in the VOR information box are: LOW ALTITUDE, HIGH ALTITUDE, and
TERMINAL
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Select a VOR:
1) With the VOR Information Page displayed, enter an identifier, the name of the VOR, or the city in which it’s
located in the VOR Box.
2) Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the Nearest VOR Page displayed, press the FMS Knob or press the VOR Softkey.
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest VOR Box.
INDEX
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
182
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1) With the Nearest VOR Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
2) Highlight ‘SELECT VOR WINDOW’, and press the ENT Key.
3) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest VOR Box.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
EIS
The Nearest VOR Page can be used to quickly find a VOR station close to the aircraft. Also, a NAV frequency
from a selected VOR station can be loaded from the Nearest VOR Page. In addition to displaying a map of
the surrounding area, the Nearest VOR Page displays information for up to 25 nearest VOR stations in three
boxes labeled ‘NEAREST VOR’, ‘INFORMATION’, and ‘FREQUENCY’. The list only includes waypoints that
are within 200 nm.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
A white arrow before the VOR identifier indicates the selected VOR. Up to eleven VORs are visible at a
time. If there are more than can be shown, each list can be scrolled. If there are no VORs in the list, text
indicating that there are no nearest VORs is displayed. If there are no nearest VORs in the list, the information
is dashed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
VOR Identifier/Symbol
Navigation Map
Showing Nearest
VOR
- Bearing/Distance to VOR
from aircraft position
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
VOR Information
AFCS
- Facility Name/City
- Class/Magnetic Variation
- Lat/Long
VOR Frequency
Nearest VOR
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-44 Nearest VOR Page
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
183
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
User Waypoints
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system can create and store up to 1,000 user-defined waypoints. User waypoints can be created from any
map page (except PFD Inset Map, AUX-Trip Planning Page, or Procedure Pages) by selecting a position on the
map using the Joystick, or from the User Waypoint Information Page by referencing a bearing/distance from
an existing waypoint, referencing bearings from two existing waypoints, or entering a latitude/longitude. Once
a waypoint has been created, it can be renamed, deleted, or moved.
EIS
User Waypoint Info
- Identifier
- Temporary/Normal
- Waypoint Type
User Wpt Comment
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
User Waypoint
Reference Wpt/Info
- Identifier/Rad/Dist or
- Identifiers/Radials or
- Region/Lat/Long
Selected User
Waypoint
User Waypoint List
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- Identifier
- Comment
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
# User Wpts Used
Displayed if User Wpt
was created on map
page
Softkeys
Figure 5-45 User Waypoint Information Page
AFCS
Select a User Waypoint:
1) With the User Waypoint Information Page displayed, enter the name of the User Waypoint, or scroll to the
desired waypoint in the User Waypoint List using the large FMS Knob.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the Nearest User Waypoint Page displayed, press the FMS Knob
APPENDICES
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest USR Box.
INDEX
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
184
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Nearest User Wpt List
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
- Identifier
- Bearing/Distance from
aircraft position
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
User Waypoint
EIS
User Waypoint Info
- Comment
- Lat/Long
Reference Wpt Info
Selected User
Waypoint
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- Identifier
- Radial/Distance
Figure 5-46 Nearest User Waypoint Page
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Creating User Waypoints
User waypoints can be created from the User Waypoint Information Page in the following ways:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Creating user waypoints from the User Waypoint Information Page:
1) Press the NEW Softkey, or press the MENU Key and select ‘Create New User Waypoint’.
2) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
3) Press the ENT Key. The current aircraft position is the default location of the new waypoint.
AFCS
4) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
a) Select “RAD/RAD” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Or:
b) Select “RAD/DIS” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the reference waypoint identifier,
the radial, and the distance into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
APPENDICES
c) Select “LAT/LON” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude and longitude into
the INFORMATION window using the FMS Knobs.
5) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
INDEX
6) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to “TEMPORARY” or “NORMAL” by moving the cursor
to “TEMPORARY” and selecting the ENT Key to check or uncheck the box.
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
185
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Or:
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
3) Press the ENT Key. The message ‘Are you sure you want to create the new User Waypoint AAAAAA?’ is
displayed.
4) With ‘YES’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
5) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
EIS
a) Select “RAD/RAD” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
b) Select “RAD/DIS” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the reference waypoint identifier,
the radial, and the distance into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
c) Select “LAT/LON” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude and longitude into
the INFORMATION window using the FMS Knobs.
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
7) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to “TEMPORARY” or “NORMAL” by moving the cursor
to “TEMPORARY” and selecting the ENT Key to check or uncheck the box.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
APPENDICES
Figure 5-47 User Waypoint Information Page Menu
Creating user waypoints from map pages:
1) Press the Joystick to activate the panning function and pan to the map location of the desired user waypoint.
2) Press the ENT Key. The User Waypoint Information Page is displayed with the captured position.
INDEX
Note: If the pointer has highlighted a map database feature, one of three things happens upon pressing
the ENT Key: 1) information about the selected feature is displayed instead of initiating a new waypoint,
2) a menu pops up allowing a choice between ‘Review Airspaces’ or ‘Create User Waypoint’, or 3) a new
waypoint is initiated with the default name being the selected map item.
186
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected name.
5) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
a) Select “RAD/RAD” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
b) Select “RAD/DIS” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the reference waypoint identifier,
the radial, and the distance into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
EIS
Or:
c) Select “LAT/LON” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude and longitude into
the INFORMATION window using the FMS Knobs.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
7) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to “TEMPORARY” or “NORMAL” by moving the cursor
to “TEMPORARY” and selecting the ENT Key to check or uncheck the box.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
9) Press the GO BACK Softkey to return to the map page.
Editing User Waypoints
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Editing a user waypoint comment or location:
1) With the User Waypoint Information Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Move the cursor to the desired field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to make any changes.
AFCS
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Renaming user waypoints:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Highlight a user waypoint in the User Waypoint List. Press the RENAME Softkey, or press the MENU Key and
select ‘Rename User Waypoint’
2) Enter a new name.
APPENDICES
3) Press the ENT Key. The message ‘Do you want to rename the user waypoint AAAAAA to BBBBBB?’ is
displayed.
4) With ‘YES’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
187
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Changing the location of an existing waypoint to the aircraft present position:
1) Enter a waypoint name or select the waypoint in the User Waypoint List, then press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Use Present Position’.
4) Press the ENT Key twice. The new waypoint’s location is saved.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
EIS
A system generated comment for a user waypoint incorporates the reference waypoint identifier, bearing,
and distance. If a system generated comment has been edited, a new comment can be generated.
Resetting the comment field to the system generated comment:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Enter a waypoint name or select the waypoint in the User Waypoint List, then press the ENT Key.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Auto Comment’.
4) Press the ENT Key. The generated comment is based on the reference point used to define the waypoint.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The default type of user waypoint (normal or temporary) can be changed using the user waypoint information
page menu. Temporary user waypoints are automatically deleted upon the next power cycle.
Changing the user waypoint storage duration default setting:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) With the User Waypoint Information Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
2) Move the cursor to select ‘Waypoint Setup’, and press the ENT Key.
3) Select ‘NORMAL’ or ‘TEMPORARY’ as desired, and press the ENT Key
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor and return to the User Waypoint Information Page.
188
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Deleting User Waypoints
Deleting a single user waypoint
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Highlight a User Waypoint in the User Waypoint List, or enter a waypoint in the User Waypoint field.
2) Press the DELETE Softkey or press the CLR Key. ‘Yes’ is highlighted in the confirmation window.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
EIS
1) Highlight a User Waypoint in the User Waypoint List, or enter a waypoint in the User Waypoint field.
2) Press the MENU Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Select ‘Delete User Waypoint’.
4) Press the ENT Key twice to confirm the selection.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Note: The option to ‘Delete All User Waypoints’ is not available while the aircraft is in flight.
Deleting all user waypoints
1) Highlight a User Waypoint in the User Waypoint List.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Delete All User Waypoints’.
4) Press the ENT Key twice to confirm the selection.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
189
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
5.4 Airspaces
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Perspective can display the following types of airspaces: Class B/TMA, Class C/TCA, Class D, Restricted, MOA
(Military), Other Airspace, Air Defense Interdiction Zone (ADIZ), and Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR).
Class D Airspace
EIS
MOA (Military)
Class B Airspace
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Restricted Area
Alert Area
AFCS
Class C Airspace
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
ADIZ
APPENDICES
Warning Area
Figure 5-48 Airspaces
INDEX
The Nearest Airspaces Page, Airspace Alerts Window, and Airspace Alerts on the PFD provide additional
information about airspaces and the location of the aircraft in relationship to them.
190
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The Airspace Alerts Box allows the pilot to turn the controlled/special-use airspace message alerts on or off.
This does not affect the alerts listed on the Nearest Airspaces Page or the airspace boundaries depicted on the
Navigation Map Page. It simply turns on/off the warning provided when the aircraft is approaching or near an
airspace.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
An altitude buffer is also provided which “expands” the vertical range above or below an airspace. For example,
if the buffer is set at 500 feet, and the aircraft is more than 500 feet above/below an airspace, an alert message is
not generated, but if the aircraft is less than 500 feet above/below an airspace and projected to enter it, the pilot
is notified with an alert message. The default setting for the altitude buffer is 200 feet.
Changing the altitude buffer distance setting:
EIS
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the altitude buffer field in the Airspace Alerts Box.
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter an altitude buffer value and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Turning an airspace alert on or off:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field in the Airspace Alerts Box.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn the airspace alert ON or counterclockwise to turn the alert OFF.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
AFCS
Airspace Alerts Box
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- Airspace Altitude Buffer
- Alert On/Off
(Default Settings Shown)
APPENDICES
INDEX
DFLTS Softkey
Figure 5-49 System Setup Page - Airspace Alerts
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
191
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Map ranges for the airspace boundaries are selected from the Aviation Group in the Map Setup Menu: See Table
5-2 for the default and maximum ranges for each type of airspace and the symbol used to define the airspace
area.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Nearest Airspaces Page can be used to quickly find airspaces close to the flight path. In addition, a selected
frequency associated with the airspace can be loaded from the Nearest Airspaces Page. In addition to displaying
a map of airspace boundaries and surrounding area, the Nearest Airspaces Page displays airspace information in
four boxes labeled ‘AIRSPACE ALERTS’, ‘AIRSPACE, AGENCY’, VERTICAL LIMITS’, and ‘FREQUENCIES’.
EIS
Airspace Alerts Info
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- Name
- Proximity (Ahead, Inside,
Ahead < 2nm, Within 2nm)
- Time till Intercept (only if
Ahead or Ahead < 2nm)
Airspace 1
Airspace/Agency Info
- Airspace Type
- Controlling Agency
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Airspace Vertical Limits
- Ceiling
- Floor
Airspace 2
Associated Frequencies
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Type
- Availability/Info
- Frequency
Softkeys
Figure 5-50 Nearest Airspaces Page
AFCS
Airspace alerts and associated frequencies are shown in scrollable lists on the Nearest Airspaces Page. The
ALERTS and FREQ softkeys place the cursor in the respective list. The FREQ Softkey is enabled only if one or
more frequencies exist for a selected airspace.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selecting and viewing an airspace alert with its associated information:
1) Select the Nearest Airspace Page.
APPENDICES
2) Press the ALERTS Softkey; or press the FMS Knob; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Alerts Window’,
and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘AIRSPACE ALERTS’ Box.
3) Select the desired airspace.
INDEX
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
192
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pressing the PFD ALERTS Softkey displays the message window on the PFD. The following airspace alerts are
displayed in the message window:
Comments
The aircraft is inside the airspace.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Special use airspace is ahead of aircraft. The aircraft penetrates the airspace within 10
minutes.
Special use airspace is near and ahead of the aircraft position.
Special use airspace is within 2 nm of the aircraft position.
EIS
Message
INSIDE ARSPC – Inside airspace.
ARSPC AHEAD – Airspace ahead –
less than 10 minutes.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near and
ahead.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near –
less than 2 nm.
Table 5-6 PFD Airspace Alert Messages
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
193
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
5.5 Direct-to-Navigation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Direct-to method of navigation, initiated by pressing the Direct-to Key on either the MFD or PFD, is
quicker to use than a flight plan when the desire is to navigate to a single point such as a nearby airport.
Once a direct-to is activated, the system establishes a point-to-point course line from the present position to the
selected direct-to destination. Course guidance is provided until the direct-to is replaced with a new direct-to or
flight plan, or cancelled.
EIS
A vertical navigation (VNV) direct-to creates a descent path (and provides guidance to stay on the path) from
the current altitude to a selected altitude at the direct-to waypoint. Vertical navigation is based on barometric
altitudes, not on GPS altitude, and is used for cruise and descent phases of flight.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Direct-to Window allows selection and activation of direct-to navigation. The Direct-to Window displays
selected direct-to waypoint data on the PFD and the MFD.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Direct-to Point Info
- Identifier/Symbol/Region
- Facility Name
- City
VNV Constraints
- Altitude at Arrival
- Along Track Offset
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Map of Selected Point
Location of Destination
- Bearing/Distance
AFCS
Desired Course
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-51 Direct-to Window - MFD
194
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Direct-to Point Info
VNV Constraints
- Altitude at Arrival
- Along Track Offset
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
- Identifier/Symbol/City
- Facility Name
Direct-to Point Info
- Bearing/Distance
- Desired Course
EIS
Activation Command
Figure 5-52 Direct-to Window - PFD
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Any waypoint can be entered as a direct-to destination from the Direct-to Window.
Entering a waypoint identifier, facility name, or city as a direct-to destination:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed (with the active flight plan wayoint as the default
selection or a blank waypoint field if no flight plan is active).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to begin entering a waypoint identifier (turning it counter-clockwise brings
up the waypoint selection submenu - press the CLR Key to remove it), or turn the large FMS Knob to select the
facility name, or city field and turn the small FMS Knob to begin entering a facility name or city. If duplicate
entries exist for the entered facility or city name, additional entries can be viewed by turning the small FMS
Knob during the selection process.
3) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate?’ field is highlighted.
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the direct-to.
AFCS
Any waypoint contained in the active flight plan can be selected as a direct-to waypoint from the Direct-to
Window, the Active Flight Plan Page, or the Active Flight Plan Window.
Waypoint Submenu
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- Flight Plan Waypoints
- Nearest Waypoints
- Recent Waypoints
- User Waypoints
- Airway Waypoints
(only available when
active leg is part of an
airway)
APPENDICES
Figure 5-53 Waypoint Submenu
Selecting an active flight plan waypoint as a direct-to destination:
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
INDEX
1) While navigating an active flight plan, press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed with the
active flight plan waypoint as the default selection.
195
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
2) Turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display a list of flight plan waypoints (the FPL list is populated
only when navigating a flight plan).
3) Select the desired waypoint.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Or:
1) Select the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD, or the Active Flight Plan Window on the PFD.
EIS
2) Select the desired waypoint.
3) Press the Direct-to Key.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Any NRST, RECENT, USER, or AIRWAY waypoints can be selected as a direct-to destination in the Direct-to
Window.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selecting a NRST, RECENT, USER, or AIRWAY waypoint as a direct-to destination:
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed (with the active flight plan destination as the
default selection or a blank destination if no flight plan is active).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display a list of FPL waypoints (the FPL list is populated only
when navigating a flight plan, and the AIRWAY list is available only when the active leg is part of an airway).
3) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the NRST, RECENT, USER, or AIRWAY waypoints
4) Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select the desired waypoint.
5) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
AFCS
6)
Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.The Direct-to Window can be displayed from any page and
allows selection and activation of direct-to navigation. If the direct-to is initiated from any page except the WPT
pages, the default waypoint is the active flight plan waypoint (if a flight plan is active) or a blank waypoint field.
Direct-to requests on any WPT page defaults to the displayed waypoint.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selecting any waypoint as a direct-to destination:
1) Select the page or window containing the desired waypoint type and select the desired waypoint.
APPENDICES
2) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window with the selected waypoint as the direct-to
destination.
3) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
4) Press ENT again to activate the direct-to.
Selecting a nearby airport as a direct-to destination:
INDEX
1) Press the NRST Softkey on the PFD; or turn the FMS Knob to display the Nearest Airports Page.
2) Select the desired airport (the nearest one is already selected).
3) Press the Direct-to Key.
196
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Direct-to destinations may also be selected by using the pointer on the navigation map pages. If no airport,
NAVAID, or user waypoint exists at the desired location, a temporary waypoint named ‘MAPWPT’ is automatically
created at the location of the map arrow.
Selecting a waypoint as a direct-to destination using the pointer:
1) From a navigation map page, press the Joystick to display the pointer.
2) Move the Joystick to place the pointer at the desired destination location.
EIS
3) If the pointer is placed on an existing airport, NAVAID, or user waypoint, the waypoint name is highlighted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window with the selected point entered as the direct-to
destination.
5) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
6) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Cancelling a Direct-to:
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window.
2) Press the MENU Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) With ‘Cancel Direct-To NAV’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. If a flight plan is still active, the system resumes
navigating the flight plan along the closest leg.
Page Menu
- Cancel Direct-To
Navigation
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-54 Direct-to Window - Cancelling Direct-to Navigation
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
197
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
When navigating a direct-to, the system sets a direct great circle course to the selected destination. The course
to a destination can also be manually selected using the course field (‘COURSE’) on the Direct-to Window.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selecting a manual direct-to course:
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed with the destination field highlighted.
2) Highlight the course field.
3) Enter the desired course.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
EIS
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Reselecting the direct course from the current position:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed with the destination field highlighted.
2) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
3) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
A direct-to with altitude constraints creates a descent path (and provides guidance to stay on the path) from the
aircraft’s current altitude to the altitude of the direct-to waypoint. The altitude is reached at the waypoint, or at the
specified distance along the flight path if an offset distance has been entered. All VNV altitudes prior to the directto destination are removed from the active flight plan upon successful activation of a direct-to destination that is
part of the active flight plan. All VNV altitudes following the direct-to waypoint are retained. See the section on
Vertical Navigation for more information regarding the use and purpose of VNV altitudes and offset distances.
Entering a VNV altitude and along-track offset for the waypoint:
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor over the ‘VNV’ altitude field.
AFCS
3) Enter the desired altitude.
4) Press the ENT Key. The option to select MSL or AGL is now displayed.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘MSL’ or ‘AGL’.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now flashing in the VNV offset distance field.
7) Enter the desired along-track distance before the waypoint.
8) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate?’ field is highlighted.
APPENDICES
9) Press the ENT Key to activate.
Removing a VNV altitude constraint:
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window.
2) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
3) With ‘Clear Vertical Constraints’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
198
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Page Menu
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
- Clear Vertical Navigation
Constraints
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-55 Direct-to Window - Clearing Vertical Constraints
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5.6 Flight Planning
Flight Plan Leg Type
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Flight planning on Perspective consists of building a flight plan by entering waypoints one at a time, adding
waypoints along airways, and inserting departures, airways, arrivals, or approaches as needed. Perspective allows
flight planning information to be entered from either the MFD or PFD. The flight plan is displayed on maps using
different line widths, colors, and types, based on the type of leg and the segment of the flight plan currently being
flown (departure, enroute, arrival, approach, or missed approach).
Symbol
AFCS
Active non-heading Leg
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Active heading Leg
Non-heading Leg in the current flight segment
APPENDICES
Heading Leg not in the current flight segment
Non-heading leg not in the active flight segment
Turn Anticipation Arc
INDEX
Table 5-7 Flight Plan Leg Symbols
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
199
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
EIS
Whenever an approach, departure, or arrival procedure is loaded into the active flight plan, a set of approach,
departure, or arrival waypoints is inserted into the flight plan along with a header line describing the instrument
procedure the pilot selected. The original enroute portion of the flight plan remains active (unless an instrument
procedure is activated) when the procedure is loaded.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Up to 99 flight plans with up to 99 waypoints each can be created and stored in memory. One flight plan can be
activated at a time and becomes the active flight plan. The active flight plan is erased when the system is turned
off and overwritten when another flight plan is activated. When storing flight plans with an approach, departure,
or arrival, the system uses the waypoint information from the current database to define the waypoints. If the
database is changed or updated, the system automatically updates the information if the procedure has not been
modified. If an approach, departure, or arrival procedure is no longer available, the procedure is deleted from the
affected stored flight plan(s), and an alert is displayed (see Miscellaneous System Messages) advising that one or
more stored flight plans need to be edited.
When the database is updated, the airways need to be reloaded also. Each airway segment is reloaded from
the database given the entry waypoint, the airway identifier and the exit waypoint. This re-loads the sequence of
waypoints between the entry and exit waypoints (the sequence may change when the database is updated). The
update of an airway can fail during this process. If that happens, the airway waypoints are changed to regular
(non-airway) flight plan waypoints, and an alert is displayed (see Miscellaneous System Messages).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The following could cause the airway update to fail:
• Airway identifier, entry waypoint or exit waypoint not found in the new database.
• Airway entry/exit waypoint is not an acceptable waypoint for the airway – either the waypoint is no longer on
the airway, or there is a new directional restriction that prevents it being used.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Loading the new airway sequence would exceed the capacity of the flight plan.
Flight Plan Creation
There are three methods to create or modify a flight plan:
AFCS
• Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD (create/modify the active flight plan)
• Active Flight Plan Window on the PFD (create/modify the active flight plan)
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Flight Plan Catalog Page on the MFD (create/modify a stored flight plan)
200
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Active FPL Waypoint List
Active Flight
Plan Leg
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
- Comment
- Procedure Header
- Waypoint Identifier
- Airway Identifier
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Waypoint Altitude Constraint
EIS
Turn Anticipation
Arc
Vertical Navigation Profile
Non-Active,
Flight Plan Leg
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- Active Vertical WPT Alt/ID
- Vertical Speed Target
- Flight Path Angle
- Vertical Speed Target
- Time to Top of Descent
- Vertical Deviation
Figure 5-56 Active Flight Plan Page
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Active Flight Plan Comment
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Active Flight
Plan Leg
Active Flight Plan Waypoint List
AFCS
- Waypoint ID
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Airway Identifier
Figure 5-57 Active Flight Plan Window on PFD
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
201
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Catalog Contents
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
- # Used
- # Empty
Flight Plan List
- Comment
EIS
Selected
Flight Plan
Map
Selected FPL Info
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- Departure Waypoint
- Destination Waypoint
- Total Flight Plan Distance
- Enroute Safe Altitude
Softkeys
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-58 Flight Plan Catalog Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The active flight plan is listed on the active Flight Plan Page on the MFD, and in the Active Flight Plan
Window on the PFD. It is the flight plan to which Perspective is currently providing guidance, and is shown
on the navigation maps. Stored flight plans are listed on the Flight Plan Catalog Page, and are available for
activation (becomes the active flight plan).
Creating an active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (only on MFD).
AFCS
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window with a
waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, or airway waypoints).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of
waypoints and press the ENT Key. The active flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.
5) Repeat step numbers 3 and 4 to enter each additional flight plan waypoint.
6) When all waypoints have been entered, press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
APPENDICES
Creating a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
INDEX
3) Press the NEW Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Create New Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key to
display a blank flight plan for the first empty storage location.
202
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window with a
waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, or airway waypoints).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of
waypoints and press the ENT Key.
6) Repeat step numbers 4 and 5 to enter each additional flight plan waypoint.
7) When all waypoints have been entered, press the FMS Knob to return to the Flight Plan Catalog Page. The new
flight plan is now in the list.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
203
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Flight plans can be imported from an SD Card or exported to an SD Card from the Stored Flight Plan Page.
Importing a Flight Plan from an SD Card
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Insert the SD card containing the flight plan in the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Press the FPL Key on the Control Unit to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
4) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
5) Turn either FMS Knob to highlight an empty or existing flight plan.
EIS
6) Press the IMPORT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Import Flight Plan”, and press the ENT Key.
If an empty slot is selected, a list of the available flight plans on the SD card will be displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Or:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If an existing flight plan is selected, an “Overwrite existing flight plan? OK or CANCEL” prompt is displayed.
Press the ENT Key to choose to overwrite the selected flight plan and see the list of available flight plans on the
SD card. If overwriting the existing flight plan is not desired, select “CANCEL” using the FMS Knob, press the
ENT Key, select another flight plan slot, and press the IMPORT Softkey again.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan for importing.
8) Press the ENT Key to initiate the import.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
9) Press the ENT Key again to confirm the import.
INDEX
Import/Export Softkeys
List of Flight Plans to Import &
Details for the Selected File
Import Successful
Figure 5-59 Flight Plan Import
204
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Note: If the imported flight plan contains a waypoint with a name that duplicates the name of a waypoint
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
already stored on the system, the system compares the coordinates of the imported waypoint with those of
the existing waypoint. If the coordinates are different, the imported waypoint is automatically renamed by
adding characters to the end of the name.
Exporting a Flight Plan to an SD Card
1) Insert the SD card into the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Press the FPL Key on the Control Unit to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
EIS
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
4) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be exported.
6) Press the EXPORT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Export Flight Plan”.
7) If desired, change the name for the exported file by turning the large FMS Knob to the left to highlight the
name, then use the small and large FMS knobs to enter the new name, and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8) Press the ENT Key to initiate the export.
9) Press the ENT Key to confirm the export.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Stored Flight Plan to be Exported &
Exported Flight Plan Name
APPENDICES
Import/Export Softkeys
Export Successful
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
INDEX
Figure 5-60 Flight Plan Export
205
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Adding Waypoints to an Existing Flight Plan
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Waypoints can be added to the active flight plan or any stored flight plan. Choose the flight plan, select the
desired point of insertion, enter the waypoint, and it is added in front of the selected waypoint. Flight plans
are limited to 99 waypoints (including waypoints within airways and procedures). If the number of waypoints
in the flight plan exceeds 99, the message “Flight plan is full. Remove unnecessary waypoints.” appears and the
new waypoint(s) are not added to the flight plan.
Stored Flight Plan Selected
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
- Memory Slot
- Comment
- Procedure Identifier
- Waypoint Identifier
- Airway Identifier
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Waypoint Altitude Constraint
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Softkeys
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 5-61 Stored Flight Plan Page
APPENDICES
Flight Plan Full Message
INDEX
Figure 5-62 Active Flight Plan Page - FPL Full
206
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Adding a waypoint to a stored flight plan:
1) On the Flight Plan Catalog Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Highlight the desired flight plan.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the ENT Key, turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select “EDIT” and press the
ENT Key. The Stored Flight Plan Page is displayed.
4) Select the point in the flight plan to add the new waypoint. The new waypoint is placed directly in front of the
highlighted waypoint.
5) Enter the identifier, facility, or city of the new waypoint.
EIS
6) Press the ENT Key. The new waypoint now exists in the flight plan.
Note: If the identifier entered in the Waypoint Information Window has duplicates, a Duplicate Waypoint
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Window is displayed. Use the FMS Knob to select the correct waypoint.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 5-63 Duplicate Waypoints Window
Adding a waypoint to the active flight plan:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD).
APPENDICES
3) Select the point in the flight plan before which to add the new waypoint. The new waypoint is placed directly
in front of the highlighted waypoint.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window with a
waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, or airway waypoints).
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
INDEX
5) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of
waypoints and press the ENT Key. The active flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.
207
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Creating and adding user waypoints to the active flight plan:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight Management
2) Press the LD WPT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Load Waypoint’, and press the ENT Key. The user
waypoint is created with a name of USRxxx (using the next available in sequence) and is added to the end of
the active flight plan.
1) Press the Joystick to activate the panning function on the Active Flight Plan Page and pan to the map location
of the desired user waypoint.
Adding Airways to a Flight Plan
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Airways can be added to the active flight plan or any stored flight plan. Choose a flight plan (add the desired
airway entry point if not already in the flight plan), select the waypoint after the desired airway entry point,
select the airway, and it is added in front of the selected waypoint. An airway can only be loaded if there is a
waypoint in the flight plan that is part of the desired airway and is not part of an arrival or approach procedure.
Perspective also anticipates the desired airway and exit point based on loaded flight plan waypoints.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Airway Entry Waypoint
Selected Airway
Airways Available at TOP
Airway Waypoint
Sequence
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Preview of
Selected Airway
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-64 Select Airway Page - Selecting Airway
Adding an airway to a flight plan:
APPENDICES
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD).
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the waypoint after the desired airway entry point. If this waypoint is not
a valid airway entry point, a valid entry point should be entered at this time.
INDEX
4) Turn the small FMS Knob one click clockwise and press the LD AIRWY Softkey, or press the MENU Key and
select “Load Airway”. The Select Airway Page is displayed. The LD AIRWY Softkey or the “Load Airway” menu
item is available only when a valid airway entry waypoint has been chosen (the waypoint ahead of the cursor
position).
208
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired airway from the list, and press the ENT Key. Low altitude airways are
shown first in the list, followed by “all” altitude airways, and then high altitude airways.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
6) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired airway exit point from the list, and press the ENT Key. ‘LOAD?’ is
highlighted.
7) Press the ENT Key. The system returns to editing the flight plan with the new airway inserted.
Airway Entry Waypoint
EIS
Selected Airway
Selected Exit Point
Preview of
Selected Airway
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selected Airway Exit
Point
Airway Exit Points
Available
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-65 Select Airway Page - Selecting Exit Point
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Inserted Airway Header
- Airway Identifier: [airway
identifier].[exit waypoint identifier]
(e.g., V4.SLN)
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 5-66 Active Flight Plan Page - Airway Inserted
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
209
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Restrictions on Adding Airways
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight Management
Airway “UR975” in North Africa has more complicated directional restrictions within the list of airway
waypoints AMANO, VAKOR, LIBRO NELDA, DIRKA, GZO, KOSET, and SARKI:
Some airways have directional restrictions on all or part of the route. Airway “A2” in Europe has a directional
restriction over the whole route such that it can be flown only in the direction MTD-ABB-BNE-DEVAL.
• Starting from AMANO, the airway can be flown only to LIBRO.
• Starting from SARKI, the airway can be flown only to LIBRO.
EIS
• Between NELDA and GZO, the airway can be flown in either direction.
In the US, airways that are “one-way” for specified hours of operation are not uncommon. These airways
are always bidirectional in the system database.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The system only allows correct airway sequences to be inserted. If the pilot subsequently inverts the flight
plan, the system inverts the airway waypoint sequence and removes the airway header.
210
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Adding Procedures to a Stored Flight Plan
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Perspective allows the pilot to insert pre-defined instrument procedures from the navigation database into a
flight plan. The procedures are designed to facilitate routing of traffic leaving an airport (departure), arriving at
an airport (arrival), and landing at an airport (approach). See the procedures section for more details.
Flight Plan Name
EIS
Flight Plan Waypoint
List
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Softkeys
Load Departure Load Arrival Load Approach Activate Flight Plan -
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-67 Stored Flight Plan Page
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
211
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Departure (DP)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A Departure Procedure (DP) is loaded at the departure airport in the flight plan. Only one departure can
be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route is defined by selection of a departure, the transition waypoints,
and a runway.
Departure Airport
EIS
Selected
Departure
Departures Available at
KMCI
Departure Waypoint
Sequence
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Preview of
Selected
Departure
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-68 Departure Loading Page - Selecting the Departure
Loading a departure procedure into a stored flight plan:
1) Select a stored flight plan from the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
AFCS
2) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘EDIT FLIGHT PLAN’, and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
3) Press the LD DP Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Load Departure”, and press the ENT Key. The
Departure Loading Page is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Select a departure. Press the ENT Key.
5) Select a transition for the selected departure. Press the ENT Key.
6) Select a runway served by the selected departure, if required. Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
7) Press the ENT Key to load the selected departure procedure.
212
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Departure Airport
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected
Departure
Selected Runway
Preview of
Selected
Departure
Selected
Departure End
Point
Selected Transition
EIS
Departure Transition Points
Available
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-69 Departure Loading Page - Selecting Transition
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Inserted Departure Header
- Departure Identifier: [departure
airport]-[departure runway].
[departure transition].
[departure end point]
(e.g., KMKC-ALL.WLDCT2.SLN)
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-70 Stored Flight Plan Page - Departure Inserted
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
213
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Arrival (STAR)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR) is loaded at the destination airport in the flight plan. Only one arrival
can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route is defined by selection of an arrival, the transition waypoints,
and a runway.
Destination Airport
EIS
Selected Arrival
Arrivals Available at KCOS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selected Runway
Arrival Waypoint Sequence
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Preview of
Selected Arrival
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-71 Arrival Loading Page - Selecting the Arrival
Loading an arrival procedure into a stored flight plan:
1) Select a stored flight plan from the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
AFCS
2) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘EDIT FLIGHT PLAN’, and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
3) Press the LD STAR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Load Arrival”, and press the ENT Key. The Arrival
Loading Page is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Select an arrival. Press the ENT Key.
5) Select a transition for the selected arrival. Press the ENT Key.
6) Select a runway served by the selected arrival, if required. Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
7) Press the ENT Key to load the selected arrival procedure.
214
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Destination Airport
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected Arrival
Selected Transition
Transitions Available with
DBRY1
EIS
Arrival Waypoint Sequence
Preview of
Selected Arrival
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-72 Arrival Loading Page - Selecting the Transition
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Inserted Arrival Header
- Arrival Identifier:
[arrival airport]-[arrival transition].
[arrival].[arrival runway]
(e.g., KCOS-TBE.DBRY1.ALL)
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-73 Stored Flight Plan Page - Arrival Inserted
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
215
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Approach (APPR)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
An Approach Procedure (APPR) can be loaded at any airport that has an approach available. Only one
approach can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route for a selected approach is defined by designating
transition waypoints.
EIS
Destination Airport
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selected
Approach
Approaches Available at
KCOS
BARO Minimum
Preview of
Selected
Approach
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Approach Waypoint
Sequence
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-74 Approach Loading Page - Selecting the Approach
Loading an approach procedure into a stored flight plan:
1) Select a stored flight plan from the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
AFCS
2) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘EDIT FLIGHT PLAN’, and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
3) Press the LD APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Load Approach”, and press the ENT Key. The
Approach Loading Page is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Select an approach. Press the ENT Key.
5) Select a transition for the selected approach. Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
6) Press the ENT Key to skip setting BARO minimums; or rotate small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’, and press the
ENT Key to enter the minimum altitude using the small FMS Knob or the FMS Control Unit keyboard. Press the
ENT Key.
INDEX
7) Press the ENT Key to load the selected approval procedure.
216
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Destination Airport
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected
Approach
Selected Transition
Preview of
Selected
Approach
EIS
Transitions Available with
Selected Approach
Approach Waypoint
Sequence
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Load Approach?
Figure 5-75 Approach Loading Page - Selecting the Transition
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Inserted Approach Header
- Approach Identifier: [approach
airport].[runway and approach type]
(e.g., KCOS-RNAV 35RGPS LPV)
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-76 Stored Flight Plan Page - Approach Inserted
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
217
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Flight Plan Storage
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Perspective can store up to 99 flight plans, numbered 1 through 99. The active flight plan is erased when
the system is powered off or when another flight plan is activated. Details about each stored flight plan can be
viewed on the Flight Plan Catalog Page and on the Stored Flight Plan Page.
Viewing information about a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
EIS
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
4) The Flight Plan Information is displayed showing departure, destination, total distance, and enroute safe altitude
information for the selected Flight Plan.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Press the EDIT Softkey to open the Stored Flight Plan Page and view the waypoints in the flight plan.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) Press the FMS Knob to exit the Stored Flight Plan Page.
Flight Plan Name
(Comment)
Preview of Selected
Flight Plan
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected Flight Plan
Stored Flight Plan Info
AFCS
- Departure Airport
- Destination Airport
- Total Flight Plan Distance
- Enroute Safe Altitude
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Stored FPL Editing
Softkeys
Figure 5-77 Stored Flight Plan Information
APPENDICES
Storing an active flight plan from the Active Flight Plan Page or the Active Flight Plan Window:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Highlight ‘Store Flight Plan’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. The flight plan is stored in the next available position in the flight
plan list on the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
218
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Sort Flight Plans
The stored flight plans can be sorted alphanumerically based on the flight plan name (comment) assigned
to each flight plan.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Sorting by comment (flight plan name):
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘Sort By Comment’ and press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed.
EIS
4 ) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to change flight plan ordering. To cancel the request, press the CLR
Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Activate a Flight Plan
Activating a stored flight plan erases the active flight plan and replaces it with the flight plan being activated.
Inverting a stored flight plan reverses the waypoint order and activates it.
Activating a stored flight plan on the MFD:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Press the ACTIVE Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Activate Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The
‘Activate Stored Flight Plan?’ window is displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
Inverting and activating a stored flight plan on the MFD:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
AFCS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Press the INVERT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Invert & activate FPL?’, and press the ENT Key.
The ‘Invert and activate stored flight plan?’ window is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
Copy a Flight Plan
APPENDICES
Perspective allows copying a flight plan into a new flight plan memory slot, allowing editing, etc., without
affecting the original flight plan. This can be used to duplicate an existing stored flight plan for use in creating
a modified version of the original stored flight plan.
Copying a stored flight plan on the MFD:
INDEX
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
219
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
3) Press the COPY Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Copy Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Copy
to Flight Plan XX?’ window is displayed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to copy the flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Delete a Stored Flight Plan
Individual or all stored flight plans can be deleted from the system memory.
Deleting a stored flight plan:
EIS
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the DELETE Softkey; press the CLR Key; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’, and press
the ENT Key. The ‘Delete Flight Plan XX?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Note: The option to delete all stored flight plans is not available while the aircraft is in flight.
Deleting all stored flight plans:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘Delete All’ and press the ENT Key. A ‘Delete all flight plans?’ confirmation window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete all flight plans. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
Flight Plan Editing
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The active flight plan or any stored flight plan can be edited. The edits made to the active flight plan affect
navigation as soon as they are entered.
Deleting the Active Flight Plan
Perspective allows deleting an active flight plan. Deleting the active flight plan suspends navigation by the
system.
APPENDICES
Deleting the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Delete all waypoints in flight
plan?’ window is displayed.
INDEX
3) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the active flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR
Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
220
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Deleting Flight Plan Items
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Individual waypoints, entire airways, and entire procedures can be deleted from a flight plan. Some waypoints
in the final approach segment (such as the FAF or MAP) can not be deleted individually. Attempting to delete
a waypoint that is not allowed results in a window displaying ‘Invalid flight plan modification.’
Deleting an individual waypoint from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the waypoint to be deleted.
EIS
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove XXXXX?’ window is displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Deleting an entire airway from the active flight plan:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the white header of the airway to be deleted.
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <airway name>?’ window is displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Deleting an entire procedure from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
AFCS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the white header of the procedure to be deleted.
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
APPENDICES
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu and turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Remove <procedure>’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
INDEX
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
221
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Deleting an individual waypoint from a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
4) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the waypoint to be deleted.
EIS
6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove XXXXX?’ window is displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Deleting an entire airway from a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
4) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the white header of the airway to be deleted.
6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <airway name>?’ window is displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
AFCS
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Deleting an entire procedure from a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
APPENDICES
4) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the white header of the procedure to be deleted.
6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
INDEX
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
222
Or:
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
5) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu and turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Remove <procedure>’.
6) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
EIS
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Changing Flight Plan Comments (Names)
The comment field (or name) of each flight plan can be changed to something that is useful for identification
and sorting.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Changing the active flight plan comment:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the comment field.
3) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the comment.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Changing a stored flight plan comment:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
AFCS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the comment field.
6) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the comment.
APPENDICES
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Along Track Offsets
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
INDEX
A waypoint having an “along track offset” distance from an existing waypoint can be entered into a flight plan.
Along track offset waypoints lie along the path of the existing flight plan, and can be used to make the system
reach a specified altitude before or after reaching the specified flight plan waypoint. Offset distances can be
223
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
entered from 1 to 99 nm in increments of 1 nm. Entering a negative offset distance results in an along track
offset waypoint inserted before the selected waypoint, whereas entering a positive offset distance results in an
along track offset waypoint inserted after the selected waypoint. Multiple offset waypoints are allowed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A waypoint must be adjacent to its parent waypoint in the flight plan, so the system limits the along-track
distance to less than the length of the leg before or after the selected waypoint. If the selected waypoint is the
active waypoint, the distance is limited to less than the distance to go to the active waypoint. Assigning an along
track offset to a leg with indeterminate length is not permitted. An along track offset is not allowed at or after
the final approach fix of an approach.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
An along track offset distance cannot be modified once entered. If the along track offset distance must be
changed, the existing along track offset waypoint must be deleted and a new one created with the new offset
distance.
Along Track Offset
Waypoint and Distance
from Flight Plan Waypoint
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Along Track
Offset Waypoint
and Distance
Figure 5-78 Along Track Offset
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Entering an along track offset distance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the waypoint for the along track offset.
APPENDICES
3) Press the ATK OFST Softkey (MFD only); or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Create ATK Offset Waypoint’, and
press the ENT Key.
4) Enter a positive or negative offset distance in the range of +/- 1 to 99 nm (limited by leg distances).
5) Press the ENT Key to create the offset waypoint.
INDEX
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
224
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Parallel Track
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Parallel Track (PTK) feature allows creation of a parallel course offset of 1 to 50 nm left or right of the
current flight plan. When Parallel Track is activated, the course line drawn on the map pages shows the parallel
course, and waypoint names have a lower case “p” placed after the identifier.
Using direct-to, loading an approach, a holding pattern, or editing and activating the flight plan automatically
cancels Parallel Track. Parallel Track is also cancelled if a course change occurs greater than 120° or the parallel
tracks overlap as a result of the course change.
Note: Vertical navigation is unavailable while the Parallel Track feature is active.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Active Flight Plan prior to Parallel Track
Selecting Parallel
Track
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-79 Active Flight Plan Window - Selecting Parallel Track
AFCS
Activating parallel track:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Parallel Track’, and press the ENT Key. The Parallel Track Window is displayed
with the direction field highlighted.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Left’ or ‘Right’ and press the ENT Key. The ‘DISTANCE’ field is highlighted.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter a distance from 1-99 nm and press the ENT Key. ‘ACTIVATE PARALLEL
TRACK’ is highlighted.
APPENDICES
5) Press the ENT Key to activate parallel track. Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to cancel the parallel track
activation.
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
225
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Offset Direction
Offset Distance
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Activation Prompt
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-80 Parallel Track Window
AFCS
Parallel Track Waypoints
- TIFTO-p
- TOP-p
- ULNAZ-p
- ...
- LAA-p
Activating Parallel Track
affects the entire active
flight segment (e.g.,
enroute)
Parallel Track
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Original Track
INDEX
Figure 5-81 Parallel Track Active
226
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If the parallel track proposed by the offset direction and distance is not allowed by the system, the activation
prompt is displayed, but disabled. Parallel Track cannot be activated if a course is set using direct-to or if the
active leg is the first leg of the departure procedure. Attempting to activate parallel track with these conditions
results in the message ‘Parallel Track Unavailable Invalid Route Geometry’. If an approach leg is active the status
indicates that the system is unable to activate the parallel track with the message ‘Parallel Track Unavailable
Approach Leg Active’. If the offset direction and distance results in an unreasonable route geometry the status
indicates that the system is unable to activate the parallel track because of invalid geometry.
EIS
Subdued Prompt
(Unavailable)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Unavailable Status
Invalid
Geometry
Approach
Active
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-82 Parallel Track Unavailable
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If the active leg is not a track between two fixes (TF) or a course to a fix (DF) leg, the status
indicates that the system is unable to activate the parallel track because parallel track is not available for the
active leg type.
AFCS
Offset Direction &
Distance Subdued
(Unavailable)
Cancel Prompt
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Active Status
APPENDICES
Figure 5-83 Cancelling Parallel Track
Cancelling parallel track:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD)
INDEX
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Parallel Track’, and press the ENT Key. The Parallel Track Window is displayed
with ‘CANCEL PARALLEL TRACK?’ highlighted.
3) Press the ENT Key.
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
227
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Activating a Flight Plan Leg
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight Management
Activating a flight plan leg:
Perspective allows selection of a highlighted leg as the “active leg” (the flight plan leg which is currently
used for navigation guidance).
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD)
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the destination waypoint for the desired leg.
EIS
3) Press the ACT LEG Softkey (MFD only); or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Activate Leg’, and press the ENT Key.
A confirmation window is displayed with ‘ACTIVATE’ highlighted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the flight plan leg. To cancel, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press
the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Selected Destination
Waypoint
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Current
Active Leg
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Activate Leg Softkey
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-84 Active Flight Plan Page - Selecting the Leg Destination Waypoint
228
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
New Active
Flight Plan Leg
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Confirmation Window
Figure 5-85 Active Flight Plan Page - New Active Leg
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Inverting a Flight Plan
Any flight plan may be inverted (reversed) for navigation back to the original departure point.
Inverting the active flight plan:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD)
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Invert Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. An ‘Invert Active Flight Plan?’
confirmation window is displayed.
3) Select ‘OK’.
AFCS
4) Press the ENT Key to invert and activate the active flight plan. To cancel, press the CLR Key, or highlight
‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Inverting and activating a stored flight plan:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be inverted.
APPENDICES
4) Press the INVERT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Invert & Activate Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key.
An ‘Invert and activate stored flight plan?’ confirmation window is displayed.
5) Select ‘OK’.
6) Press the ENT Key to invert and activate the stored flight plan. To cancel, press the CLR Key, or highlight
‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
229
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Flight Plan Views
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Information about flight plans can be viewed in more than one way. The active flight plan can be configured
to show cumulative distance over the length of the flight plan or the distance for each leg of the flight plan;
and the active flight plan can be viewed in a narrow or wide view. In the wide view, additional information is
displayed: Fuel Remaining (FUEL REM), Estimated Time Enroute (ETE), Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA), and
Bearing to the waypoint (BRG).
Switching between leg-to-leg waypoint distance and cumulative waypoint distance:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
EIS
2) Press the VIEW Softkey to display the CUM and LEG-LEG Softkeys.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the CUM Softkey to view cumulative waypoint distance, or press the LEG-LEG Softkey to view leg-to-leg
waypoint distance.
4) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the top level active flight plan softkeys.
Active Flight Plan Cumulative Distance
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Active Flight Plan Leg to Leg Distance
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
WIDE Softkey, NARROW Softkey, LEG-LEG Softkey, CUM Softkey
Figure 5-86 Active Flight Plan - Leg to Leg vs. Cumulative Distance
APPENDICES
Switching between wide and narrow view:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Press the VIEW Softkey to display the WIDE and NARROW Softkeys.
3) Press the WIDE Softkey to display the wide view, or press the NARROW Softkey to display the narrow view.
INDEX
4) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the top level active flight plan softkeys.
230
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Active Flight Plan Narrow View
Active Flight Plan Wide View
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
WIDE Softkey, NARROW Softkey, LEG-LEG Softkey, CUM Softkey
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-87 Active Flight Plan - Wide vs. Narrow View
Collapsing Airways
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Perspective allows airways on the active flight plan to be collapsed or expanded from the Active Flight Plan
Page/Window. When airways have been collapsed, it is indicated on the airway heading.
When airways are collapsed, leg-to-leg computed values such as DIS or ETE shown for the exit waypoint
reflects the total of all the legs on the airway that have been hidden in the collapsed display. The DTK value is
inhibited because it is not usable in this context.
AFCS
The Active Flight Plan Page always keeps the following three waypoints visible: “From” waypoint, “To”
waypoint, and the “Next” waypoint. To prevent one or more of these waypoints from being hidden in a collapsed
airway segment, the airway segment that contains either the “To” or the “Next” waypoint is automatically
expanded. When an airway is loaded, airways are automatically expanded to facilitate flight plan review.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
231
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Q3.FEPOT Airway
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Collapsed View
Expanded View
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-88 Expanded/Collapsed Airways
Collapsing/expanding the airways in the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Collapse Airways’ or ‘Expand Airways’, and press the ENT Key. The airways are
collapsed/expanded.
Closest Point of FPL
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
‘Closest Point of FPL’ calculates the bearing and closest distance at which a flight plan passes a reference
waypoint, and creates a new user waypoint along the flight plan at the location closest to a chosen reference
waypoint.
Determining the closest point along the active flight plan to a selected waypoint:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD)
AFCS
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Closest Point of FPL’’, and press the ENT Key. A window appears with the
reference waypoint field highlighted.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Enter the identifier of the reference waypoint and press the ENT Key. The system displays the bearing (BRG) and
distance (DIS) to the closest point along the flight plan to the selected reference waypoint and creates a user
waypoint at this location. The name for the new user waypoint is derived from the identifier of the reference
waypoint.
232
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.7 Vertical Navigation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Note: Perspective supports vertical navigation for all lateral leg types except for CA, CI, FA, FM, HA, HM, PI,
VA, VD, VI, VR, and VM. Vertical constraints are not retained in stored flight plans.
Current Vertical Navigation Profile
EIS
The Perspective Vertical Navigation (VNV) feature provides vertical profile guidance during the enroute and
teminal phases of flight. Guidance based on specified altitudes at waypoints in the active flight plan or to a
direct-to waypoint is provided. It includes vertical path guidance to a descending path, which is provided as a
linear deviation from the desired path. The desired path is defined by a line joining two waypoints with specified
altitudes or as a vertical angle from a specified waypoint/altitude. The vertical waypoints are integrated into the
active flight plan Both manual and autopilot-coupled guidance are supported.
Current Vertical Navigation Profile
Enabled (valid data)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Disabled (fields dashed)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ENBL VNV Softkey
CNCL VNV Softkey
Figure 5-89 Enabling/Disabling Vertical Navigation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Enabling VNV guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
APPENDICES
2) Press the ENBL VNV Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Enable VNV’, and press the ENT Key. Vertical
navigation is enabled, and vertical guidance begins with the waypoint shown in the CURRENT VNV PROFILE box
(defaults first waypoint in the active flight plan with an altitude enabled for vertical navigation (e.g., HABUK)).
Disabling VNV guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
INDEX
2) Press the CNCL VNV Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Cancel VNV’, and press the ENT Key. Vertical
navigation is disabled.
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
233
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Canceling vertical navigation results in vertical deviation (V DEV), vertical speed required (VS REQ), and time
to top of descent/bottom of descent (TIME TO TOD/BOD) going invalid. The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI)
and Required Vertical Speed Indicator (RVSI) on the PFD are removed, and the V DEV, VS REQ, and TIME TO
TOD items displayed in the CURRENT VNV PROFILE box are dashed. VNV remains disabled until manually
enabled. Vertical guidance in reversionary mode can only be enabled for a direct-to waypoint.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Perspective allows a vertical navigation direct-to to any waypoint in the active flight plan with an altitude
constraint “designated” for vertical guidance. Pressing the VNV Direct-to Softkey on the Active Flight Plan Page
allows the flight plan to be flown, while vertical guidance based on the altitude constraint at the VNV direct-to
waypoint is provided. The altitude change begins immediately and is spread along the flight plan from current
position to the vertical direct-to waypoint, not just along the leg for the direct-to waypoint. A direct-to with
altitude constraint activated by pressing the Direct-to Key also provides vertical guidance, but would bypass
flight plan waypoints between the current position in the flight plan and the direct-to waypoint. A top of descent
(TOD) point is computed based on the default flight path angle; descent begins once the TOD is reached.
Current Vertical Navigation Profile
Current Vertical Navigation Profile
After VNV Direct-to
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Prior to VNV Direct-to
VNV Direct-To Softkey
VNV PROF Softkey
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-90 Vertical Navigation Direct-To
Activating a vertical navigation direct-to:
APPENDICES
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired waypoint.
Note: The selected waypoint must have a designated altitude constraint (light blue number) to be used. If
INDEX
not, the first waypoint in the flight plan with a designated altitude constraint is selected.
3) Select the VNV Direct-To Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘VNV Direct-To’, and press the ENT Key.
An ‘Activate vertical Direct-to to: NNNNNFT at XXXXXX?’ confirmation window is displayed.
234
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4) Press the ENT Key. Vertical guidance begins to the altitude constraint for the selected waypoint.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The vertical navigation profile can be modified by directly entering a vertical speed target (VS TGT) and/or flight
path angle (FPA) in the CURRENT VNV PROFILE box.
Modifying the VS TGT and FPA:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the VNV PROF Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select VNV Profile Window’, and press the ENT
Key. The cursor is now located in the CURRENT VNV PROFILE box.
EIS
3) Turn the FMS Knobs as needed to edit the values.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Altitude Constraints
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Perspective can use altitude constraints associated with lateral waypoints to give guidance for vertical
navigation. These altitudes are, depending on the specific instance, manually entered or retrieved from the
published altitudes in the navigation database. The navigation database only contains altitudes for procedures
that call for “Cross at” altitudes. If the procedure states “Expect to cross at,” then the altitude is not in the
database. In this case the altitude may be entered manually.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Displayed Text
Examples
Cross AT
or ABOVE
5,000 ft
Large White Text
Large Light Blue Text
Cross AT
2,300 ft
Cross AT
or BELOW
3,000 ft
AFCS
Small Light Blue Text
Small Light Blue
Subdued Text
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Altitude Constraint
Examples
Small White Text with
Altitude Restriction Bar
Figure 5-91 Waypoint Altitude Constraints
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
235
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
White Text
Light Blue Text
Light Blue Subdued Text
Large Altitude calculated by the system
Text estimating the altitude of the aircraft as
it passes over the navigation point. This
altitude is provided as a reference and is
not designated to be used in determining
vertical speed and deviation guidance.
Altitude has been entered manually.
Altitude is designated for use in giving
vertical speed and deviation guidance.
Altitude does not match the published
altitude in navigation database or no
published altitude exists.
The system cannot use this
altitude in determining vertical
speed and deviation guidance
because of an invalid constraint
condition
Small
Text
Altitude is designated for use in giving
vertical speed and deviation guidance.
Altitude has been retrieved from the
navigation database or has been entered
manually and matches a published
altitude in the navigation database.
The system cannot use this
altitude in determining vertical
speed and deviation guidance
because of an invalid constraint
condition
Altitude is not designated to be used in
determining vertical speed and deviation
guidance. Altitude has been retrieved
from the navigation database and is
provided as a reference.
Table 5-8 Altitude Constraint Size and Color Coding
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Altitudes associated with approach procedures are “auto-designated”. This means the system automatically
uses the altitudes loaded with the approach for giving vertical speed and deviation guidance. Note that these
altitudes are displayed as blue text up to, but not including the FAF. The FAF is always a “reference only”
altitude and cannot be designated, unless the selected approach does not provide vertical guidance. In this case,
the FAF altitude can be designated.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Altitudes that have been designated for use in vertical guidance can be “un-designated” using the CLR Key.
The altitude is now displayed only as a reference. It is not used to give vertical guidance. Other displayed
altitudes may change due to re-calculations or be rendered invalid as a result of manually changing an altitude
to a non-designated altitude.
Designating a waypoint altitude to be used for vertical guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
AFCS
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter editing mode.
4) Press the ENT Key. The altitude is now shown in blue, indicating it is usable for vertical guidance.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Designating a procedure waypoint altitude to be used for vertical guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude.
APPENDICES
3) Press the ENT Key. The altitude is now shown in blue, indicating it is usable for vertical guidance.
INDEX
Altitude constraints are displayed and entered in feet mean sea level (MSL) values to the nearest hundred. An
altitude constraint in feet above ground level (AGL) format is supported for airports. When a database altitude
restriction is displayed, the system allows entry of a different altitude when creating a waypoint, effectively
overriding the database restriction (only before the FAF). When a database altitude restriction of type “AT or
ABOVE” or “AT or BELOW” is activated, the system uses the “AT” portion of the restriction to define the vertical
profile.
236
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
An altitude constraint is invalid if:
• Meeting the constraint requires the aircraft to climb
• Meeting the constraint requires the maximum flight path angle or maximum vertical speed to be exceeded
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• The altitude constraint results in a TOD behind the aircraft present position
• The constraint is within a leg type for which altitude constraints are not supported
• The altitude constraint is added to the FAF of an approach that provides vertical guidance (i.e., ILS or GPS
WAAS approach)
• The altitude constraint is added to a waypoint past the FAF.
EIS
Entering/modifiying an altitude constraint:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Enter an altitude constraint value using the FMS Knobs. To enter altitudes as a flight level, turn the small
FMS Knob counter-clockwise past zero or clockwise past 9 on the first character, and the system automatically
changes to show units of Flight Level. Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to highlight the first zero and enter
the three digit flight level.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the altitude constraint; if the selected waypoint is an airport, an additional choice
is displayed. Turn the small FMS Knob to choose ‘MSL’ or ‘AGL’, and press the ENT Key to accept the altitude.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Altitude constraints can be modified or deleted after having been added to the flight plan. In the event
an altitude constraint is deleted and the navigation database contains an altitude restriction for the lateral
waypoint, the system displays the altitude restriction from the database provided no predicted altitude
can be provided. The system also provides a way to reinstate a published altitude constraint that has been
edited.
Deleting an altitude constraint provided by the navigation database:
AFCS
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove VNV altitude constraint?’ confirmation window is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Select ‘OK’ and press the ENT Key.
Deleting an altitude constraint that has been manually entered:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
APPENDICES
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT?’ confirmation window is
displayed.
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
INDEX
4) Select ‘REMOVE’ and press the ENT Key. The manually entered altitude is deleted (it is replaced by a system
calculated altitude, if available).
237
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Reverting a manually entered altitude constraint back to the navigation database value:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT?’ confirmation window is
displayed.
4) Select ‘REVERT’ and press the ENT Key. The altitude is changed to the navigation database value.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
EIS
Modifying a system calculated altitude constraint:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
3) Press the CLR Key. An ‘Edit or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT?’ confirmation window is
displayed.
4) Select ‘EDIT’ and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Edit the value using the FMS Knobs, and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
238
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.8 Procedures
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Perspective can access the whole range of instrument procedures available. Departures (DPs), arrivals (STARs),
and non-precision and precision approaches (APPRs) are stored within the database and can be loaded using the
Procedures (PROC) Key.
EIS
The selected procedure for the departure or arrival airport is added to the active flight plan. No waypoints are
required to be in the active flight plan to load procedures; however, if the departure and arrival airport are already
loaded, the procedure loading window defaults to the appropriate airport, saving some time selecting the correct
airport on the Procedure Loading Page. Whenever an approach is selected, the choice to either “load” or “activate”
is given. “Loading” adds the approach to the end of the flight plan without immediately using it for navigation
guidance. This allows continued navigation via the intermediate waypoints in the original flight plan, but keeps
the procedure available on the Active Flight Plan Page for quick activation when needed. “Activating” also adds
the procedure to the end of the flight plan but immediately begins to provide guidance to the first waypoint in
the approach.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Departures
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
A Departure Procedure (DP) is loaded at the departure airport in the flight plan. Only one departure can be
loaded at a time in a flight plan. If a departure is loaded when another departure is already in the active flight
plan, the new departure replaces the previous departure. The route is defined by selection of a departure, the
transition waypoints, and a runway.
Loading a Departure into the Active Flight Plan
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Loading a departure into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
1) Press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘SELECT DEPARTURE’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The Departure Loading Page is displayed.
AFCS
4) Select a departure from the list and press the ENT Key.
5) Select a runway (if required) and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key. ‘LOAD?’ is highlighted.
7) Press the ENT Key to load the departure procedure.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
239
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Available Procedure Actions
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Departure Airport
Loaded Procedures
Departure Choices
Departure Preview
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-92 Departure Selection
Loaded Departure
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected Departure
APPENDICES
Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys
INDEX
Figure 5-93 Departure Loading
240
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Viewing available departures at an airport:
1) From the Airport Information Page (first page in the WPT group), press the DP Softkey. The Departure Information
Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on the Airport information Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob, then turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Departure. The departure is previewed on
the map.
EIS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available departures. Press the ENT Key to select the departure. The cursor
moves to the Runway box. The departure is previewed on the map.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runways. Press the ENT Key to select the runway. The cursor
moves to the Transition box. The departure is previewed on the map.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The cursor
moves to the Sequence box. The departure is previewed on the map.
7) Press the INFO Softkey to return to the Airport Information Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Removing a Departure from the Active Flight Plan
When plans change while flying IFR, departures can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan.
Removing a departure procedure from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Departure’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the departure procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
AFCS
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD)
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the departure header in the active flight plan.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the departure procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
241
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Arrivals
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR) can be loaded at any airport that has one available. Only one arrival
can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. If an arrival is loaded when another arrival is already in the active
flight plan, the new arrival replaces the previous arrival. The route is defined by selection of an arrival, the
transition waypoints, and a runway.
Loading an Arrival into the Active Flight Plan
Loading an arrival into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
EIS
1) Press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘SELECT ARRIVAL’.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Select an arrival from the list and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the ENT Key. The Arrival Loading Page is displayed.
8) Press the ENT Key to load the arrival procedure.
6) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key.
7) Select a runway (if required) and press the ENT Key. ‘LOAD?’ is highlighted.
Available Procedure Actions
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Destination Airport
Loaded Procedures
Arrival Preview
Arrival Choices
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-94 Arrival Selection
242
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selected Arrival
Loaded Arrival
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-95 Arrival Loading
Viewing available arrivals at an airport:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) From the Airport Information Page (first page in the WPT group), select the STAR Softkey. The Arrival Information
Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on the Airport Information Page.
2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob, then turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Arrival. The arrival is previewed on the
map.
AFCS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available arrivals. Press the ENT Key to select the arrival. The cursor moves
to the Transition box. The arrival is previewed on the map.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The cursor
moves to the Runway box. The arrival is previewed on the map.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runways. Press the ENT Key to select the runway. The cursor
moves to the Sequence box. The arrival is previewed on the map.
7) Press the INFO Softkey to return to the Airport Information Page.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
243
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Removing an Arrival from the Active Flight Plan
When plans change while flying IFR, arrivals can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Removing an arrival from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD)
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Arrival’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the arrival procedure.
EIS
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
Or:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD)
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the arrival header in the active flight plan.
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the arrival procedure.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
Approaches
NOTE: If certain GPS parameters (WAAS, RAIM, etc.) are not available, some published approach procedures
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
for the desired airport may not be displayed in the list of available approaches.
AFCS
An Approach Procedure (APPR) can be loaded at any airport that has one available, and provides guidance
for non-precision and precision approaches to airports with published instrument approach procedures.
Only one approach can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. If an approach is loaded when another approach
is already in the active flight plan, the new approach replaces the previous approach. The route is defined by
selection of an approach and the transition waypoints.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Whenever an approach is selected, the choice to either “load” or “activate” is given. “Loading” adds the
approach to the end of the flight plan without immediately using it for navigation guidance. This allows
continued navigation via the intermediate waypoints in the original flight plan, but keeps the procedure
available on the Active Flight Plan Page for quick activation when needed. “Activating” also adds the
procedure to the end of the flight plan but immediately begins to provide guidance to the first waypoint in
the approach.
INDEX
APPENDICES
When selecting an approach, a “GPS” designation to the right of the procedure name indicates the procedure
can be flown using the GPS receiver. Some procedures do not have this designation, meaning the GPS
receiver can be used for supplemental navigation guidance only. If the GPS receiver cannot be used for
primary guidance, the appropriate navigation receiver must be used for the selected approach (e.g., VOR or
ILS). The final course segment of ILS approaches, for example, must be flown by tuning the NAV receiver to
the proper frequency and selecting that NAV receiver on the CDI.
244
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Example on HSI
EIS
Approach Type
- LNAV
- LNAV+V
- L/VNAV
- LPV
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
HSI Annunciation
Description
LNAV
GPS approach using published LNAV minima
LNAV+V
GPS approach using published LNAV minima.
Advisory vertical guidance is provided
L/VNAV
GPS approach using published LNAV/VNAV
minima
LPV
GPS approach using published LPV minima
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Perspective WAAS GPS allows for flying LNAV, LNAV/VNAV, and LPV approaches according to the published
chart. LNAV+V is a standard LNAV approach with advisory vertical guidance provided for assistance in
maintaining a constant vertical glidepath similar to an ILS glideslope on approach. This guidance is displayed
on the PFD in the same location as the ILS glideslope using a magenta diamond. In all cases where LNAV+V is
indicated by the system during an approach, LNAV minima are used. The active approach type is annunciated
on the HSI as shown in the following table:
Table 5-9 Approach Types
Loading an Approach into the Active Flight Plan
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Loading an approach into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
1) Press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘SELECT APPROACH’, and press the ENT Key. The Approach Loading Page is displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Select an approach from the list and press the ENT Key.
4) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key.
5) Barometric Minimums
a) To set ‘MINIMUMS’, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’, and press the ENT Key. Turn the small FMS
Knob to select the altitude, and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
Or:
b) To skip setting minimums, press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Press the ENT Key with ‘LOAD?’ highlighted to load the arrival procedure; or turn the large FMS Knob to
highlight ‘ACTIVATE’ and press the ENT Key to load and activate the approach procedure.
NOTE: When GPS is not approved for the selected final approach course, the message ‘NOT APPROVED
APPENDICES
FOR GPS’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to the approach, but the HSI must to be switched to a NAV
receiver to fly the final course of the approach.
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
245
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Available Procedure Actions
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Destination Airport
Loaded Procedures
Approach Preview
Approach Choices
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-96 Approach Selection
Loaded Approach
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected Approach
APPENDICES
Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys
LOAD or ACTIVATE? Annunciation
INDEX
Figure 5-97 Approach Loading
246
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Viewing available approaches at an airport:
1) From the Airport Information Page (first page in the WPT group), press the APR Softkey. The Departure
Information Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on the Airport information Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob, then turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Approach. The approach is previewed on
the map.
EIS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available approaches. Press the ENT Key to select the approach. The
cursor moves to the Runway box. The approach is previewed on the map.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runways. Press the ENT Key to select the runway. The cursor
moves to the Transition box. The approach is previewed on the map.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The cursor
moves to the Sequence box. The approach is previewed on the map.
7) Press the INFO Softkey to return to the Airport Information Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Loading an approach into the active flight plan from the Nearest Airport Page:
1) Select the Nearest Airports Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob, then turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired nearest airport. The airport is
previewed on the map.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Approach Window’, and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired approach.
5) Press the LD APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Load Approach’, and press the ENT Key. The
Approach Loading Page is displayed with the transitions field highlighted.
6) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired transition, and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
7) Barometric Minimums
a) To set ‘MINIMUMS’, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’, and press the ENT Key. Turn the small FMS
Knob to select the altitude, and press the ENT Key. The ‘LOAD?’ field is highlighted.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Or:
b) To skip setting minimums, press the ENT Key. The ‘LOAD?’ field is highlighted.
APPENDICES
8) Press the ENT Key with ‘LOAD?’ highlighted to load the arrival procedure; or turn the large FMS Knob to
highlight ‘ACTIVATE’ and press the ENT Key to load and activate the approach procedure. The system continues
navigating the current flight plan until the approach is activated. When GPS is not approved for the selected
final approach course, the message ‘NOT APPROVED FOR GPS’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to the
approach, but the HSI must to be switched to a NAV receiver to fly the final course of the approach.
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
247
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Activating an Approach
A previously loaded approach can be activated from the Procedures Window.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Activating a previously loaded approach:
1) Press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed with ‘Activate Approach’ highlighted.
2) Press the ENT Key to activate the approach.
EIS
In many cases, it may be easiest to “load” the full approach while still some distance away, enroute to the
destination airport. Later, if vectored to final, use the steps above to select ‘Activate Vector-To-Final’ — which
makes the inbound course to the FAF waypoint active.
Activating a previously loaded approach with vectors to final:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the PROC Key to display the Procedures Window.
2) Highlight ‘ACTIVATE VECTOR-TO-FINAL’ and press the ENT Key.
Loading and activating an approach using the MENU Key:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) From the Approach Loading Page, press the MENU Key. The page menu is displayed with ‘Load & Activate
Approach’ highlighted.
2) Press the ENT Key. When GPS is not approved for the selected final approach course, the message ‘NOT
APPROVED FOR GPS’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to the approach, but the HSI must to be switched to
a NAV receiver to fly the final course of the approach.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Removing an Approach from the Active Flight Plan
When plans change while flying IFR, approaches can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan.
Removing an approach from the active flight plan:
AFCS
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD)
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Approach’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the approach procedure.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD)
APPENDICES
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the approach header in the active flight plan.
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the approach procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
248
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Missed Approach
Activating a missed approach in the active flight plan:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Press the PROC Key.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘ACTIVATE MISSED APPROACH’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The aircraft automatically sequences to the MAHP.
Or:
Press the Go-Around Button.
EIS
Course To Altitude
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
In this missed approach procedure, the altitude immediately following the MAP (in this case ‘6368ft’) is
not part of the published procedure. It is simply a Course to Altitude (CA) leg which guides the aircraft along
the runway centerline until the altitude required to safely make the first turn toward the MAHP is exceeded.
This altitude is provided by Jeppesen, and may be below, equal to, or above the published minimums for
this approach. In this case, if the aircraft altitude is below the specified altitude (6,368 feet) after crossing
the MAP, a direct-to is established to provide a course on runway heading until an altitude of 6,368 feet is
reached. After reaching 6,368 feet, a direct-to is established to the published MAHP (in this case MOGAL).
If the aircraft altitude is above the specified altitude after crossing the MAP, a direct-to is established to the
published fix (MOGAL) to begin the missed approach procedure.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
In some missed approach procedures this Course to Altitude leg may be part of the published procedure.
For example, a procedure may dictate a climb to 5,500 feet, then turn left and proceed to the Missed Approach
Hold Point (MAHP). In this case, the altitude would appear in the list of waypoints as ‘5500ft’. Again, if the
aircraft altitude is lower than the prescribed altitude, a direct-to is established on a Course to Altitude leg
when the missed approach procedure is activated.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Course to Altitude Leg
APPENDICES
Figure 5-98 Course to Altitude
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
249
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
5.9 Trip Planning
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Perspective allows the pilot to view trip planning information, fuel information, and other information for
a specified flight plan or flight plan leg based on automatic data, or based on manually entered data. Weight
planning is also available, based on manually entered fuel data and the active flight plan (to estimate remaining
fuel).
Trip Planning
EIS
All of the input of data needed for calculation and viewing of the statistics is done on the Trip Planning Page
located in the AUX Page Group.
Selected Flight Plan Segment
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- FPL Number/Cumulative Legs (CUM or REM) or Leg Number (NN)
- Waypoints Defining Selected Flight Plan/Flight Plan Leg
Trip Planning Page Mode
- Automatic/Manual
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Preview of Selected
Flight Plan/
Flight Plan Leg
Trip Input Data (sensor/pilot)
- Departure Time (local)
- Ground Speed
- Fuel Flow
- Fuel On Board Aircraft
- Calibrated Airspeed
- Indicated Altitude
- Barometric Pressure
- Total Air Temperature
Trip Statistics
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Desired Track Distance Est. Time Enroute Est. Time of Arrival Enroute Safe Altitude Sunrise Time (local) Sunset Time (local) -
Other Statistics
- Density Altitude
- True Airspeed (TAS)
AFCS
Fuel Statistics
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Efficiency Total Endurance Remaining Fuel Remaining Endurance Fuel Required Total Range -
Softkeys
- Automatic/Manual Page Mode
- Flight Plan/Waypoint Mode
Figure 5-99 Trip Planning Page
APPENDICES
The trip planning inputs are based on sensor inputs (automatic page mode) or on pilot inputs (manual page
mode). Some additional explanation of the sources for some of the inputs is as follows:
• Departure time (DEP TIME) - This defaults to the current time in automatic page mode. The computations
are from the aircraft present position, so the aircraft is always just departing.
• Calibrated airspeed (CALIBRATED AS) - The primary source is from the air data system, and the secondary
source of information is GPS ground speed.
INDEX
• Indicated altitude (IND ALTITUDE) - The primary source is the barometric altitude, and the secondary source
of information is GPS altitude.
250
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Trip Statistics
The trip statistics are calculated based on the selected starting and ending waypoints and the trip planning
inputs.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In flight plan mode (FPL) with a stored flight plan selected (NN), and the entire flight plan (CUM) selected,
the waypoints are the starting and ending waypoints of the selected flight plan.
In flight plan mode (FPL) with a stored flight plan selected (NN), and a specific leg (NN) selected, the
waypoints are the endpoints of the selected leg.
EIS
In flight plan mode (FPL) with the active flight plan selected (00), and the remaining flight plan (REM)
selected, the ‘from’ waypoint is the present position of the aircraft and the ‘to’ waypoint is the endpoint of the
active flight plan.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
In flight plan mode (FPL) with the active flight plan selected (00), and a specific leg (NN) selected, the
‘from’ waypoint is the current aircraft position and the ‘to’ waypoint is the endpoint of the selected leg.
In waypoint (WPTS) mode these are manually selected waypoints (if there is an active flight plan, these
default to the endpoints of the active leg).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Some of the calculated trip statistics are dashed when the selected leg of the active flight plan has already
been flown.
• Desired Track (DTK) - DTK is shown as nnn° and is the desired track between the selected waypoints. It is dashed unless only a single leg is selected.
• Distance (DIS) - The distance is shown in tenths of units up to 99.9, and in whole units up to 9999. HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Estimated time enroute (ETE) - ETE is shown as hours:minutes until less than an hour, then it is shown
as minutes:seconds.
• Estimated time of arrival (ETA) - ETA is shown as hours:minutes and is the local time at the
destination.
- If in waypoint mode then the ETA is the ETE added to the departure time.
AFCS
- If a flight plan other than the active flight plan is selected it shows the ETA by adding to the departure
time all of the ETEs of the legs up to and including the selected leg. If the entire flight plan is selected,
then the ETA is calculated as if the last leg of the flight plan was selected.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- If the active flight plan is selected the ETA reflects the current position of the aircraft and the current
leg being flown. The ETA is calculated by adding to the current time the ETEs of the current leg up to
and including the selected leg. If the entire flight plan is selected, then the ETA is calculated as if the
last leg of the flight plan was selected.
APPENDICES
• Enroute safe altitude (ESA) - The ESA is shown as nnnnnFT
• Destination sunrise and sunset times (SUNRISE, SUNSET) - These times are shown as hours:minutes
and are the local time at the destination.
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
251
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Fuel Statistics
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The fuel statistics are calculated based on the selected starting and ending waypoints and the trip planning
inputs. Some of the calculated trip statistics are dashed when the selected leg of the active flight plan has
already been flown.
• Fuel efficiency (EFFICIENCY) - This value is calculated by dividing the current ground speed by the
current fuel flow.
• Time of fuel endurance (TOTAL ENDUR) - This time is shown as hours:minutes. This value is obtained
by dividing the amount of fuel on board by the current fuel flow.
EIS
• Fuel on board upon reaching end of selected leg (REM FUEL) - This value is calculated by taking the
amount of fuel onboard and subtracting the fuel required for trip.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Fuel endurance remaining at end of selected leg (REM ENDUR) - This value is calculated by subtracting
the time of fuel endurance by the amount of time to go.
• Fuel required for trip (FUEL REQ) - This value is calculated by multiplying the time to go by the fuel
flow.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Total range at entered fuel flow (TOTAL RANGE) - This value is calculated by multiplying the time of fuel
endurance by the ground speed.
Other Statistics
These statistics are calculated based on the system sensor inputs or the manual trip planning inputs.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Density altitude (DENSITY ALT)
• True airspeed (TRUE AIRSPEED)
The pilot may select automatic (AUTO) or manual (MANUAL) page mode, and flight plan (FPL) or waypoint
(WPTS) mode. In automatic page mode, only the FPL, LEG, or waypoint IDs are editable (based on FPL/WPTS
selection).
AFCS
Selected Flight Plan NN -
Selected Leg(s)
00 is Active FPL
01-99 are Stored FPLs
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Starting and Ending Waypoint of
Selected Flight Plan Segment
Stored Flight Plan
- CUM: Beginning to End of FPL
- NN: Beginning to End of Selected Leg
Active Flight Plan
- REM: Pres. Pos. to End of FPL
- NN: Pres. Pos. to End of Selected Leg
APPENDICES
Figure 5-100 Trip Planning Page - Flight Plan Mode
Selected Flight Plan
Selected Leg(s)
Not Available
Not Available
INDEX
Selected Starting and Ending Waypoints
Figure 5-101 Trip Planning Page - Waypoint Mode
252
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting automatic or manual page mode:
Press the AUTO Softkey or the MANUAL Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Auto Mode’ or ‘Manual
Mode’, and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selecting flight plan or waypoint mode:
Press the FPL Softkey or the WPTS Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Flight Plan Mode’ or ‘Waypoints
Mode’, and press the ENT Key.
Selecting a flight plan and leg for trip statistics:
EIS
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor in the flight plan number field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired flight plan number.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘CUM’ or ‘REM’. The statistics for each leg can be viewed by turning the
small FMS Knob to select the desired leg. The Inset Map also displays the selected data.
Selecting waypoints for waypoint mode:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the WPTS Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Waypoints Mode’, and press the ENT Key. The
cursor is positioned in the waypoint field directly below the FPL field.
2) Turn the FMS knobs to select the desired waypoint (or select from the Page Menu ‘Set WPT to Present Position’
if that is what is desired), and press the ENT Key. The cursor moves to the second waypoint field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Turn the FMS knobs to select the desired waypoint, and press the ENT Key. The statistics for the selected leg
are displayed.
In manual page mode, the other eight trip input data fields must be entered by the pilot, in addition to flight
plan and leg selection.
Entering manual data for trip statistics calculations:
AFCS
1) Press the MANUAL Softkey or select ‘Manual Mode’ from the Page Menu, and press the ENT Key. The cursor
may now be positioned in any field in the top right two boxes.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the FMS Knobs to move the cursor onto the DEP TIME field and enter the desired value. Press the ENT Key.
The statistics are calculated using the new value and the cursor moves to the next entry field. Repeat until all
desired values have been entered.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
253
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
5.10 RAIM Prediction
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
RAIM (Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring) is a GPS receiver function that performs a consistency
check on all tracked satellites. RAIM ensures that the available satellite geometry allows the receiver to calculate
a position within a specified RAIM protection limit (2.0 nm for oceanic, 2.0 nm for enroute, 1.0 nm for terminal,
and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches). During oceanic, enroute, and terminal phases of flight, RAIM is
available nearly 100% of the time. The RAIM prediction function also indicates whether RAIM is available at a
specified date and time. RAIM computations predict satellite coverage within ±15 min of the specified arrival
date and time. Because of the tighter protection limit on approaches, there may be times when RAIM is not
available. RAIM prediction must be initiated manually if there is concern over WAAS coverage at the destination
or some other reason that compromises navigation precision. If RAIM is not predicted to be available for the
final approach course, the approach does not become active. If RAIM is not available when crossing the FAF, the
missed approach procedure must be flown.
RAIM PREDICTION Box
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Prediction Waypoint
- Arrival Time
- Arrival Date
- RAIM Status
RAIM Softkey
SBAS Softkey
(displays SBAS Selection)
(displays RAIM
PREDICTION)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-102 RAIM Prediction
APPENDICES
Predicting RAIM availability at a selected waypoint:
1) Select the AUX-GPS Status Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob. The RAIM Prediction ‘WAYPOINT’ field is highlighted.
INDEX
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window with a
waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, or airway waypoints).
254
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint; or select a waypoint from the submenu of
waypoints and press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
5) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
6) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
7) Press the ENT Key with ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’ highlighted to begin the computation.
Predicting RAIM availability at the aircraft present position:
1) Select the AUX-GPS Status Page.
EIS
2) Press the FMS Knob. The RAIM Prediction ‘WAYPOINT’ field is highlighted.
3) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Set WPT to Present Position’, and press the ENT Key.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
6) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
7) Press the ENT Key with ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’ highlighted to begin the computation.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Status of the RAIM computation for the selected waypoint, time, and date is displayed at the bottom of the
RAIM PREDICTION Box as follows:
• ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’ - RAIM has not been computed.
• ‘COMPUTING AVAILABILITY’ - RAIM calculation is in progress.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• ‘RAIM AVAILABLE’ - RAIM is predicted to be available.
• ‘RAIM NOT AVAILABLE’ - RAIM is predicted to be unavailable.
The Satellite Based Augmentation System (SBAS) provides increased navigation accuracy when available. SBAS
can be enabled or disabled manually on the GPS Status Page.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
255
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SBAS Status
SBAS SELECTION Box
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
- WAAS Enable/Disable
RAIM Softkey
SBAS Softkey
(displays SBAS Selection)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
(displays RAIM
PREDICTION)
Figure 5-103 SBAS Display - Active
Enabling/Disabling SBAS:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Select the AUX-GPS Status Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob. The SBAS SELECTION ‘WAAS’ field is highlighted.
AFCS
3) Press the ENT Key to disable SBAS. Press the ENT Key again to enable SBAS.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
SBAS Status
SBAS SELECTION Box
APPENDICES
- WAAS Enable/Disable
INDEX
RAIM Softkey
SBAS Softkey
(displays SBAS Selection)
(displays RAIM
PREDICTION)
Figure 5-104 SBAS Display - Disabled
256
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.11 Navigating a Flight Plan
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following discussion is an example of navigating a flight plan with the WAAS capable GPS system while
Perspective provides vertical guidance through descents. A lateral flight plan (LNAV) would be navigated in much
the same way, but would not include vertical guidance when the final approach course is active.
nOTE: The following example flight plan is for instructional purposes only. All database information depicted
should be considered not current.
EIS
The example is a flight plan from KMKC to KCOS filed using the TIFTO2 departure, various Victor Airways,
and the DBRY1 arrival with the transition at TBE. The flight plan includes an enroute altitude of 12,000 feet, an
LPV (WAAS) approach selected for runway 35R, and a missed approach executed at the Missed Approach Point
(MAP). A few enroute changes are demonstrated.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Prior to departure, the TIFTO2 departure, the airways, and the DBRY1 arrival at KCOS are loaded. See the
Procedures section for loading departures and arrivals. Note the magenta arrow in Figure 5-105 indicating the
active departure leg.
After takeoff, ATC assigns a heading of 240º.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Figure 5-105 shows the aircraft on the assigned heading of 240º. ‘TERM’ (Terminal) is the current CDI flight
phase displayed on the HSI indicating 1.0 nm CDI scaling.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-105 Assigned Heading of 240º
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
257
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) ATC now assigns routing to join V4. A heading of 290º is assigned to intercept V4. The aircraft turns to heading
290° as seen in Figure 5-106.
Figure 5-106 Assigned Heading of 290º
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Enter V4 into the flight plan.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
258
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
b) The desired entry point for V4 (TOP) must be entered. Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight
plan insertion point (SLN) as shown in Figure 5-107. When the V4 entry point (TOP) is inserted, it is placed
immediately above the highlighted waypoint (SLN).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-107 Begin Adding V4 to the Flight Plan
c) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. Enter the desired entry point for V4,
Topeka VOR (TOP), as shown in Figure 5-108.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-108 Entering V4 Entry Point
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
259
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
d) Press the ENT Key. TOP is inserted into the flight plan as in Figure 5-109.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-109 TOP Inserted into the Flight Plan
e) With SLN still highlighted as in Figure 5-109, turn the small FMS Knob clockwise. The Waypoint Information
Page is displayed and the LD AIRWY Softkey is now available.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
f) Press the LD AIRWY Softkey to display the list of available airways for TOP as seen in Figure 5-110.
Figure 5-110 List of Available Airways for TOP
INDEX
g) Turn either FMS Knob to highlight V4 in the list as seen in Figure 5-110.
260
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
h) Press the ENT Key. The list of available exits for V4 is now displayed as in Figure 5-111.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-111 List of Available Exits for V4
i) If necessary, turn either FMS Knob to select the desired exit. In this case Salina VOR (SLN) is selected as in
Figure 5-111.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
j) Press the ENT Key. The selected airway and exit are displayed, and the prompt “LOAD?” highlighted as in
Figure 5-112.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-112 Ready to Load V4
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
INDEX
k) Press the ENT Key.
261
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
l) V4 is now loaded into the flight plan as shown in Figure 5-113.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-113 V4 is Loaded in the Flight Plan
5) Making V4 the active leg of the flight plan.
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
b) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight SLN. The TO waypoint of the leg is selected in order to activate the leg.
AFCS
c) Press the ACT LEG Softkey. The confirmation window is now displayed as in Figure 5-114. Note the TOP to
SLN leg is actually part of V4.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-114 Comfirm Active Leg
262
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
d) Verify the displayed leg is the desired leg and press the ENT Key. Note in Figure 5-115, the magenta arrow in
the flight plan window and magenta line on the map indicating V4 is now the active flight plan leg. Note the
phase of flight remained in Terminal (TERM) mode up to this point because a departure leg was active. Since a
leg after the departure is now active, the current CDI flight phase is ENR (Enroute) and CDI scaling has changed
to 2.0 nm.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-115 V4 Now Active Leg
6) The aircraft continues on heading 290º. When crosstrack distance is less than 2.0 nm, the XTK disappears from
the HSI and the CDI is positioned on the last dot indicating a 2.0 nm distance from the centerline of the next
course.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
263
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
7) As the CDI approaches center, the aircraft turns onto the active leg as seen in Figure 5-116.
Figure 5-116 Turn on to Active Leg
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) At SLN, Victor Airway 244 (V244) is intercepted. Turn prompts are displayed in the PFD Navigation Status Box
as seen in Figure 5-117.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-117 Turn to Intercept V244
264
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
9) As seen in Figure 5-118, V244 is now the active flight plan leg.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-118 V244 Now Active Leg
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
265
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
10) At Lamar VOR (LAA) V263 is intercepted. See Figure 5-119.
Figure 5-119 HYS to LAA Leg Active
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
11) ATC grants clearance to proceed direct to the OPSHN intersection to begin the arrival procedure. ATC advises
to expect an altitude of 10,000 feet at OPSHN.
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
b) Turn the large FMS Knob to select OPSHN in the flight plan list.
) Key. The Direct-to Window is now displayed as shown in Figure 5-120.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
c) Press the Direct-to (
Figure 5-120 Direct To OPSHN
266
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
d) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the VNV altitude field as shown in Figure 5-121.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-121 Enter VNV Altitude
e) An altitude of 10,000 feet is entered as requested by ATC.
f) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed in the VNV offset field as shown in Figure 5-122.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-122 Enter VNV Offset Distance
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
INDEX
g) Enter the offset, or distance from the waypoint at which to reach the selected altitude. In this case, three
miles prior to OPSHN is entered. In other words, the system gives vertical guidance so the aircraft arrives at an
altitude of 10,000 feet three miles prior to OPSHN.
267
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
h) Press the ENT Key twice to activate the direct-to. Note, in Figure 5-123, the magenta arrow indicating the directto OPSHN after the offset waypoint for OPSHN. The preceding offset waypoint indicates the offset distance
and altitude that were previously entered. The remaining waypoints in the loaded arrival procedure have no
database specified altitudes, therefore, dashes are displayed. Keep the CDI centered and maintain a track along
the magenta line to OPSHN.
Note the Direct-to waypoint is within the loaded arrival procedure, therefore, phase of flight scaling for theCDI
changes to Terminal Mode and is annunciated by displaying ‘TERM’ on the HSI.
NOTE: If the loaded arrival procedure has waypoints with altitude constraints retrieved from the database
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
to be used as is, the altitude must be manually accepted by placing the cursor over the desired altitude,
then pressing the ENT Key. The altitude is now displayed as light blue meaning it is used by the system to
determine vertical speed and deviation guidance.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-123 Direct-to Active
12) The aircraft is proceeding to OPSHN. The expected approach is the RNAV LPV approach to runway 35R, so it is
selected.
INDEX
APPENDICES
a) Press the PROC Key to display the Procedures Window.
268
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
b) ‘SELECT APPROACH’ should be highlighted as shown in Figure 5-124.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-124 Procedures Window
c) Press the ENT Key. A list of available approaches for the destination airport is displayed as in Figure 5-125.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-125 List of Available Approaches
d) Turn either FMS Knob to select the LPV approach for 35R as shown in Figure 5-125.
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
269
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
e) Press the ENT Key. A list of available transitions for the selected approach is displayed as in Figure 5-126.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
f) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired transition. In this case, the Initial Approach Fix (IAF) at HABUK is
used.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-126 List of Available Transitions
To set ‘MINIMUMS’, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’, and press the ENT Key. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the altitude, and press the ENT Key.
g) Press the ENT Key.
h) Barometric Minimums
Or:
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
To skip setting minimums, press the ENT Key.
270
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-127 Barometric Minimums Set
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
i) With ‘LOAD?’ highlighted, again press the ENT Key. The selected approach is added to the flight plan as seen
in Figure 5-128.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-128 Loaded Approach
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
271
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
13) Note the altitude constraints associated with each of the approach waypoints as seen in Figure 5-129. These
altitudes are loaded from the database and are displayed as light blue text, indicating these values are
“designated” for use in computing vertical deviation guidance.
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Note: To no longer use the displayed altitude for calculating vertical deviation guidance, perform the
following:
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
b) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired altitude.
c) Press the CLR Key.
d) Press the FMS Knob to deactivate the cursor.
After making the altitude “non-designated”, it is displayed as white text.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Altitude constraint values associated with the Final Approach Fix (FAF) and waypoints beyond the FAF cannot be
designated for vertical guidance. These altitude values are always displayed as white text, as in Figure 5-129.
Vertical guidance from the FAF and on to the Missed Approach Point (MAP) is given using the WAAS GPS
altitude source, therefore, the displayed altitude values are for reference only.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-129 Vertical Guidance is Active to the FAF
272
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
14) As the aircraft approaches OPSHN, it may be desirable to adjust the speed, or steepness of the upcoming
descent. The default Flight Path Angle (FPA) is -3.0 degrees and a required vertical speed is computed to
maintain the -3.0 FPA. To change the vertical flight path, perform the following steps.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
a) Press the VNV PROF Softkey to place the cursor in the target vertical speed field (VS TGT) as shown in Figure
5-130.
b) At this point, the descent vertical speed can be selected, or the FPA can be selected. Turn the large FMS Knob
to select the desired selection field, then turn the small FMS Knob to enter the desired value.
EIS
Note the information now displayed in the ‘CURRENT VNV PROFILE’ box. Also, note the offset waypoint (orange
box) and gray circle are now displayed on the map. The gray circle marks the Top of Descent (TOD). In this
example, vertical guidance is provided at the TOD that results in a -3.0 degree FPA descent to an altitude of
10,000 feet upon reaching the offset waypoint.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 5-130 Adjusting the Descent
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
c) Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
273
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
15) As seen in Figure 5-131, the aircraft is approaching TOD. Note the target vertical speed required to reach the
selected altitude. The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI) and the Required Vertical Speed Indicator (RVSI) are
now displayed on the PFD as shown in Figure 5-132. When the aircraft is within one minute of the TOD, it is
annunciated as shown in Figure 5-132, and an aural alert ‘Vertical track’ will be heard.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-131 Approaching Top of Descent (TOD)
AFCS
Target Altitude
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Vertical Deviation
Indicator (VDI)
APPENDICES
Required Vertical
Speed Indicator
(RVSI)
INDEX
Figure 5-132 VDI & RVSI Upon Reaching Top of Descent (TOD)
274
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
16) Upon reaching TOD, a descent vertical speed is established which places the VSI pointer in line with the RVSI as
shown in Figure 5-133.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Keep Vertical Deviation
Indicator Centered
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Align Actual Vertical Speed
with
Required Vertical Speed
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-133 VDI & RVSI Showing Correctly Established Descent
17) When the aircraft is one minute from the bottom of descent (BOD) it is annunciated as shown in Figure 5-134.
Upon reaching the offset waypoint for OPSHN, the aircraft is at 10,000 feet.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-134 Approaching Bottom of Descent (BOD) at OPSHN Offset Waypoint
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
275
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
18) The aircraft is approaching OPSHN. The upcoming turn and next heading are annunciated at the top left of the
PFD as seen in Figure 5-135. Initiate the turn and maneuver the aircraft on a track through the turn radius to
intercept the magenta line for the OPSHN to FSHER leg and center the CDI.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-135 Turn to intercept OPSHN to FSHER Leg
276
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
19) After passing OPSHN, the next leg of the arrival turns magenta as shown in Figure 5-136. The magenta arrow
in the flight plan list now indicates the OPSHN to FSHER leg of the arrival procedure is now active.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-136 Tracking the OPSHN to FSHER Leg
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
20) The flight continues through the arrival procedure to PYNON (see Figure 5-137). At a point 31 nm from the
destination airport, the phase of flight scaling for the CDI changes to Terminal Mode and is annunciated by
displaying ‘TERM’ on the HSI.
A descent to HABUK is in the next leg. Note the TOD point on the map. Annunciations for the upcoming turn
and descent, as well as the VDI and RVSI, appear on the PFD as the flight progresses.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
277
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
INDEX
Figure 5-137 Approaching PYNON
278
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
21) Upon passing PYNON the approach procedure automatically becomes active. The approach may be activated
at any point to proceed directly to the IAF. In this example, the aircraft has progressed through the final
waypoint of the arrival and the flight plan has automatically sequenced to the IAF as the active leg, activating
the approach procedure (see Figure 5-138).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-138 Approach is Now Active
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Note: To manually activate the approach procedure, perform the following steps:
a) Press the PROC Key.
b) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘ACTIVATE APPROACH’ as shown in Figure 5-139.
AFCS
c) Press the ENT Key to activate the approach.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-139 Manually Activate Approach
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
279
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
22) The IAF is the next waypoint. At the TOD, establish a descent vertical speed as previously discussed in Step 16.
The aircraft altitude is 9,000 feet upon reaching HABUK.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-140 Descending Turn to the Initial Approach Fix (IAF)
280
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
23) After crossing FALUR the next waypoint is the FAF. The flight phase changes to LPV on the HSI indicating the
current phase of flight is in Approach Mode and the approach type is LPV. CDI scaling changes accordingly and is
used much like a localizer when flying an ILS approach. The RVSI is no longer displayed and the VDI changes to
the Glidepath Indicator (as shown in Figure 5-141) when the final approach course becomes active.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-141 Descending to the FAF
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The descent continues through the FAF (CEGIX) using the Glidepath Indicator, as one would use a glideslope
indicator, to obtain an altitude “AT” 7,800 feet at the FAF. Note the altitude restriction lines over and under (At)
the altitude in the ‘ALT’ field in Figure 5-141.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
281
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
24) After crossing CEGIX, the aircraft continues following the glidepath to maintain the descent to “AT or ABOVE”
6,370 feet at the Missed Approach Point (MAP) (RW35R) as seen in Figure 5-142.
Figure 5-142 Descending to the Missed Approach Point
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
In this missed approach procedure, the altitude immediately following the MAP (in this case ‘6368ft’) is not part
of the published procedure. It is simply a Course to Altitude (CA) leg which guides the aircraft along the runway
centerline until the altitude required to safely make the first turn toward the MAHP is exceeded. This altitude
is provided by Jeppesen, and may be below, equal to, or above the published minimums for this approach. In
this case, if the aircraft altitude is below the specified altitude (6,368 feet) after crossing the MAP, a direct-to
is established to provide a course on runway heading until an altitude of 6,368 feet is reached. After reaching
6,368 feet, a direct-to is established to the published MAHP (in this case MOGAL). If the aircraft altitude is
above the specified altitude after crossing the MAP, a direct-to is established to the published fix (MOGAL) to
begin the missed approach procedure.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
In some missed approach procedures this Course to Altitude leg may be part of the published procedure. For
example, a procedure may dictate a climb to 5,500 feet, then turn left and proceed to the Missed Approach Hold
Point (MAHP). In this case, the altitude would appear in the list of waypoints as ‘5500ft’. Again, if the aircraft
altitude is lower than the prescribed altitude, a direct-to is established on a Course to Altitude leg when the
missed approach procedure is activated.
282
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
25) Upon reaching the MAP, it is decided to execute a missed approach. Automatic waypoint sequencing is
suspended past the MAP. Press the SUSP Softkey on the PFD to resume automatic waypoint sequencing
through the missed approach procedure.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A direct-to is initiated to MOGAL, which is the Missed Approach Hold Point (MAHP) as seen in Figure 5-143.
The aircraft is climbing to 10,000 feet. The CDI flight phase now changes from LPV to MAPR as seen on the
HSI.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-143 Missed Approach Active
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
283
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
26) The aircraft continues climbing to “AT or ABOVE” 10,000 feet at MOGAL. A holding pattern is established at
the MAHP (MOGAL) as shown in Figure 5-144.
Figure 5-144 Establishing the Holding Pattern
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
27) The aircraft maintains 10,000 feet while following the magenta line through the hold as in Figure 5-145.
INDEX
Figure 5-145 Hold Established
284
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.12 Abnormal Operation
This section discusses the Dead Reckoning mode of operation and the subsequent indications.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Note: Dead Reckoning Mode only functions in Enroute (ENR) or Oceanic (OCN) phase of flight. In all other
phases, an invalid GPS solution produces a “NO GPS POSITION” annunciation on the map and Perspective
stops using GPS.
EIS
While in Enroute or Oceanic phase of flight, if the system detects an invalid GPS solution or is unable to
calculate a GPS position, the system automatically reverts to Dead Reckoning (DR) Mode. In DR Mode, the system
uses its last-known position combined with continuously updated airspeed and heading data (when available) to
calculate and display the aircraft’s current estimated position.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
It is important to note that estimated navigation data supplied by Perspective in DR Mode may become
increasingly unreliable and must not be used as a sole means of navigation. If while in DR Mode airspeed and/or
heading data is also lost or not available, the DR function may not be capable of accurately tracking estimated
position and, consequently, the system may display a path that is different than the actual movement of the
aircraft. Estimated position information displayed by Perspective through DR while there is no heading and/or
airspeed data available should not be used for navigation.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
DR Mode is inherently less accurate than the standard GPS/WAAS Mode due to the lack of satellite measurements
needed to determine a position. Changes in wind speed and/or wind direction compounds the relative inaccuracy
of DR Mode. Because of this degraded accuracy, other navigation equipment must be relied upon for position
awareness until GPS-derived position data is restored.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
DR Mode is indicated on the system by the appearance of the letters ‘DR’ superimposed in yellow over the
‘own aircraft’ symbol as shown in Figure 5-146. In addition, ‘DR’ is prominently displayed in yellow on the HSI
slightly above and to the right of the aircraft symbol on the CDI as shown in Figure 5-146. The CDI deviation
bar remains, but is removed from the display after 20 minutes in DR Mode. The autopilot will remain coupled
in DR mode as long as the deviation info is available (20 min.) Lastly, but at the same time, a ‘GPS NAV LOST’
alert message appears on the PFD. Normal navigation using GPS/WAAS source data resumes automatically once
a valid GPS solution is restored.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
As a result of operating in DR Mode, all GPS-derived data is computed based upon an estimated position and
is displayed as yellow text on the display to denote degraded navigation source information as shown in Figure
5-146.
Also, while Perspective is in DR Mode, the autopilot does not couple to GPS, and both TAWS and Terrain
Proximity are disabled. Additionally, the accuracy of all nearest information (airports, airspaces, and waypoints)
is questionable. Finally, airspace alerts continue to function, but with degraded accuracy.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
285
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Distance &
Bearing
EIS
Dead Reckoning
Annunciaion
Wind Data
GPS Navigation
Lost Message
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Current
Track
Indicator
Course Deviation
Indicator
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Bearing
Pointer/
Distance
Destination
Airport
Information
Nav Data Bar
Wind Data
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
All data except
Active Leg,
TAS, and DTK
are in yellow
AFCS
Dead Reckoning
Annunciation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Subdued Aircraft
Symbol
APPENDICES
Figure 5-146 Dead Reckoning Mode - GPS Derived Data Shown in Yellow
Note: The Inset Map is removed from the PFD any time aircraft pitch is greater than +30° or less than –20°,
INDEX
or when a 65° bank angle is reached.
286
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Section 6 Hazard Avoidance
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Hazard avoidance features available for the Perspective® are designed to aid situational awareness and provide
advisory information with regard to potential hazards to flight safety associated with weather, terrain, and air
traffic.
Weather
®
• GDL 69/69A XM Satellite Weather (Optional)
®
• L-3 STORMSCOPE WX-500 Series II Weather Mapping Sensor (Optional)
EIS
Terrain Avoidance
• Terrain Proximity
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• TERRAIN-SVS (Standard with SVS Option)
• Terrain Awareness and Warning System (TAWS) (Optional)
Traffic
®
• Avidyne TAS600 Traffic Advisory System (TAS) (Optional)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
®
• L-3 SKYWATCH HP (SKY497) Traffic Advisory System (TAS) (Optional)
6.1 XM Satellite Weather (Optional)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
®
Note: XM Satellite Weather data provides information for avoiding hazardous weather. Do not utilize XM
Weather information to penetrate hazardous weather.
Note: XM Lightning and optional L-3 STORMSCOPE® WX-500 lightning are mutually exclusive.
AFCS
XM® Satellite Weather is provided through the GDL 69/69A, a remote-mounted data-link satellite receiver.
Received graphical weather information and associated text is displayed on the Multi Function Display (MFD)
and the Primary Flight Display (PFD) Inset Map. The GDL 69A can also receive XM Satellite Radio entertainment
services. Both weather data and entertainment programming operate in the S-band frequency range to provide
continuous reception capabilities at any altitude throughout North America.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
XM Satellite Radio services are subscription-based. For more information on specific service packages, visit
www.xmradio.com.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
287
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Activating Services
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Before XM Satellite Weather and XM Satellite Radio can be used, the service must be activated. Service is
activated by providing coded IDs unique to the installed GDL 69/69A. XM Satellite Radio and XM Satellite
Weather services each have coded IDs. The Data and Audio Radio IDs must be provided to activate the weather
service and entertainment subscriptions, respectively. These IDs are located on:
• The label on the back of the Data Link Receiver
• The XM Information Page on the MFD (Figure 6-1)
EIS
• The XM Satellite Radio Activation Instructions included with the unit (available at www.garmin.com, P/N
190-00355-04)
Contact the installer if the Audio and Data Radio IDs cannot be located.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
XM Satellite Radio uses the coded IDs to send an activation signal that allows the Perspective® to display
weather data and/or entertainment programming provided through the GDL 69/69A.
Activating XM Satellite Weather and XM Satellite Radio services:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Contact XM Satellite Radio by email (address listed on their website, www.xmradio.com) or by the customer
service phone number listed on the website. Follow the instructions provided by XM Satellite Radio services.
2) Select the XM Page in the Auxiliary Page Group.
3) Press the INFO Softkey to display the XM Information Page.
4) Verify that the desired services are activated.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) Press the LOCK Softkey.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘YES’.
AFCS
7) To complete activation, press the ENT Key.
Data Radio ID
(for XM Weather)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Audio Radio ID
(for XM Satellite Radio)
APPENDICES
Weather Products
(Available Products for
Service Class Indicated
in Green)
INDEX
Select to Display XM
Information page
288
Figure 6-1 XM Information Page
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
Select to Lock
Subscription
Information
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Using XM Satellite Weather Products
The primary map for viewing XM Weather data is the Weather Data Link Page in the Map Page Group. This
is the only Perspective® map display capable of showing information for all available XM weather products.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Viewing the Weather Data Link Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Weather Data Link Page.
EIS
NEXRAD Weather
Product Age
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NEXRAD
Weather Product
Selected for
Display
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NEXRAD Weather
Product Display
Enabled
Figure 6-2 Weather Data Link Page
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When a weather product is active on the Weather Data Link Page or the Navigation Map Page, the age of the
data is displayed on the screen (Figure 6-2). The age of the product is based on the time difference between
when the data was assembled on the ground and the current GPS time. Weather products are refreshed at
specific intervals (defined in the Refresh Rate column in Table 6-1).
If for any reason, a weather product is not refreshed within the 30-, 60-, 90-, or 180-minute Expiration
Time intervals (see Table 6-1), the data is considered expired and is removed from the display. This ensures
that the displayed data is consistent with what is currently being broadcast by XM Satellite Radio services. If
more than half of the expiration time has elapsed, the color of the product age displayed changes to yellow.
APPENDICES
Table 6-1 shows the weather product symbols, the expiration time and the refresh rate. The refresh rate
represents the interval at which XM Satellite Radio broadcasts new signals that may or may not contain new
weather data. It does not represent the rate at which weather data is updated or new content is received by
the Data Link Receiver. Weather data is updated at intervals that are defined and controlled by XM Satellite
Radio and its data vendors.
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
289
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Weather Product
Symbol
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Next-generation Radar
(NEXRAD)
Cloud Top
(CLD TOP)
Echo Top
(ECHO TOP)
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
XM Lightning
(LTNG)
Cell Movement
(CELL MOV)
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
(SIG/AIR)
Meteorological Aerodrome Report
(METARs)
City Forecast
(CITY)
Surface Analysis
(SFC)
Freezing Levels
(FRZ LVL)
Winds Aloft
(WIND)
County Warnings
(COUNTY)
Cyclone Warnings
(CYCLONE)
Icing Potential (CIP and SLD)
(ICNG)
Pilot Weather Report
(PIREPs)
Air Report
(AIREPs)
Turbulence
(TURB)
Radar Coverage
no product image
(RADAR CVRG)
Temporary Flight Restrictions
no product image
(TFRs)
Terminal Aerodrome Reports
no product image
(TAFs)
Expiration Time
(Minutes)
Refresh Rate
(Minutes)
30
5
60
15
30
7.5
30
5
30
12
60
12
90
12
60
12
60
12
60
12
60
12
60
5
60
12
90
22
90
12
90
12
180
18
30
5
60
12
60
12
Table 6-1 Weather Product Symbols and Data Timing
290
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Echo Top (ECHO TOP)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
XM Lightning (LTNG)
+
+
+
+
Cell Movement (CELL MOV)
+
+
+
+
SIGMETs/AIRMETs (SIG/AIR)
+
METARs
+
City Forecast (CITY)
+
Surface Analysis (SFC)
+
Freezing Levels (FRZ LVL)
+
Winds Aloft (WIND)
+
County Warnings (COUNTY)
+
Cyclone Warnings (CYCLONE)
+
Icing Potential (ICNG)
+
PIREPs
+
+
AIREPs
+
+
Turbulence (TURB)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
+
AFCS
TAFs
+
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TFRs
+
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Radar Coverage
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Flight Plan Pages
+
Nearest Page Group
Cloud Top (CLD TOP)
AUX - Video Page
+
AUX - Trip Planning
Page
Weather Data Link
Page
+
Weather Information
Page
Navigation Map Page
+
EIS
NEXRAD
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Weather Product
PFD Inset Map
Table 6-2 shows which XM products can be displayed (indicated with a ‘+’ symbol) on specific maps.
Table 6-2 Weather Product Display Maps
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
291
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Softkeys control the display of weather information on most MFD pages and the PFD Inset Map (Figure 6-3
shows the weather product softkeys for the Weather Data Link Page). When a weather product is selected
for display, the corresponding softkey label changes to gray to indicate the product is enabled. Unavailable
weather products have subdued softkey labels (softkeys are disabled from selection).
NEXRAD ECHO TOP CLD TOP
ENGINE
CYCLONE SFC OFF
FRZ LVL
SIG/AIR
METAR
LEGEND MORE WX CHKLIST
WIND OFF ICNG OFF TURB OFF AIREPS
PIREPS
COUNTY
LTNG
CELL MOV
BACK
EIS
SFC Softkey label changes
to reflect current selection.
WIND/ICNG/TURB Softkey labels
change to reflect current selection.
CURRENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
OFF
12 HR
24 HR
36 HR
48 HR
Select the BACK Softkey
to move up one level.
LEGEND
BACK
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
PREV and NEXT Softkeys cycle through Winds Aloft,
Icing, and Turbulence altitude selection softkeys.
PREV
OFF
SFC
3000
6000
9000
12000
15000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
18000
21000
24000
27000
30000
33000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
36000
39000
42000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
1000
3000
6000
9000
12000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
18000
21000
24000
27000
30000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
21000
24000
27000
30000
33000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
39000
42000
45000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
15000
36000
Figure 6-3 Weather Data Link Weather Product Softkeys
INDEX
APPENDICES
The setup menus for the Navigation Map Page and the Weather Data Link Page control the map range settings
above which weather products data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the weather
product map range setting is selected, the weather product data is removed from the map. The menus also
provide a means in addition to the softkeys for enabling/disabling display of weather products.
292
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Setting up and customizing the Weather Data Link Page:
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) With ‘Weather Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-4).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘XM Product Group 1’ or ‘XM Product Group 2’, and press the ENT Key
(Figure 6-5).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections.
EIS
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings, etc.).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link Page with the changed settings.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-4 Weather Data Link Page Menu
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-5 Weather Data Link Page Setup Menu
Restoring default Weather Data Link Page settings:
APPENDICES
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Weather Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Press the MENU Key.
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
INDEX
5) Highlight the desired default(s) to restore (all or for selection) and press ENT Key.
293
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Maps besides the Weather Data Link Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
Setting up and customizing weather data for the Navigation Map Page:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-6).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Weather’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-7).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-8).
EIS
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 6-6 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-8 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Weather Group
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 6-7 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
294
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Each active weather product has an associated legend which can be displayed on the Weather Data Link
Page.
Viewing legends for displayed weather products
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the LEGEND Softkey to display the legends for the displayed weather products.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Weather Legend’ and press the ENT Key.
EIS
3) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the legends if more are available than fit in the window.
4) To remove the Legend Window, press the LEGEND Softkey, the ENT or the CLR Key, or press the FMS Knob.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Additional information about the following can be displayed by panning over the display on the map:
• County Warnings
• Cell Movement
• TFRs
• SIGMETs
• AIREPs
• AIRMETs
• PIREPs
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Echo Tops
• METARs
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The map panning feature is enabled by pressing the RANGE Knob. The map range is adjusted by turning
the RANGE Knob. If the map range is adjusted while panning is enabled, the map is re-centered on the Map
Pointer.
AFCS
Additional
Information
on Weather
Feature
Selected with
Map Pointer
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Flash Flood
Warning
Selected with
Map Pointer
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 6-9 Panning on the Weather Data Link Page
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
295
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NEXRAD
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Hazard Avoidance
WSR-88D, or NEXRAD (NEXt-generation RADar), is a network of 158 high-resolution Doppler radar
systems that are operated by the National Weather Service (NWS). NEXRAD data provides centralized
meteorological information for the continental United States and selected overseas locations. The maximum
range of a single NEXRAD radar site is 250 nm. In addition to a wide array of services, the NEXRAD network
provides important information about severe weather and air traffic safety.
NOTE: NEXRAD cannot be displayed at the same time as terrain.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
NEXRAD data is not real-time. The lapsed time between collection, processing, and dissemination of
NEXRAD images can be significant and may not reflect the current radar synopsis. Due to the inherent delays
and the relative age of the data, it should be used for long-range planning purposes only. Never use NEXRAD
data or any radar data to penetrate hazardous weather. Rather, use it in an early-warning capacity of predeparture and enroute evaluation.
Figure 6-10 NEXRAD Data on the Weather Data Link Page
• PFD Inset Map
• Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Nearest Pages
• Weather Data Link Page
• Flight Plan Pages
• Airport Information Page
• AUX - Video Page
INDEX
APPENDICES
NEXRAD data can be displayed on the following maps:
296
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying NEXRAD weather information:
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey). This step is not necessary on the
Weather Data Link Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey.
Composite data from all the NEXRAD radar sites in the United States is shown. This data is composed of
the maximum reflectivity from the individual radar sweeps. The display of the information is color-coded to
indicate the weather severity level. All weather product legends can be viewed on the Weather Data Link Page.
For the NEXRAD legend (Figure 6-11), press the LEGEND Softkey when NEXRAD is selected for display.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
No Radar Coverage
Figure 6-11 NEXRAD Data with Legend
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The display of radar coverage is always active when either NEXRAD or ECHO TOPS is selected. Areas
where NEXRAD radar coverage and Echo Tops information is not currently available or is not being collected
are indicated in grayish-purple. Radar capability exists in these areas, but it is not active or is off-line.
Reflectivity
AFCS
Reflectivity is the amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver. Colors on the NEXRAD
display are directly correlative to the level of detected reflectivity. Reflectivity as it relates to hazardous
weather can be very complex.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The role of radar is essentially to detect moisture in the atmosphere. Simply put, certain types of weather
reflect radar better than others. The intensity of a radar reflection is not necessarily an indication of the
weather hazard level. For instance, wet hail returns a strong radar reflection, while dry hail does not. Both
wet and dry hail can be extremely hazardous.
APPENDICES
The different NEXRAD echo intensities are measured in decibels (dB) relative to reflectivity (Z). NEXRAD
measures the radar reflectivity ratio, or the energy reflected back to the radar receiver (designated by the
letter Z). The value of Z increases as the returned signal strength increases.
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
297
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
NEXRAD Limitations
NEXRAD radar images may have certain limitations:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• NEXRAD base reflectivity does not provide sufficient information to determine cloud layers or precipitation
characteristics (wet hail vs. rain). For example, it is not possible to distinguish between wet snow, wet
hail, and rain.
• NEXRAD base reflectivity is sampled at the minimum antenna elevation angle. An individual NEXRAD
site cannot depict high altitude storms at close ranges. It has no information about storms directly over
the site.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
• When zoomed in to a range of 30 nm, each square block on the display represents an area of four square
kilometers. The intensity level reflected by each square represents the highest level of NEXRAD data
sampled within the area (Figure 6-12).
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Block Area is 4 km2
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-12 NEXRAD Data - Zoomed
The following may cause abnormalities in displayed NEXRAD radar images:
• Ground clutter
• Strobes and spurious radar data
APPENDICES
• Sun strobes (when the radar antenna points directly at the sun)
• Interference from buildings or mountains, which may cause shadows
INDEX
• Metallic dust from military aircraft, which can cause alterations in radar scans
298
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NEXRAD Limitations (Canada)
• Radar coverage extends to 55ºN.
• Any precipitation displayed between 52ºN and 55ºN is displayed as mixed because it is unknown.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
No Coverage
Above 55°N
Precipitation
Above 52°N
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-13 NEXRAD Data - Canada
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
299
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Echo Tops
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Note: Display of Echo Tops is mutually exclusive with Cloud Tops and NEXRAD.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Echo Tops data (Figure 6-14) shows the location, elevation, and direction of the highest radar echo. The
highest radar echo does not indicate the top of a storm or clouds; rather it indicates the highest altitude at
which precipitation is detected. Information is derived from NEXRAD data.
Figure 6-14 Echo Tops Data
AFCS
Displaying Echo Tops information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the ECHO TOPS Softkey.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To display the Echo Tops legend (Figure 6-15), press the LEGEND Softkey when Echo Tops is selected for
display. Since Echo Tops and Cloud Tops use the same color scaling to represent altitude, display of these
weather products is mutually exclusive. When Echo Tops is activated, NEXRAD and Cloud Tops data are
removed.
INDEX
No Radar Coverage
Figure 6-15 ECHO TOPS Legend
300
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The display of radar coverage is always active when either NEXRAD or ECHO TOPS is selected. Areas
where NEXRAD radar coverage and Echo Tops information is not currently available or is not being collected
are indicated in grayish-purple. Radar capability exists in these areas, but it is not active or is off-line.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Cloud Tops
Note: Cloud Tops and Echo Tops cannot be displayed at the same time.
Cloud Tops data (Figure 6-16) depicts cloud top altitudes as determined from satellite imagery.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-16 Cloud Tops Data
AFCS
Displaying Cloud Tops information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the CLOUD TOPS Softkey.
To display the Cloud Tops legend (Figure 6-17), press the LEGEND Softkey when Cloud Tops is selected for
display. Since Cloud Tops and Echo Tops use the same color scaling to represent altitude, display of these
weather products is mutually exclusive. When Cloud Tops is activated, Echo Tops data is removed.
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 6-17 Cloud Tops Legend
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
301
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
XM Lightning
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Lightning data (Figure 6-18) shows the approximate location of cloud-to-ground lightning strikes. A strike
icon represents a strike that has occurred within a two-kilometer region. The exact location of the lightning
strike is not displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Lightning
Strikes
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-18 Lightning Data
AFCS
XM Lightning data displays on the following maps:
• PFD Inset Map
• Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Nearest Pages
• Weather Data Link Page
• Flight Plan Pages
• AUX - Video Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Displaying XM Lightning information:
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey). This step is not necessary on the
Weather Data Link Page.
APPENDICES
2) Press the XM LTNG Softkey (LTNG Softkey on the Weather Data Link Page).
INDEX
To display the XM Lightning legend on the Weather Data Link Page (Figure 6-19), press the LEGEND Softkey
when XM Lightning is selected for display.
Figure 6-19 Lightning Legend
302
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Cell Movement
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Cell Movement data (Figure 6-20) shows the location and movement of storm cells as identified by the
ground-based system. Cells are represented by yellow squares, with direction of movement indicated with
short, orange arrows.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Storm Cells
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-20 Cell Movement Data
On most applicable maps, Cell Movement data is selected for display along with NEXRAD. On the Weather
Data Link Page, Cell Movement data can be selected independently. Cell Movement data can be displayed
on the following maps:
• Nearest Pages
•Navigation Map
• Weather Data Link Page
AFCS
• PFD Inset Map
• AUX - Trip Planning Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Displaying Cell Movement information:
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, select the INSET Softkey). This step is not necessary on the
Weather Data Link Page.
APPENDICES
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey (CEL MOV Softkey on the Weather Data Link Page). For Cell Movement to be
displayed on maps other than the Weather Data Link Page, Cell Movement must be turned on in the Navigation
Map Setup Menu (see “Setting Up XM Satellite Weather”).
To display the Cell Movement legend on the Weather Data Link Page, (Figure 6-21), press the LEGEND
Softkey when Cell Movement is selected for display.
INDEX
Figure 6-21 Cell Movement Legend
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
303
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
SIGMETs and AIRMETs
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SIGMETs (SIGnificant METeorological Information) and AIRMETs (AIRmen’s METeorological Information)
are broadcast for potentially hazardous weather. A Convective SIGMET is issued for hazardous convective
weather. A localized SIGMET is a significant weather condition occurring at a localized geographical
position.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
AIRMET
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SIGMET
Figure 6-22 SIGMET/AIRMET Data
Displaying SIGMETs and AIRMETs:
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
AFCS
2) Press the SIG/AIR Softkey.
3) To view the text of the SIGMET or AIRMET, press the RANGE Knob and move the Map Pointer over the
icon.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Press the ENT key. Figure 6-23 shows sample SIGMET text.
INDEX
APPENDICES
To display the SIGMET and AIRMET legend (Figure 6-24), press the LEGEND Softkey when SIGMETs and
AIRMETs are selected for display.
Figure 6-23 Sample SIGMET Text
304
Figure 6-24 SIGMET/AIRMET Legend
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
METARs and TAFs
NOTE: Atmospheric pressure as reported for METARs is given in hectopascals (hPa), except for in the United
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
States, where it is reported in inches of mercury (in Hg). Temperatures are reported in Celsius.
Note: METAR information is only displayed within the installed aviation database service area.
EIS
METARs (METeorological Aerodrome Reports) typically contain information about the temperature,
dewpoint, wind, precipitation, cloud cover, cloud heights, visibility, and barometric pressure at an airport or
observation station. They can also contain information on precipitation amounts, lightning, and other critical
data. METARs reflect hourly observations; non-routine updates include the code “SPECI” in the report.
METARs are shown as colored flags at airports that provide them.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Instructions for
Viewing METAR
and TAF Text
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected Airport
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-25 METAR Flags on the Weather Data Link Page
TAFs (Terminal Aerodrome Forecasts) are weather predictions for specific airports typically within a 24hour period, and may span up to 36 hours. TAFs may include forecast wind, visibility, weather phenomena,
and sky conditions using METAR codes.
APPENDICES
METAR and TAF text are displayed on the Weather Information Page. METAR data is displayed first in a
decoded fashion, then as raw text. TAF information is displayed only in its raw form when it is available.
Displaying METAR and TAF text:
1) On the Weather Data Link Page, press the METAR Softkey.
INDEX
2) Press the RANGE Knob and pan to the desired airport.
3) Press the ENT Key. The Weather Information Page is shown with METAR and TAF text.
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
305
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. METAR text must be completely
scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
5) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Or:
1) Select the Weather Information Page.
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Waypoint Page Group.
b) Press the WX Softkey to select the Weather Information Page.
EIS
2) Press the FMS Knob to display the cursor.
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired airport and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. Note that the METAR text must
be completely scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
METAR Text for the
Selected Airport
METAR Symbol
AFCS
TAF Text for the
Selected Airport
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-26 METAR and TAF Text on the Weather Information Page
To display the METAR legend on the Weather Data Link Page (Figure 6-27), press the LEGEND Softkey when
METARs are selected for display.
INDEX
APPENDICES
The METAR flag color is determined by the information in the METAR text. A gray METAR flag is displayed
when the METAR text does not contain adequate information.
Figure 6-27 METAR Legend
306
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Surface Analysis and City Forecast
Note: Surface Analysis and City Forecast data are displayed only within the installed Aviation Database
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
service area.
Surface Analysis and City Forecast information is available for current and forecast weather conditions.
Forecasts are available for intervals of 12, 24, 36, and 48 hours.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-28 Current Surface Analysis Data
Displaying Surface Analysis and City Forecast information:
AFCS
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the SFC Softkey.
4) Select the desired forecast time: CURRENT, 12 HR, 24 HR, 36 HR, or 48 HR. The SFC Softkey label changes
to reflect the forecast time selected.
APPENDICES
To display the Surface Analysis and City Forecast legend (Figure 6-29), press the LEGEND Softkey when
Surface Analysis and City Forecast are selected to be displayed.
INDEX
Figure 6-29 Surface Analysis Legend
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
307
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Freezing Levels
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Freezing Level data shows the color-coded contour lines for the altitude and location at which the first
isotherm is found (Figure 6-30). When no data is displayed for a given altitude, the data for that altitude has
not been received, or is out of date and has been removed from the display. New data appears at the next
update.
Figure 6-30 Freezing Level Data
Displaying Freezing Level information:
AFCS
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the FRZ LVL Softkey.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To display the Freezing Level legend (Figure 6-31), press the LEGEND Softkey when Freezing Level data is
selected to be displayed.
INDEX
Figure 6-31 Freezing Level Legend
308
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Winds Aloft
Winds Aloft data (Figure 6-32) shows the forecasted wind speed and direction at the surface and at selected
altitudes. Altitude can be displayed in 3,000-foot increments up to 42,000 feet MSL.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Displaying Winds Aloft data:
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the WIND Softkey.
EIS
4) Select the desired altitude level: SFC (surface) up to 42,000 feet. Press the NEXT or PREV Softkey to cycle
through the altitude softkeys. The WIND Softkey label changes to reflect the altitude selected.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 6-32 Winds Aloft Data at 12,000 Feet
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To display the Winds Aloft legend (Figure 6-33), press the LEGEND Softkey when Winds Aloft is
selected for display.
APPENDICES
Figure 6-33 Winds Aloft Data with Legend
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
309
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
County Warnings
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
County data (Figure 6-34) provides specific public awareness and protection weather warnings from the
National Weather Service (NWS). This can include information on fires, tornadoes, severe thunderstorms,
flood conditions, and other natural disasters.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Additional
Information
on Flood
Warning
Selected
with Map
Pointer
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Flood
Warning
Figure 6-34 County Flood Warning
AFCS
Displaying County Warning information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the COUNTY Softkey.
INDEX
APPENDICES
To display the County Warnings legend (Figure 6-35), press the LEGEND Softkey when County Warnings
are selected to be displayed.
Figure 6-35 County Warnings Legend
310
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Cyclone
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Cyclone weather product (Figure 6-36) shows the current location of cyclones (hurricanes), tropical
storms, and depressions using the symbol shown below (Figure 6-37). Storm tracks include date and time
of arrival inside orange boxes.
EIS
Cyclone
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-36 Cyclone Data Selected for Display
Displaying cyclone (hurricane) track information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
AFCS
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the CYCLONE Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To display the Cyclone legend (Figure 6-37), press the LEGEND Softkey when Cyclones are selected to be
displayed.
APPENDICES
Figure 6-37 Cyclone Legend
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
311
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Icing (CIP & SLD)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Current Icing Product (CIP) data shows a graphical view of the current icing environment (Figure 6-39).
Icing severity is displayed in four categories: light, moderate, severe, and extreme (not specific to aircraft type).
The CIP product is not a forecast, but a presentation of the current conditions at the time of the analysis.
Supercooled Large Droplet (SLD) icing conditions are characterized by the presence of relatively large,
super cooled water droplets indicative of freezing drizzle and freezing rain aloft. SLD threat areas are depicted
as magenta dots over the CIP colors.
EIS
Displaying Icing data:
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the ICNG Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Select the desired altitude level: 1,000 feet up to 30,000 feet. Press the NEXT or PREV Softkey to cycle through
the altitude softkeys. The ICNG Softkey label changes to reflect the altitude selected.
Figure 6-38 Icing Data at 15,000 Feet
INDEX
APPENDICES
To display the Icing Potential legend (Figure 6-39), press the LEGEND Softkey when Icing is selected for
display.
Figure 6-39 Icing Potential Legend
312
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Turbulence
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Turbulence data identifies the potential for erratic movement of high-altitude air mass associated winds.
Turbulence is classified as light, moderate, severe or extreme, at altitudes between 21,000 and 45,000 feet.
Turbulence data is intended to supplement AIRMETs and SIGMETs.
Displaying Turbulence data:
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the TURB Softkey.
EIS
4) Select the desired altitude level: 21,000 feet up to 45,000 feet. Press the NEXT or PREV Softkey to cycle
through the altitude softkeys. The TURB Softkey label changes to reflect the altitude selected.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 6-40 Turbulence Data at 24,000 Feet
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To display the Turbulence legend (Figure 6-41), press the LEGEND Softkey when Turbulence is selected
for display.
APPENDICES
Figure 6-41 Turbulence Legend
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
313
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
PIREPs and AIREPs
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pilot Weather Reports (PIREPs) provide timely weather information for a particular route of flight. When
significant weather conditions are reported or forecast, Air Traffic Control (ATC) facilities are required to
solicit PIREPs. A PIREP may contain unforecast adverse weather conditions, such as low in-flight visibility,
icing conditions, wind shear, and turbulence. PIREPs are issued as either Routine (UA) or Urgent (UUA).
Another type of PIREP is an Air Report (AIREP). AIREPs are used almost exclusively by commerical airlines
and are considered lower priority to general aviation pilots.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Instructions for
Viewing PIREP
and AIREP Text
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Urgent
PIREP
Selected
Routine
PIREP
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AIREP
Figure 6-42 AIREPs and PIREPs on the Weather Data Link Page
AFCS
Displaying PIREP and AIREP text:
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the AIREPS or PIREPS Softkey.
4) Press the RANGE Knob and pan to the desired weather report. A gray circle will appear around the weather
report when it is selected.
APPENDICES
5) Press the ENT Key. The Weather Information Page is shown with PIREP or AIREP text. The data is first displayed
in a decoded fashion, then as raw text.
6) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the PIREP or AIREP text.
INDEX
7) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link Page.
314
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Decoded PIREP Text
Raw PIREP Text
Selected PIREP
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-43 PIREP Text on the Weather Information Page
To display the PIREP or AIREP legend (Figure 6-44), press the LEGEND Softkey when PIREPs or AIREPs are
selected for display.
The PIREP color is determined by the type (routine or urgent).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 6-44 AIREPs & PIREPs Legend
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
315
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
6.2 L-3 WX500 Stormscope (Optional)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The L-3 WX-500 Stormscope® system is not intended for hazardous thunderstorm penetration.
Weather information on the Perspective® MFD is approved for weather avoidance only. Refer to the WX500 User’s Guide for detailed operation information.
Note: Lightning detection and GDL 69/69A XM® Satellite Weather Lightning are mutually exclusive.
EIS
The following pages can display Stormscope data:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Stormscope Page
• Navigation Map
• AUX - Video Page
• AUX - Trip Planning Page
• Nearest Pages
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
To display Stormscope data on the Navigation Map, AUX - Trip Planning Page, or any of the Nearest Pages,
press the MAP Softkey, then press the STRMSCP Softkey. These pages can also display cell or strike data using the
yellow lightning strike symbols shown in Table 6-3.
Table 6-3 Lightning Age and Symbols
AFCS
Setting Up Stormscope on the Navigation Map
Setting up Stormscope options on the Navigation Map:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) On the Navigation Map Page, press the MENU Key.
2) With ‘Map Setup’ selected (Figure 6-45), press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the group selection window. Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Weather’
(Figure 6-46), and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight and move between the product selections.
5) When an item is highlighted, turn the small FMS Knob to select the option.
6) Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page (Figure 6-47).
316
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The following options are available (Figure 6-46):
• STRMSCP LTNG – Turns the display of Stormscope data on or off.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• STRMSCP MODE – Selects the CELL or STRIKE mode of lightning activity. Cell mode identifies clusters
or cells of electrical activity. Strike mode indicates the approximate location of lightning strikes.
• STRMSCP SMBL – Selects the range at which Stormscope data displays. Stormscope data is removed
when a map range greater than the STRMSCP SMBL value is selected.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-45 Page Menu
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-46 Map Setup Menu
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
317
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Cell and Strike Mode on the Navigation Map
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
On the Navigation Map, cell mode identifies cells of lightning activity (Figure 6-47). Stormscope identifies
clusters of electrical activity that indicate cells. Strike mode indicates the approximate location of lightning
strikes.
Selecting the ‘cell’ or ‘strike’ mode on the Navigation Map:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) With ‘Map Setup’ selected, press the ENT Key.
EIS
3) Select the ‘Weather’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on ‘STRMSCP LTNG’.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘STRMSCP MODE’.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to change between ‘CELL’ and ‘STRIKE’ options. When an item is selected, press the
ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
7) Press the FMS knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
APPENDICES
Figure 6-47 Navigation Map Page with Stormscope Lightning Data
INDEX
If heading input is lost, strikes and/or cells must be cleared manually after the execution of each turn
(Figure 6-48). This is to ensure that the strike and/or cell positions are depicted accurately in relation to the
nose of the aircraft.
318
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Manually clearing Stormscope data on the Navigation Map:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘Clear Stormscope® Lightning’.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the ENT Key.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-48 Navigation Map Page Options Menu
Zoom Range on the Navigation Map
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Stormscope lightning data can be displayed up to 800 nm zoom range (in North up mode) on the Navigation
Map Page. However, in the track up mode at the 500 nm range, a portion of Stormscope lightning data
can be behind the aircraft and therefore not visible on the Navigation Map. Since the range for Stormscope
data is 400 nm diameter total (200 nm in front and 200 nm behind), the 500 nm range in North up mode
shows all the data.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
At a map range of less than 25 nm, Stormscope lightning data is not displayed, but can still be present. The
presence of Stormscope lightning data is indicated by the annunciation ‘LTNG < 25 nm’ in the upper right
corner (Figure 6-49).
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-49 Lightning Display Range Annunciation
Selecting a Stormscope range on the Navigation Map:
1) Press the MENU Key.
APPENDICES
2) Select ‘MAP SETUP’.
3) Select the ‘Weather’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘STRMSCP SMBL’.
INDEX
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the maximum display range.
7) Press the ENT Key.
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
319
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
To change the display range on the Navigation Map Page, turn the RANGE Knob clockwise to zoom out or
counter-clockwise to zoom in.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selecting the Stormscope Page
Stormscope lightning data can be displayed at the ranges of 25 nm, 50 nm, 100 nm, and 200 nm.
Adjusting the Stormscope Map Range:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Stormscope Page.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
3) To change the map range, turn the RANGE Knob clockwise to zoom out or counter-clockwise to zoom in.
Figure 6-50 Stormscope Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Changing between ‘cell’ and ‘strike’ mode on the Stormscope Page:
1) Select the Stormscope Page.
2) Press the MODE Softkey. The CELL and STRIKE softkeys are displayed.
APPENDICES
3) Press the CELL Softkey to display ‘CELL’ data or press the STRIKE Softkey to display ‘STRIKE’ data. ‘CELL’ or
‘STRIKE’ is displayed in the mode box in the upper left corner of the Stormscope Page.
4) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the main Stormscope page.
Changing the viewing mode between 360˚ and 120˚ on the Stormscope Page:
INDEX
1) Select the Stormscope Page.
2) Press the VIEW Softkey. The 360 and ARC softkeys are displayed. Press the 360 Softkey to display a 360˚
viewing area or press the ARC Softkey to display a 120˚ viewing area.
3) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the main Stormscope page.
320
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.3 Terrain Proximity
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Warning: Do not use Terrain Proximity information for primary terrain avoidance. Terrain Proximity is
intended only to enhance situational awareness.
NOTE: Terrain data is not displayed when the aircraft latitude is greater than 75° North or 60° South.
EIS
Perspective® Terrain Proximity is a terrain awareness system that does not comply with TSO-C151b certification
standards. It increases situational awareness and aids in reducing controlled flight into terrain (CFIT). Do not
confuse Terrain Proximity with Terrain Awareness and Warning System (TAWS). TAWS is more sophisticated
and robust, and it is TSO-C151b certified. Terrain Proximity does not provide warning annunciations or voice
alerts. It only provides color indications on map displays when terrain and obstacles are within a certain altitude
threshold from the aircraft. Although the terrain and obstacle color map displays are the same, TAWS uses more
sophisticated algorithms to assess aircraft distance from terrain and obstacles.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Terrain Proximity requires the following components to operate properly:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Valid 3-D GPS position
• Valid terrain/obstacle database
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Terrain Proximity displays altitudes of terrain and obstructions relative to the aircraft position and altitude with
reference to a database that may contain inaccuracies. Terrain and obstructions are shown only if they are in the
database. Terrain and obstacle information should be used as an aid to situational awareness. They should never
be used to navigate or maneuver around terrain.
Note that all obstructions may not be available in the terrain and obstacle database. No terrain and obstacle
information is shown without a valid 3-D GPS position.
AFCS
The Perspective® GPS receiver provides the horizontal position and altitude. GPS altitude is derived from
satellite position. GPS altitude is then converted to a mean sea level (MSL)-based altitude (GPS-MSL altitude)
and is used to determine terrain and obstacle proximity. GPS-MSL altitude accuracy is affected by satellite
geometry, but is not subject to variations in pressure and temperature that normally affect pressure altitude
sensors. GPS-MSL altitude does not require local altimeter settings to determine MSL altitude. It is a widely-used
MSL altitude source.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Terrain and obstacle databases are referenced to MSL. Using the GPS position and altitude, the Terrain Proximity
feature portrays a 2-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the position and altitude of the
aircraft. GPS position and GPS-MSL altitude are used to calculate and predict the aircraft’s flight path in relation
to the surrounding terrain and obstacles. In this way, the pilot can view predicted dangerous terrain and obstacle
conditions.
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
321
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Displaying Terrain Proximity Data
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The symbols and colors in Figure 6-51 and Table 6-4 are used to represent obstacles and aircraft altitude
when the Terrain Proximity Page is selected for display. Terrain Proximity uses black, yellow, and red to
represent terrain information relative to aircraft altitude. The color of each obstacle is associated with the
altitude of the aircraft.
Terrain Above Aircraft Altitude
Red terrain is above
or within 100 ft below
the aircraft altitude
Aircraft Altitude
EIS
100 ft Threshold
1000 ft
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Yellow terrain is between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
Black terrain is more than 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-51 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for Terrain Proximity
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL
Obstacle Location
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft
below the aircraft altitude
Yellow obstacle is between 100 ft and
1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
AFCS
Table 6-4 Terrain Proximity Terrain/Obstacle Colors and Symbology
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Terrain and obstacle information can be displayed on the following pages:
• PFD Inset Map
• Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Flight Plan Page
• Terrain Proximity Page
• AUX - Video Page
Displaying terrain and obstacle information (maps other than the Terrain Proximity Page):
APPENDICES
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey).
2) Press the TERRAIN Softkey to display terrain and obstacle data.
When Terrain Proximity is selected on maps other than the Terrain Proximity Page, an icon to indicate the
feature is enabled for display and a legend for Terrain Proximity colors are shown (Figure 6-55).
INDEX
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu provides a means in addition to the softkey for enabling/disabling
display of terrain and obstacles. The setup menu also controls the map range settings above which terrain and
obstacle data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the map range setting is selected, the
data is removed from the map.
322
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Terrain data can be selected for display independently of obstacle data; however, obstacles recognized by
Terrain Proximity as yellow or red are shown when terrain is selected for display and the map range is within
the setting limit.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Maps besides the Terrain Proximity Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
The maximum display ranges for obstacles on each map are dependent on the range setting made for the
Navigation Map. If the maximum range for obstacle display on the Navigation Map is adjusted to below 20 nm,
the highest obstacle display range settings on the other applicable maps are also adjusted proportionally.
Customizing terrain and obstacle display on the Navigation Map Page:
EIS
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-52).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-53).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-54).
• TERRAIN DATA – Turns the display of terrain data on or off and sets maximum range at which terrain is shown
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• OBSTACLE DATA – Turns the display of obstacle data on or off and sets maximum range at which obstacles are shown
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-52 Navigation Map Page Menu
APPENDICES
190-00820-03 Rev. A
INDEX
Figure 6-53 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-54 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Map Group
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
323
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Additional information about obstacles can be displayed by panning over the display on the map. The map
panning feature is enabled by pressing the RANGE Knob. The map range is adjusted by turning the RANGE
Knob. If the map range is adjusted while panning is enabled, the map is re-centered on the Map Pointer.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Additional
Information on
Obstacle Selected
with Map Pointer
Red Terrain Area
(Above or Within
100’ Below
Aircraft Altitude)
Yellow Terrain Area
(Between 100’ and
1000’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
EIS
Red Lighted
Obstacles
(Above or Within
100’ Below
Aircraft Altitude)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Lighted Obstacle
Selected with Map
Pointer
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Terrain Display
Enabled
Terrain Legend
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-55 Terrain Information on the Navigation Map Page
Terrain Proximity Page
AFCS
The Terrain Proximity Page is specialized to show terrain and obstacle data in relation to the aircraft’s current
altitude, without clutter from the basemap. Aviation data (airports, VORs, and other NAVAIDs) can be displayed
for reference.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. Two views are available
relative to the position of the aircraft: the 360° default display and the radar-like ARC (120°) display. Map range
is adjustable with the RANGE Knob from 1 to 200 nm, as indicated by the map range rings (or arcs).
Displaying the Terrain Proximity Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
APPENDICES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Terrain Proximity Page.
3) To change the view,
a) Press the VIEW Softkey.
b) Press the 360 or ARC Softkey to select the desired view.
INDEX
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘View 120º’ or ‘View 360º’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key to change the view.
324
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Showing/hiding aviation information on the Terrain Proximity Page:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘Show Aviation Data’ or ‘Hide Aviation Data’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Map Orientation
Yellow Terrain
(Between 100’ and
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Current Aircraft GPSderived MSL Altitude
EIS
Black Terrain
(More than 1000’
Below the Aircraft
Altitude)
Map Range Rings
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Red Terrain
(Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Terrain Legend
Figure 6-56 Terrain Proximity Page (360 View)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Yellow Terrain
(Between 100’
and 1000’ Below
the Aircraft
Altitude)
Map Range Arc
Black Terrain
(Terrain More than
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Red Terrain
(Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
APPENDICES
Terrain Legend
Figure 6-57 Terrain Proximity Page (ARC View)
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
325
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
6.4 Terrain-SVS (Optional)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Warning: Do not use TERRAIN-SVS information for primary terrain avoidance. TERRAIN-SVS is intended
only to enhance situational awareness.
NOTE: Terrain data is not displayed when the aircraft latitude is greater than 75° North or 60° South.
EIS
NOTE: TERRAIN-SVS is standard when the Synthetic Vision System (SVS) option is installed. The TAWS-B
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Perspective® TERRAIN-SVS is a terrain awareness system available with the Synthetic Vision System (SVS).
SVS functionality is offered as an optional enhancement. Optional Terrain Awareness and Warning System
(TAWS) or standard TERRAIN-SVS is integrated within SVS to provide visual and auditory alerts to indicate the
presence of threatening terrain relevant to the projected flight path. For detailed information regarding SVS, refer
to the Synthetic Vision System (SVS) section of the Perspective® Pilot’s Guide.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
option will take precedence over TERRAIN-SVS.
TERRAIN-SVS does not comply with TSO-C151b certification standards. It increases situational awareness
and aids in reducing controlled flight into terrain (CFIT). Do not confuse TERRAIN-SVS with Terrain Awareness
and Warning System (TAWS). TAWS is more sophisticated and robust, and it is TSO-C151b certified. Although
the terrain and obstacle color map displays are the same, TAWS uses more sophisticated algorithms to assess
aircraft distance from terrain and obstacles.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TERRAIN-SVS does not provide the following:
• Premature Descent Alerting (PDA)
• Excessive Descent Rate (EDR)
• Negative Climb Rate (NCR)
AFCS
• Descent to 500 Feet Callout (DFC)
TERRAIN-SVS requires the following components to operate properly:
• Valid 3-D GPS position
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Valid terrain/obstacle database
APPENDICES
TERRAIN-SVS displays altitudes of terrain and obstructions relative to the aircraft position and altitude with
reference to a database that may contain inaccuracies. Terrain and obstructions are shown only if they are in the
database. Terrain and obstacle information should be used as an aid to situational awareness. They should never
be used to navigate or maneuver around terrain.
Note that all obstructions may not be available in the terrain and obstacle database. No terrain and obstacle
information is shown without a valid 3-D GPS position.
INDEX
The Perspective® GPS receiver provides the horizontal position and altitude. GPS altitude is derived from
satellite position. GPS altitude is then converted to a mean sea level (MSL)-based altitude (GPS-MSL altitude) and
is used to determine terrain and obstacle proximity. GPS-MSL altitude accuracy is affected by satellite geometry,
but is not subject to variations in pressure and temperature that normally affect pressure altitude sensors. GPSMSL altitude does not require local altimeter settings to determine MSL altitude. It is a widely-used MSL altitude
source.
326
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Terrain and obstacle databases are referenced to MSL. Using the GPS position and altitude, the TERRAIN-SVS
feature portrays a 3-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the position and altitude of the
aircraft. GPS position and GPS-MSL altitude are used to calculate and predict the aircraft’s flight path in relation
to the surrounding terrain and obstacles. In this way, the pilot can view predicted dangerous terrain and obstacle
conditions.
Displaying TERRAIN-SVS Data
EIS
TERRAIN-SVS uses yellow (caution) and red (warning) to depict terrain and obstacles (with heights greater
than 200 feet above ground level, AGL) alerts relative to aircraft altitude. Colors are adjusted automatically as
the aircraft altitude changes. The colors and symbols in Figure 6-58 and Table 6-5 are used to represent terrain,
obstacles, and potential impact points.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-58 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for TERRAIN-SVS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
Potential
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL Impact Points
Obstacle Location
WARNING: Red obstacle is above or within
100’ below current aircraft altitude
AFCS
CAUTION: Yellow obstacle is between 100’
and 1000’ below current aircraft altitude
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Table 6-5 TERRAIN-SVS Obstacle Colors and Symbology
TERRAIN-SVS information can be displayed on the following maps:
• Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Flight Plan Pages
• TERRAIN-SVS Page
• AUX - Video Page
APPENDICES
• PFD Inset Map
Displaying terrain and obstacle information (maps other than the TERRAIN-SVS Page):
INDEX
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey).
2) Press the TERRAIN Softkey to display terrain and obstacle data.
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
327
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
When TERRAIN-SVS is selected on maps other than the TERRAIN-SVS Page, an icon to indicate the feature
is enabled for display and a legend for TERRAIN-SVS terrain colors are shown (Figure 6-65).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu provides a means in addition to the softkeys for enabling/disabling the
display of terrain and obstacles. The setup menu also controls the map range settings above which terrain and
obstacle data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the map range setting is selected, the
data is removed from the map. For terrain data, the enable/disable function applies only to the MFD, while the
range setting also affects the PFD Inset Map.
EIS
Terrain data can be selected for display independently of obstacle data; however, obstacles for which warnings
and cautions are issued are shown when terrain is selected for display and the map range is within the setting
limit.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Maps besides the TERRAIN-SVS Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page. The
maximum display ranges for obstacles on each map are dependent on the range setting made for the Navigation
Map. If the maximum range for obstacle display on the Navigation Map is adjusted to below 20 nm, the highest
obstacle display range settings on the other applicable maps are also adjusted proportionally.
Customizing terrain and obstacle display on the Navigation Map Page:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-59).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-60).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-61).
• TERRAIN DATA – Turns the display of terrain data on or off and sets maximum range at which terrain is shown
• OBSTACLE DATA – Turns the display of obstacle data on or off and sets maximum range at which obstacles are shown
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings).
AFCS
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
328
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Figure 6-59 Navigation Map Page Menu
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-60 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-61 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Map Group
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
329
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
TERRAIN-SVS Page
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The TERRAIN-SVS Page is specialized to show terrain, obstacle, and potential impact point data in relation
to the aircraft’s current altitude, without clutter from the basemap. Aviation data (airports, VORs, and other
NAVAIDs) can be displayed for reference. If an obstacle and the projected flight path of the aircraft intersect,
the display automatically zooms in to the closest potential point of impact on the TERRAIN-SVS Page.
Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. Two views are available
relative to the position of the aircraft: the 360° default display and the radar-like ARC (120°) display. Map
range is adjustable with the RANGE Knob from 1 to 200 nm, as indicated by the map range rings (or arcs).
EIS
Displaying the TERRAIN-SVS Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the TERRAIN-SVS Page.
Changing the TERRAIN-SVS Page view:
1) Press the VIEW Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the 360 or ARC Softkey to select the desired view.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘View 120º’ or ‘View 360º’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key to change the view
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Showing/hiding aviation information on the TERRAIN-SVS Page:
1) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
2) Select ‘Show Aviation Data’ or ‘Hide Aviation Data’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
330
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Red Terrain
(Warning - Terrain
Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Yellow Terrain
(Caution - Terrain
Between 100’ and
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
EIS
Black Terrain
(Terrain More than
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Map Range Rings
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Terrain Legend
Annunciation Window
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-62 TERRAIN-SVS Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Red Terrain
(Warning - Terrain
Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
AFCS
Map Range Arc
Yellow Terrain
(Caution - Terrain
Between 100’
and 1000’ Below
the Aircraft
Altitude)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Black Terrain
(Terrain More than
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Terrain Legend
Figure 6-63 TERRAIN-SVS Page (ARC View)
APPENDICES
Annunciation Window
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
331
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
TERRAIN-SVS Alerts
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Alerts are issued when flight conditions meet parameters that are set within TERRAIN-SVS software algorithms.
TERRAIN-SVS alerts typically employ a CAUTION or a WARNING alert severity level, or both. When an
alert is issued, visual annunciations are displayed and aural alerts are simultaneously issued. Table 6-6 shows
TERRAIN-SVS alert types with corresponding annunciations and aural messages.
EIS
When an alert is issued, annunciations appear on the PFD and MFD. The TERRAIN-SVS Alert Annunciation
is shown to the upper left of the Altimeter on the PFD and below the Terrain Legend on the MFD. If the
TERRAIN-SVS Page is not displayed at the time, a pop-up alert appears on the MFD. To acknowledge the popup alert:
• Press the CLR Key (returns to the currently viewed page), or
• Press the ENT Key (accesses the TERRAIN-SVS Page)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Alert Annunciation
Pop-up
Alert
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 6-64 TERRAIN-SVS Alert Annunciations
Terrain Display Enabled
Terrain Legend
INDEX
Alert Annunciation
Figure 6-65 Navigation Map Page
(After TERRAIN-SVS Pop-up Alert Acknowledgment)
332
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
MFD
Pop-Up Alert
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PFD/MFD
Alert
Annunciation
Alert Type
Aural Message
“Warning; Terrain, Terrain”
Imminent Terrain Impact Warning (ITI)
“Warning; Terrain, Terrain”
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Warning (ROC)
“Warning; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Imminent Obstacle Impact Warning (IOI)
“Warning; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Imminent Terrain Impact Caution (ITI)
“Caution; Terrain, Terrain”
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Caution (ROC)
“Caution; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Imminent Obstacle Impact Caution (IOI)
“Caution; Obstacle, Obstacle”
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
“Caution; Terrain, Terrain”
EIS
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Caution (RTC)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Warning (RTC)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Table 6-6 TERRAIN-SVS Alerts Summary
Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance (RTC) and Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance (ROC)
alerts are issued when the aircraft flight path is above terrain, yet is projected to come within the minimum
clearance values in Figure 6-66. When an RTC alert is issued, a potential impact point is displayed on the
TERRAIN-SVS Page.
AFCS
Imminent Terrain Impact (ITI) and Imminent Obstacle Impact (IOI) alerts are issued when the
aircraft is below the elevation of a terrain or obstacle cell in the aircraft’s projected path. ITI and IOI alerts
are accompanied by a potential impact point displayed on the TERRAIN-SVS Page. The alert is annunciated
when the projected vertical flight path is calculated to come within minimum clearance altitudes in Figure
6-66.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
333
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Required Terrain Clearance
RTC Level (FT)
RTC Descending (FT)
800
EIS
Required
Terrain
Clearance
(FT)
Required
Terrain Clearance
(FT)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
700
600
500
400
300
200
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
100
0
0
5
10
15
20
Distance From Runway (NM)
Distance
From Runway (NM)
25
30
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-66 FLTA Alert Minimum Terrain and Obstacle Clearance Values
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLTA alerts are automatically inhibited when the aircraft is less than 200 feet above the destination runway
elevation while within 0.5 nm of the approach runway or the aircraft is between runway ends.
Figure 6-67 TERRAIN-SVS Alerting Disabled
(TERRAIN-SVS Inhibited) Annunciation
Inhibiting/enabling TERRAIN-SVS alerting:
AFCS
1) Select the TERRAIN-SVS Page.
2) Press the INHIBIT Softkey to inhibit or enable TERRAIN-SVS (choice dependent on current state).
Or:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Inhibit TERRAIN-SVS’ or ‘Enable TERRAIN-SVS’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT
Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
If TERRAIN-SVS alerts are inhibited when the Final Approach Fix is the active waypoint in a GPS WAAS
approach, a ‘LOW ALT’ annunciation may appear on the PFD next to the Altimeter if the current aircraft
altitude is at least 164 feet below the prescribed altitude at the Final Approach Fix. See the Flight Instruments
Section for details.
334
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Status
During power-up, TERRAIN-SVS conducts a self-test of its aural and visual annunciations. An aural alert is
issued at test completion.
PFD/MFD Alert
Annunciation
Aural Message
System Test in Progress
System Test Pass
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Alert Type
None
None
Terrain System Test Fail
“Terrain System Test OK”
“Terrain System Failure”
EIS
Table 6-7 TERRAIN-SVS System Test Status Annunciations
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TERRAIN-SVS continually monitors several system-critical items such as database validity, hardware status,
and GPS status. If the terrain/obstacle database is not available, the aural message “Terrain System Failure” is
generated along with the ‘TER FAIL’ alert annunciation.
PFD/MFD Alert
Annunciation
No GPS position
Excessively degraded GPS signal
GPS signal re-established
Aural Message
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Alert Type
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TERRAIN-SVS requires a 3-D GPS navigation solution along with specific vertical accuracy minimums.
Should the navigation solution become degraded or if the aircraft is out of the database coverage area, the
annunciation ‘TER N/A’ is generated in the annunciation window and on the TERRAIN-SVS Page. The aural
message “Terrain System Not Available” is generated. When the GPS signal is re-established and the aircraft
is within the database coverage area, the aural message “Terrain System Available” is generated.
“Terrain System Not Available”
None
“Terrain System Available”
AFCS
Table 6-8 TERRAIN-SVS Status Annunciations
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
335
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
6.5 Terrain Awareness & Warning System
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Warning: Do not use TAWS-B information for primary terrain avoidance. TAWS-B is intended only to
enhance situational awareness.
NOTE: Terrain data is not displayed when the aircraft latitude is greater than 75° North or 60° South.
EIS
NOTE: The data contained in the TAWS databases comes from government agencies. Garmin accurately
processes and cross-validates the data but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of the data.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TAWS-B (Terrain Awareness and Warning System - Class B) is an optional feature to increase situational awareness
and aid in reducing controlled flight into terrain (CFIT). TAWS provides visual and aural annunciations when
terrain and obstacles are within the given altitude threshold from the aircraft. The displayed alerts and warnings
are advisory in nature only.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TAWS satisfies TSO-C151b Class A requirements for certification. TAWS requires the following to operate
properly:
• A valid terrain/obstacle/airport terrain database
• A valid 3-D GPS position solution
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TAWS uses terrain and obstacle information supplied by government sources. Terrain information is based on
terrain elevation information in a database that may contain inaccuracies. Individual obstructions may be shown
if available in the database. The data undergoes verification by Garmin to confirm accuracy of the content, per
TSO-C151b. However, the displayed information should never be understood as being all-inclusive and data
may be inaccurate.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
TAWS uses information provided from the GPS receiver to provide a horizontal position and altitude. GPS
altitude is derived from satellite measurements. GPS altitude is converted to a mean sea level (MSL)-based altitude
(GPS-MSL altitude) and is used to determine TAWS alerts. GPS-MSL altitude accuracy is affected by factors such
as satellite geometry, but it is not subject to variations in pressure and temperature that normally affect pressure
altitude devices. GPS-MSL altitude does not require local altimeter settings to determine MSL altitude. Therefore,
GPS altitude provides a highly accurate and reliable MSL altitude source to calculate terrain and obstacle alerts.
APPENDICES
The terrain and obstacle databases used by TAWS are referenced to mean sea level (MSL). Using the GPS
position and GPS-MSL altitude, TAWS displays a 2-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to
the position and altitude of the aircraft. Furthermore, the GPS position and GPS-MSL altitude are used to calculate
and “predict” the aircraft’s flight path in relation to the surrounding terrain and obstacles. In this manner, TAWS
can provide advanced alerts of predicted dangerous terrain conditions.
INDEX
Baro-corrected altitude (or indicated altitude) is derived by adjusting the altimeter setting for local atmospheric
conditions. The most accurate baro-corrected altitude can be achieved by frequently updating the altimeter setting
to the nearest reporting station along the flight path. However, because actual atmosphere conditions seldom
match the standard conditions defined by the International Standard Atmosphere (ISA) model (where pressure,
temperature, and lapse rates have fixed values), it is common for the baro-corrected altitude (as read from the
altimeter) to differ from the GPS-MSL altitude. This variation results in the aircraft’s true altitude differing from
the baro-corrected altitude.
336
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying TAWS Data
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
TAWS uses yellow (caution) and red (warning) to depict terrain and obstacles (with heights greater than 200
feet above ground level, AGL) alerts relative to aircraft altitude. Colors are adjusted automatically as the aircraft
altitude changes. The colors and symbols in Figure 6-67 and Table 6-10 are used to represent terrain, obstacles,
and potential impact points.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
Potential
Impact
Points
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-68 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for TAWS-B
Obstacle Location
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
WARNING: Red obstacle is above or within
100’ below current aircraft altitude
CAUTION: Yellow obstacle is between 100’
and 1000’ below current aircraft altitude
AFCS
Table 6-9 TAWS Obstacle Colors and Symbology
TAWS information can be displayed on the following maps:
• Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Flight Plan Page
• TAWS-B Page
• AUX - Video Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• PFD Inset Map
Displaying terrain and obstacle information (maps other than the TAWS-B Page):
APPENDICES
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey).
2) Press the TERRAIN Softkey to display terrain and obstacle data.
When TAWS is selected on maps other than the TAWS-B Page, an icon to indicate the feature is enabled for
display and a legend for TAWS terrain colors are shown (Figure 6-74).
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
337
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu provides a means in addition to the softkey for enabling/disabling
display of terrain and obstacles. The setup menu also controls the map range settings above which terrain and
obstacle data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the map range setting is selected, the
data is removed from the map.
Terrain data can be selected for display independently of obstacle data; however, obstacles for which warnings
and cautions are issued are shown when terrain is selected for display and the map range is within the setting
limit.
EIS
Maps besides the TAWS-B Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page. The
maximum display ranges for obstacles on each map are dependent on the range setting made for the Navigation
Map. If the maximum range for obstacle display on the Navigation Map is adjusted to below 20 nm, the
highest obstacle display range settings on the other applicable maps are also adjusted proportionally.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Customizing terrain and obstacle display on the Navigation Map Page:
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-70).
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-69).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-71).
• TERRAIN DATA – Turns the display of terrain data on or off and sets maximum range at which terrain is
shown
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• OBSTACLE DATA – Turns the display of obstacle data on or off and sets maximum range at which obstacles are
shown
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
338
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Figure 6-69 Navigation Map Page Menu
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-70 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-71 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Map Group
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
339
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
TAWS-B Page
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The TAWS-B Page is specialized to show terrain, obstacle, and potential impact point data in relation to
the aircraft’s current altitude, without clutter from the basemap. Aviation data (airports, VORs, and other
NAVAIDs) can be displayed for reference. If an obstacle and the projected flight path of the aircraft intersect,
the display automatically zooms in to the closest potential point of impact on the TAWS-B Page.
Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. Two views are available
relative to the position of the aircraft: the 360° default display and the radar-like ARC (120°) display. Map
range is adjustable with the RANGE Knob from 1 to 200 nm, as indicated by the map range rings (or arcs).
EIS
Displaying the TAWS-B Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the TAWS-B Page.
Changing the TAWS-B Page view:
1) Press the VIEW Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the 360 or ARC Softkey to select the desired view.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘View 120º’ or ‘View 360º’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key to change the view
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Showing/hiding aviation information on the TAWS-B Page:
1) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
2) Select ‘Show Aviation Data’ or ‘Hide Aviation Data’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
340
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Red Terrain
(Warning - Terrain
Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Yellow Terrain
(Caution - Terrain
Between 100’ and
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
EIS
Black Terrain
(Terrain More than
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Map Range Rings
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Terrain Legend
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-72 TAWS-B Page (360 View)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Red Terrain
(Warning - Terrain
Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
AFCS
Map Range Arc
Black Terrain
(Terrain More than
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Yellow Terrain
(Caution - Terrain
Between 100’
and 1000’ Below
the Aircraft
Altitude)
Terrain Legend
APPENDICES
Figure 6-73 TAWS-B Page (ARC View)
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
341
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
TAWS Alerts
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Alerts are issued when flight conditions meet parameters that are set within TAWS software algorithms.
TAWS alerts typically employ a CAUTION or a WARNING alert severity level, or both. When an alert is issued,
visual annunciations are displayed and aural alerts are simultaneously issued. Table 6-10 shows TAWS alert
types with corresponding annunciations and aural messages.
When an alert is issued, annunciations appear on the PFD and MFD. The TAWS Alert Annunciation is
shown to the upper left of the Altimeter on the PFD and below the Terrain Legend on the MFD. If the TAWS-B
Page is not displayed at the time, a pop-up alert appears on the MFD. To acknowledge the pop-up alert:
EIS
• Press the CLR Key (returns to the currently viewed page), or
• Press the ENT Key (accesses the TAWS-B Page)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Alert Annunciation
Figure 6-74 TAWS-B Alert Annunciations
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Pop-up
Alert
APPENDICES
Terrain Display Enabled
Terrain Legend
Alert Annunciation
INDEX
Figure 6-75 Navigation Map Page
(After TAWS-B Pop-up Alert Acknowledgment)
342
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
MFD Pop-Up Alert
Aural Message
Excessive Descent Rate Warning
(EDR)
“Pull Up”
or
* “Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull Up”*
or
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”
*
or
Imminent Obstacle Impact
Warning (IOI)
*
“Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”*
or
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”
*
“Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”*
or
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”
*
“Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”*
or
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”
or
Reduced Required Obstacle
Clearance Caution (ROC)
or
Imminent Obstacle Impact
Caution (IOI)
or
AFCS
“Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”*
or
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
*
or
Imminent Terrain Impact Caution
(ITI)
“Too Low, Terrain”
None
None
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
“Five-Hundred”
“Sink Rate”
*
or
“Don’t Sink”*
or
“Too Low, Terrain”
APPENDICES
Negative Climb Rate Caution
(NCR)
or
* “Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up”*
or
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Reduced Required Terrain
Clearance Caution (RTC)
or
* “Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up”*
or
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”
* Alerts with multiple messages are configurable at installation and are installation-dependent. Alerts for the default
configuration are indicated with asterisks.
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
INDEX
Table 6-10 TAWS Alerts Summary
190-00820-03 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Reduced Required Obstacle
Clearance Warning (ROC)
Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull Up’*
or
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”
EIS
Imminent Terrain Impact
Warning (ITI)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Reduced Required Terrain
Clearance Warning (RTC)
Premature Descent Alert
Caution (PDA)
Altitude Callout “500”
Excessive Descent Rate Caution
(EDR)
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PFD/MFD Alert
Annunciation
Alert Type
343
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Excessive Descent Rate Alert
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The purpose of the Excessive Descent Rate (EDR) alert is to provide suitable notification when the
aircraft is determined to be closing (descending) upon terrain at an excessive speed. Figure 6-76 shows the
parameters for the alert as defined by TSO-C151b.
6000
5500
5000
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
4500
EIS
4000
NK
: “SI
ion
Caut
3500
”
RATE
3000
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2500
2000
Warning: “PULL UP”
1500
1000
12000
11000
Descent Rate (FPM)
10000
9000
8000
7000
6000
5000
4000
3000
2000
1000
0
0
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
500
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-76 Excessive Descent Rate Alert Criteria
Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance
AFCS
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance (RTC) and Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance (ROC)
alerts are issued when the aircraft flight path is above terrain, yet is projected to come within the minimum
clearance values in Figure 6-77. When an RTC alert is issued, a potential impact point is displayed on the
TAWS-B Page.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Imminent Terrain Impact (ITI) and Imminent Obstacle Impact (IOI) alerts are issued when the
aircraft is below the elevation of a terrain or obstacle cell in the aircraft’s projected path. ITI and IOI alerts are
accompanied by a potential impact point displayed on the TAWS-B Page. The alert is annunciated when the
projected vertical flight path is calculated to come within minimum clearance altitudes in Figure 6-77.
344
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Required Terrain Clearance
RTC Level (FT)
RTC Descending (FT)
800
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
600
500
400
300
EIS
Required
Terrain
Clearance
(FT)
Required
Terrain Clearance
(FT)
700
200
100
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
0
0
5
10
15
20
Distance From Runway (NM)
Distance
From Runway (NM)
25
30
Figure 6-77 FLTA Alert Minimum Terrain and Obstacle Clearance Values
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
FLTA alerts are automatically inhibited when the aircraft is less than 200 feet above the destination runway
elevation while within 0.5 nm of the approach runway or the aircraft is between runway ends.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-78 TERRAIN-SVS Alerting Disabled
(TERRAIN-SVS Inhibited) Annunciation
Premature Descent Alerting
AFCS
A Premature Descent Alert (PDA) is issued when the system detects that the aircraft is significantly
below the normal approach path to a runway (Figure 6-79).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
PDA alerting begins when the aircraft is within 15 nm of the destination airport and ends when the aircraft
is either 0.5 nm from the runway threshold or is at an altitude of 125 feet AGL while within 1.0 nm of the
threshold.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
345
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
800
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Height Above Destination (Feet)
700
600
500
400
300
PDA Alerting Area
200
100
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Distance to Destination (NM)
Figure 6-79 PDA Alerting Threshold
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
PDA and FLTA aural and visual alerts can be manually inhibited. Discretion should be used when inhibiting
TAWS-B and the system should be enabled when appropriate. When TAWS is inhibited, the alert annunciation
‘TAWS INH’ is shown on the PFD and MFD (Figure 6-80).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-80 TAWS Alerting Disabled
(TAWS Inhibited) Annunciation
Inhibiting/enabling TAWS-B alerting:
1) Select the TAWS-B Page.
AFCS
2) Press the INHIBIT Softkey to inhibit or enable TAWS-B (choice dependent on current state).
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
b) Select ‘Inhibit TAWS’ or ‘Enable TAWS’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
If TAWS alerts are inhibited when the Final Approach Fix is the active waypoint in a GPS WAAS approach,
a ‘LOW ALT’ annunciation may appear on the PFD next to the Altimeter if the current aircraft altitude is at
least 164 feet below the prescribed altitude at the Final Approach Fix. See the Flight Instruments Section for
details.
Five-Hundred Aural Alert
INDEX
The purpose of the aural alert message “Five-hundred” is to provide an advisory alert that the aircraft is
500 feet above terrain or the destination runway elevation. When the aircraft descends within 500 feet of
terrain, the aural message “Five-hundred” is generated. There are no display annunciations or pop-up alerts
that accompany the aural message.
346
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Negative Climb Rate After Takeoff Alert (NCR)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Negative Climb Rate (NCR) After Takeoff alert (also referred to as “Altitude Loss After Takeoff”)
provides alerts when the system determines the aircraft is losing altitude (closing upon terrain) after takeoff.
The aural message “Don’t Sink” is given for NCR alerts, accompanied by an annunciation and a pop-up terrain
alert on the display. NCR alerting is only active when departing from an airport and when the following
conditions are met:
• Height above the terrain is less than 700 feet
• Distance from the departure airport is 5 nm or less
EIS
• Heading change from the departure heading is less than 110 degrees
Figure 6-78 shows the NCR alerting parameters as defined by TSO-C151b.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1000
900
700
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
600
“DON’T SINK”
or
“TOO LOW, TERRAIN”
500
400
300
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
800
200
100
0
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
Altitude Loss (Feet)
AFCS
Figure 6-81 Negative Climb Rate (NCR) Altitude Loss
1000
900
700
600
“DON’T SINK”
or
“TOO LOW, TERRAIN”
500
400
300
APPENDICES
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
800
200
100
0
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
4000
4500
5000
5500
6000
6500
7000
INDEX
0
Sink Rate (FPM)
Figure 6-82 Negative Climb Rate (NCR) Sink Rate
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
347
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
System Status
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
During power-up, TAWS conducts a self-test of its aural and visual annunciations. The system test can also be
manually initiated. A single chime is issued at test completion. TAWS System Testing is disabled when ground
speed exceeds 30 knots.
PFD/MFD Alert TAWS-B Page
Annunciation Annunciation
Alert Type
System Test in Progress
System Test Pass
None
EIS
TAWS System Test Fail
Aural Message
TAWS TEST
None
None
Single Chime
TAWS FAIL
“TAWS System Failure”
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Manually testing the TAWS-B System:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Table 6-11 TAWS System Test Status Annunciations
3) Select ‘Test TAWS’ and press the ENT Key to confirm the selection.
1) Select the TAWS-B Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the MENU Key (Figure 6-83).
AFCS
Figure 6-83 TAWS-B Page Menu
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TAWS continually monitors several system-critical items such as database validity, hardware status, and GPS
status. If the terrain/obstacle database is not available, the aural message “TAWS System Failure” is generated
along with the ‘TAWS FAIL’ alert annunciation.
TAWS requires a 3-D GPS navigation solution along with specific vertical accuracy minimums. Should the
navigation solution become degraded or if the aircraft is out of the database coverage area, the annunciation
‘TAWS N/A’ is generated in the annunciation window and on the TAWS-B Page. The aural message “TAWS Not
Available” is generated. When the GPS signal is re-established and the aircraft is within the database coverage
area, the aural message “TAWS Available” is generated.
Alert Type
PFD/MFD Alert
Annunciation
INDEX
No GPS position
Excessively degraded GPS signal
No terrain database coverage
GPS signal re-established
Aural Message
“TAWS Not Available”
None
“TAWS Available”
Table 6-12 TAWS Status Annunciations
348
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.6 Avidyne TAS600 Series (Optional)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Refer to the Avidyne TAS600 Series Pilot’s Guide for a detailed discussion of the Avidyne TAS600.
Traffic Advisory System (TAS) is designed to help in detection and avoidance of other aircraft. TAS uses an onboard interrogator-processor and an altitude reporting transponder for the air-to-air traffic data link.
TAS Symbology
Traffic is displayed according to TCAS symbology using four different symbols.
EIS
TAS Symbol
Description
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Non-Threat Traffic
Proximity Advisory (PA)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Traffic Advisory (TA)
Traffic Advisory Off Scale
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Table 6-13 TAS Symbol Description
A Non-threat Advisory, shown as an open white diamond, indicates that an intruding aircraft is at greater than
±1200 feet relative altitude or the distance is beyond 5 nm.
A Proximity Advisory indicates that the intruding aircraft is within ±1200 feet and is within 5 nm range, but
is still not considered a threat.
AFCS
A Traffic Advisory (TA) alerts the crew to a potentially hazardous intruding aircraft. Closing rate, distance,
and vertical separation meet TA criteria. A Traffic Advisory that is beyond the selected display range is indicated
by a half TA symbol at the edge of the screen at the relative bearing of the intruder.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Displaying Traffic Data
Traffic information is displayed on the following maps:
• Nearest Pages
• Navigation Map Page
• Active Flight Plan Page
• Traffic Map Page
• AUX - Video Page
APPENDICES
• PFD Inset Map
• Trip Planning Page
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
INDEX
Traffic information can also be displayed on the PFD when the Synthetic Vision System (SVS) option is
installed and enabled. See the Additional Features Section for details.
349
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Displaying traffic on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Map Page.
3) Turn the RANGE Knob clockwise to display a larger area or counter-clockwise to display a smaller area.
Operating
Mode
Traffic Display
Range
EIS
Altitude
Mode
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Traffic
Advisory,
Aircraft is
400’ Below,
Climbing
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
“Non-Bearing”
Traffic (Bearing
Undetermined),
Distance 8.0 nm,
1100’ Above,
Descending
Proximity
Traffic, 1000’
Above,
Descending
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Off Scale
Traffic
Figure 6-84 Traffic Map Page
AFCS
The Traffic Map Page shows surrounding TAS traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s current position and
altitude, without basemap clutter. Aircraft orientation is always heading up unless there is no valid heading.
Map range is adjustable with the RANGE Knob from 2 to 24 nm, as indicated by the map range rings.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The traffic mode and altitude display mode are annunciated in the upper left corner.
Displaying traffic information (maps other than the Traffic Map Page):
1) Press the MAP Softkey.
2) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey to display traffic data.
INDEX
APPENDICES
When traffic is selected on maps other than the Traffic Map Page, a traffic icon is shown to indicate TAS is
enabled for display.
350
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Traffic
Advisory
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Proximity
Traffic
EIS
Non-Threat
Traffic
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TA Off Scale
Banner
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Non-Bearing
Traffic
Advisories
Figure 6-85 TAS Traffic on Navigation Map
Displaying traffic information (PFD Inset Map):
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the INSET Softkey.
2) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey to display traffic data on the inset map (TRFC-1).
3) Press the softkey again to display the traffic-only inset (TRFC-2).
4) Press the softkey again to remove traffic data.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
351
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Altitude Display
Changing the altitude display mode:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) On the Traffic Page, press the ALT MODE Softkey.
EIS
2) Press one of the following Softkeys:
•
BELOW
•
NORMAL
•
ABOVE
•
UNREST (unrestricted)
3) To return to the Traffic Page, press the BACK Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select one of the following:
•
BELOW
•
NORMAL
•
ABOVE
•
UNREST (unrestricted)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the ENT Softkey.
Traffic Map Page Display Range
The display range on the Traffic Map Page can be changed at any time. Map range is adjustable with the
RANGE Knob from 2 to 24 nm, as indicated by the map range rings.
AFCS
Changing the display range on the Traffic Page:
1) Turn the RANGE Knob.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) The following range options are available:
•
2 nm
•
2 and 6 nm
•
6 and 12 nm
•
12 and 24 nm
INDEX
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu also controls the display of traffic. The setup menu controls the map
range settings. Traffic data symbols and labels can be decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than
the map range setting is selected, the data is removed from the map. Maps besides the Traffic Map Page use
settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
352
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Customizing the traffic display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) With Map Setup highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-86).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-87).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through the selections (Figure 6-88).
• TRAFFIC – Turns the display of traffic data on or off
- All Traffic - Displays all traffic
- TA/PA - Displays Traffic Alerts and Proximity Advisories
- TA ONLY - Displays Traffic Alerts only
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
• TRAFFIC MODE – Selects the traffic mode for display; select from:
• TRAFFIC SMBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic symbols are shown
• TRAFFIC LBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic labels are shown with the option to turn off
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (ON/OFF, range settings, etc.).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 6-86 Navigation Map Page Menu
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-87 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-88 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Traffic Group
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
353
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
TAS Alerts
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Refer to the TAS600 documentation for information on alerts generated by the TAS equipment.
When the number of TAs on the Traffic Map Page increases from one scan to the next, the following occur:
• A “Traffic” voice alert is generated followed by the clock position, relative altitude and range of the TA.
• A TRAFFIC Annunciation appears at the top right of the airspeed on the PFD, flashing for 5 seconds and
remaining displayed until no TAs are detected in the area.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
• The PFD Inset Map is automatically displayed with TA traffic.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Inset Map
Displays When
TA is Detected
Figure 6-89 Traffic Annunciation (PFD)
TAS Voice Alerts
AFCS
To listen to an update of Traffic Advisories press the MUTE Softkey twice.
Muting the TAS voice alert in progress:
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the MUTE Softkey while the voice alert is playing. Subsequent voice alerts will be heard.
354
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Status
NOTE: Refer to the TAS600 documentation for information on the operating mode.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page.
Traffic Mode Annunciation
(Traffic Map Page)
Mode
Traffic Display Enabled Icon
(Other Maps)
OPERATING
TAS Operating
EIS
FAIL
TAS Failed*
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
* See Table 6-15 for additional failure annunciations
Table 6-14 TAS Modes
If the unit fails, an annunciation as to the cause of the failure is shown in the center of the Traffic Map Page.
DATA FAILED
Description
Data is not being received from the TAS unit
Data is being received from the TAS unit, but the
unit is self-reporting a failure
Incorrect data format received from the TAS unit
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FAILED
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Traffic Map Page
Annunciation
NO DATA
Table 6-15 TAS Failure Annunciations
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
355
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
The annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left corner of
maps on which traffic can be displayed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation
EIS
TA OFF SCALE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TA X.X ± XX ↕
TRFC FAIL
NO TRFC DATA
Description
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display
range*
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within
the selected display range
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic
Advisory**
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude
separation in hundreds of feet, and altitude trend
arrow (climbing/descending)
TAS unit has failed (unit is self-reporting a failure or
sending incorrectly formatted data)
Data is not being received from the TAS unit
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Table 6-16 TAS Traffic Status Annunciations
356
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.7 L-3 Skywatch (Optional)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Refer to the SKYWATCH® (SKY497) Pilot’s Guide for a detailed discussion of the SKY497 TAS.
Traffic Advisory System (TAS) is designed to help in detection and avoidance of other aircraft. TAS uses an onboard interrogator-processor and an altitude reporting transponder for the air-to-air traffic data link.
TAS Symbology
Traffic is displayed according to TCAS symbology using four different symbols.
EIS
TAS Symbol
Description
Non-Threat Traffic
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Proximity Advisory (PA)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Traffic Advisory (TA)
Traffic Advisory Off Scale
Table 6-17 TAS Symbol Description
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
A Non-threat Advisory, shown as an open white diamond, indicates that an intruding aircraft is at greater than
±1200 feet relative altitude or the distance is beyond 5 nm.
A Proximity Advisory indicates that the intruding aircraft is within ±1200 feet and is within 5 nm range, but
is still not considered a threat.
AFCS
A Traffic Advisory (TA) alerts the crew to a potentially hazardous intruding aircraft. Closing rate, distance,
and vertical separation meet TA criteria. A Traffic Advisory that is beyond the selected display range is indicated
by a half TA symbol at the edge of the screen at the relative bearing of the intruder.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
357
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Operation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The unit must be in operating mode for traffic to be displayed. The ability to switch from standby to operating
mode on the ground is especially useful for scanning the airspace around the airport before takeoff.
Switching from standby mode to operating mode:
1) On the Traffic Page, press the OPERATE Softkey or press the MENU Key and turn the small FMS knob to select
Operating Mode.
2) If using the FMS menu, press the ENT Key to place the SKY497 in the operating mode.
EIS
3) To switch to Standby Mode from the Traffic Page, press the STANDBY Softkey.
System Self Test
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Set the range to 2/6 nm.
2) Press the STANDBY Softkey.
3) Press the TEST Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Self test takes approximately eight seconds to complete. When completed successfully, traffic symbols display
and a voice alert “Traffic Advisory System Test Passed” is heard. If the self test fails, the system reverts to
Standby Mode and a voice alert “Traffic Advisory System Test Failed” is heard.
Displaying Traffic Data
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Traffic information can be displayed on the following maps when the SKY497 unit is operating:
• PFD Inset Map
• Nearest Pages
• Navigation Map Page
• Active Flight Plan Page
• Traffic Map Page
• AUX - Video Page
AFCS
• Trip Planning Page
Traffic information can also be displayed on the PFD when the Synthetic Vision System (SVS) option is
installed and enabled. See the Additional Features Section for details.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Displaying traffic on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Map Page.
3) Press the OPERATE Softkey to begin displaying traffic. OPERATING is displayed in the Traffic mode field.
APPENDICES
4) Press the ALT MODE Softkey to change the altitude volume.
5) Press the STANDBY Softkey to place the system in the Standby mode. STANDBY is displayed in the Traffic mode
field.
INDEX
6) Turn the RANGE Knob clockwise to display a larger area or counter-clockwise to display a smaller area.
358
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Operating
Mode
Traffic Display
Range
Altitude
Mode
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Traffic Advisory,
Aircraft is
400’ Below,
Climbing
EIS
“Non-Bearing”
Traffic (Bearing
Undetermined),
Distance 8.0 nm,
1100’ Above,
Descending
Off Scale
Traffic
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Proximity
Traffic, 1000’
Above,
Descending
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-90 Traffic Map Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Traffic Map Page shows surrounding TAS traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s current position and
altitude, without basemap clutter. Aircraft orientation is always heading up unless there is no valid heading.
Map range is adjustable with the RANGE Knob from 2 to 40 nm, as indicated by the map range rings.
The traffic mode and altitude display mode are annunciated in the upper left corner.
Displaying traffic information (maps other than the Traffic Map Page):
1) Press the MAP Softkey.
AFCS
2) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey. Traffic is now displayed on the map.
When traffic is selected on maps other than the Traffic Map Page, a traffic icon is shown to indicate TAS is
enabled for display.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
359
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Traffic
Advisory
EIS
Proximity
Traffic
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Non-Threat
Traffic
TA Off Scale
Banner
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Non-Bearing
Traffic
Advisories
Figure 6-91 TAS Traffic on Navigation Map
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Displaying traffic information (PFD Inset Map):
1) Press the INSET Softkey.
2) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey to display traffic data on the inset map (TRFC-1).
3) Press the softkey again to display the traffic-only inset (TRFC-2).
AFCS
4) Press the softkey again to remove traffic data.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu also controls the display of traffic. The setup menu controls the map
range settings. Traffic data symbols and labels can be decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than
the map range setting is selected, the data is removed from the map. Maps besides the Traffic Map Page use
settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
360
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Altitude Display
Changing the altitude display mode:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) On the Traffic Page, press the ALT MODE Softkey.
2) Press one of the following Softkeys:
BELOW
•
NORMAL
•
ABOVE
•
UNREST (unrestricted)
EIS
•
3) To return to the Traffic Page, press the BACK Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select one of the following:
BELOW
•
NORMAL
•
ABOVE
•
UNREST (unrestricted)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
•
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the ENT Softkey.
Traffic Map Page Display Range
The display range on the Traffic Map Page can be changed at any time. Map range is adjustable with the
RANGE Knob from 2 to 40 nm, as indicated by the map range rings.
AFCS
Changing the display range on the Traffic Page:
1) Turn the RANGE Knob.
2) The following range options are available:
2 nm
•
2 and 6 nm
•
6 and 12 nm
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
•
APPENDICES
Customizing the traffic display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With Map Setup highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-92).
INDEX
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-93).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through the selections (Figure 6-94).
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
361
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
• TRAFFIC – Turns the display of traffic data on or off
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• TRAFFIC MODE – Selects the traffic mode for display; select from:
- All Traffic - Displays all traffic
- TA/PA - Displays Traffic Alerts and Proximity Advisories
- TA ONLY - Displays Traffic Alerts only
• TRAFFIC SMBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic symbols are shown
• TRAFFIC LBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic labels are shown with the option to turn off
EIS
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (ON/OFF, range settings, etc.).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 6-92 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-94 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Traffic Group
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 6-93 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
362
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TAS Alerts
NOTE: Refer to the SKY497 documentation for information on alerts generated by the TAS equipment.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the number of TAs on the Traffic Map Page increases from one scan to the next, the following occur:
• A “Traffic, Traffic” voice alert is generated.
• A TRAFFIC Annunciation appears at the top right of the airspeed on the PFD, flashing for 5 seconds and
remaining displayed until no TAs are detected in the area.
EIS
• The PFD Inset Map is automatically displayed with TA traffic
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Inset Map
Displays When
TA is Detected
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-95 Traffic Annunciation (PFD)
System Status
Traffic Mode Annunciation
(Traffic Map Page)
TAS Self-test Initiated
TEST
(also shown in white in center of page)
TAS Operating
Traffic Display Enabled Icon
(Other Maps)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Mode
AFCS
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page.
OPERATING
STANDBY
(also shown in white in center of page)
TAS Failed*
FAIL
APPENDICES
TAS Standby
* See Table 6-19 for additional failure annunciations
INDEX
Table 6-18 TAS Modes
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
363
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
If the unit fails, an annunciation as to the cause of the failure is shown in the center of the Traffic Map Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Traffic Map Page
Annunciation
NO DATA
DATA FAILED
FAILED
Description
Data is not being received from the TAS unit
Data is being received from the TAS unit, but the
unit is self-reporting a failure
Incorrect data format received from the TAS unit
EIS
Table 6-19 TAS Failure Annunciations
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left corner of
maps on which traffic can be displayed.
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TA OFF SCALE
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TA X.X ± XX ↕
TRFC FAIL
NO TRFC DATA
Description
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range*
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the
selected display range
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory**
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude
separation in hundreds of feet, and altitude trend arrow
(climbing/descending)
TAS unit has failed (unit is self-reporting a failure or
sending incorrectly formatted data)
Data is not being received from the TAS unit
*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Table 6-20 TAS Traffic Status Annunciations
364
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Section 7 Automatic Flight Control System
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Note: The approved Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) always supersedes this Pilot’s Guide.
7.1 GFC 700 (Optional)
• GSA 80 AFCS Yaw Servo (optional)
• GDU 1240A Multi-Function Display (MFD)
• GSA 81 AFCS Servos (2)
• GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Units (2 IAUs)
• GTA 82 Pitch Trim Adapter
• GMC 705 AFCS Control Unit
• GSM 85 Servo Gearboxes (3)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• GDU 1240A Primary Flight Display (PFD)
EIS
The GFC 700 is a digital Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS), fully integrated within the Perspective®
System avionics architecture. The System Overview section provides a block diagram to support this system
description. GFC 700 AFCS functionality in the Cirrus SR20, SR22 and SR22TN is distributed across the
following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The GFC 700 AFCS can be divided into these main operating functions:
• Flight Director (FD) — Flight director operation takes place within either GIA 63W. Flight director commands
are displayed on the PFD. The flight director provides:
– Command Bars showing pitch/roll guidance
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
– Vertical/lateral mode selection and processing
– Autopilot communication
• Autopilot (AP) — Autopilot operation occurs within the pitch, roll, yaw, and pitch trim servos. It also provides
servo monitoring and automatic flight control in response to flight director steering commands, Attitude and
Heading Reference System (AHRS) attitude and rate information, and airspeed.
AFCS
• Yaw Damper (YD) — The yaw servo (optional) is self-monitoring and provides Dutch roll damping and turn
coordination in response to yaw rate, roll angle, lateral acceleration, and airspeed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Manual Electric Trim (MET) — The pitch trim adapter provides manual electric pitch trim capability when
the autopilot is not engaged and provides directional trim during climbs and descents.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
365
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
GFC 700 Controls
The GFC 700 AFCS Control Unit is positioned below the GCU 478, and has the following controls:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
2
3
4
HDG Key
NAV Key
Selects/deselects Heading Select Mode
AP Key
LVL Key
Engages/disengages the autopilot
Engages the autopilot in level vertical and lateral modes
Adjusts the vertical mode reference in Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, Indicated
Airspeed, and Altitude Hold modes
Selects/deselects Indicated Airspeed Mode
Selects/deselects Altitude Hold Mode
Selects/deselects Vertical Path Tracking Mode for Vertical Navigation flight control
Selects/deselects Vertical Speed Mode
Engages/disengages the yaw damper
Activates/deactivates the flight director only
Pressing once turns on the director in the default vertical and lateral modes.
Pressing again deactivates the flight director and removes the Command Bars. If
the autopilot is engaged, the key is disabled.
Selects/deselects Approach Mode
Selects/deselects Navigation Mode
NOSE UP/DN
Wheel
6 IAS Key
7 ALT Key
8 VNV Key
9 VS Key
10 YD Key
11 FD Key
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
5
12
APR Key
2
3
4
12
11
10
5
6
7
9
8
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 7-1 GMC 705 AFCS Control Unit
366
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The following GFC 700 AFCS controls are located separately from the GFC 700 AFCS Control Unit:
GA Button
(Go Around)
Disengages the autopilot, yaw damper, and flight director and interrupts pitch trim
operation
An AP DISC Button is located on the pilot’s control stick.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AP DISC Button
(Autopilot
Disconnect)
This button may be used to acknowledge an autopilot disconnect alert and mute the
associated aural tone.
Disengages the autopilot and selects flight director Go Around Mode
EIS
If an approach procedure is loaded this switch also activates the missed approach when
the selected navigation source is GPS or when the navigation source is VOR/LOC and
a valid frequency has been tuned.
The GA Button is located on the power lever.
Used to command manual electric pitch trim
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MET Switch
(Manual Electric An MET Switch is located on the pilot and copilot control stick.
Trim)
Press DN (forward) and UP (rearward) for manual electric trim. The MET Switch may
be used to acknowledge an autopilot disconnect alert and mute the associated aural
tone.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
367
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
Flight Director Operation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The flight director function provides pitch and roll commands to the AFCS and displays them on the PFD.
With the flight director active, the aircraft can be hand-flown to follow the path shown by the Command Bars.
Maximum commanded pitch (-15°, +20°) and roll (25°) angles, vertical acceleration, and roll rate are limited to
values established during AFCS certification. The flight director also provides commands to the autopilot.
Activating the Flight Director
EIS
An initial press of a key listed in Table 7-1 (when the flight director is not active) activates the flight director
in the listed modes. The flight director may be turned off and the Command Bars removed from the display by
pressing the FD Key again. The FD Key is disabled when the autopilot is engaged.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Control Pressed
Modes Selected
FD Key
AP Key
GA Button
ALT Key
VS Key
VNV Key
Lateral
Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)
Go Around (in air)
Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)
NAV Key
Navigation**
APR Key
Approach**
HDG Key
LVL Key
Heading Select
Level Hold
ROL
ROL
GA
ROL
ROL
ROL
GPS
VOR
LOC
BC
GPS
VOR
LOC
HDG
LVL
Vertical
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Go Around (in air)
GA
Altitude Hold
ALT
Vertical Speed
VS
Vertical Path Tracking* VPTH
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Pitch Hold (default)
Level Hold
PIT
LVL
*Valid VNV flight plan must be entered before VNV Key press activates flight director.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
**The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal or active GPS
course before NAV or APR Key press activates flight director.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Table 7-1 Flight Director Activation
368
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AFCS Status Box
Lateral Modes
Active
Vertical Modes
Active
Mode
Reference
EIS
Armed
Autopilot Yaw Damper
Status
Status
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight director mode annunciations are displayed on the PFD when the flight director is active. Flight director
selection and autopilot and yaw damper statuses are shown in the center of the AFCS Status Box. Lateral flight
director modes are displayed on the left and vertical on the right. Armed modes are displayed in white and
active in green.
Armed
AFCS Status Box
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selected
Altitude
AFCS Status
Annunciation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Command
Bars
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GPS is
Selected
Navigation
Source
AFCS
Figure 7-2 PFD AFCS Display
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
369
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
Flight Director Modes
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight director modes are normally selected independently for the pitch and roll axes. Unless otherwise
specified, all mode keys are alternate action (i.e., press on, press off). In the absence of specific mode selection,
the flight director reverts to the default pitch and/or roll modes.
Armed modes are annunciated in white and active in green in the AFCS Status Box. Under normal operation,
when the control for the active flight director mode is pressed, the flight director reverts to the default mode(s)
for the axis(es). Automatic transition from armed to active mode is indicated by the white armed mode
annunciation moving to the green active mode field and flashing for 10 seconds.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
If the information required to compute a flight director mode becomes invalid or unavailable, the flight
director automatically reverts to the default mode for that axis. A flashing yellow mode annunciation and
annunciator light indicate loss of sensor (ADC) or navigation data (VOR, LOC, GPS, VNV, WAAS) required to
compute commands. When such a loss occurs, the system automatically begins to roll the wings level (enters
Roll Hold Mode) or maintain the pitch angle (enters Pitch Hold Mode), depending on the affected axis. The
flashing annunciation stops when the affected mode key is pressed or another mode for the axis is selected. If
after 10 seconds no action is taken, the flashing annunciation stops.
Figure 7-3 Loss of VOR Signal
The flight director is automatically disabled if the attitude information required to compute the default flight
director modes becomes invalid or unavailable.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Command Bars
AFCS
Upon activation of the flight director, Command Bars are displayed in magenta on the PFD. If the aircraft
is being flown by hand, the command bars are displayed hollow (Figure 7-4). The Command Bars do not
override the Aircraft Symbol. The Command Bars move together vertically to indicate pitch commands and
bank left or right to indicate roll commands.
Command Bars (Autopilot Engaged)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Command Bars
Command Bars (Pilot Hand Flying Aircraft)
Aircraft Symbol
APPENDICES
Figure 7-4 Command Bars
INDEX
If the attitude information being sent to the flight director becomes invalid or unavailable, the Command Bars
are removed from the display.
370
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Vertical Modes
Vertical Mode
Description
Indicated Airspeed (IAS)
Captures and tracks descent legs of
an active vertical profile
VNV Target Altitude Capture
Glideslope
Go Around
VS Key
VS
nnnn fpm
-3000 to
+1500 fpm
100 fpm
IAS Key IAS
nnn kt
80 to
185 kt
1 kt
VNV
Key
ALTV
GP
GS
TO
7°
GA
7°
APPENDICES
Captures the Vertical Navigation
**
(VNV) Target Altitude
Captures and tracks the WAAS
glidepath on approach
APR
Key
Captures and tracks the ILS glideslope
on approach
Commands a constant pitch angle
and wings level on ground in
preparation for takeoff
GA
Disengages the autopilot and Button
commands a constant pitch angle
and wings level in the air
VPTH
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Takeoff
10 ft
AFCS
Glidepath
± 150 ft
*
ALTS
ALT Key ALT nnnnn ft
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Vertical Path Tracking
(If equipped)
0.5°
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Vertical Speed
-15° to
+20°
PIT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selected Altitude Capture
Altitude Hold
(default)
Reference
Change
Increment
EIS
Pitch Hold
Holds the current aircraft pitch
attitude; may be used to climb/
descend to the Selected Altitude
Captures the Selected Altitude
Holds the current Altitude Reference
Maintains the current aircraft vertical
speed; may be used to climb/descend
to the Selected Altitude
Maintains the current aircraft
airspeed in IAS while the aircraft is
climbing/descending to the Selected
Altitude
Reference
Control Annunciation
Range
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Table 7-2 lists the vertical modes with their corresponding controls and annunciations. The mode reference is
displayed next to the active mode annunciation for Altitude Hold, Vertical Speed, and Indicated Airspeed modes.
The NOSE UP/DN Wheel can be used to change the vertical mode reference while operating under Pitch Hold,
Vertical Speed, Indicated Airspeed, or Altitude Hold modes. Increments of change and acceptable ranges of
values for each of these references using the NOSE UP/DN Wheel are also listed in the table.
* ALTS armed automatically when PIT, VS, IAS, or GA active, and under VPTH when Selected Altitude is to be captured instead
of VNV Target Altitude
** ALTV armed automatically under VPTH when VNV Target Altitude is to be captured instead of Selected Altitude
Table 7-2 Flight Director Vertical Modes
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
371
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
Pitch Hold Mode (PIT)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the flight director is activated (the FD Key is pressed), Pitch Hold Mode is selected by default. Pitch
Hold Mode is indicated as the active vertical mode by the green ‘PIT’ annunciation. This mode may be used for
climb or descent to the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter), since Selected Altitude Capture Mode is
automatically armed when Pitch Hold Mode is activated.
In Pitch Hold Mode, the flight director maintains a constant pitch attitude. The pitch reference is set to the
aircraft pitch attitude at the moment of mode selection. If the aircraft pitch attitude exceeds the flight director
pitch command limitations, the flight director commands a pitch angle equal to the nose-up/down limit.
EIS
Changing the Pitch Reference
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
When operating in Pitch Hold Mode, the pitch reference can be adjusted by using the NOSE UP/DN
Wheel.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pitch Hold
Mode Active
Selected Altitude
Capture Mode Armed
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected
Altitude
Command Bars Maintain
Desired Pitch Reference
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 7-5 Pitch Hold Mode
372
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selected Altitude Capture Mode (ALTS)
Selected Altitude Capture Mode is automatically armed with activation of the following modes:
• Go Around
• Vertical Speed
• Vertical Path Tracking (if the Selected Altitude is to
be captured instead of the VNV Target Altitude)
• Indicated Airspeed
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Pitch Hold
EIS
The white ‘ALTS’ annunciation indicates Selected Altitude Capture Mode is armed (see Figure 7-5 for example).
The ALT SEL Knob is used to set the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter) until Selected Altitude
Capture Mode becomes active.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions to Selected Altitude
Capture Mode with Altitude Hold Mode armed (Figure 7-6). This automatic transition is indicated by the green
‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds and the appearance of the white ‘ALT’ annunciation. The
Selected Altitude is shown as the Altitude Reference beside the ‘ALTS’ annunciation.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
At 50 feet from the Selected Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions from Selected Altitude
Capture to Altitude Hold Mode and holds the reference altitude. As Altitude Hold Mode becomes active, the
white ‘ALT’ annunciation moves to the active vertical mode field and flashes green for 10 seconds to indicate
the automatic transition.
Altitude Reference
(in this case, equal to
Selected Altitude)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Flash up to 10 sec, Indicating Automatic Transition
AFCS
Figure 7-6 Automatic Mode Transitions During Altitude Capture
Changing the Selected Altitude
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Use of the ALT SEL Knob to change the Selected Altitude while Selected Altitude Capture Mode is active
causes the flight director to revert to Pitch Hold Mode with Selected Altitude Capture Mode armed for the
new Selected Altitude.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
373
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
Altitude Hold Mode (ALT)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Altitude Hold Mode can be activated by pressing the ALT Key; the flight director maintains the current aircraft
altitude (to the nearest 10 feet) as the Altitude Reference. The flight director’s Altitude Reference, shown in the
AFCS Status Box, is independent of the Selected Altitude, displayed above the Altimeter. Altitude Hold Mode
is indicated by a green ‘ALT’ annunciation in the AFCS Status Box.
Altitude Hold Mode is automatically armed when the flight director is in Selected Altitude Capture Mode (see
Figure 7-6). Selected Altitude Capture Mode automatically transitions to Altitude Hold Mode when the altitude
error is less than 50 feet. In this case, the Selected Altitude becomes the flight director’s Altitude Reference.
EIS
Changing the Altitude Reference
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
When operating in Altitude Hold Mode, the reference altitude can be adjusted by using the NOSE UP/DN
Wheel. The reference altitude can only be moved a maximum of 150 ft from the current aircraft altitude; each
click changes the reference altitude by 10 ft.
NOTE: Turning the ALT SEL Knob while in Altitude Hold Mode changes the Selected Altitude, but not the
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
flight director’s Altitude Reference, and does not cancel the mode.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Altitude Hold
Mode Active
Altitude
Reference
Selected
Altitude
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Selected
Altitude
Bug
Command Bars Hold Pitch Attitude
to Maintain Altitude Reference
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 7-7 Altitude Hold Mode
374
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Vertical Speed Mode (VS)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In Vertical Speed Mode, the flight director acquires and maintains a Vertical Speed Reference. Current aircraft
vertical speed (to the nearest 100 fpm) becomes the Vertical Speed Reference at the moment of Vertical Speed
Mode activation. This mode may be used for climb or descent to the Selected Altitude (shown above the
Altimeter) since Selected Altitude Capture Mode is automatically armed when Vertical Speed Mode is selected.
When Vertical Speed Mode is activated by pressing the VS Key, ‘VS’ is annunciated in green in the AFCS Status
Box along with the Vertical Speed Reference. The Vertical Speed Reference is also displayed above the Vertical
Speed Indicator. A Vertical Speed Reference Bug corresponding to the Vertical Speed Reference is shown on
the indicator.
EIS
Changing the Vertical Speed Reference
Vertical Speed
Mode Active
Vertical
Speed
Reference
Selected
Altitude Capture
Mode Armed
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected
Altitude
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Vertical Speed Reference (shown both in the AFCS Status Box and above the Vertical Speed Indicator)
may be changed by using the NOSE UP/DN Wheel.
Vertical
Speed
Reference
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Vertical
Speed
Reference
Bug
AFCS
Command Bars Indicate Climb to
Attain Vertical Speed Reference
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 7-8 Vertical Speed Hold Mode
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
375
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
Indicated Airspeed Mode (IAS)
NOTE: The Selected Altitude should be set before selecting Indicated Airspeed Mode (IAS).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Indicated Airspeed Mode is selected by pressing the IAS Key. This mode acquires and maintains the
Airspeed Reference (IAS) while climbing or descending to the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter).
When Indicated Airspeed Mode is active, the flight director continuously monitors Selected Altitude, airspeed
and altitude.
EIS
The Airspeed Reference is set to the current airspeed upon mode activation. Indicated Airspeed Mode is
indicated by a green ‘IAS’ annunciation beside the Airspeed Reference in the AFCS Status Box. The Airspeed
Reference is also displayed directly above the Airspeed Indicator, along with a bug corresponding to the Airspeed
Reference along the tape.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Engine power must be adjusted to allow the autopilot to fly the aircraft at a pitch attitude corresponding to
the desired flight profile (climb or descent) while maintaining the Airspeed Reference.
Changing the Airspeed Reference
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Airspeed Reference (shown in both the AFCS Status Box and above the Airspeed Indicator) may be
adjusted by using the NOSE UP/DN Wheel.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Indicated
Airspeed
Mode Active
Selected
Airspeed Altitude Capture
Reference Mode Armed
Selected
Altitude
AFCS
Airspeed
Reference
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Airspeed
Reference
Bug
Command Bars Indicate Climb
to Attain Selected Altitude
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 7-9 Indicated Airspeed Mode (IAS)
376
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Vertical Navigation Modes (VPTH, ALTV)
Note: VNV is disabled when parallel track or Dead Reckoning Mode is active.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Note: The Selected Altitude takes precedence over any other vertical constraints.
Vertical Navigation (VNV) flight control is available for enroute/terminal cruise and descent operations any
time that VNV flight planning is available. Refer to the Flight Management Section for more information on
VNV flight plans. Conditions for availability include, but are not limited to:
EIS
• The selected navigation source is GPS.
• A VNV flight plan (with at least one altitude-constrained waypoint) or vertical direct-to is active.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• VNV is enabled (VNV ENBL Softkey pressed on the MFD).
• Crosstrack error is valid and within certain limits.
• Desired/actual track are valid or track angle error is within certain limits.
• The VNV Target Altitude of the active waypoint is no more than 250 ft above the current aircraft altitude.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The flight director may be armed for VNV at any time, but no target altitudes are captured during a climb.
The Command Bars provide vertical profile guidance based on specified altitudes (entered manually or loaded
from the database) at waypoints in the active flight plan or vertical direct-to. The appropriate VNV flight control
modes are sequenced by the flight director to follow the path defined by the vertical profile. Upon reaching
the last waypoint in the VNV flight plan, the flight director transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and cancels any
armed VNV modes.
Vertical Path Tracking Mode (VPTH)
Note: If another vertical mode key is pressed while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is selected, Vertical Path
AFCS
Tracking Mode reverts to armed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When a vertical profile (VNV flight plan) is active and the VNV Key is pressed, Vertical Path Tracking
Mode is armed in preparation for descent path capture. ‘VPTH’ (or ‘/V’ when Glidepath or Glideslope Mode
is concurrently armed) is annunciated in white in addition to previously armed modes. If applicable, the
appropriate altitude capture mode is armed for capture of the next VNV Target Altitude (ALTV) or the Selected
Altitude (ALTS), whichever is greater.
APPENDICES
Figure 7-10 Vertical Path Tracking Armed Annunciations
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
377
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
Prior to descent path interception, the Selected Altitude must be set below the current aircraft altitude
by at least 75 feet. For the flight director to transition from Altitude Hold to Vertical Path Tracking Mode,
acknowledgment is required within five minutes of descent path interception by:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Pressing the VNV Key
• Adjusting the Selected Altitude
EIS
If acknowledgment is not received within one minute of descent path interception, the white ‘VPTH’
annunciation starts to flash. Flashing continues until acknowledged or the descent path is intercepted. If
the descent is not confirmed by the time of interception, Vertical Path Tracking Mode remains armed and the
descent is not captured.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
In conjunction with the “TOD [top of descent] within 1 minute” annunciation in the PFD Navigation Status
Box and the “Vertical track” voice message, VNV indications (VNV Target Altitude, vertical deviation, and
vertical speed required) appear on the PFD in magenta (Figure 7-11).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Altitude Hold
Mode Active
Vertical Path Tracking
Armed, (Flashing Indicates
Acknowledgment Required)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected
Altitude
AFCS
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
GPS is
Selected
Navigation
Source
VNV Target
Altitude
Required
Vertical
Speed Bug
Terminal
Phase of
Flight
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 7-11 Vertical Path Capture
378
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
When a descent leg is captured (i.e., vertical deviation becomes valid), Vertical Path Tracking becomes
active and tracks the descent profile (Figure 7-12). An altitude capture mode (‘ALTS’ or ‘ALTV’) is armed as
appropriate.
VNV Target Altitude
Capture Armed
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Vertical Path
Tracking Active
EIS
VNV Target
Altitude
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Required
Vertical
Speed
Indication
Terminal
Phase of
Flight
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GPS is
Selected
Navigation
Source
Command Bars Indicate Descent to
Maintain Required Vertical Speed
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Vertical Deviation
Indicator (VDI)
Figure 7-12 Vertical Path Tracking Mode
AFCS
If the altimeter barometric setting is adjusted while Vertical Path Tracking is active, the flight director
increases/decreases the descent rate by up to 500 fpm to re-establish the aircraft on the descent path (without
commanding a climb). Adjusting the altimeter barometric setting creates discontinuities in VNV vertical
deviation, moving the descent path. For large adjustments, it may take several minutes for the AFCS to reestablish on the descent path. If the change is made while nearing a waypoint with a VNV Target Altitude,
the aircraft may not re-establish on the descent path in time to meet the vertical constraint.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
379
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
Automatic Reversion to Pitch Hold Mode
Several situations can occur while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is active which cause the flight director to
revert to Pitch Hold Mode:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Vertical deviation exceeds 200 feet during an overspeed condition.
• Vertical deviation experiences a discontinuity that both exceeds 200 feet in magnitude and results in the
vertical deviation exceeding 200 feet in magnitude. Such discontinuities are usually caused by flight plan
changes that affect the vertical profile.
• Vertical deviation becomes invalid (the Vertical Deviation Indicator is removed from the PFD).
EIS
• A display enters Reversionary Mode (this does not apply to an active vertical direct-to).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Unless VNV is disabled, Vertical Path Tracking Mode and the appropriate altitude capture mode become
armed following the reversion to Pitch Hold Mode to allow for possible profile recapture.
Non-Path Descents
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, and Indicated Airspeed modes can also be used to fly non-path descents
while VNV flight control is selected. If the VS or IAS Key is pressed while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is
selected, Vertical Path Tracking Mode reverts to armed along with the appropriate altitude capture mode to
allow profile re-capture.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 7-13 Indicated Airspeed Mode VNV Non-Path Descent
To prevent immediate profile re-capture, the following must be satisfied:
• At least 10 seconds have passed since the non-path transition was initiated
• Vertical deviation from the profile has exceeded 250 feet, but is now less than 200 feet
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Pressing the VNV Key twice re-arms Vertical Path Tracking for immediate profile re-capture.
380
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode (ALTV)
Note: Armed VNV Target Altitude and Selected Altitude capture modes are mutually exclusive. However,
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected Altitude Capture Mode is armed implicitly (not annunciated) whenever VNV Target Altitude Capture
Mode is armed.
EIS
VNV Target Altitude Capture is analogous to Selected Altitude Capture Mode and is armed automatically
after the VNV Key is pressed and the next VNV Target Altitude is to be intercepted before the Selected
Altitude. The annunciation ‘ALTV’ indicates that the VNV Target Altitude is to be captured. VNV Target
Altitudes are shown in the active flight plan or vertical direct-to, and can be entered manually or loaded
from a database (see the Flight Management Section for details). At the same time as “TOD within 1 minute”
is annunciated in the Navigation Status Box, the active VNV Target Altitude is displayed above the Vertical
Speed Indicator (see Figure 7-11).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
As the aircraft nears the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions to VNV Target
Altitude Capture Mode with Altitude Hold Mode armed. This automatic transition is indicated by the green
‘ALTV’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds and the appearance of the white ‘ALT’ annunciation. The
VNV Target Altitude is shown as the Altitude Reference beside the ‘ALTV’ annunciation and remains displayed
above the Vertical Speed Indicator. The Required Vertical Speed Indication (RVSI) is removed once VNV
Target Altitude Capture Mode becomes active.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
At 50 feet from the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions from VNV Target
Altitude Capture to Altitude Hold Mode and tracks the level leg. As Altitude Hold Mode becomes active, the
white ‘ALT’ annunciation moves to the active vertical mode field and flashes green for 10 seconds to indicate
the automatic transition. The flight director automatically arms Vertical Path Tracking, allowing upcoming
descent legs to be captured and subsequently tracked.
Altitude Reference (In This Case,
Equal To VNV Altitude Target)
AFCS
Flash up to 10 sec, Indicating Automatic Transition
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 7-14 Automatic Mode Transitions During Altitude Capture
Changing the VNV Target Altitude
APPENDICES
Changing the current VNV Target Altitude while VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode is active causes the
flight director to revert to Pitch Hold Mode. Vertical Path Tracking and the appropriate altitude capture
mode are armed in preparation to capture the new VNV Target Altitude or the Selected Altitude, depending
on which altitude is to be intercepted first.
VNV target altitudes can be changed while editing the active flight plan (see the Flight Management
Section for details).
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
381
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
Glidepath Mode (GP)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Glidepath Mode is used to track the WAAS-based glidepath. When Glidepath Mode is armed, ‘GP’ is
annunciated in white in the AFCS Status Box.
Selecting Glidepath Mode:
1) Ensure a GPS approach with vertical guidance (LPV, LNAV/VNAV, LNAV +V) is loaded into the active flight plan.
The active waypoint must be part of the flight plan (cannot be a direct-to a waypoint not in the flight plan).
EIS
2) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
3) Press the APR Key.
NOTE: Some RNAV (GPS) approaches provide a vertical descent angle as an aid in flying a stabilized
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
approach. These approaches are NOT considered Approaches with Vertical Guidance (APV). Approaches
that are annunciated on the HSI as LNAV or LNAV+V are considered Nonprecision Approaches (NPA) and
are flown to an MDA even though vertical glidepath (GP) information may be provided.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
WARNING: When flying an LNAV approach (with vertical descent angle) with the autopilot coupled, the
aircraft will not level off at the MDA even if the MDA is set in the altitude preselect.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Upon reaching the glidepath, the flight director transitions to Glidepath Mode and begins to capture and
track the glidepath.
Figure 7-15 Glidepath Mode Armed
Once the following conditions have been met, the glidepath can be captured:
AFCS
• The active waypoint is at or after the final approach fix (FAF).
• Vertical deviation is valid.
• The CDI is at less than full-scale deviation
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Automatic sequencing of waypoints has not been suspended (no ‘SUSP’ annunciation on the HSI)
382
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
LNAV/VNAV
Approach
Active
Command Bars Indicate
Descent on Glidepath
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Glidepath
Mode Active
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GPS Approach
Mode Active
EIS
Glidepath
Indicator
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 7-16 Glidepath Mode
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GPS is
Selected
Navigation
Source
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
383
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
Glideslope Mode (GS)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Glideslope Mode is available for LOC/ILS approaches to capture and track the glideslope. When Glideslope
Mode is armed (annunciated as ‘GS’ in white), LOC Approach Mode is armed as the lateral flight director
mode.
Selecting Glideslope Mode:
1) Ensure a valid localizer frequency is tuned.
2) Ensure that LOC is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
EIS
3) Press the APR Key.
Or:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
2) Ensure a LOC/ILS approach is loaded into the active flight plan.
3) Ensure the corresponding LOC frequency is tuned.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Press the APR Key.
Figure 7-17 Glideslope Mode Armed
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Once LOC is the navigation source, the localizer and glideslope can be captured. Upon reaching the glideslope,
the flight director transitions to Glideslope Mode and begins to capture and track the glideslope.
Approach
Mode Active
Glideslope
Mode Active
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Active ILS
Frequency Tuned
NAV2 (localizer) is Selected
Navigation Source
Command Bars Indicate Descent
on Localizer/ Glideslope Path
Glideslope
Indicator
INDEX
Figure 7-18 Glideslope Mode
384
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Go Around (GA) and Takeoff (TO) Modes
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Go Around and Takeoff modes are coupled pitch and roll modes and are annunciated as both the vertical
and lateral modes when active. In these modes, the flight director commands a constant set pitch attitude and
keeps the wings level. The GA Switch is used to activate both modes. The mode entered by the flight director
depends on whether the aircraft is on the ground or in the air.
Takeoff Mode provides an attitude reference during rotation and takeoff. This mode can be selected only
while on the ground by pushing the GA Switch. The flight director Command Bars assume a wings-level,
pitch-up attitude.
EIS
Pressing the GA Button while in the air activates the flight director in a wings-level, pitch-up attitude, allowing
the execution of a missed approach or a go around. Go Around Mode disengages the autopilot and arms Selected
Altitude Capture Mode automatically. Subsequent autopilot engagement is allowed. Attempts to modify the
aircraft attitude (i.e., with the NOSE UP/DN Wheel) result in reversion to Pitch and Roll Hold modes.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Go Around Mode Active
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Autopilot Disconnect Annunciation
Flashes Yellow for 5 seconds
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Command Bars Indicate Climb
Takeoff Mode Active
APPENDICES
Figure 7-19 Go Around and Takeoff Modes
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
385
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
Lateral Modes
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following table relates each GFC 700 lateral mode to its respective control and annunciation. Refer to the
vertical modes section for information regarding Takeoff and Go Around Modes.
NOTE: The GFC 700 may generate a lower bank angle than the maximum roll command limit in degrees
indicated in Table 7-3 by the amount needed to produce a turn rate equal to or less than standard rate.
Lateral Mode
Control Annunciation
EIS
Holds the current aircraft roll
attitude or rolls the wings level,
(default)
depending on the commanded
bank angle
Captures and tracks the Selected HDG
Heading
Key
Roll Hold
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Description
Heading Select
Navigation, GPS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Navigation, VOR Enroute Capture/Track
Navigation, LOC Capture/Track
(No Glideslope)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Navigation, Backcourse Capture/Track
Captures and tracks the selected
navigation source (GPS, VOR,
LOC)
Captures and tracks a
localizer signal for backcourse
approaches
AFCS
Approach, LOC Capture/Track
(Glideslope Mode automatically armed)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
HDG
25°
GPS
25°
25° Capture
10° Track
25° Capture
10° Track
LOC
GPS
Approach, VOR Capture/Track
Go Around
25°
BC
Approach, GPS
Takeoff
ROL
VOR
NAV
Key
Captures and tracks the selected
navigation source (GPS, VOR, APR Key
LOC)
Commands a constant pitch
angle and wings level on ground
in preparation for takeoff
Disengages the autopilot and
commands a constant pitch
angle and wings level in the air
Maximum Roll
Command Limit
VAPP
LOC
25° Capture
10° Track
25°
25° Capture
10° Track
25° Capture
10° Track
TO
Wings Level
GA
Wings Level
GA
Button
APPENDICES
The GFC 700 limits turn rate to 3 degrees per second (standard rate turn).
INDEX
Table 7-3 Flight Director Lateral Modes
386
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Roll Hold Mode (ROL)
Note: If Roll Hold Mode is activated as a result of a mode reversion, the flight director rolls the wings
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
level.
When the flight director is activated or switched, Roll Hold Mode is selected by default. This mode is
annunciated as ‘ROL’ in the AFCS Status Box. The current aircraft bank angle is held, subject to the bank angle
condition.
EIS
Figure 7-20 Roll Hold Mode Annunciation
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Flight Director Response
Rolls wings level
Maintains current aircraft roll attitude
Limits bank to 25°
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Bank Angle
< 6°
6 to 25°
>25°
Table 7-4 Roll Hold Mode Responses
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
387
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
Heading Select Mode (HDG)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Heading Select Mode is activated by pressing the HDG Key. Heading Select Mode acquires and maintains
the Selected Heading. The Selected Heading is shown by a light blue bug on the HSI and in the box to the
upper left of the HSI.
Changing the Selected Heading
Note: Pressing the HDG Knob synchronizes the Selected Heading to the current heading.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The Selected Heading is adjusted using the HDG Knob. Turns are commanded in the same direction as
Selected Heading Bug movement, even if the bug is turned more than 180° from the present heading (e.g.,
a 270° turn to the right). However, Selected Heading changes of more than 330° at a time result in turn
reversals.
Pitch Hold
Mode Active
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Heading Select
Mode Active
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selected
Heading
Selected
Heading
Bug
Command Bars Track
Selected Heading
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 7-21 Heading Select Mode
388
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Navigation Modes (GPS, VOR, LOC, BC)
NOTE: The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal or active GPS course for the
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
flight director to enter Navigation Mode.
NOTE: When intercepting a flight plan leg, the flight director gives commands to capture the active leg at
approximately a 45° angle to the track between the waypoints defining the active leg. The flight director
does not give commands fly to the starting waypoint of the active leg.
EIS
NOTE: When making a backcourse approach, set the Selected Course to the localizer front course.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Pressing the NAV Key selects Navigation Mode. Navigation Mode acquires and tracks the selected navigation
source (GPS, VOR, LOC). The flight director follows GPS roll steering commands when GPS is the selected
navigation source. When the navigation source is VOR or LOC, the flight director creates roll steering commands
from the Selected Course and deviation. Navigation Mode can also be used to fly non-precision GPS and LOC
approaches where vertical guidance is not required.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Backcourse Navigation Mode is selected when the localizer front course is greater than 105° from the aircraft
heading. Backcourse Navigation Mode captures and tracks a localizer signal in the backcourse direction. The
annunciation ‘BC’ in the AFCS Status Box indicates Backcourse Navigation Mode (Figure 7-24).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If the Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) shows greater than one dot when the NAV Key is pressed, the selected
mode is armed. If the CDI is less than one dot, Navigation Mode is automatically captured when the NAV Key
is pressed. The armed annunciation appears in white to the left of the active roll mode
Figure 7-22 GPS Navigation Mode Armed
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When the CDI has automatically switched from GPS to LOC during a LOC/ILS approach, GPS Navigation
Mode remains active, providing GPS steering guidance until the localizer signal is captured. LOC Navigation
Mode is armed when the automatic navigation source switch takes place. If the APR Key is pressed prior to the
automatic navigation source switch, LOC Navigation Mode is armed.
If Navigation Mode is active and either of the following occur, the flight director reverts to Roll Hold Mode
(wings rolled level):
• Different VOR tuned while in VOR Navigation Mode (VOR Navigation Mode reverts to armed)
APPENDICES
• Navigation source manually switched (with the CDI Softkey)
• During a LOC/ILS approach, the FAF is crossed while in GPS Navigation Mode after the automatic navigation
source switch from GPS to LOC
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
389
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
Changing the Selected Course
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If the navigation source is VOR or localizer, or OBS Mode has been enabled when using GPS, the Selected
Course is controlled using the CRS Knob.
Pitch Hold
Mode Active
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
GPS Navigation
Mode Active
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GPS is
Selected
Navigation
Source
Selected
Course
Command Bars Indicate Right Turn to Track
GPS Course and Climb to Intercept Selected Altitude
Figure 7-23 Navigation Mode
Pitch Hold
Mode Active
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Backcourse
Mode Active
LOC2 is Selected Navigation Source
Command Bars Hold Pitch Attitude
INDEX
Figure 7-24 Backcourse Mode
390
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Approach Modes (GPS, VAPP, LOC)
NOTE: The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal or active GPS course for the
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
flight director to enter Approach Mode.
Approach Mode is activated when the APR Key is pressed. Approach Mode acquires and tracks the selected
navigation source (GPS, VOR, or LOC), depending on loaded approach. This mode uses the selected navigation
receiver deviation and desired course inputs to fly the approach. Pressing the APR Key when the CDI is greater
than one dot arms the selected approach mode (annunciated in white to the left of the active lateral mode). If
the CDI is less the 1 dot, the LOC is automatically captured when the APR Key is pressed.
EIS
VOR Approach Mode (VAPP) provides greater sensitivity for signal tracking than VOR Navigation Mode.
Selecting VOR Approach Mode:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Ensure a valid VOR frequency is tuned
2) Ensure that VOR is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the APR Key.
When GPS Approach Mode is armed, Glidepath Mode is also armed.
Selecting GPS Approach Mode:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Ensure a GPS approach is loaded into the active flight plan. The active waypoint must be part of the flight plan
(cannot be a direct-to a waypoint not in the flight plan).
2) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
3) Press the APR Key.
AFCS
Figure 7-25 GPS Approach Mode Armed
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
391
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
LOC Approach Mode allows the autopilot to fly a LOC/ILS approach with a glideslope. When LOC Approach
Mode is armed, Glideslope Mode is also armed automatically. LOC captures are inhibited if the difference
between aircraft heading and localizer course exceeds 105°.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selecting LOC Approach Mode:
1) Ensure a valid localizer frequency is tuned.
2) Ensure that LOC is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
3) Press the APR Key.
EIS
Or:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
2) Ensure a LOC/ILS approach is loaded into the active flight plan.
3) Ensure the corresponding LOC frequency is tuned.
4) Press the APR Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If the following occurs, the flight director reverts to Roll Hold Mode (wings rolled level):
• Approach Mode is active and a Vectors-To-Final is activated
• Approach Mode is active and Navigation source is manually switched
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• During a LOC/ILS approach, GPS Navigation Mode is active and the FAF is crossed after the automatic
navigation source switch from GPS to LOC
Changing the Selected Course
AFCS
If the navigation source is VOR or localizer, or OBS Mode has been enabled when using GPS, the Selected
Course is controlled using the CRS Knob.
Level Mode
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Level Mode is coupled pitch and roll modes and is annunciated as both the vertical and lateral modes when
active. Pressing the LVL Key engages the autopilot (if not engaged), rolls the wings level, and maintains an aircraft
attitude that provides level flight. Level mode does not track altitude or heading. Pressing the LVL Key always
engages the autopilot. When the LVL Key is pressed all armed and active modes are cancelled and the autopilot
and flight director revert to LVL mode for pitch and roll (Figure 7-26). While in level mode, all other mode are
available by pressing the corresponding button.
392
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pitch
Roll
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Command Bars Indicate
Level with the Horizon
Figure 7-26 Level Mode Annunciation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
InterceptinG and Flying A DME Arc
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The AFCS will intercept and track a DME arc that is part of the active flight plan provided that GPS
Navigation Mode is engaged, GPS is the active navigation source on the CDI, and the DME arc segment is
the active flight plan leg. It is important to note that automatic navigation of DME arcs is based on GPS.
Thus, even if the APR key is pressed and LOC or VOR Approach Mode is armed prior to reaching the Initial
Approach Fix (IAF), Approach Mode will not activate until the arc segment is completed.
AFCS
If the pilot decides to intercept the arc at a location other than the published IAF (i.e. ATC provides vectors
to intercept the arc) and subsequently selects Heading Mode or Roll Mode, the AFCS will not automatically
intercept or track the arc unless the pilot activates the arc leg of the flight plan and arms GPS Navigation
Mode. The AFCS will not intercept and fly a DME arc before reaching an IAF that defines the beginning of the
arc segment. Likewise, if at any point while established on the DME arc the pilot deselects GPS Navigation
Mode, the AFCS will no longer track the arc.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
393
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
Autopilot and Yaw Damper Operation
NOTE: Refer to the POH for specific instructions regarding emergency procedures.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Cirrus SR20 (no yaw damper), SR22 and SR22TN, autopilot and yaw damper operate the flight control
surface servos to provide automatic flight control. The autopilot controls the aircraft pitch and roll attitudes
following commands received from the flight director. Pitch autotrim provides trim commands to the pitch trim
servo to relieve any sustained effort required by the pitch servo. Autopilot operation is independent of the yaw
damper.
EIS
The yaw damper reduces Dutch roll tendencies, coordinates turns, and provides a steady force to maintain
directional trim. It can operate independently of the autopilot and may be used during normal hand-flight
maneuvers. Yaw rate commands are limited to 6 deg/sec by the yaw damper.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Flight Control
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pitch and roll commands are provided to the servos based on the active flight director modes. Yaw commands
are provided by the yaw servo. Servo motor control limits the maximum servo speed and torque. The servo
mounts are equipped with slip-clutches set to certain values. This allows the servos to be overridden in case
of an emergency.
Pitch Axis and Trim
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The autopilot pitch axis uses pitch rate to stabilize the aircraft pitch attitude during flight director maneuvers.
Flight director pitch commands are rate and attitude-limited, combined with pitch damper control, and sent
to the pitch servo motor. The pitch servo measures the output effort (torque) and provides this signal to the
pitch trim servo. The pitch trim servo commands the motor to reduce the average pitch servo effort.
AFCS
When the autopilot is not engaged, the pitch trim adapter may be used to provide manual electric trim
(MET). This allows the aircraft to be trimmed using a control stick switch. Manual trim commands are
generated only when the MET Switch are pressed. Trim speeds are scheduled with airspeed to provide more
consistent response.
NOTE: When the autopilot is engaged, the MET Switch does not respond.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Roll Axis
The autopilot roll axis uses roll rate to stabilize aircraft roll attitude during flight director maneuvers. The
flight director roll commands are rate- and attitude-limited, combined with roll damper control, and sent to
the roll servo motor.
APPENDICES
Yaw Axis
INDEX
The yaw damper uses yaw rate and roll attitude to dampen the aircraft’s natural Dutch roll response. It also
uses lateral acceleration to coordinate turns and reduce or eliminate the need for the pilot to use rudder pedal
force to maintain coordinated flight during climbs and descents.
394
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Engagement
Autopilot
Engaged
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the AP Key is pressed, the autopilot, yaw damper, and flight director (if not already active) are activated.
The flight director engages in Pitch and Roll Hold Modes when initially activated. When the YD Key is pressed,
the system engages the yaw damper independently of the autopilot (if not already engaged). Autopilot and yaw
damper status are displayed in the center of the AFCS Status Box. Engagement is indicated by green ‘AP’ and
‘YD’ annunciations, respectively.
Yaw Damper
Engaged
EIS
Figure 7-27 Autopilot and Yaw Damper Engaged
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Disengagement
NOTE: The autopilot does not disengage when the MET Switch is pressed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The autopilot is manually disengaged by pushing the AP DISC Button (twice), AP Key on the AFCS Control
Panel, or GA Button. Manual autopilot disengagement is indicated by a five-second flashing yellow ‘AP’
annunciation and a three-second autopilot disconnect aural alert.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 7-28 Manual Autopilot Disengagement
Pushing the AP DISC Button or YD Key disengages both the yaw damper and the autopilot. When the yaw
damper and autopilot are manually disengaged, both the ‘AP’ and ‘YD’ annunciation turn yellow and flash for 5
seconds and a three-second autopilot disconnect aural alert is generated.
AFCS
Figure 7-29 Yaw Damper Disengagement
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
After manual disengagement, the autopilot disconnect aural alert may be cancelled by pushing the AP DISC
Button (AP DISC Button also cancels the flashing ‘AP’ annunciation).
• System failure
• Invalid sensor data
APPENDICES
Automatic autopilot disengagement is indicated by a flashing red and white ‘AP’ annunciation and by
the autopilot disconnect aural alert, which continue until acknowledged by pushing the AP DISC Button.
Automatic autopilot disengagement occurs due to:
• Inability to compute default flight director modes
(FD also disengages automatically)
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
395
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Yaw damper disengagement is indicated by a five-second flashing yellow ‘YD’ annunciation. Automatic yaw
damper disengagement occurs when autopilot disengagement is caused by failure in a parameter also affecting
the yaw damper. This means the yaw damper can remain operational in some cases where the autopilot
automatically disengages. A localized failure in the yaw damper system or invalid sensor data also cause yaw
damper disengagement.
Figure 7-30 Automatic Autopilot and Yaw Damper Disengagement
EIS
Reversionary Mode
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
In the event of a PFD failure, the MFD goes into reversionary mode. The autopilot remains engaged but
reverts to pitch hold and roll hold modes; all other modes are available for selection. If the MFD fails, the PFD
goes into reversionary mode and the autopilot continues to function.
Miscompare
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Critical values generated by redundant sensors are monitored by comparators. If differences in the sensors
exceed a specified amount, the Comparator Window appears in the upper right corner of the PFD and the
discrepancy is annunciated in the Comparator Window as a ‘MISCOMP’ (miscompare). If one or both of the
sensed values are unavailable, it will be annunciated as a ‘NO COMP’ (no compare).
Figure 7-31 Comparator Window
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Reversionary sensor selection is annunciated in a window on the right side of the PFD. These annunciations
reflect reversionary sensors selected on the PFD. Pressing the SENSOR Softkey accesses the ADC1, ADC2,
AHRS1, and AHRS2 softkeys. These softkeys allow switching of the sensors being viewed on the PFD. The
GPS sensor cannot be switched manually.
Figure 7-32 Reversionary Sensor Window
APPENDICES
If an ‘AP MISCOMP’ annunciation is displayed in the comparator window the IAU will select the operating
AHRS and the following message (e.g. ‘USING AHRS2’) appears in the reversionary sensor window. When the
‘AP MISCOMP’ annunciation disappears, the pilot must then select the AHRS being used by the IAU (in this
case AHRS2) and re-engage the autopilot. If AHRS1 is selected as the operating AHRS no annunciation will
appear in the reversionary sensor window and the pilot can re-engage the autopilot.
INDEX
If a miscompare occurs between ADC1 and ADC2 the autopilot does not disengage and the IAU automatically
switches to the operating ADC.
396
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Example Flight Plan
Note: The following example flight plan and diagrams (not to be used for navigation) in this section are
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
for instructional purposes only and should be considered not current. Numbered portions of accompanying
diagrams correspond to numbered procedure steps.
This scenario-based set of procedures (based on the example flight plan found in the Flight Management
Section) shows various GFC 700 AFCS modes used during a flight. In this scenario, the aircraft departs Charles
B. Wheeler Downtown Airport (KMKC), enroute to Colorado Springs Airport (KCOS). After departure, the
aircraft climbs to 12,000 ft and airway V4 is intercepted, following ATC vectors.
EIS
Airway V4 is flown to Salina VOR (SLN) using VOR navigation, then airway V244 is flown using GPS Navigation.
The ILS approach for runway 35L and LPV (WAAS) approach for runway 35R are shown and a missed approach
is executed.
30
3
30
27
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
27
30
24
24
21
27
24
27
15
12
21
18
15
18
9
24
21
12
6
Lamar
VOR
(LAA)
Topeka
VOR
(TOP)
12
Hays
VOR
(HYS)
9
V 244
Salina
VOR
(SLN)
9
3
V4
18
V 244
9
6
0
33
15
6
KCOS
KMKC
30
3
6
0
33
3
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
33
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
0
33
0
12
21
15
18
Figure 7-33 Flight Plan Overview
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
397
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
Departure
Climbing to the Selected Altitude and flying an assigned heading:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Before takeoff:
a) Use the ALT SEL Knob to set the Selected Altitude to 12,000 feet.
EIS
b) Push the GA Switch to activate Takeoff Mode. The flight director Command Bars establish a pitch up attitude to
follow.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
c) Press the AP Key to engage the autopilot in a climb, holding the pitch angle commanded in Takeoff Mode and
wings level.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) In this example, Vertical Speed Mode is used to capture the Selected Altitude (Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, or
Indicated Airspeed Mode may be used).
a) Press the VS Key to activate Vertical Speed Mode.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Vertical Speed Reference may be adjusted after Vertical Speed Mode is selected using the NOSE UP/DN
Wheel.
3) Use the HDG Knob to set the Selected Heading, complying with ATC vectors to intercept Airway V4.
Press the HDG Key to activate Heading Select Mode while the autopilot is engaged in the climb. The autopilot
follows the Selected Heading Bug on the HSI and turns the aircraft to the desired heading.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director transitions to Selected Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
At 50 feet from the Selected Altitude, the green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds; the autopilot
transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft.
INDEX
APPENDICES
398
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
HD
GM
od
e
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TO M
ode
3
Selected Altitude of 12,000 MSL
ALT Mode
4
1
2
VS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
KMKC
e
Mod
ode
M
TO
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 7-34 Departure
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
399
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
Intercepting a VOR Radial
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
During climb-out, the autopilot continues to fly the aircraft in Heading Select Mode. Airway V4 to Salina
VOR (SLN) should now be intercepted. Since the enroute flight plan waypoints correspond to VORs, flight
director Navigation Mode using either VOR or GPS as the navigation source may be used. In this scenario, VOR
Navigation Mode is used for navigation to the first VOR waypoint in the flight plan.
Intercepting a VOR radial:
1) Arm VOR Navigation Mode:
EIS
a) Tune the VOR frequency.
b) Press the CDI Softkey to set the navigation source to VOR.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
c) Use the CRS Knob to set the Selected Course to the desired value, 255°. Note that at this point, the flight
director is still in Heading Select Mode and the autopilot continues to fly the Selected Heading, 290°.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) As the aircraft nears the Selected Course, the flight director transitions from Heading Select to VOR Navigation
Mode and the ‘VOR’ annunciation flashes green. The autopilot begins turning to intercept the Selected
Course.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
d) Press the NAV Key. This arms VOR Navigation Mode and the white ‘VOR’ annunciation appears to the left of
the active lateral mode.
3) The autopilot continues the turn until the aircraft is established on the Selected Course.
0
3
Hd
29 g
0o
30
AFCS
33
V4
6
o
255
Salina
VOR
(SLN)
24
VO
R
9
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
27
3
NA
V
Mo
de
2
HD
G
12
M
od
e,
VO
R
Ar
m
ed
15
21
18
APPENDICES
1
INDEX
Figure 7-35 Intercepting a VOR Radial
400
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flying a Flight Plan/GPS Course
Note: Changing the navigation source cancels Navigation Mode and causes the flight director to revert
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
back to Roll Hold Mode (wings rolled level).
As the aircraft closes on Salina VOR, GPS is used to navigate the next leg, airway V244. The aircraft is
currently tracking inbound on Airway V4.
Flying a GPS flight plan:
1) Transition from VOR to GPS Navigation Mode:
EIS
a) Press the CDI Softkey until GPS is the selected navigation source.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
b) Press the NAV Key to activate GPS Navigation Mode. The autopilot guides the aircraft along the active flight
plan leg.
0
33
30
3
V4
6
3
o
075
30
e
V Mod
PS NA
6
27
G
2
12
15
21
18
12
AFCS
24
9
Hays
VOR
(HYS)
Salina
VOR
(SLN)
V 244
1
24
27
076
e
9
o
260
o
d
AV Mo
VOR N
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
0
33
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Following the flight plan, the autopilot continues to steer the aircraft under GPS guidance. Note that in GPS
Navigation Mode, course changes defined by the flight plan are automatically made without pilot action
required.
15
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
21
18
Figure 7-36 Transition to GPS Flight Plan
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
401
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
Descent
While flying the arrival procedure, the aircraft is cleared for descent in preparation for the approach to KCOS.
Three methods are presented for descent:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Indicated Airspeed descent – Indicated Airspeed Mode can be used to descend to the Selected Altitude at a
constant airspeed. This descent method does not account for flight plan waypoint altitude constraints.
• Vertical Path Tracking descent – Vertical Path Tracking Mode is used to follow the vertical descent path
defined in the GPS flight plan. Altitude constraints correspond to waypoints in the flight plan. Before VNV
flight control can provide vertical profile guidance, a VNV flight plan must be entered and enabled.
EIS
• Non-path descent in a VNV scenario – A VNV flight plan is entered and enabled, however Pitch Hold, Vertical
Speed, or Indicated Airspeed Mode can be used to descend to the VNV Target Altitude prior to reaching the
planned TOD. Indicated Airspeed Mode is used in the example.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Indicated Airspeed descent:
1) Select Indicated Airspeed Mode:
a) Using the ALT SEL Knob, set the Selected Altitude to 10,000 feet.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
b) Press the IAS Key to activate Indicated Airspeed Mode. The annunciation ‘IAS’ appears next to the Airspeed
Reference, which defaults to the current aircraft airspeed. Selected Altitude Capture Mode is armed
automatically.
2) Use the NOSE UP/DN Wheel to adjust the commanded airspeed while maintaining the same power, or reduce
power to allow descent in Indicated Airspeed Mode while the autopilot maintains the current airspeed.
AFCS
3) As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director transitions to Selected Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the Selected Altitude; the
autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft.
APPENDICES
1
Cruise Altitude of 12,000 MSL
ALT Mode
2
IAS
Mod
e
3
Selected Altitude of 10,000 MSL
ALT Mode
INDEX
Figure 7-37 IAS Descent
402
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Vertical Path Tracking descent to VNV Target Altitude:
1) Select VNV flight control:
a) Press the VNV Key to arm Vertical Path Tracking Mode. The white annunciation ‘VPTH’ appears.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
b) Using the ALT SEL Knob, set the Selected Altitude below the flight plan’s VNV Target Altitude of 10,000 feet.
EIS
If the Selected Altitude is not at least 75 ft below the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director captures the
Selected Altitude rather than the VNV Target Altitude once Vertical Path Tracking Mode becomes active (ALTS is
armed rather than ALTV).
•
Press the VNV Key.
•
Turn the ALT SEL Knob to adjust the Selected Altitude.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
c) If Vertical Path Tracking Mode is armed more than 5 minutes prior to descent path capture, acknowledgment is
required for the flight director to transition from Altitude Hold to Vertical Path Tracking Mode. To proceed with
descent path capture if the white ‘VPTH’ annunciation begins flashing, do one of the following
If the descent is not confirmed by the time of interception, Vertical Path Tracking Mode remains armed and the
descent is not captured.
2) When the top of descent (TOD) is reached, the flight director transitions to Vertical Path Tracking Mode and
begins the descent to the VNV Target Altitude. Intention to capture the VNV Target Altitude is indicated by the
white ‘ALTV’ annunciation.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) As the aircraft nears the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director transitions to VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTV’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
AFCS
The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the VNV Target Altitude;
the autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft at the vertical waypoint.
ALT Mode
TOD
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1
Cruise Altitude of 12,000 MSL
2
APPENDICES
VPT
HM
ode
3
VNAV Target Altitude of 10,000 MSL
BOD
ALT Mode
Selected Altitude (set below VNAV Target Altitude)
INDEX
Along-track Offset, 3 nm before OPSHN
3 nm
Figure 7-38 VPTH Descent
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
403
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
Non-path descent using Indicated Airspeed Mode:
1) Using Indicated Airspeed Mode, command a non-path descent to an intermediate altitude above the next VNV
flight plan altitude.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
a) Using the ALT SEL Knob, set the Selected Altitude below the current aircraft altitude to an altitude (in this case,
9,400 feet) at which to level off between VNV flight plan altitudes.
EIS
b) Press the IAS Key before the planned TOD during an altitude hold while VPTH is armed. The Airspeed Reference
defaults to the current aircraft airspeed. Vertical Path Tracking and Selected Altitude Capture Mode are armed
automatically.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Reduce power to allow descent in Indicated Airspeed Mode. The autopilot maintains the Airspeed Reference.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director transitions to Selected Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the Selected Altitude; the
autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft. After leveling off reset Selected Altitude at
or below 9,000 ft.
AFCS
4) When the next TOD is reached, Vertical Path Tracking becomes active (may require acknowledgment to allow
descent path capture).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) As the aircraft nears the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director transitions to VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTV’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the VNV Target Altitude;
the autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft at the vertical waypoint.
INDEX
APPENDICES
404
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
VP
TH
M
od
e
Planned
TOD
2
BOD
1
IA
S
VNAV Target Altitude of 10,000 MSL
Pla
nn
M
od
e
3
Selected Altitude of 9,400 MSL
ed
EIS
ALT Mode
De
sce
nt
ALT Mode
Pa
th
TOD
VP
TH
Mo
de
VNAV Target Altitude of 9,000 MSL
5
BOD
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4
ALT Mode
Selected Altitude
OPSHN
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3 nm
HABUK
Figure 7-39 Non-path Descent
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
405
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
Approach
Note: If an approach contains a DME arc, the arc must be flown in Navigation Mode with the GFC 700.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When receiving vectors from ATC, Navigation Mode must be selected prior to intercepting the ARC.
Flying an ILS approach:
1) Transition from GPS Navigation Mode to Heading Select Mode.
EIS
a) Select the Runway 35L ILS approach for KCOS and select ‘VECTORS’ for the transition. Load and activate the
approach into the flight plan.
b) Use the HDG Knob to set the Selected Heading after getting vectors from ATC.
c) Press the HDG Key. The autopilot turns the aircraft to the desired heading.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
d) Use Heading Select Mode to comply with ATC vectors as requested.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Arm LOC Approach and Glideslope modes.
a) Ensure the appropriate localizer frequency is tuned.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
b) Press the APR Key when cleared for approach to arm Approach and Glideslope modes. ‘LOC’ and ‘GS’ appear
in white as armed mode annunciations.
c) The navigation source automatically switches to LOC. After this switch occurs, the localizer signal can be captured
and the flight director determines when to begin the turn to intercept the final approach course. The flight
director now provides guidance to the missed approach point.
AFCS
3) There are two options available at this point, as the autopilot flies the ILS approach:
• Push the AP DISC Button at the decision height and land the aircraft.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Use the GA Button to execute a missed approach.
406
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
KCOS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
LOC APR/
GS Mode
3
PETEY
2
HD
G
od
M
e
PYNON
1
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GPS NAV Mode
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 7-40 ILS Approach to KCOS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
407
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
Flying a RNAV GPS approach with vertical guidance (WAAS Only):
1) Arm flight director modes for a RNAV GPS approach with vertical guidance:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
a) Make sure the navigation source is set to GPS (use CDI Softkey to change navigation source).
b) Select the Runway 35R LPV approach for KCOS. Load and activate the approach into the flight plan.
EIS
2) Press the APR Key once clearance for approach has been received. GPS Approach Mode is activated and
Glidepath Mode is armed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Once the glidepath is captured, Glidepath Mode becomes active. The flight director now provides guidance to
the missed approach point.
4) There are two options available at this point, as the autopilot flies the approach:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Push the AP DISC Button at the decision height and land the aircraft.
• Use the GA Button to execute a missed approach.
KCOS
CEGIX
AFCS
3
GPS APR/
GP Mode
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4
2
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
FALUR
HABUK
PYNON
1
INDEX
APPENDICES
GPS NAV Mode
Figure 7-41 LPV Approach to KCOS
408
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Go Around/Missed Approach
Note: As a result of calculations performed by the system while flying the holding pattern, the display may
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
re-size automatically and the aircraft may not precisely track the holding pattern as depicted on the PFD and
MFD.
Flying a missed approach:
EIS
1) Push the GA Button at the Decision height and apply go-around power to execute a missed approach. The
flight director Command Bars establish a nose-up climb to follow. If flying an ILS or LOC approach the CDI also
switches to GPS as the navigation source.
Note that when the GA Button is pushed, the missed approach is activated and the autopilot disconnects,
indicated by the ‘AP’ annunciation flashing yellow for 5 seconds and the autopilot disconnect aural alert.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Flashes 5 sec
2) Start the climb to the prescribed altitude in the published Missed Approach Procedure (in this case, 10,000 ft).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
a) Press the AP Key to re-engage the autopilot.
b) Press the NAV Key to have the autopilot fly to the hold.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Use the ALT SEL Knob to set a Selected Altitude to hold.
To hold the current airspeed during the climb, press the IAS Key.
AFCS
As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director transitions to Selected Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the Selected Altitude; the
autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft.
APPENDICES
4) The autopilot flies the holding pattern after the missed approach is activated. Annunciations are displayed in
the Navigation Status Box, above the AFCS Status Box.
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
409
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
4
EIS
MOGAL
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GPS NAV Mode
3
KCOS
GA Mode
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 7-42 Go Around/Missed Approach
410
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AFCS Annunciations and Alerts
AFCS Status Alerts
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The annunciations in Table 7-5 (listed in order of increasing priority) can appear on the PFD above the
Airspeed and Attitude indicators. Only one annunciation may occur at a time, and messages are prioritized by
criticality.
AFCS Status Annunciation
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 7-43 AFCS Status Annunciation
Rudder Mistrim Right
Rudder Mistrim Left
Aileron Mistrim Right
Elevator Mistrim Down
Elevator Mistrim Up
Yaw Damper Failure
Yaw servo providing sustained force in the indicated direction
Roll servo providing sustained force in the indicated direction
Pitch servo providing sustained force in the indicated direction
If AP engaged, take control of the aircraft and disengage AP
If AP disengaged, move MET switch to unstick
YD control failure
Roll axis control failure; AP inoperative
Pitch Failure
Pitch axis control failure
AP and MET are unavailable; FD may still be available
Performing preflight system test; aural alert sounds at completion
Do not press the AP DISC Button during servo power-up and preflight system
tests as this may cause the preflight system test to fail or never to start (if servos
fail their power-up tests). Power must be cycled to the servos to remedy the
situation.
APPENDICES
Preflight Test
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Roll Failure
System Failure
AFCS
Pitch Trim Failure
Description
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Aileron Mistrim Left
Annunciation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Alert Condition
Preflight system test failed; aural alert sounds at failure
INDEX
Table 7-5 AFCS Status Alerts
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
411
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
Overspeed Protection
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Note: Overspeed protection is not active in ALT, GS or GP Modes.
While Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, Indicated Airspeed, Vertical Path Tracking, or an altitude capture mode is
active, airspeed is monitored by the flight director. Pitch commands are not changed until overspeed protection
becomes active. Overspeed protection is provided in situations where the flight director cannot acquire and
maintain the mode reference for the selected vertical mode without exceeding the certified maximum autopilot
airspeed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
When an autopilot overspeed condition occurs, the Airspeed Reference appears in a box above the Airspeed
Indicator, flashing a yellow ‘MAXSPD’ annunciation. The autopilot, if engaged, will follow the pitch up
command for the flight director. Engine power should be reduced and/or the pitch reference adjusted to slow
the aircraft. The annunciation disappears when the overspeed condition is resolved.
Note: When the autopilot is outside normal operating limits, it uses more aggressive commands to return
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
to normal limits.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Airspeed
Indicator
Figure 7-44 Overspeed Annunciation
AFCS
7.2 S-TEC Fifty Five X Autopilot (Optional)
Note: This section covers only the additional ‘AP’ (autopilot engaged) status annunciation that may appear
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
in the Perspective® AFCS Status Box. This status annunciation is not analogous to both the Perspective®
and the S-TEC Fifty Five X. Refer to the approved S-TEC Fifty Five X Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) for
comprehensive list of annunciations and operating instructions.
APPENDICES
In addition to the status and mode annunciations that are simultaneously displayed on both the Perspective®
(AFCS Status Box) and the S-TEC Fifty Five X (Autopilot Display and/or Remote Annunciator Display), the
Perspective® displays an additional status annunciation of ‘AP’ when the autopilot is engaged.
INDEX
Autopilot
Status
Figure 7-45 Autopilot Engaged (Perspective® AFCS Status Box)
412
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Section 8 Additional Features
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: With the availability of SafeTaxi, ChartView, or FliteCharts in electronic form, it is still advisable to
carry another source of charts on board the aircraft.
Additional features of the system include the following:
• Synthetic Vision System (SVS)
• SafeTaxi® diagrams
EIS
• ChartView and FliteCharts® electronic charts
• AOPA’s Airport Directory
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• XM Radio entertainment
• Scheduler
• Electronic Checklists
• Flight Data Logging
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The optional Synthetic Vision System (SVS) provides a three-dimensional forward view of terrain features on
the PFD. SVS imagery shows the pilot’s view of relevant features in relation to the aircraft attitude, as well as the
flight path pertaining to the active flight plan.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SafeTaxi diagrams provide detailed taxiway, runway, and ramp information at more than 700 airports in the
United States. By decreasing range on an airport that has a SafeTaxi diagram available, a close up view of the
airport layout can be seen.
The optional ChartView and FliteCharts provide on-board electronic terminal procedures charts. Electronic
charts offer the convenience of rapid access to essential information. Either ChartView or FliteCharts may be
configured in the system, but not both.
AFCS
AOPA’s Airport Directory offers detailed information for a selected airport, such as available services, hours of
operation, and lodging options.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The optional XM Radio entertainment audio feature of the GDL 69A Data Link Receiver handles more than 170
channels of music, news, and sports. XM Radio offers more entertainment choices and longer range coverage
than commercial broadcast stations.
The Scheduler feature can be used to enter and display short term or long term reminder messages such as
Switch fuel tanks, Change oil, or Altimeter-Transponder Check in the Messages Window on the PFD.
APPENDICES
Optional checklists help to quickly find the proper procedure on the ground or during flight.
The Flight Data Logging feature automatically stores critical flight and engine data on an SD data card.
Approximately 1,000 flight hours can be recorded for each 1GB of available space on the card.
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
413
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
8.1 Synthetic Vision System (SVS)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Use appropriate primary systems for navigation, and for terrain, obstacle, and traffic avoidance.
SVS is intended as an aid to situational awareness only and may not provide either the accuracy or reliability
upon which to solely base decisions and/or plan maneuvers to avoid terrain, obstacles, or traffic.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The optional Synthetic Vision System (SVS) is a visual enhancement to the Perspective® Integrated Avionics
System. SVS depicts a forward-looking attitude display of the topography immediately in front of the aircraft.
The field of view is 30 degrees to the left and 35 degrees to the right. SVS information is shown on the Primary
Flight Display (PFD), or on the Multifunction Display (MFD) in Reversionary Mode (Figure 8‑85). The depicted
imagery is derived from the aircraft attitude, heading, GPS three-dimensional position, and a nine arc-second
database of terrain, obstacles, and other relevant features. The terrain data resolution of nine arc-seconds, meaning
that the terrain elevation contours are stored in squares measuring nine arc-seconds on each side, is required for
the operation of SVS. Loss of any of the required data, including temporary loss of the GPS signal, will cause SVS
to be disabled until the required data is restored.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The SVS terrain display shows land contours (colors are consistent with those of the topographical map display),
large water features, towers, and other obstacles over 200’ AGL that are included in the obstacle database. Cultural
features on the ground such as roads, highways, railroad tracks, cities, and state boundaries are not displayed
even if those features are found on the MFD map. The terrain display also includes a north–south east–west grid
with lines oriented with true north and spaced at one arc-minute intervals to assist in orientation relative to the
terrain.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The optional Terrain Awareness and Warning System (TAWS) or standard Terrain-SVS is integrated within
SVS to provide visual and auditory alerts to indicate the presence of terrain and obstacle threats relevant to the
projected flight path. Terrain alerts are displayed in red and yellow shading on the PFD.
AFCS
The terrain display is intended for situational awareness only. It may not provide the accuracy or fidelity on
which to base decisions and plan maneuvers to avoid terrain or obstacles. Navigation must not be predicated
solely upon the use of the Terrain–SVS or TAWS terrain or obstacle data displayed by the SVS.
• Pathways
• Airport Signs
• Flight Path Marker
• Runway Display
• Horizon Heading Marks
• Terrain Alerting
• Traffic Display
• Obstacle Alerting
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The following SVS enhancements appear on the PFD:
414
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-1 Synthetic Vision Imagery
SVS Operation
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SVS is activated from the PFD using the softkeys located along the bottom edge of the display. Pressing the
softkeys turns the related function on or off. When SVS is enabled, the pitch scale increments are reduced to
10 degrees up and 7.5 degrees down.
AFCS
SVS functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. The PFD Softkey leads into the PFD function Softkeys,
including synthetic vision. Pressing the SYN VIS Softkey displays the SVS feature softkeys. The softkeys are
labeled PATHWAY, SYN TERR, HRZN HDG, and APTSIGNS. The BACK Softkey returns to the previous
level of softkeys. Synthetic Terrain must be active before any other SVS feature may be activated.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
HRZN HDG, APTSIGNS, and PATHWAY Softkeys are only available when the SYN TERR Softkey is
activated (gray with black characters). After activating the SYN TERR Softkey, the HRZN HDG, APTSIGNS,
and PATHWAY softkeys may be activated in any combination to display desired features. When system power
is cycled, the last selected state (on or off) of the SYN TERR, HRZN HDG, APTSIGNS, and PATHWAY
softkeys is remembered by the system.
APPENDICES
• PATHWAY Softkey enables display of rectangular boxes that represent course guidance.
• SYN TERR Softkey enables synthetic terrain depiction.
• HRZN HDG Softkey enables horizon heading marks and digits.
• APTSIGNS Softkey enables airport signposts.
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
415
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
PFD
BACK
SYN VIS
Pressing the BACK Softkey
returns to the top-level softkeys.
BACK
SYN TERR HRZN HDG APTSIGNS
EIS
PATHWAY
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Pressing the BACK Softkey returns to the previous level of softkeys.
Figure 8-2 SVS Softkeys
Activating and deactivating SVS:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the SYN VIS Softkey.
3) Press the SYN TERR Softkey. The SVS display will cycle on or off with the SYN TERR Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Activating and deactivating Pathways:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the SYN VIS Softkey.
3) Press the PATHWAY Softkey. The Pathway feature will cycle on or off with the PATHWAY Softkey.
AFCS
Activating and deactivating Horizon Headings:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the SYN VIS Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the HRZN HDG Softkey. The horizon heading display will cycle on or off with the HRZN HDG Softkey.
Activating and deactivating Airport Signs:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
APPENDICES
2) Press the SYN VIS Softkey.
INDEX
3) Press the APTSIGNS Softkey. Display of airport signs will cycle on or off with the APTSIGNS Softkey.
416
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SVS Features
Flight
Path
Marker
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected
Altitude
Pathways
Color
Matches CDI
Indicating
NAV Source
Airport
Runway
EIS
Zero
Pitch Line
(ZPL) with
Compass
Heading
Marks
Airplane
Symbol
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Synthetic
Terrain
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SVS
Softkeys
Figure 8-3 SVS on the Primary Flight Display
NOTE: Pathways and terrain features are not a substitute for standard course and altitude deviation
information provided by the CDI, VSI, and VDI.
AFCS
Pathways
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pathways provide a three-dimensional perspective view of the selected route of flight shown as colored rectangular
boxes representing the horizontal and vertical flight path of the active flight plan. The box size represents 700 feet
wide by 200 feet tall during enroute, oceanic, and terminal flight phases. During an approach, the box width is
700 feet or one half full scale deviation on the HSI, whichever is less. The height is 200 feet or one half full scale
deviation on the VDI, whichever is less. The altitude at which the pathway boxes are displayed is determined by
the selected altitude during climb, cruise, and when the active leg is the final approach course prior to intercepting
the glidepath/glideslope. During a descent (except while on the approach glidepath/glideslope), the pathway boxes
are displayed at the selected altitude, or the VNAV altitude programmed for the active leg in the flight plan, or the
published altitude constraint, whichever is higher (Figure 8-4). Just prior to intercepting the glidepath/glideslope,
the pathway boxes are displayed on the glidepath/glideslope, or the selected altitude, whichever is lower.
APPENDICES
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
INDEX
The color of the rectangular boxes may be magenta, green, or white depending on the route of flight and navigation
source selected. The active GPS or GPS overlay flight plan leg is represented by magenta boxes that correspond to
the Magenta CDI. A localizer course is represented by green boxes that correspond to a green CDI. An inactive
leg of an active flight plan is represented by white boxes corresponding to a white line drawn on the Inset map or
MFD map indicating an inactive leg.
417
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected
Altitude
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Programmed
Altitudes
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-4 Programmed and Selected Altitude
AFCS
Pathways provide supplemental glidepath/glideslope information on an active ILS, LPV, LNAV/VNAV, and
some LNAV approaches. Pathways are intended as an aid to situational awareness and should not be used
independent of the CDI, VDI, glide path indicator, and glide slope indicator. They are removed from the
display when the selected navigation information is not available. Pathways are not displayed beyond the
active leg when leg sequencing is suspended and are not displayed on any portion of the flight plan leg that
would lead to intercepting a leg in the wrong direction.
Departure and Enroute
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Prior to intercepting an active flight plan leg, pathways are displayed as a series of boxes with pointers at
each corner that point in the direction of the active waypoint. Pathways are not displayed for the first leg
of the flight plan if that segment is a Heading-to-Altitude leg. The first segment displaying pathways is the
first active GPS leg or active leg with a GPS overlay. If this leg of the flight plan route is outside the SVS
field of view, pathways will not be visible until the aircraft has turned toward this leg. While approaching
the center of the active leg and prescribed altitude, the number of pathway boxes decreases to a minimum
of four.
INDEX
Climb profiles cannot be displayed due to the variables associated with aircraft performance. Flight
plan legs requiring a climb are indicated by pathways displayed at a level above the aircraft at the altitude
selected or programmed.
418
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Descent and Approach
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pathways are shown descending only for a programmed descent (Figures 8-5, 8-6). When the flight plan
includes programmed descent segments, pathways are displayed along the descent path provided that the
selected altitude is lower than the programmed altitude.
When an approach providing vertical guidance is activated, Pathways are shown level at the selected
altitude up to the point along the final approach course where the altitude intercepts the extended vertical
descent path, glidepath, or glideslope. From the vertical path descent, glidepath, or glideslope intercept
point, the pathways are shown inbound to the Missed Approach Point (MAP) along the published lateral
and vertical descent path, or at the selected altitude, whichever is lower.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
During an ILS approach, the initial approach segment is displayed in magenta at the segment altitudes
if GPS is selected as the navigation source on the CDI. When switching to localizer inbound with LOC
selected as the navigation source on the CDI, pathways are displayed in green along the localizer and glide
slope.
VOR, LOC BC, and ADF approach segments that are approved to be flown using GPS are displayed in
magenta boxes. Segments that are flown using other than GPS or ILS, such as heading legs or VOR final
approach courses are not displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected Altitude
set for Enroute
Selected Altitude
set for Departure
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Climbs NOT
displayed
by pathway
Non-programmed descents NOT displayed by pathway
TOD
AFCS
Selected Altitude
for Step Down
Programmed descent
displayed by pathway
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selected Altitude or Programmed Altitude
(whichever is higher)
APPENDICES
Figure 8-5 SVS Pathways, Enroute and Descent
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
419
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
Missed Approach
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Upon activating the missed approach, pathways lead to the Missed Approach Holding Point (MAHP) and
are displayed as a level path at the published altitude for the MAHP, or the selected altitude, whichever is
the highest. If the initial missed approach leg is a Course-to-Altitude (CA) leg, the pathways boxes will
be displayed level at the altitude published for the MAHP. If the initial missed approach leg is defined by
a course using other than GPS, pathways are not displayed for that segment. In this case, the pathways
displayed for the next leg may be outside the field of view and will be visible when the aircraft has turned
in the direction of that leg.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Pathways are displayed along each segment including the path required to track course reversals that are
part of a procedure, such as holding patterns. Pathways boxes will not indicate a turn to a MAHP unless a
defined geographical waypoint exists between the MAP and MAHP.
FAF
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Descent displayed
by pathway
Selected Altitude
or Programmed Altitude
(whichever is higher)
MAP Climbs NOT displayed
by pathway
Turn Segment
NOT displayed
by pathway
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
MAHP
INDEX
Figure 8-6 SVS Pathways, Approach, Missed Approach, and Holding
420
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Path Marker
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Flight Path Marker (FPM), also known as a Velocity Vector, is displayed on the PFD at groundspeeds
above 30 knots. The FPM depicts the approximate projected path of the aircraft accounting for wind speed
and direction relative to the three-dimensional terrain display.
The FPM is always available when the Synthetic Terrain feature is in operation. The FPM represents the
direction of the flight path as it relates to the terrain and obstacles on the display, while the airplane symbol
represents the aircraft heading.
EIS
The FPM works in conjunction with the Pathways feature to assist the pilot in maintaining desired altitudes
and direction when navigating a flight plan. When on course and altitude the FPM is aligned inside the
pathway boxes as shown (Figure 8-7).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The FPM may also be used to identify a possible conflict with the aircraft flight path and distant terrain or
obstacles. Displayed terrain or obstacles in the aircraft’s flight path extending above the FPM could indicate
a potential conflict, even before an alert is issued by TAWS. However, decisions regarding terrain and/or
obstacle avoidance should not be made using only the FPM.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Flight Path
Marker
(FPM)
AFCS
Wind
Vector
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-7 Flight Path Marker and Pathways
Zero Pitch Line
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
INDEX
The Zero Pitch Line is drawn completely across the display and represents the aircraft attitude with respect
to the horizon. It may not align with the terrain horizon, particularly when the terrain is mountainous or
when the aircraft is flown at high altitudes.
421
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
Horizon Heading
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Horizon Heading is synchronized with the HSI and shows approximately 60 degrees of compass
heading in 30‑degree increments on the Zero Pitch Line. Horizon Heading tick marks and digits appearing
on the zero pitch line are not visible behind either the airspeed or altitude display. Horizon Heading is used
for general heading awareness, and is activated and deactivated by pressing the HRZN HDG Softkey.
Traffic
WARNING: Intruder aircraft at or below 500 ft. AGL may not appear on the SVS display or may appear as a
EIS
partial symbol.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Traffic symbols are displayed in their approximate locations as determined by the related traffic systems.
Traffic symbols are displayed in three dimensions, appearing larger as they are getting closer, and smaller
when they are further away. Traffic within 1000 feet laterally of the aircraft will not be displayed on the SVS
display. Traffic symbols and coloring are consistent with that used for traffic displayed in the Inset map or
MFD traffic page. If the traffic altitude is unknown, the traffic will not be displayed on the SVS display. For
more details refer to the traffic system discussion in the Hazard Avoidance section.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Airport Signs
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Airport Signs provide a visual representation of airport location and identification on the synthetic terrain
display. When activated, the signs appear on the display when the aircraft is approximately 15 nm from
an airport and disappear at approximately 4.5 nm. Airport signs are shown without the identifier until
the aircraft is approximately eight nautical miles from the airport. Airport signs are not shown behind the
airspeed or altitude display. Airport signs are activated and deactivated by pressing the APTSIGNS Softkey.
AFCS
Traffic
Airport
Sign
without
Identifier
(Between
8 nm and
15 nm)
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Airport
Sign with
Identifier
(Between
4.5 nm and
8 nm)
Figure 8-8 Airport Signs
422
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Runways
WARNING: Do not use SVS runway depiction as the sole means for determining the proximity of the aircraft
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
to the runway or for maintaining the proper approach path angle during landing.
EIS
Runway data provides improved awareness of runway location with respect to the surrounding terrain. All
runway thresholds are depicted at their respective elevations as defined in the database. In some situations,
where threshold elevations differ significantly, crossing runways may appear to be layered. As runways are
displayed, those within 45 degrees of the aircraft heading are displayed in white. Other runways will be gray
in color. When an approach for a specific runway is active, that runway will appear brighter and be outlined
with a white box, regardless of the runway orientation as related to aircraft heading. As the aircraft gets closer
to the runway, more detail such as runway numbers and centerlines will be displayed. Not all airports have
runways with endpoint data in the database, therefore, these runways are not displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Runway
Selected for
Approach
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Other
Runway
on Airport
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-9 Airport Runways
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
423
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
Terrain - SVS and TAWS Alerting
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Terrain alerting on the synthetic terrain display is triggered by Forward-looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA)
alerts, and corresponds to the red and yellow X symbols on the Inset Map and MFD map displays. For more
detailed information regarding TERRAIN-SVS and TAWS, refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section.
EIS
In some instances, a terrain or obstacle alert may be issued with no conflict shading displayed on the
synthetic terrain. In these cases, the conflict is outside the SVS field of view to the left or right of the
aircraft.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TERRAIN
Annunciation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Terrain
Caution
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Potential
Impact
Point
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 8-10 Terrain Alert
424
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Obstacles are represented on the synthetic terrain display by standard two-dimensional tower symbols found
on the Inset map and MFD maps and charts. Obstacle symbols appear in the perspective view with relative
height above terrain and distance from the aircraft. Unlike the Inset map and MFD moving map display,
obstacles on the synthetic terrain display do not change colors to warn of potential conflict with the aircraft’s
flight path until the obstacle is associated with an actual FLTA alert. Obstacles greater than 1000 feet below the
aircraft altitude are not shown. Obstacles are shown behind the airspeed and altitude displays.
EIS
TERRAIN
Annunciation
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Obstacle
Warning
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Potential
Impact
Point
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-11 Obstacle
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
425
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
Field of View
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The PFD field of view can be represented on the MFD Navigation Map Page. Two dashed lines forming a
V‑shape in front of the aircraft symbol on the map, represent the forward viewing area shown on the PFD.
Configuring field of view:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight Map Setup and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Field of
View
Navigation Map Page OPTIONS Menu
Map Setup Menu, Map Group, Field of View Option
AFCS
Figure 8-12 Option Menus
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the Map Group and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the Aviation Group options to FIELD OF VIEW.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select On or Off.
INDEX
APPENDICES
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
426
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The following figure compares the PFD forward looking depiction with the MFD plan view and FIELD OF
VIEW turned on.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Lines
Depict
PFD Field
of View
EIS
Field of View on the MFD
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SVS View on the PFD
Figure 8-13 MFD and PFD Field of View Comparison
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
427
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
8.2 Enhanced Vision System (EVS)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Perspective® system provides a control and display interface to an Enhanced Vision System. EVS is designed
to provide an aid to situational awareness while operating in low visibility environments. The EVS camera view
is displayed on the AUX - VIDEO page.
Image Quality and Interpretation
EIS
Image quality may vary according to target size, target temperature, background temperature, and attenuation
from airborne particles or moisture within view of the sensor. If the video signal is ever completely interrupted,
the display may appear as a solid field of gray, white, or blue, and the message No Video or NO DATA AVAILABLE
may appear.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The EVS periodically calibrates itself to optimize the image. The calibration process can be observed on the
display as a one second image interruption, which happens every five minutes or when calibration is manually
activated.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Upon power-up the EVS requires approximately 30 seconds to produce a usable image. The image generated
is monochrome (black and white). Normally the hotter an object is the whiter it appears on the display.
EVS Data Unavailable
EVS Calibration
AFCS
Figure 8-14 EVS Messages
EVS Softkeys
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
While on the AUX - VIDEO Page, pressing the VID ZM + or VID ZM - Softkeys increases or decreases EVS
display magnification between 1x and 2x.
APPENDICES
Pressing the HIDE MAP Softkey removes the map and displays EVS on the full screen. The softkey label
changes to grey with black characters. Pressing the HIDE MAP Softkey again restores the map view and the
small EVS image. The softkey label returns to white characters on a black background.
Pressing the SETUP Softkey advances to the next level of softkeys: CNTRST -, CNTRST +, BRIGHT -,
BRIGHT +, SAT -, SAT +, RESET, and BACK.
INDEX
Pressing the CNTRST - and CNTRST + Softkeys adjust display contrast in five percent increments from 0 to
100%. Pressing the BRIGHT - and BRIGHT + Softkeys adjust display brightness in five percent increments
from 0 to 100%. Pressing the SAT - and SAT + Softkeys adjust display saturation in five percent increments
from 0 to 100%.
428
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pressing the RESET Softkey returns all video adjustments options to the default settings.
While viewing the SETUP Softkeys, pressing the BACK Softkey or after 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, the
system reverts to the AUX - VIDEO Page softkeys.
ENGINE
CNTRST +
SETUP
BRIGHT -
BRIGHT +
ZOOM IN ZOOM OUT
SAT -
SAT +
HIDE MAP
RESET
EIS
CNTRST -
MAP
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The EVS softkeys shown below appear on the AUX - VIDEO Page.
BACK
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Pressing the BACK Softkey returns
to the Previous Level Softkeys.
Figure 8-15 EVS Softkeys
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The video adjustments options can also be selected by using the page menu option.
Selecting video adjustment options:
1) While viewing the AUX - VIDEO Page press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired video adjustment option and press the ENT Key.
Once the ENT key is pressed on any option, the page menu closes and returns to the AUX - VIDEO Page.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-16 AUX - VIDEO Page Menu
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
429
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EVS
Camera
View
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Map
View
EVS
Softkeys
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-17 EVS and Map on the AUX - Video Page
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
EVS View
with Map
Hidden
Figure 8-18 Full Screen EVS Image
430
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.3 SafeTaxi
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SafeTaxi is an enhanced feature that gives greater map detail when viewing airports at close range. The
maximum map ranges for enhanced detail are pilot configurable. When viewing at ranges close enough to
show the airport detail, the map reveals taxiways with identifying letters/numbers, airport Hot Spots, and airport
landmarks including ramps, buildings, control towers, and other prominent features. Resolution is greater at
lower map ranges. When the MFD display is within the SafeTaxi ranges, the airplane symbol on the airport
provides enhanced position awareness.
EIS
Designated Hot Spots are recognized at airports with many intersecting taxiways and runways, and/or complex
ramp areas. Airport Hot Spots are outlined to caution pilots of areas on an airport surface where positional
awareness confusion or runway incursions happen most often. Hot Spots are defined with a magenta circle or
outline around the region of possible confusion.
• VOR Information Page
• Inset Map (PFD)
• User Waypoint Information Page
• Weather Datalink Page
• Trip Planning Page
• Airport Information Page
• Nearest Pages
• Intersection Information Page
• Active and Stored Flight Plan Pages
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Navigation Map Page
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Any map page that displays the navigation view can also show the SafeTaxi airport layout within the maximum
configured range. The following is a list of pages where the SafeTaxi feature can be seen:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• NDB Information Page
During ground operations the aircraft’s position is displayed in reference to taxiways, runways, and airport
features. In the example shown, the aircraft is on taxiway Bravo inside the High Alert Intersection boundary
on KSFO airport. Airport Hot Spots are outlined in magenta. When panning over the airport, features such as
runway holding lines and taxiways are shown at the cursor.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
431
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Taxiway
Identification
EIS
Aircraft
Position
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Airport Hot
Spot Outline
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Airport
Features
Figure 8-19 SafeTaxi Depiction on the Navigation Map Page
DCLTR Softkey
Removes Taxiway
Markings
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The DCLTR Softkey (declutter) label advances to DCLTR-1, DCLTR -2, and DCLTR-3 each time the softkey is
pressed for easy recognition of decluttering level. Pressing the DCLTR Softkey removes the taxiway markings
and airport feature labels. Pressing the DCLTR-1 Softkey removes VOR and station ID, the VOR symbol, and
intersection names if within the airport plan view. Pressing the DCLTR-2 Softkey removes the airport diagram
and runway layout, unless the airport in view is part of an active route structure. Pressing the DCLTR-3 Softkey
cycles back to the original map detail. Refer to Map Declutter Levels in the Flight Management Section.
432
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Configuring SafeTaxi range:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Map Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 8-20 Navigation Map PAGE MENU, Map Setup Option
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the Aviation Group and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the Aviation Group options to SAFETAXI.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the range of distances.
6) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired distance for maximum SafeTaxi display range.
7) Press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
AFCS
SAFETAXI
Option
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
SafeTaxi
Range
Options
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 8-21 MAP SETUP Menu, Aviation Group, SAFETAXI Range Options
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
433
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
SafeTaxi Cycle Number and Revision
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SafeTaxi database is revised every 56 days. SafeTaxi is always available for use after the expiration date.
When turning on the system, the Power-up Page indicates whether the databases are current, out of date, or
not available.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
SafeTaxi Database
Figure 8-22 Power-up Page, SafeTaxi Database
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Power-up Page Display
Definition
Normal operation. SafeTaxi database is valid and within current cycle.
SafeTaxi database has expired.
AFCS
Database card contains no SafeTaxi data.
Table 8-1 SafeTaxi Annunciation Definitions
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The SafeTaxi Region, Version, Cycle, Effective date and Expires date of the database cycle can also be found
on the AUX - System Status page, as seen in Figure 8-23.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Select the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the DATABASE window. Scroll through the listed
information by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the SafeTaxi database information is
shown.
434
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The SafeTaxi database cycle number shown in the figure, 09S3, is deciphered as follows:
09 – Indicates the year 2009
S – Indicates the data is for SafeTaxi
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3 – Indicates the third issue of the SafeTaxi database for the year
The SafeTaxi EFFECTIVE date 07–MAY–09 is the beginning date for the current database cycle. SafeTaxi
EXPIRES date 02–JUL–09 is the revision date for the next database cycle.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SafeTaxi Data
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 8-23 AUX – System Status Page, SafeTaxi Current Information
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
SafeTaxi information appears in blue and yellow text. The EFFECTIVE date appears in blue when data is
current and in yellow when the current date is before the effective date. The EXPIRES date appears in blue
when data is current and in yellow when expired (Figures 8‑23 and 8-24). NOT AVAILABLE appears in blue
in the REGION field if SafeTaxi data is not available on the database card (Figure 8‑24). An expired SafeTaxi
database is not disabled and will continue to function indefinitely.
APPENDICES
Select the MFD1 DB Softkey a second time. The softkey label will change to PFD1 DB. The DATABASE
window will now be displaying database information for the PFD. As before, scroll through the listed information
by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the SafeTaxi database information is shown.
Refer to Updating Garmin Databases in Appendix B for instructions on revising the SafeTaxi database.
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
435
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The other three possible AUX - System Status page conditions are shown here. The EFFECTIVE date is the
beginning date for this database cycle. If the present date is before the effective date, the EFFECTIVE date
appears in yellow and the EXPIRES date appears in blue. The EXPIRES date is the revision date for the next
database cycle. NOT AVAILABLE indicates that SafeTaxi is not available on the database card or no database
card is inserted.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Current Date is before Effective Date
SafeTaxi Database has Expired
SafeTaxi Database Not Installed
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-24 AUX – System Status Page, SafeTaxi Expired, SafeTaxi Not Available
436
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.4 ChartView
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ChartView resembles the paper version of Jeppesen terminal procedures charts. The charts are displayed in full
color with high-resolution. The MFD depiction shows the aircraft position on the moving map in the plan view
of approach charts and on airport diagrams. Airport Hot Spots are outlined in magenta.
The ChartView database subscription is available from Jeppesen, Inc. Available data includes:
• Arrivals (STAR)
• Airport Diagrams
• Departure Procedures (DP)
• NOTAMs
EIS
• Approaches
ChartView Softkeys
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ChartView functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. While on the Navigation Map Page, Nearest
Airports Page, or Flight Plan Page, pressing the SHW CHRT Softkey displays the available terminal chart and
advances to the chart selection level of softkeys: CHRT OPT, CHRT, INFO, DP, STAR, APR, WX, NOTAM,
and GO BACK. The chart selection softkeys shown below appear on the Airport Information Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pressing the GO BACK Softkey reverts to the top level softkeys and previous page.
Pressing the CHRT OPT Softkey advances to the next level of softkeys: ALL, HEADER, PLAN, PROFILE,
MINIMUMS, FIT WDTH, FULL SCN, and BACK.
While viewing the CHRT OPT Softkeys, after 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, the system reverts to the chart
selection softkeys.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SHW CHRT
CHRT
INFO
DP
STAR
APR
WX
NOTAM
GO BACK
AFCS
CHRT OPT
Pressing the GO BACK Softkey returns
to the top-level softkeys and previous page.
HEADER
PLAN
PROFILE
MINIMUMS FIT WDTH FULL SCN
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
ALL
BACK
Pressing the BACK Softkey returns
to the Chart Selection Softkeys.
APPENDICES
Figure 8-25 ChartView SHW CHRT, Chart Selection, and Chart Option Softkeys
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
437
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
Terminal Procedures Charts
Selecting Terminal Procedures Charts:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Nearest Airport Page, or Flight Plan Page, press the SHW CHRT
Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the OPTIONS Menu to Show Chart.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
3) Press the ENT Key to display the chart.
Navigation Map Page OPTIONS Menu
Waypoint Airport Information Page OPTIONS Menu
Figure 8-26 Option Menus
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
When no terminal procedure chart is available for the nearest airport or the selected airport, the banner
CHART NOT AVAILABLE appears on the screen. The CHART NOT AVAILABLE banner does not refer to
the Jeppesen subscription, but rather the availability of a particular airport chart selection or procedure for a
selected airport.
APPENDICES
Figure 8-27 Chart Not Available Banner
INDEX
If there is a problem in rendering the data (such as a data error or a failure of an individual chart), the banner
UNABLE TO DISPLAY CHART is then displayed.
Figure 8-28 Unable To Display Chart Banner
438
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
When a chart is not available by pressing the SHW CHRT Softkey or selecting a Page Menu Option, charts
may be obtained for other airports from the WPT Pages or Flight Plan Pages.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If a chart is available for the destination airport, or the airport selected in the active flight plan, the chart
appears on the screen. When no flight plan is active, or when not flying to a direct-to destination, pressing the
SHW CHRT Softkey displays the chart for the nearest airport, if available.
The chart shown is the one associated with the WPT – Airport Information page. Usually this is the airport
runway diagram. Where no runway diagram exists, but Take Off Minimums or Alternate Minimums are
available, that page appears. If Airport Information pages are unavailable, the Approach Chart for the airport
is shown.
EIS
Selecting a chart:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Flight Plan Page, or Nearest Airports Page, press the SHW CHRT
Softkey. The airport diagram or approach chart is displayed on the Airport Information Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select either the Airport Identifier Box or the Approach Box. (Press the APR Softkey
if the Approach Box is not currently shown).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Turn the small and large FMS Knob to enter the desired airport identifier.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the airport selection.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Approach Box.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to show the approach chart selection choices.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) Turn either FMS Knob to scroll through the available charts.
9) Press the ENT Key to complete the chart selection.
AFCS
Chart Scale
Select Desired
Approach Chart
From Menu
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Scroll Through
Chart With
the Joystick
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 8-29 Approach Information Page, Chart Selection
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
439
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
While the APPROACH Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the MFD softkeys are blank. Once the desired
chart is selected, the chart scale can be changed and the chart page can be scrolled using the Joystick. Pressing
the Joystick centers the chart on the screen.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The aircraft symbol is shown on the chart only if the chart is to scale and the aircraft position is within
the boundaries of the chart. The aircraft symbol is not displayed when the Aircraft Not Shown Icon appears
(Figure 8‑33). If the Chart Scale Box displays a banner NOT TO SCALE, the aircraft symbol is not shown. The
Aircraft Not Shown Icon may appear at certain times, even if the chart is displayed to scale.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Pressing the CHRT Softkey switches between the ChartView diagram and the associated map in the WPT
page group. In the example shown, the CHRT Softkey switches between the Colorado Springs, CO (KCOS)
Airport Diagram and the navigation map on the WPT – Airport Information page.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press CHRT Softkey
to Switch Between
ChartView and WPT Airport Information Page
Figure 8-30 CHRT Softkey, Airport Information Page
440
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pressing the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey returns to the airport diagram chart when the view is on a terminal
procedure chart. If the displayed chart is the airport diagram chart, pressing the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey
returns to the Airport Information Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The aircraft position is shown in magenta on the ChartView diagrams when the location of the aircraft is within
the chart boundaries. In the example shown, the aircraft is turning onto Taxiway Romeo on the Charlotte, NC
(KCLT) airport.
EIS
Another source for additional airport information is from the INFO Box above the chart for certain airports.
This information source is not related to the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey. When the INFO Box is selected
using the FMS Knob, the MFD softkeys are blank. The Charlotte, NC airport has five additional charts offering
information; the Airport Diagram, Take-off Minimums, Class B Airspace, Airline Parking Gate Coordinates, and
Airline Parking Gate Location. (The numbers in parentheses after the chart name are Jeppesen designators.)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Aircraft
Current
Position
AFCS
Figure 8-31 Airport Information Page, INFO View, Full Screen Width
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
441
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In the example shown in Figure 8-31, the Class B Chart is selected. Pressing the ENT Key displays the
Charlotte Class B Airspace Chart (Figure 8-32).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-32 Airport Information Page, Class B Chart Selected from INFO View
Pressing the DP Softkey displays the Departure Procedure Chart if available.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Chart Not
To Scale
INDEX
Aircraft Not
Shown Icon
Figure 8-33 Departure Information Page
442
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pressing the STAR Softkey displays the Standard Terminal Arrival Chart if available.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Chart Not
To Scale
EIS
Change Range
and Scroll
Through the
Chart With the
Joystick
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Aircraft Not
Shown Icon
Figure 8-34 Arrival Information Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the APR Softkey displays the approach chart for the airport if available.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
INDEX
Figure 8-35 Approach Information Page
443
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pressing the WX Softkey shows the airport weather frequency information, and includes weather data such as
METAR and TAF from the XM Data Link Receiver, when available. Weather information is available only when
an XM Data Link Receiver is installed and the XM Weather subscription is current.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
WX Info
When
Available
WX Softkey
Selected
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-36 Weather Information Page
NOTE: A subdued softkey label indicates the function is disabled.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Recent NOTAMS applicable to the current ChartView cycle are included in the ChartView database. Pressing
the NOTAM Softkey shows the local NOTAM information for selected airports, when available. When NOTAMS
are not available, the NOTAM Softkey label appears subdued and is disabled as shown in Figure 8-36. The
NOTAM Softkey may appear on the Airport Information Page and all of the chart page selections.
444
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTAM
Softkey
Appears for
Selected
Airports
Figure 8-37 NOTAM Softkey Highlighted
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Local
NOTAM on
This Airport
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
NOTAM
Softkey
Selected
Figure 8-38 Airport Information Page, Local NOTAMs
INDEX
Pressing the NOTAM Softkey again removes the NOTAMS information.
Pressing the GO BACK Softkey reverts to the previous page (Navigation Map Page, Nearest Pages, or Flight
Plan Page).
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
445
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
Chart Options
Pressing the CHRT OPT Softkey displays the next level of softkeys, the chart options level (Figure 8-25).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pressing the ALL Softkey shows the complete approach chart on the screen.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Complete
Chart
Shown
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 8-39 Approach Information Page, ALL View
446
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pressing the HEADER Softkey shows the header view (approach chart briefing strip) on the screen.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Approach
Chart
Briefing Strip
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-40 Approach Information Page, Header View
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the PLAN Softkey shows the approach chart two dimensional plan view.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Approach
Chart Plan
View
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 8-41 Approach Information Page, Plan View
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
447
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pressing the PROFILE Softkey displays the approach chart descent profile strip.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Approach
Chart Descent
Profile Strip
Figure 8-42 Approach Information Page, Profile View, Full Screen Width
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the MINIMUMS Softkey displays the minimum descent altitude/visibility strip at the bottom of the
approach chart.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Minimum
Descent
Altitude/
Visibility Strip
Figure 8-43 Approach Information Page, Minimums View, Full Screen Width
448
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
If the chart scale has been adjusted to view a small area of the chart, pressing the FIT WIDTH Softkey
changes the chart size to fit the available screen width.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press FIT WDTH
Softkey to Show
Full Chart Width
Figure 8-44 Airport Information Page, FIT WDTH Softkey Selected
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
449
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
Pressing the FULL SCN Softkey alternates between removing and replacing the data window to the right.
Selecting Additional Information:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) While viewing the Airport Taxi Diagram, press the FULL SCN Softkey to display the information windows
(AIRPORT, INFO).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the AIRPORT, INFO, RUNWAYS, or FREQUENCIES Box (INFO Box shown).
EIS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the INFO Box choices. If multiple choices are available, scroll to the desired
choice with the large FMS Knob and press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Press the FMS Knob again to deactivate the cursor.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Available
Information
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press FULL SCN
Softkey to Switch
Between Full
Screen and Chart
With Info Window
INDEX
Figure 8-45 Airport Information Page, Full Screen and Info Window
Pressing the BACK Softkey, or waiting for 45 seconds reverts to the chart selection softkeys.
450
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The full screen view can also be selected by using the page menu option.
Selecting full screen On or Off:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move between the FULL SCREEN and COLOR SCHEME Options.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between the On and Off Full Screen Options.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Chart Setup Option
Full Screen On/Off Selection
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-46 Page Menus
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
451
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
Day/Night View
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ChartView can be displayed on a white or black background for day or night viewing. The Day View offers
a better presentation in a bright environment. The Night View gives a better presentation for viewing in a dark
environment. When the CHART SETUP Box is selected the MFD softkeys are blank.
Selecting Day, Night, or Automatic View:
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-47 Waypoint Information Page, OPTIONS Menu
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move to the COLOR SCHEME Option (Figure 8‑48).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between Day, Auto, and Night Options.
AFCS
5) If Auto Mode is selected, turn the large FMS Knob to select the percentage field. Use the small FMS Knob to
change the percentage value. The percentage value is the day/night crossover point based on the percentage of
backlighting intensity. For example, if the value is set to 15%, the day/night display changes when the display
backlight reaches 15% of full brightness.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The display must be changed in order for the new setting to become active. This may be accomplished by
selecting another page or changing the display range.
INDEX
APPENDICES
6) Press the FMS Knob when finished to remove the Chart Setup Menu.
452
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-48 Arrival Information Page, Day View
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-49 Arrival Information Page, Night View
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
453
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
ChartView Cycle Number and Expiration Date
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ChartView database is revised every 14 days. Charts are still viewable during a period that extends from the
cycle expiration date to the disables date. ChartView is disabled 70 days after the expiration date and is no
longer available for viewing. When turning on the system, the Power-up Page displays the current status of the
ChartView database. See the table below for the various ChartView Power-up Page displays and the definition
of each.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ChartView Database
Figure 8-50 Power-up Page, ChartView Database
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Power-up Page Display
Definition
Blank Line. System is not configured for ChartView. Contact a Garminauthorized service center for configuration.
System is configured for ChartView but no chart database is installed.
Contact Jeppesen for a ChartView database.
Normal operation. ChartView database is valid and within current
cycle.
ChartView database is within 1 week after expiration date. A new cycle
is available for update.
ChartView database is beyond 1 week after expiration date, but still
within the 70 day viewing period.
ChartView database has timed out. Database is beyond 70 days after
expiration date. ChartView database is no longer available for viewing.
System time is not available. GPS satellite data is unknown or the
system has not yet locked onto satellites. Check database cycle number
for effectivity.
System is verifying chart database when new cycle is installed for the
first time.
After verifying, chart database is found to be corrupt. ChartView is not
available.
Table 8-2 ChartView Power-up Page Annunciations and Definitions
454
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The ChartView time critical information can also be found on the AUX - System Status page. The database
CYCLE number, EXPIRES, and DISABLES dates of the ChartView subscription appear in either blue or yellow
text. When the ChartView EXPIRES date is reached, ChartView becomes inoperative 70 days later. This is
shown as the DISABLES date. When the DISABLES date is reached, charts are no longer available for viewing.
The SHW CHRT Softkey label then appears subdued and is disabled until a revised issue of ChartView is
installed.
NOTE: A subdued softkey label indicates the function is disabled.
EIS
Select the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the DATABASE window. Scroll through the listed
information by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the ChartView database information is
shown.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The ChartView database cycle number shown in the figure, 0904, is deciphered as follows:
09 – Indicates the year 2009
04 – Indicates the fourth issue of the ChartView database for the year
The EXPIRES date 05–MAR–09 is the date that this database should be replaced with the next issue.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The DISABLES date 14–MAY–09 is the date that this database becomes inoperative.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
ChartView
Data
APPENDICES
Figure 8-51 AUX – System Status Page, ChartView Current and Available
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
INDEX
The ChartView database is provided directly from Jeppesen. Refer to Updating Jeppesen Databases in
Appendix B for instructions on revising the ChartView database.
455
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Other possible AUX - System Status page conditions are shown in Figure 8-52. The EXPIRES date, in yellow,
is the revision date for the next database cycle. The DISABLES date, in yellow, is the date that this database
cycle is no longer viewable. REGION and CYCLE NOT AVAILABLE in blue, indicate that no ChartView data is
available on the database card or no database card is inserted.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ChartView has Expired, but is not Disabled
ChartView Database is Disabled
ChartView Database is Not Available
Figure 8-52 AUX – System Status Page, ChartView Expired, ChartView Disabled, ChartView Not Available
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Select the MFD1 DB Softkey a second time. The softkey label will change to PFD1 DB. The DATABASE
window will now be displaying database information for the PFD. As before, scroll through the listed information
by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the ChartView database information is shown.
456
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.5 FliteCharts
• Departure Procedures (DP)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FliteCharts resemble the paper version of National Aeronautical Charting Office (NACO) terminal procedures
charts. The charts are displayed with high-resolution and in color for applicable charts. FliteCharts database
subscription is available from Garmin. Available data includes:
• Arrivals (STAR)
• Approaches
• Airport Diagrams
FliteCharts Softkeys
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FliteCharts functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. While on the Navigation Map Page, Nearest
Airports Page, or Flight Plan Page, pressing the SHW CHRT Softkey displays the available terminal chart and
advances to the chart selection level of softkeys: CHRT OPT, CHRT, INFO, DP, STAR, APR, WX, and
GO BACK. The chart selection softkeys appear on the Airport Information Page.
Pressing the GO BACK Softkey reverts to the top level softkeys and previous page.
Pressing the CHRT OPT Softkey displays the available terminal chart and advances to the next level of
softkeys: ALL, FIT WDTH, FULL SCN, and BACK.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
While viewing the CHRT OPT Softkeys, after 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, the system reverts to the chart
selection softkeys.
NOTAMs are not available with FliteCharts. The NOTAM Softkey label appears subdued and is disabled.
CHRT OPT
CHRT
INFO
DP
STAR
APR
WX
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SHW CHRT
GO BACK
AFCS
Presssing the GO BACK Softkey returns
to the top-level softkeys and previous page.
FIT WDTH
FULL SCN
BACK
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
ALL
Pressing the BACK Softkey returns
to the Chart Selection Softkeys.
APPENDICES
Figure 8-53 FliteCharts SHW CHRT, Chart Selection, and Chart Option Softkeys
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
457
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
Terminal Procedures Charts
Selecting Terminal Procedures Charts:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Nearest Airport Page, or Flight Plan Page, press the SHW CHRT
Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the OPTIONS Menu to Show Chart.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
3) Press the ENT Key to display the chart.
Navigation Map Page OPTIONS Menu
Waypoint Airport Information Page OPTIONS Menu
Figure 8-54 Option Menus
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
When no terminal procedure chart is available, the banner CHART NOT AVAILABLE appears on the screen.
The CHART NOT AVAILABLE banner does not refer to the FliteCharts subscription, but rather the availability
of a particular airport chart selection or procedure for a selected airport.
Figure 8-55 Chart Not Available Banner
INDEX
APPENDICES
If there is a problem in rendering the data (such as a data error or a failure of an individual chart), the banner
UNABLE TO DISPLAY CHART is then displayed.
Figure 8-56 Unable To Display Chart Banner
458
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
When a chart is not available by pressing the SHW CHRT Softkey or selecting a Page Menu Option, charts
may be obtained for other airports from the WPT Pages or Flight Plan Pages.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If a chart is available for the destination airport, or the airport selected in the active flight plan, the chart
appears on the screen. When no flight plan is active, or when not flying to a direct-to destination, pressing the
SHW CHRT Softkey displays the chart for the nearest airport, if available.
The chart shown is one associated with the WPT – Airport Information page. Usually this is the airport runway
diagram. Where no runway diagram exists, but Take Off Minimums or Alternate Minimums are available, that
page appears. If Airport Information pages are unavailable, the Approach Chart for the airport is shown.
EIS
Selecting a chart:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Flight Plan Page, or Nearest Airports Page, press the SHW CHRT
Softkey. The airport diagram or approach chart is displayed on the Airport Information Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select either the Airport Identifier Box or the Approach Box. (Press the APR Softkey
if the Approach Box is not currently shown).
4) Turn the small and large FMS Knob to enter the desired airport identifier.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the airport selection.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Approach Box.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to show the approach chart selection choices.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) Turn either FMS Knob to scroll through the available charts.
9) Press the ENT Key to complete the chart selection.
Chart Not
To Scale
AFCS
Select Desired
Approach Chart
from Menu
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pan Chart
With the
Joystick
APPENDICES
Aircraft Not
Shown Icon
INDEX
Figure 8-57 Approach Information Page, Chart Selection
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
459
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
While the APPROACH Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the MFD softkeys are blank. Once the desired
chart is selected, the chart scale can be changed and the chart can be panned using the Joystick. Pressing the
Joystick centers the chart on the screen.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The aircraft symbol is not shown on FliteCharts. The Chart Scale Box displays a banner NOT TO SCALE, and
the Aircraft Not Shown Icon is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Pressing the CHRT Softkey alternates between the FliteCharts diagram and the associated map in the WPT
page group. In the example shown, the CHRT Softkey switches between the Charlotte, NC (KCLT) Airport
Diagram and the navigation map on the WPT – Airport Information page.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Press CHRT Softkey
to Switch Between
FliteCharts and
Navigation Map Page
INDEX
Figure 8-58 CHRT Softkey, Airport Information Page
460
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pressing the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey returns to the airport diagram chart when the view is on a terminal
procedure chart. If the displayed chart is the airport diagram chart, pressing the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey
returns to the Airport Information Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Another source for additional airport information is from the INFO Box above the chart (Figure 8-65) or to
the right of the chart (Figure 8-59) for certain airports. This information source is not related to the INFO‑1
or INFO-2 Softkey. When the INFO Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the MFD softkeys are blank. The
Charlotte, NC airport has three additional charts offering information; the Airport Diagram, Alternate Minimums,
and Take-off Minimums.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Info Box
Selected
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-59 Airport Information Page, INFO View with Airport Information
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
461
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In the example shown in Figure 8-59, TAKE OFF MINIMUMS is selected. Pressing the ENT Key displays the
Take-off Minimums and Departure Procedures Chart (Figure 8-60).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-60 Airport Information Page, TAKE OFF MINIMUMS Selected from INFO View
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Pressing the DP Softkey displays the Departure Procedure Chart if available.
Figure 8-61 Departure Information Page
462
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pressing the STAR Softkey displays the Standard Terminal Arrival Chart if available.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-62 Arrival Information Page
Pressing the APR Softkey displays the approach chart for the airport if available.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
INDEX
Figure 8-63 Approach Information Page
463
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
Pressing the WX Softkey shows the airport weather frequency information, when available, and includes
weather data such as METAR and TAF from the XM Data Link Receiver. Weather information is available only
when an XM Data Link Receiver is installed and the XM Weather subscription is current.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selecting Additional Information:
1) While viewing the Airport Taxi Diagram, press the WX Softkey to display the information windows (AIRPORT,
INFO).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the INFO Box.
EIS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the INFO Box choices. When the INFO Box is selected the MFD softkeys are
blank. If multiple choices are available, scroll to the desired choice with the large FMS Knob and press the ENT
Key to complete the selection.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Press the FMS Knob again to deactivate the cursor.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
WX Info
When
Available
AFCS
Info Available
on This Airport
Chart Not
To Scale
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Softkeys are
Blank during
Info Box
Selection
APPENDICES
Figure 8-64 Weather Information Page, WX Softkey Selected
WX Softkey
Selected
INDEX
Pressing the GO BACK Softkey reverts to the previous page (Navigation Map Page or Flight Plan Page).
464
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Chart Options
Pressing the CHRT OPT Softkey displays the next level of softkeys, the chart options level (Figure 8-53).
Pressing the ALL Softkey shows the complete chart on the screen.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Complete
Chart
Shown
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-65 Airport Information Page, ALL View Selected
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
465
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pressing the FIT WIDTH Softkey fits the width of the chart in the display viewing area. In the example
shown, the chart at close range is replaced with the full width chart.
Press FIT WDTH
Softkey to Show
Full Chart Width
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 8-66 Approach Information Page, FIT WDTH Softkey Selected
466
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pressing the FULL SCN Softkey alternates between removing and replacing the data window to the right.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Press FULL SCN
Softkey to Switch
Between Chart on
Full Screen and Chart
with Info Window
AFCS
Figure 8-67 Airport Information Page, Full Screen and Info Window
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pressing the BACK Softkey, or waiting for 45 seconds reverts to the chart selection softkeys.
The full screen view can also be selected by using the page menu option.
APPENDICES
Selecting full screen On or Off:
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move between the FULL SCREEN and COLOR SCHEME Options.
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
INDEX
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between the On and Off Full Screen Options.
467
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Chart Setup Option
Full Screen On/Off Selection
Figure 8-68 Page Menus
Day/Night View
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
FliteCharts can be displayed on a white or black background for day or night viewing. The Day View offers
a better presentation in a bright environment. The Night View gives a better presentation for viewing in a dark
environment. When the CHART SETUP Box is selected the MFD softkeys are blank.
Selecting Day, Night, or Automatic View:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
Figure 8-69 Waypoint Information Page, OPTIONS Menu
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move to the COLOR SCHEME Option (Figure 8‑70).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between Day, Auto, and Night Options.
INDEX
5) If Auto Mode is selected, turn the large FMS Knob to select the percentage field. Use the small FMS Knob to
change the percentage value. The percentage value is the day/night crossover point based on the percentage of
backlighting intensity. For example, if the value is set to 15%, the day/night display changes when the display
backlight reaches 15% of full brightness.
468
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The display must be changed in order for the new setting to become active. This may be accomplished by
selecting another page or changing the display range.
6) Press the FMS Knob when finished to remove the Chart Setup Menu.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-70 Approach Information Page, Day View
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 8-71 Approach Information Page, Night View
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
469
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
FliteCharts Cycle Number and Expiration Date
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FliteCharts data is revised every 28 days. Charts are still viewable during a period that extends from the cycle
expiration date to the disables date. FliteCharts is disabled 180 days after the expiration date and are no longer
available for viewing upon reaching the disables date. When turning on the system, the Power-up Page displays
the current status of the FliteCharts database. See the table below for the various FliteCharts Power-up Page
displays and the definition of each.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
FliteCharts Database
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-72 Power-up Page, FliteCharts Database
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Power-up Page Display
Definition
Blank Line. System is not configured for FliteCharts. Contact a
Garmin-authorized service center for configuration.
System is configured for FliteCharts but no chart database is installed.
Refer to Updating Garmin Databases in Appendix B for the FliteCharts
database
Normal operation. FliteCharts database is valid and within current
cycle.
FliteCharts database is beyond the expiration date, but still within the
180 day viewing period.
FliteCharts database has timed out. Database is beyond 180 days
after expiration date. FliteCharts database is no longer available for
viewing.
APPENDICES
Table 8-3 FliteCharts Power-up Page Annunciations and Definitions
When the 180 day grace period has expired, ‘Chart data is disabled.’ in yellow indicates that the FliteCharts
database has expired and is no longer viewable. ‘Chart Data: N/A’ appears in white if no FliteCharts data is
available on the database card or no database card is inserted.
INDEX
FliteCharts time critical information can also be found on the AUX - System Status page. The FliteCharts
database REGION, CYCLE number, EFFECTIVE, EXPIRES, and DISABLES dates of the subscription appear in
either blue or yellow text. Dates shown in blue are current data. Dates shown in yellow indicate the data is not
within the current subscription period.
470
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FliteCharts becomes inoperative 180 days after the FliteCharts EXPIRES date is reached, and is no longer
available for viewing. This date is shown as the DISABLES date. After the disable date the SHW CHRT Softkey
label appears subdued and is unavailable until a revised issue of FliteCharts is installed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: A subdued softkey label indicates the function is disabled.
Select the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the DATABASE window. Scroll through the listed
information by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the FliteCharts database information is
shown.
EIS
The FliteCharts database cycle number shown in the figure, 0905, is deciphered as follows:
09 – Indicates the year 2009
05 – Indicates the fifth issue of the FliteCharts database for the year
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The FliteCharts EFFECTIVE date 07–MAY–09 is the first date that this database is current.
The FliteCharts EXPIRES date 04–JUN–09 is the last date that this database is current.
The DISABLES date 01–DEC–09 is the date that this database becomes inoperative.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
FliteCharts
Data
APPENDICES
Figure 8-73 AUX – System Status Page, FliteCharts Current and Available
The FliteCharts database is provided from Garmin. Refer to Updating Garmin Databases in Appendix B for
instructions on revising the FliteCharts database.
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
471
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The other three possible AUX - System Status page conditions are shown here. The EXPIRES date, in yellow,
is the revision date for the next database cycle. The DISABLES date, in yellow, is the date that this database cycle
is no longer viewable. REGION and CYCLE NOT AVAILABLE in blue, indicate that FliteCharts database is not
available on the database card or no database card is inserted.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
FliteCharts Expired, but is not Disabled
FliteCharts Database is Disabled
FliteCharts Database is Not Available
Figure 8-74 AUX – System Status Page, FliteCharts Expired, FliteCharts Disabled, FliteCharts Not Available
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Select the MFD1 DB Softkey a second time. The softkey label will change to PFD1 DB. The DATABASE
window will now be displaying database information for the PFD. As before, scroll through the listed information
by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the FliteCharts database information is shown.
472
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.6 AOPA Airport Directory
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Aircraft Owners and Pilots Association (AOPA) Airport Directory database offers detailed information
regarding services, hours of operation, lodging options, and more. This information is viewed on the Airport
Information Page by selecting the INFO Softkey until INFO-2 is displayed as shown in Figure 8-75.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-75 AOPA Information on the Airport Information Page
AOPA Database Cycle Number and Revision
AFCS
The AOPA Airport Directory database is revised four times per year. Check fly.garmin.com for the current
database. The Airport Directory is always available for use after the expiration date. When turning on the
system, the Power-up Page indicates whether the databases are current, out of date, or not available.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
AOPA Database
INDEX
Figure 8-76 Power-up Page, Airport Directory Database
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
473
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Power-up Page Display
Definition
Normal operation. AOPA Airport Directory database is valid and within
current cycle.
AOPA Airport Directory database has expired.
Database card contains no AOPA Airport Directory data.
Table 8-4 Airport Directory Annunciation Definitions
EIS
The Airport Directory Region, Version, Cycle, Effective date and Expires date of the database cycle can also be
found on the AUX - System Status page, as seen in Figure 8-77.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Select the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the DATABASE window. Scroll through the listed information
by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the Airport Directory database information is shown.
The Airport Directory database cycle number shown in the figure, 09D2, is deciphered as follows:
09 – Indicates the year 2009
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
D – Indicates the data is for Airport Directory
2 – Indicates the second issue of the Airport Directory database for the year
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Airport Directory EFFECTIVE date 15–APR–09 is the beginning date for the current database cycle. The
Airport Directory EXPIRES date 14–JUL–09 is the revision date for the next database cycle.
APPENDICES
Airport
Directory
Data
Figure 8-77 AUX – System Status Page, Airport Directory Current Information
INDEX
Airport Directory information appears in blue and yellow text. The EFFECTIVE date appears in blue when data
is current and in yellow when the current date is before the effective date. The EXPIRES date appears in blue when
data is current and in yellow when expired (Table 8-4). NOT AVAILABLE appears in blue in the REGION field if
Airport Directory data is not available on the database card. An expired Airport Directory database is not disabled
and will continue to function indefinitely.
474
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.7 XM Radio Entertainment
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Note: Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section for information about XM Weather products.
The optional XM Radio entertainment feature of the GDL 69A Data Link Receiver is available for the pilot’s and
passengers’ enjoyment. The GDL 69A can receive XM Satellite Radio® entertainment services at any altitude
throughout the Continental U.S. Entertainment audio is available only on the GDL 69A Data Link Receiver, not
the GDL 69.
EIS
XM Satellite Radio offers a variety of radio programming over long distances without having to constantly
search for new stations. Based on signals from satellites, coverage far exceeds land-based transmissions.
XM Satellite Radio services are subscription-based. For more information on specific service packages, visit
www.xmradio.com.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Activating XM Satellite Radio Services
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The service is activated by providing XM Satellite Radio with either one or two coded IDs, depending on the
equipment. Either the Audio Radio ID or the Data Radio ID, or both, must be provided to XM Satellite Radio
to activate the entertainment subscription.
It is not required to activate both the entertainment and weather service subscriptions with the GDL 69A.
Either or both services can be activated. XM Satellite Radio uses one or both of the coded IDs to send an
activation signal that, when received by the GDL 69A, allows it to play entertainment programming.
These IDs are located:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• On the label on the back of the Data Link Receiver
• On the XM Information Page on the MFD (Figure 8-78)
• On the XM Satellite Radio Activation Instructions included with the unit (available at www.garmin.com, P/N
190-00355-04)
AFCS
Contact the installer if the Data Radio ID and the Audio Radio ID cannot be located.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
475
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
NOTE: The LOCK Softkey on the XM Information Page (AUX Page Group) is used to save GDL 69A activation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
data when the XM services are initially set up. It is not used during normal XM Radio operation, but there
should be no adverse effects if inadvertently pressed during flight. Refer to the GDL 69/69A XM Satellite
Radio Activation Instructions (190-00355-04, Rev H or later) for further information.
Activating the XM Satellite Radio services:
EIS
1) Contact XM Satellite Radio through the e-mail address listed on their website (www.xmradio.com) or by the
customer service phone number listed on the website. Follow the instructions provided by XM Satellite Radio
services.
2) Select the AUX Page Group.
3) Select the next to last page in the AUX Page Group.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the INFO Softkey to display the XM Information Page.
5) Verify that the desired services are activated.
6) Press the LOCK Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
7) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight YES.
8) To complete activation, press the ENT Key.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Data
Radio ID
Audio
Radio ID
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Weather
Products
Window
RADIO
and INFO
Softkeys
Figure 8-78 XM Information Page
LOCK Softkey
is Used to Save
Activation Data
During Initial
Setup
INDEX
If XM weather services have not been activated, all the weather product boxes are blank on the XM Information
Page and a yellow Activation Required message is displayed in the center of the Weather Data Link Page (Map
Page Group). The Service Class refers to the groupings of weather products available for subscription.
476
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Using XM Radio
The XM Radio Page provides information and control of the audio entertainment features of the XM Satellite
Radio.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selecting the XM Radio Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the displayed AUX - XM Information Page.
3) Press the RADIO Softkey to show the XM Radio Page where audio entertainment is controlled.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Active
Channel
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Channel
List
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Volume
Field
Categories
Field
AFCS
Figure 8-79 XM Radio Page
Active Channel and Channel List
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Active Channel Box on the XM Radio Page displays the currently selected channel that the XM Radio
is using.
The Channels List Box of the XM Radio Page shows a list of the available channels for the selected category.
Channels can be stepped through one at a time or may be selected directly by channel number.
APPENDICES
Selecting a channel from the channel list:
1) While on the XM Radio Page, press the CHNL Softkey.
2) Press the CH + Softkey to go up through the list in the Channel Box, or move down the list with the
CH – Softkey.
INDEX
Or:
1) Press the FMS Knob to highlight the channel list and turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the channels.
2) Press the ENT Key to activate the selected channel.
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
477
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
Selecting a channel directly:
1) While on the XM Radio Page, press the CHNL Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the DIR CH Softkey. The channel number in the Active Channel Box is highlighted.
3) Press the numbered softkeys located on the bottom of the display to directly select the desired channel
number.
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the selected channel.
Category
EIS
The Category Box of the XM Radio Page displays the currently selected category of audio. Categories of
channels such as jazz, rock, or news can be selected to list the available channels for a type of music or other
contents. One of the optional categories is PRESETS to view channels that have been programmed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selecting a category:
1) Press the CATGRY Softkey on the XM Radio Page.
2) Press the CAT + and CAT - Softkeys to cycle through the categories.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Or:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Categories list. Highlight the desired category with the small FMS Knob
and press the ENT Key. Selecting All Categories places all channels in the list.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 8-80 Categories List
478
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Presets
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Up to 15 channels from any category can be assigned a preset number. The preset channels are selected by
pressing the PRESETS and MORE Softkeys. Then the preset channel can be selected directly and added to
the channel list for the Presets category.
Setting a preset channel number:
1) On the XM Radio Page, while listening to an Active Channel that is wanted for a preset, press the PRESETS
Softkey to access the first five preset channels (PS1 - PS5).
EIS
2) Press the MORE Softkey to access the next five channels (PS6 – PS10), and again to access the last five
channels (PS11 – PS15). Pressing the MORE Softkey repeatedly cycles through the preset channels.
3) Press any one of the (PS1 - PS15) softkeys to assign a number to the active channel.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the SET Softkey on the desired channel number to save the channel as a preset.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Press PRESETS to
Access the Preset
Channels Softkeys
Press MORE to Cycle
Through the Preset
Channels
Press SET to
Save Each
Preset Channel
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-81 Accessing and Selecting XM Preset Channels
Pressing the BACK Softkey, or waiting during 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, returns the system to the top
level softkeys.
AFCS
Volume
Radio volume is shown as a percentage of full volume. Volume level is controlled by pressing the VOL
Softkey, which brings up the MUTE Softkey and the volume increase and decrease softkeys.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Adjusting the volume:
1) With the XM Radio Page displayed, press the VOL Softkey.
2) Press the VOL – Softkey to reduce volume or press the VOL + Softkey to increase volume. (Once the VOL
Softkey is pressed, the volume can also be adjusted using the small FMS Knob.)
APPENDICES
3) Press the MUTE Softkey to mute the audio. Press the MUTE Softkey again to unmute the audio.
INDEX
Figure 8-82 Volume Control
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
479
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
8.8 Scheduler
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Scheduler feature can be used to enter and display reminder messages (e.g., Change oil, Switch fuel tanks,
or Altimeter-Transponder Check) in the Messages Window on the PFD. Messages can be set to display based on
a specific date and time (event), once the message timer reaches zero (one-time; default setting), or recurrently
whenever the message timer reaches zero (periodic). Message timers set to periodic alerting automatically reset
to the original timer value once the message is displayed. When power is cycled, all messages are retained until
deleted, and message timer countdown is resumed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-83 Scheduler (Utility Page)
Entering a scheduler message:
1) Select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
AFCS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the first empty scheduler message naming field.
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter the message text to be displayed in the Messages Window and press the ENT
Key.
5) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the field next to Type.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the message alert type:
• Event—Message issued at the specified date/time
• One-time—Message issued when the message timer reaches zero (default setting)
APPENDICES
• Periodic—Message issued each time the message timer reaches zero
7) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field.
INDEX
8) For periodic and one-time message, use the FMS Knob to enter the timer value (HH:MM:SS) from which to
countdown and press the ENT Key.
480
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
9) For event-based messages:
a) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired date (DD-MM-YY) and press the ENT Key.
b) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
c) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time (HH:MM) and press the ENT Key.
10) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to enter the next message.
Deleting a scheduler message:
1) Select the AUX - Utility Page.
EIS
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the name field of the scheduler message to be deleted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the CLR Key to clear the message text. If the CLR Key is pressed again, the message is restored.
5) Press the ENT Key while the message line is cleared to clear the message time.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Scheduler messages appear in the Messages Window on the PFD. When a scheduler message is waiting, the
ALERTS Softkey label changes to ADVISORY. Pressing the ADVISORY Softkey opens the Messages Window
and acknowledges the scheduler message. The softkey label reverts to ALERTS when pressed. Pressing the
ALERTS Softkey again removes the Messages Window from the display, and the scheduler message is deleted
from the message queue.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-84 PFD Messages Window
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
481
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
8.9 Electronic Checklists
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The optional checklists presented here are for example only and may differ from checklists available
for the SR20/SR22. The information described in this section is not intended to replace the checklist
information described in the AFM or the Pilot Safety and Warning Supplements document.
NOTE: Garmin is not responsible for the content of checklists. Checklists are created by the aircraft
EIS
manufacturer. Modifications or updates to the checklists are coordinated through the aircraft manufacturer.
The user cannot edit these checklists.
The optional checklist functions are displayed on two levels of softkeys that are available on any MFD page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
(Optional)
SYSTEM
MAP
DCLTR
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
SHW CHRT CHKLIST
EXIT
CHECK
EMERGCY
The CHECK Softkey label changes to UNCHECK
when the checklist item is already checked.
Figure 8-85 Checklist Softkeys
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The MFD is able to display optional electronic checklists which allow a pilot to quickly find the proper
procedure on the ground and during each phase of flight. The system accesses the checklists from an SD card
inserted into the bezel slot. If the SD card contains an invalid checklist file or no checklist, the Power-up Page
messages display ‘Checklist File: Invalid’ or ‘Checklist File: N/A’ (not available) and the CHKLIST Softkey is
not available.
AFCS
Accessing and navigating checklists:
1) From any page on the MFD, press the CHKLIST Softkey or turn the large FMS Knob to select the Checklist Page.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘GROUP’ field.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired procedure and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘Checklist’ field.
APPENDICES
5) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired checklist and press the ENT Key. The selected checklist item is
indicated with white text surrounded by a white box.
6) Press the ENT Key or CHECK Softkey to check the selected checklist item. The line item turns green and a
checkmark is placed in the associated box. The next line item is automatically selected for checking.
Either FMS Knob can be used to scroll through the checklist and select the desired checklist item.
Press the CLR Key or UNCHECK Softkey to remove a check mark from an item.
INDEX
482
The following colors are used for checklist items:
• Blue - Items not selected
• White - Item is selected
• Green - Item has been checked
• Yellow - Caution notes
• Red - Warning notes
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
7) When all checklist items have been checked, ‘*Checklist Finished*’ is displayed in green text at the bottom left
of the checklist window. If all items in the checklist have not be checked, ‘*Checklist Not Finished*’ will be
displayed in yellow text.\
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
8) Press the ENT Key. ‘GO TO NEXT CHECKLIST?’ will be highlighted by the cursor.
9) Press the ENT Key to advance to the next checklist.
10) Press the EXIT Softkey to exit the Checklist Page and return to the page last viewed.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-86 Sample Checklist
APPENDICES
Accessing emergency procedures:
1) From any page on the MFD, press the CHKLIST Softkey or turn the large FMS Knob to select the Checklist Page.
2) Press the EMERGCY Softkey.
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
INDEX
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired emergency checklist and press the ENT Key.
483
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
4) Press the ENT Key or CHECK Softkey to check the selected emergency checklist item. The line item turns green
and a checkmark is placed in the box next to it. The next line item is automatically highlighted for checking.
Either FMS Knob can be used to scroll through the checklist and select the desired checklist item.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Press the CLR Key or UNCHECK Softkey to remove a check mark from an item.
5) When all checklist items have been checked, ‘*Checklist Finished*’ is displayed in green text at the bottom left
of the checklist window. If all items in the checklist have not be checked, ‘*Checklist Not Finished*’ will be
displayed in yellow text.\
6) Press the ENT Key. ‘GO TO NEXT CHECKLIST?’ will be highlighted by the cursor.
EIS
7) Press the ENT Key to advance to the next checklist.
8) Press the RETURN Softkey to return to the previous checklist.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
9) Press the EXIT Softkey to exit the Checklist Page and return to the page last viewed.
INDEX
Figure 8-87 Emergency Checklist Page Example
484
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.10 Flight Data Logging
NOTE: Some aircraft installations may not provide all aircraft/engine data capable of being logged by the
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
system.
The Flight Data Logging feature will automatically store critical flight and engine data on an SD data card (up
to 16GB) inserted into the top card slot of the MFD. Approximately 1,000 flight hours can be recorded for each
1GB of available space on the card.
EIS
Data is written to the SD card once each second while the MFD is powered on. All flight data logged on a
specific date is stored in a file named in a format which includes that date (dataYYYY_MM_DD.csv). The file is
created automatically each time the Perspective® system is powered on, provided an SD card has been inserted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The status of the Flight Data Logging feature can be viewed on the AUX-UTILITY Page. If no SD card has been
inserted, “NO CARD” is displayed. When data is being written to the SD card, “LOGGING DATA” is displayed.
The .csv file may be viewed with Microsoft Excel® or other spreadsheet applications.
The following is a list of data parameters the Perspective® system is capable of logging for the SR20, SR22, and
SR22TN aircraft.
• GPS altitude (MSL)
• Magnetic Heading (degrees)
• GPS vertical alert limit
• GPS altitude (WGS84 datum)
• HSI source
• Baro-Corrected altitude (feet)
• Selected course
• WAAS GPS horizontal
protection level
• Baro Correction (in/Hg)
• Com1/Com2 frequency
• Indicated airspeed (kts)
• Nav1/Nav2 frequency
• WAAS GPS vertical protection
level
• Vertical speed (fpm)
• CDI deflection
• Fuel Qty (right & left)(gals)
• GPS vertical speed (fpm)
• VDI/GP/GS deflection
• Fuel Flow (gph)
• OAT (degrees C)
• Wind Direction (degrees)
• Fuel Pressure (psi)
• True airspeed (knots)
• Wind Speed (knots)
• Voltage 1 and/or 2
• Pitch Attitude Angle (degrees)
• Active Waypoint Identifier
• Amps 1 and/or 2
• Roll Attitude Angle (degrees)
• Distance to next waypoint (nm)
• Engine RPM
• Lateral and Vertical G Force (g)
• Bearing to next waypoint
(degrees)
• Oil Pressure (psi)
• Magnetic variation (degrees)
• TIT (deg. F)
• Autopilot On/Off
• Manifold Pressure (in. Hg)
• AFCS roll/pitch modes
• CHT
• AFCS roll/pitch commands
• EGT
• Oil Temperature (deg. F)
INDEX
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
APPENDICES
190-00820-03 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Latitude (degrees; geodetic;
+North)
AFCS
• Ground Track (degrees
magnetic)
• GPS horizontal alert limit
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Ground Speed (kts)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• GPS fix
• Time
• Longitude (degrees; geodetic;
+East)
• Date
485
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The file containing the recorded data will appear in the format shown in Figure 8-88. This file can be imported
into most computer spreadsheet applications.
Local Date
YYMMDD
Local 24hr Time
HHMMSS
Nearest Airport
(A blank will be
inserted if no
airport is found)
EIS
log_090210_104506_KIXD.csv
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 8-88 Log File Format
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Data logging status can be monitored on the AUX-UTILITY Page.
486
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.11 Abnormal Operation
SVS Troubleshooting
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SVS is intended to be used with traditional attitude, heading, obstacle, terrain, and traffic inputs. SVS is
disabled when valid attitude or heading data is not available for the display. In case of invalid SVS data, the PFD
display reverts to the standard blue-over-brown attitude display.
SVS becomes disabled without the following data resources:
• Attitude data
EIS
• Heading data
• GPS position data
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• 9 Arc-second Terrain data
• Obstacle data
• TAWS function is not available, in test mode, or failed
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• The position of the aircraft exceeds the range of the terrain database.
Reversionary Mode
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SVS can be displayed on the Multifunction Display (MFD) in Reversionary Mode. If it is enabled when switching
to Reversionary Mode, SVS will take up to 30 seconds to be displayed. The standard, non-SVS PFD display will
be shown in the interim.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 8-89 SVS Reversionary Mode
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
487
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
Unusual Attitudes
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Unusual attitudes are displayed with red chevrons overlaid on the display indicating the direction to fly to
correct the unusual attitude condition. The display shows either a brown or blue colored bar at the top or
bottom of the screen to represent earth or sky. This is intended to prevent losing sight of the horizon during
extreme pitch attitudes.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-90 Unusual Attitude Display
The blue colored bar is also displayed when terrain gradient is great enough to completely fill the display.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Blue Band
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Terrain
Completely
Fills Display
Figure 8-91 Blue Sky Bar with Full Display Terrain
APPENDICES
GDL 69/69A Data Link Receiver Troubleshooting
Some quick troubleshooting steps listed below can be performed to find the possible cause of a failure.
• Ensure the owner/operator of the aircraft in which the Data Link Receiver is installed has subscribed to XM
• Ensure the XM subscription has been activated
INDEX
• Perform a quick check of the circuit breakers to ensure that power is applied to the Data Link Receiver
• Ensure that nothing is plugged into the Aux Audio In jack because this would prevent XM radio from being
heard
488
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
For troubleshooting purposes, check the LRU Information Box on the AUX - System Status Page for Data Link
Receiver (GDL 69/69A) status, serial number, and software version number. If a failure has been detected in the
GDL 69/69A the status is marked with a red X.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selecting the AUX - System Status Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Status Page.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-92 LRU Information Window on System Status Page
If a failure still exists, the following messages may provide insight as to the possible problem:
LOADING
OFF AIR
---
Description
Data Link Receiver antenna error; service required
Data Link Receiver updating encryption code
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NO SIGNAL
Message Location
XM Radio Page - active channel field
XM Radio Page - active channel field
XM Radio Page - active channel field
Weather Datalink Page - center of page
XM Radio Page - active channel field
XM Radio Page - active channel field
XM Radio Page - active channel field
AFCS
Message
CHECK ANTENNA
UPDATING
Loss of signal; signal strength too low for receiver
APPENDICES
Acquiring channel audio or information
Channel not in service
Missing channel information
No communication from Data Link Receiver
WEATHER DATA LINK FAILURE Weather Datalink Page - center of page
within last 5 minutes
ACTIVATION REQUIRED
Weather Datalink Page - center of page XM subscription is not activated
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
INDEX
Table 8-5 GDL 69/69A Data Link Receiver Error Messages
489
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
Blank Page
490
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Appendix A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Annunciations and Alerts
Note: The Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) supersedes information found in this document.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Perspective® Alerting System conveys alerts using the following:
EIS
• Annunciation Window: The Annunciation Window displays abbreviated annunciation text. Text color is
based on alert levels described in the following section. The Annunciation Window is located to the right
of the Altimeter and Vertical Speed Indicator. All aircraft annunciations can be displayed simultaneously
in the Annunciation Window. A white horizontal line separates annunciations that are acknowledged from
annunciations that are not yet acknowledged. Higher priority annunciations are displayed towards the top of
the window.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Alerts Window: The Alerts Window displays text messages for up to 64 prioritized alert messages. Pressing
the ALERTS Softkey displays the Alerts Window. Pressing the ALERTS Softkey a second time removes the
Alerts Window from the display. When the Alerts Window is displayed, the FMS Knob can be used to scroll
through the alert message list.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Softkey Annunciation: During certain alerts, the ALERTS Softkey may appear as a flashing annunciation
to accompany an alert. The ALERTS Softkey assumes a new label consistent with the alert level (WARNING,
CAUTION, or ADVISORY). By selecting the softkey when flashing an annunciation, the alert is acknowledged.
The softkey label then returns to ALERTS. If alerts are still present, the ALERTS label is displayed in white
with black text. Selecting the ALERTS Softkey a second time views the alert text messages.
• System Annunciations: Typically, a large red ‘X’ appears over instruments whose information is supplied by a
failed Line Replaceable Unit (LRU). See the Perspective® System Annunciations Section for more information.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Comparator
Window
Reversionary
Sensor
Window
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Annunciation
Window
Alerts
Window
APPENDICES
Softkey
Annunciation
INDEX
Figure A-1 Alerting System
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
491
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Appendix A
• Audio Alerting System: The system issues audio alert tones when specific system conditions are met. See
the Alert Level Definitions Section for more information. The annunciation tone may be tested from the AUX
- System Status Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Testing the system annunciation tone:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Status Page.
2) Select the ANN TEST Softkey.
Or:
EIS
a) Press the MENU Key.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
b) Highlight ‘Enable Annunciator Test Mode’ and press the ENT Key.
Press to Test Annunciation Tone
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure A-2 Annunciation Tone Testing
(AUX-System Status Page)
INDEX
APPENDICES
• Comparator Window: Critical values generated by redundant sensors are monitored by comparators. If
differences in the sensors exceed a specified amount, the Comparator Window appears in the upper right corner
of the PFD and the discrepancy is annunciated in the Comparator Window as a ‘MISCOMP’ (miscompare). If
one or both of the sensed values are unavailable, it will be annunciated as a ‘NO COMP’ (no compare).
Figure A-3 Comparator Window
492
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Appendix A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
• Reversionary Sensor Window (SR22 only): Reversionary sensor selection is annunciated in a window on
the right side of the PFD. These annunciations reflect reversionary sensors selected on the PFD. Pressing the
SENSOR Softkey accesses the ADC1, ADC2, AHRS1, and AHRS2 softkeys. These softkeys allow switching
of the sensors being viewed on the PFD. The GPS sensor cannot be switched manually.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Figure A-4 Reversionary Sensor Window (SR22)
EIS
Alert Level Definitions
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Perspective® Alerting System, as installed in Cirrus SR20, SR22 and SR22TN aircraft, uses three alert
levels.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• WARNING: This level of alert requires immediate attention. Warning alert text is shown in red in the
Annunciation Window and is accompanied by a chime every 1.5 second duration and a flashing ‘WARNING’
Softkey annunciation. Pressing the WARNING Softkey acknowledges the presence of the warning alert and
stops the aural chime.
• CAUTION: This level of alert indicates the existence of abnormal conditions on the aircraft that may require
intervention. Caution alert text is shown in yellow in the Annunciation Window and is accompanied by a
single chime of 1.5 second duration and a flashing ‘CAUTION’ Softkey annunciation. Pressing the CAUTION
Softkey acknowledges the presence of the caution alert.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• ANNUNCIATION OR MESSAGE ADVISORY: This level of alert provides general information. Annunciation
alert text is shown in white in the Annunciation Window; no aural tone is generated. An annunciation
alert is accompanied by a flashing ADVISORY Softkey annunciation. Pressing the ADVISORY Softkey
acknowledges the presence of the annunciation alert.
AFCS
Message advisory alerts do not issue annunciations in the Annunciation Window. Instead, message advisory
alerts only issue a flashing ‘ADVISORY’ Softkey annunciation. Selecting the ADVISORY Softkey acknowledges
the presence of the message advisory alert and displays the alert text message in the Alerts Window.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure A-5 Softkey Annunciation (ALERTS Softkey Labels)
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
493
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Appendix A
Aircraft Alerts
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following alerts are configured specifically for the Cirrus SR20, SR22 and SR22TN. Red annunciation
window text signifies warnings and yellow, cautions. See the Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) for recommended
pilot actions.
NOTE: The ice protection system (optional) must be operated in accordance with the approved flight manual
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
limitations. This option is only available on the SR22 and SR22TN.
Annunciation Window Text
Alerts Window Text
Audio Alert
ANTI ICE CTL
Tank valves can not be controlled (closed) (TKS).
Repeating Double Chime
ANTI ICE FLO
Flow rate is low (TKS).
Repeating Double Chime
ANTI ICE QTY
Left and right fluid quantities are unknown (TKS)
Repeating Double Chime
ANTI ICE QTY
Fluid quantity is low (TKS).
Repeating Double Chime
AOA OVERHEAT
BRAKE TEMP
CHT
CO LVL HIGH
ESS BUS
FUEL FLOW
FUEL QTY
M BUS 1
M BUS 2
AOA probe is overheated.
Repeating Double Chime
Brake temperature is high.
Cylinder head temperature is high.
Carbon monoxide level is too high
Check essential power bus voltage.
Check fuel flow.
Check fuel tank levels.
Check main power bus 1 voltage.
Check main power bus 2 voltage.
MAN PRESSURE*
Check manifold pressure.
OIL PRESSURE
OIL TEMP
OXYGEN FAULT
OXYGEN QTY
RPM
STALL
START ENGAGE
TIT*
Oil pressure is out of range.
Oil temperature is high.
Oxygen system fault.
Oxygen quantity is low.
Check engine RPM.
Stall warning.
Starter is engaged.
TIT temperature is high.
Repeating Double Chime
Repeating Double Chime
Repeating Double Chime
Repeating Double Chime1
None
Repeating Double Chime
Repeating Double Chime
Repeating Double Chime
Repeating Double Chime
(after 30 seconds)
Repeating Double Chime1
Repeating Double Chime
Repeating Double Chime
Repeating Double Chime
Repeating Double Chime
Tone
Repeating Double Chime
Repeating Double Chime
APPENDICES
 Optional / * SR22TN only /
1
In air only /  TKS NH (optional) /  TKS FIKI (optional)
INDEX
Table A-1 Warning Alerts
494
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Appendix A
ANTI ICE LVL
Right tank fluid quantity is unreliable (TKS).
Double Chime
ANTI ICE PSI
Pressure is high (TKS).
Double Chime
ANTI ICE PSI
Tail pressure is low (TKS).
Double Chime
ANTI ICE QTY
Fluid quantity imbalance has been detected (TKS)
Double Chime
ANTI ICE QTY
Fluid quantity is low (TKS)
Double Chime
ANTI ICE SPD
Airspeed is too low for ice protection (TKS).
Double Chime
ANTI ICE SPD
AP MISCOMP
AP/PFD ADC
AP/PFD AHRS
AVIONICS OFF
BATT 1
BRAKE TEMP
CHT
FLAPS
FUEL FILTER
FUEL QTY
M BUS 1
M BUS 2
MAN PRESSURE*
NO ADC MODES
NO VERT MODES
OIL PRESSURE
OIL TEMP
OXYGEN QTY
OXYGEN RQD
PARK BRAKE
PITOT HEAT
PITOT HT OFF
PITOT HT RQD
START ENGAGE
Airspeed is to high for ice protection (TKS).
Double Chime
Autopilot miscompare, autopilot is not available.
Autopilot and PFD are using different ADCs.
Autopilot and PFD are using different AHRSs.
Avionics master switch is off.
Check battery 1 current.
Brake temperature is high.
Cylinder head temperature is high.
Flaps are extended beyond airspeed limitations.
Fuel filter in bypass
Check fuel tank levels.
Check main power bus 1 voltage.
Check main power bus 2 voltage.
Check manifold pressure.
Autopilot air data modes are not available.
Autopilot vertical modes are not available.
Oil pressure is out of range.
Oil temperature is high.
Oxygen quantity is low.
Oxygen is required.
Parking break is set.
Pitot heat failure.
Pitot heat is turned off.
Pitot heat is required.
Starter is engaged.
Double Chime
Double Chime
Double Chime
Double Chime
Double Chime1
Double Chime
Double Chime
Double Chime
Double Chime
Double Chime
Double Chime1
Double Chime1
None
Double Chime
Double Chime
Double Chime1
Double Chime
Double Chime
Double Chime
None
Double Chime
None
Double Chime1
Double Chime
APPENDICES
Double Chime
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Left tank fluid quantity is unreliable (TKS).
AFCS
ANTI ICE LVL
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Double Chime
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Stall warning/AoA heater has failed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ANTI ICE HTR
EIS
Audio Alert
Double Chime1
Double Chime1
Double Chime
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Alerts Window Text
Check alternator 1 current.
Check alternator 2 current.
Alternate air door is open.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Annunciation Window Text
ALT 1
ALT 2
ALT AIR OPEN*
INDEX
 Optional / * SR22TN only / 1 In air only /  TKS NH (optional) /  TKS FIKI (optional)
Table A-2 Caution Alerts
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
495
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Appendix A
NOTE: The ice protection system (optional) must be operated in accordance with the approved flight manual
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
limitations. This option is only available on the SR22 and SR22TN.
Annunciation Window Text
Alerts Window Text
ALTITUDE SEL
Climbing away from selected altitude.
ALTITUDE SEL
Descending away from selected altitude.
COURSE SEL
Current track will not intercept selected course.
L FUEL QTY
Check left fuel tank level.
R FUEL QTY
Check right fuel tank level.

EIS

HIGH MP FF*
Avoid fuel flow 18 to 30 GPH and MP above 26”.
OXYGEN QTY
Oxygen quantity is low.
PUMP BACKUP
Anti-ice backup pump mode has been selected (TKS).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Audio Alert
None
 Optional / * SR22TN only /  TKS FIKI (optional)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Table A-3 Advisory Alerts
Comparator Window Text
ALT MISCOMP
Condition
Difference in altitude sensors is > 200 ft.
If both airspeed sensors detect < 35 knots, this is inhibited.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
IAS MISCOMP
If either airspeed sensor detects > 35 knots, and the difference in sensors is > 10 kts.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
If either airspeed sensor detects > 80 knots, and the difference in sensors is > 7 kts.
HDG MISCOMP
Difference in heading sensors is > 6 degrees.
PIT MISCOMP
Difference in pitch sensors is > 5 degrees.
ROL MISCOMP
Difference in roll sensors is > 6 degrees.
ALT NO COMP
No data from one or both altitude sensors.
IAS NO COMP
No data from one or both airspeed sensors.
HDG NO COMP
No data from one or both heading sensors.
PIT NO COMP
No data from one or both pitch sensors.
ROL NO COMP
No data from one or both roll sensors..
Table A-4 Comparator Alerts
APPENDICES
Reversionary Sensor Window Text
Condition
INDEX
The PFD is displaying data from the #2 Air Data Computer.
USING ADC2
The PFD is displaying data from the #2 AHRS.
USING AHRS2
Table A-5 Reversionary Sensor Alerts (SR22 only)
496
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Appendix A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NOTE: The ice protection system (optional) must be operated in accordance with the approved flight manual
limitations. This option is only available on the SR22 and SR22TN.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Alerts Window Message
Audio Alert
None
EIS
ANTI ICE QTY  – Fluid quantity is low (TKS)
CO DET FAIL – The carbon monoxide detector is inoperative
CO DET SRVC – The carbon monoxide detector needs service
EXIT ICING – Exit icing conditions
FAILED PATH – An autopilot servo data path has failed
MFD FAN FAIL – MFD cooling fan is inoperative.
PFD1 FAN FAIL – PFD cooling fan is inoperative.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
 Optional / * SR22TN only /  TKS NH (optional)/  TKS FIKI (optional)
Table A-6 Message Advisory Alerts
Voice Alerts
Alert Trigger
Issued when the aircraft transitions through the minimum descent altitude/decision height (MDA/DH)
Aircraft is one minute from Top of Descent - issued only when vertical navigation is enabled
Issued when the airspeed is low and the autopilot is engaged
Issued when the aircraft transitions beyond the set altitude limit
TAS voice alert - played when a Traffic Advisory (TA) is issued (TAS optional)
TAS voice alert - played when the Traffic Advisory System passes a pilot-initiated self test (TAS
optional)
TAS voice alert - played when the Traffic Advisory System fails a pilot-initiated self test (TAS
optional)
Table A-7 Voice Alerts
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Voice Alert
“Minimums, Minimums”
“Vertical Track”
"Airspeed"
“Altitude”
“Traffic, Traffic”
“Traffic Advisory System
Test Passed”
“Traffic Advisory System
Test Failed”
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The following audio alerts are announced by the system using a voice of male or female gender. If the
optional Terrain Awareness and Warning System is installed, voice alerts are also generated (refer to the TAWS
Alerts section).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selecting the audio alert voice:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
APPENDICES
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the voice in the Audio Alert Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired voice, press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
497
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Appendix A
Perspective® System Annunciations
NOTE: Upon power-up, certain windows remain invalid as Perspective® equipment begins to initialize. All
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
windows should be operational within one minute of power-up. If any window continues to remain flagged,
the Perspective® System should be serviced by a Garmin-authorized repair facility.
When an LRU or an LRU function fails, a large red ‘X’ is typically displayed on windows associated with the
failed data (refer to Figure B-1 for all possible flags and the responsible LRUs). Refer to the Pilot’s Operating
Handbook (POH) for additional information regarding pilot responses to these annunciations.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Units
GDC 74A
Air Data
Computer
Database
Mismatch in
PFD and MFD
GRS 77 AHRS
OR GMU 44
Magnetometer
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GEA 71 Engine
Airframe Unit OR
GIA 63W Integrated
Avionics Unit
(A Failed GDC 74A
Displays a Red-X Over
the Percent Power
Gauge in the SR22)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GIA 63W
Integrated
Avionics Units
AFCS
GDC 74A Air
Data Computer
GTX 33 Transponder OR
GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Units
Figure A-6 System Failure Annunciations
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The status of detected LRUs can be checked on the AUX - System Status Page (Figure A-2). Active LRUs
are indicated by green check marks; failed, by red ‘X’s. Failed LRUs should be noted and a service center or
Garmin-authorized dealer informed.
Viewing LRU information:
APPENDICES
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Status Page.
2) To place the cursor in the ‘LRU Info’ Box,
a) Select the LRU Softkey.
Or:
INDEX
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) With ‘Select LRU Window’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
3) Use the FMS Knob to scroll through the box to view LRU status information.
498
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Appendix A
Comment
System Annunciation
Comment
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Attitude and Heading
Reference System is aligning.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Annunciation
Display system is not receiving
vertical speed input from the
air data computer.
Display system is not receiving
attitude information from the
AHRS.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Other Various Red X
Indications
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
APPENDICES
This annunciation is seen only
when the autopilot is engaged.
The annunciation indicates an
AHRS monitor has detected
an abnormal flight parameter,
possibly caused by strong
turbulence. In this case, the
situation should correct itself
within a few seconds. If there
is an actual failure, a red “X”
soon appears over the Attitude
Indicator.
GPS information is either
not present or is invalid for
navigation use. Note that
AHRS utilizes GPS inputs
during normal operation.
AHRS operation may be
degraded if GPS signals are not
present (see POH).
Display system is not receiving
valid true airspeed information
from air data computer.
Display system is not receiving
valid OAT information from air
data computer.
Display system is not receiving
valid transponder information.
Different versions of GDU
software are installed in the
PFD and MFD. This can also
indicate different versions of the
navigation database installed in
the PFD and MFD. A cross-talk
error between the PFD and MFD
will also cause this annunciation.
A red ‘X’ through any other
display field (such as engine
instrumentation fields)
indicates that the field is not
receiving valid data.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
AHRS calibration incomplete or
configuration module failure.
Display system is not receiving
altitude input from the air data
computer.
EIS
Display system is not receiving
valid heading input from AHRS.
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
INDEX
Display system is not receiving
airspeed input from air data
computer.
499
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Appendix A
Perspective® System Message Advisories
NOTE: This section provides information regarding Perspective® message advisories that may be displayed
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
by the system. Knowledge of the aircraft, systems, flight conditions, and other existing operational priorities
must be considered when responding to a message.
This section describes various Perspective® System message advisories. Certain messages are issued due
to an LRU or LRU function failure. Such messages are normally accompanied by a corresponding red ‘X’
annunciation as shown previously in the Perspective® System Annunciations section.
EIS
Primary Flight Display & Multi Function Display
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Message Advisory
DATA LOST – Pilot stored data was
lost. Recheck settings.
XTALK ERROR – A flight display
crosstalk error has occurred.
PFD1 SERVICE – PFD1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
MFD1 SERVICE – MFD1 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
MANIFEST – PFD1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MANIFEST – MFD1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
PFD1 CONFIG – PFD1 config error.
Config service req’d.
MFD1 CONFIG – MFD1 config error.
Config service req’d.
SW MISMATCH – GDU software
version mismatch. Xtalk is off.
PFD1 COOLING – PFD1 has poor
cooling. Reducing power usage.
MFD1 COOLING – MFD1 has poor
cooling. Reducing power usage.
PFD1 KEYSTK – PFD1 [key name] is
stuck.
MFD1 KEYSTK – MFD1 [key name]
is stuck.
CNFG MODULE – PFD1 configuration
module is inoperative.
PFD1 VOLTAGE – PFD1 has low
voltage. Reducing power usage
MFD1 VOLTAGE – MFD1 has low
voltage. Reducing power usage
500
Comments
The pilot profile data was lost. System reverts to default pilot profile and settings. The
pilot may reconfigure the MFD & PFD with preferred settings, if desired.
The MFD and PFD are not communicating with each other. The Perspective® system
should be serviced.
The PFD and/or MFD self-test has detected a problem. The Perspective® system should
be serviced.
The PFD and/or MFD has incorrect software installed. The Perspective® system should
be serviced.
The PFD configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The
Perspective® system should be serviced.
The MFD configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The
Perspective® system should be serviced.
The MFD and PFD have different software versions installed. The Perspective® system
should be serviced.
The PFD and/or MFD is overheating and is reducing power consumption by dimming
the display. If problem persists, the Perspective® system should be serviced.
A key is stuck on the PFD and/or MFD bezel. Attempt to free the stuck key by pressing
it several times. The Perspective® system should be serviced if the problem persists.
The PFD1 configuration module backup memory has failed. The Perspective® system
should be serviced.
The PFD1 voltage is low. The Perspective® system should be serviced.
The MFD voltage is low. The Perspective® system should be serviced.
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Appendix A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Databases
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the basemap database.
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the terrain database. Ensure that the
terrain card is properly inserted in display. Replace terrain card. If problem persists,
The Perspective® system should be serviced.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The terrain database is present on another LRU, but is missing on the specified LRU.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the obstacle database. Ensure that the data
card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, The Perspective®
system should be serviced.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The obstacle database is present on another LRU, but is missing on the specified LRU.
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the airport terrain database. Ensure
that the data card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, The
Perspective® system should be serviced.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The airport terrain database is present on another LRU, but is missing on the specified
LRU.
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the Safe Taxi database. Ensure that
the data card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, The
Perspective® system should be serviced.
APPENDICES
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the ChartView database (optional feature).
Ensure that the data card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists,
The Perspective® system should be serviced.
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the FliteCharts database (optional feature).
Ensure that the data card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists,
The Perspective® system should be serviced.
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the aviation database. Attempt to reload
the navigation database. If problem persists, the Perspective® system should be
serviced.
EIS
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 FliteCharts
database error exists.
Comments
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message Advisory
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 navigation
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 navigation
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 basemap
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 basemap
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 terrain
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 terrain
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 terrain
database missing.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 terrain
database missing.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 obstacle
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 obstacle
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 obstacle
database missing.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 obstacle
database missing.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 airport terrain
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 airport terrain
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 airport
terrain database missing.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 airport
terrain database missing.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 Safe Taxi
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 Safe Taxi
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 Chartview
database error exists.
501
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Appendix A
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message Advisory
DB MISMATCH – Navigation
database version mismatch. Xtalk is
off.
DB MISMATCH – Navigation
database type mismatch. Xtalk is off.
Comments
The PFD and MFD have different navigation database versions installed. Crossfill is
off. Install correct navigation database version in both displays.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The PFD and MFD have different navigation database types installed (Americas,
European, etc.). Crossfill is off. Install correct navigation database type in both
displays.
DB MISMATCH – Terrain database
The PFD and MFD have different terrain database versions installed. Install correct
version mismatch.
terrain database version in both displays.
DB MISMATCH – Terrain database
The PFD and MFD have different terrain database types installed. Install correct
type mismatch.
terrain database type in both displays.
DB MISMATCH – Obstacle database The PFD and MFD have different obstacle database versions installed. Install correct
version mismatch.
obstacle database version in both displays.
DB MISMATCH – Airport Terrain
The PFD and MFD have different airport terrain databases installed. Install correct
database mismatch.
airport terrain database in both displays.
NAV DB UPDATED – Active
System has updated the active navigation database from the standby navigation
navigation database updated.
database.
TERRAIN DSP – [PFD1, MFD1] Terrain One of the terrain, airport terrain, or obstacle databases required for TAWS in the
awareness display unavailable.
specified PFD or MFD is missing or invalid.
GMA 347 Audio Panel
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Message Advisory
GMA1 FAIL – GMA1 is inoperative.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
GMA1 CONFIG – GMA1 config error.
Config service req’d.
MANIFEST – GMA1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
GMA1 SERVICE – GMA1 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
Comments
The audio panel self-test has detected a failure. The audio panel is unavailable. The
Perspective® system should be serviced.
The audio panel configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory.
The Perspective® system should be serviced.
The audio panel has incorrect software installed. The Perspective™ system should be
serviced.
The audio panel self-test has detected a problem in the unit. Certain audio functions may
still be available, and the audio panel may still be usable. The Perspective® system should
be serviced when possible.
GEA 71 Engine/Airframe Unit
Comments
The GEA1 configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration memory.
The Perspective® system should be serviced.
The #1 GEA 71 has incorrect software installed. The Perspective® system should be
serviced.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Message Advisory
GEA1 CONFIG – GEA1 config error.
Config service req’d.
MANIFEST – GEA1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
502
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Appendix A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Unit
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 configuration settings do not match backup configuration
memory. The Perspective® system should be serviced.
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 have an error in the audio configuration. The Perspective®
system should be serviced.
EIS
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 temperature is too low to operate correctly. Allow units to
warm up to operating temperature.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 temperature is too high. If problem persists, the Perspective®
system should be serviced.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 self-test has detected a problem in the unit. The Perspective®
system should be serviced.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
A GIA mismatch has been detected, where only one is WAAS capable.
AFCS
The GIA1 and/or GIA 2 has incorrect software installed. The Perspective® system
should be serviced.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Incorrect servo software is installed, or gain settings are incorrect
The system has detected an over temperature condition in COM1 and/or COM2.
The transmitter operates at reduced power. If the problem persists, the Perspective®
system should be serviced.
APPENDICES
The system has detected a failure in COM1 and/or COM2. COM1 and/or COM2 may
still be usable. The Perspective® system should be serviced when possible.
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Comments
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message Advisory
GIA1 CONFIG – GIA1 config error.
Config service req’d.
GIA2 CONFIG – GIA2 config error.
Config service req’d.
GIA1 CONFIG – GIA1 audio config
error. Config service req’d.
GIA2 CONFIG – GIA2 audio config
error. Config service req’d.
GIA1 COOLING – GIA1 temperature
too low.
GIA2 COOLING – GIA2 temperature
too low.
GIA1 COOLING – GIA1 over
temperature.
GIA2 COOLING – GIA2 over
temperature.
GIA1 SERVICE – GIA1 needs service.
Return the unit for repair.
GIA2 SERVICE – GIA2 needs service.
Return the unit for repair.
HW MISMATCH – GIA hardware
mismatch. GIA1 communication
halted.
HW MISMATCH – GIA hardware
mismatch. GIA2 communication
halted.
MANIFEST – GIA1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MANIFEST – GIA2 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MANIFEST – GFC software mismatch,
communication halted.
COM1 TEMP – COM1 over temp.
Reducing transmitter power.
COM2 TEMP – COM2 over temp.
Reducing transmitter power.
COM1 SERVICE – COM1 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
COM2 SERVICE – COM2 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
503
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Appendix A
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message Advisory
COM1 PTT – COM1 push-to-talk key
is stuck.
COM2 PTT – COM2 push-to-talk key
is stuck.
COM1 RMT XFR – COM1 remote
transfer key is stuck.
COM2 RMT XFR – COM2 remote
transfer key is stuck.
LOI – GPS integrity lost. Crosscheck
with other NAVS.
GPS NAV LOST – Loss of GPS
navigation. Insufficient satellites.
GPS NAV LOST – Loss of GPS
navigation. Position error.
GPS NAV LOST – Loss of GPS
navigation. GPS fail.
ABORT APR – Loss of GPS navigation.
Abort approach.
APR DWNGRADE – Approach
downgraded.
TRUE APR – True north approach.
Change HDG reference to TRUE.
GPS1 SERVICE – GPS1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
GPS2 SERVICE – GPS2 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
NAV1 SERVICE – NAV1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
NAV2 SERVICE – NAV2 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
NAV1 RMT XFR – NAV1 remote
transfer key is stuck.
NAV2 RMT XFR – NAV2 remote
transfer key is stuck.
G/S1 FAIL – G/S1 is inoperative.
G/S2 FAIL – G/S2 is inoperative.
INDEX
G/S1 SERVICE – G/S1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
G/S2 SERVICE – G/S2 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
504
Comments
The COM1 and/or COM2 external push-to-talk switch is stuck in the enable (or
“pressed”) position. Press the PTT switch again to cycle its operation.
If the problem persists, the Perspective® system should be serviced.
The COM1 and/or COM2 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”)
position. Press the transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem
persists, the Perspective® system should be serviced.
GPS integrity is insufficient for the current phase of flight.
Loss of GPS navigation due to insufficient satellites.
Loss of GPS navigation due to position error.
Loss of GPS navigation due to GPS failure.
Abort approach due to loss of GPS navigation.
Use LNAV minima when approach is downgraded.
Displayed after passing the first waypoint of a true north approach when the nav
angle is set to ‘MAGNETIC’.
A failure has been detected in the GPS1 and/or GPS2 receiver. The receiver may still
be available. The Perspective® system should be serviced.
A failure has been detected in the NAV1 and/or NAV2 receiver. The receiver may still
be available. The Perspective® system should be serviced.
The remote NAV1 and/or NAV2 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”)
state. Press the transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem persists,
the Perspective® system should be serviced.
A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 1 and/or receiver 2. The
Perspective® system should be serviced.
A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 1 and/or receiver 2. The receiver
may still be available. The Perspective® system should be serviced when possible.
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Appendix A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GDL 69/69A Satellite Datalink Receiver
Comments
GDL 69 configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration memory.
The Perspective® system should be serviced.
A failure has been detected in the GDL 69. The receiver is unavailable. The
Perspective® system should be serviced.
MANIFEST – GDL software mismatch, The GDL 69 has incorrect software installed. The Perspective® system should be
communication halted.
serviced.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message Advisory
GDL69 CONFIG – GDL 69 config
error. Config service req’d.
GDL69 FAIL – GDL 69 has failed.
Comments
The transponder configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration
memory. The Perspective® system should be serviced.
The transponder has incorrect software installed. The Perspective® system should be
serviced.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The #1 transponder should be serviced when possible.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Message Advisory
XPDR1 CONFIG – XPDR1 config error.
Config service req’d.
MANIFEST – GTX1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
XPDR1 SRVC – XPDR1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
XPDR1 FAIL – XPDR1 is inoperative.
EIS
GTX 32/33 Transponder
There is no communication with the #1 transponder.
GDC 74A Air Data Computer
Comments
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GDC1 or GDC2 is reporting that the altitude error correction is unavailable.
AFCS
GDC1 or GDC2 is reporting that the airspeed error correction is unavailable.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Message Advisory
ADC1 ALT EC – ADC1 altitude error
correction is unavailable.
ADC2 ALT EC – ADC2 altitude error
correction is unavailable.
ADC1 AS EC – ADC1 airspeed error
correction is unavailable.
ADC2 AS EC – ADC2 airspeed error
correction is unavailable.
MANIFEST – GDC1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MANIFEST – GDC2 software
mismatch, communication halted.
The GDC 74A has incorrect software installed. The Perspective® system should be
serviced.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
505
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Appendix A
GRS 77 Attitude and Heading Reference System
Comments
The #1 AHRS is not receiving true airspeed from the air data computer. The AHRS
relies on GPS information to augment the lack of airspeed. The Perspective® system
should be serviced.
AHRS2 TAS – AHRS2 not receiving
The #2 AHRS is not receiving true airspeed from the air data computer. The AHRS
valid airspeed.
relies on GPS information to augment the lack of airspeed. The Perspective® system
should be serviced.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 using backup
The #1 AHRS is using the backup GPS path. Primary GPS path has failed. The
GPS source.
Perspective® system should be serviced when possible.
AHRS2 GPS – AHRS2 using backup
The #2 AHRS is using the backup GPS path. Primary GPS path has failed. The
GPS source.
Perspective® system should be serviced when possible.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 not receiving
The #1 AHRS is not receiving any or any useful GPS information. Check AFMS
any GPS information.
limitations. The Perspective® system should be serviced.
AHRS2 GPS – AHRS2 not receiving
The #2 AHRS is not receiving any or any useful GPS information. Check AFMS
any GPS information.
limitations. The Perspective® system should be serviced.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 not receiving
The #1 AHRS is not receiving backup GPS information. The Perspective® system
backup GPS information.
should be serviced.
AHRS2 GPS – AHRS2 not receiving
The #2 AHRS is not receiving backup GPS information. The Perspective® system
backup GPS information.
should be serviced.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 operating
The #1 AHRS is operating exclusively in no-GPS mode. The Perspective® system
exclusively in no-GPS mode.
should be serviced.
AHRS2 GPS – AHRS2 operating
The #2 AHRS is operating exclusively in no-GPS mode. The Perspective® system
exclusively in no-GPS mode.
should be serviced.
AHRS MAG DB – AHRS magnetic
The #1 AHRS earth magnetic field model is out of date. Update magnetic field model
model database version mismatch.
when practical.
AHRS1 SRVC – AHRS1 Magnetic-field The #1 AHRS earth magnetic field model is out of date. Update magnetic field model
model needs update.
when practical.
AHRS2 SRVC – AHRS2 Magnetic-field The #2 AHRS earth magnetic field model is out of date. Update magnetic field model
model needs update.
when practical.
GEO LIMITS – AHRS1 too far North/
South, no magnetic compass.
The aircraft is outside geographical limits for approved AHRS operation. Heading is
GEO LIMITS – AHRS2 too far North/ flagged as invalid.
South, no magnetic compass.
MANIFEST – GRS1 software
The #1 AHRS has incorrect software installed. The Perspective® system should be
mismatch, communication halted.
serviced.
MANIFEST – GRS2 software
The #2 AHRS has incorrect software installed. The Perspective® system should be
mismatch, communication halted.
serviced.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message Advisory
AHRS1 TAS – AHRS1 not receiving
valid airspeed.
506
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Appendix A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GCU 478 PFD/MFD Control Unit
Comments
GCU 478 configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration memory.
The Perspective® system should be serviced.
A failure has been detected in the GCU 478. The GCU 478 is unavailable.
The GCU 478 has incorrect software installed. The Perspective® system should be
serviced.
A key is stuck on the GCU 478 bezel. Attempt to free the stuck key by pressing it
several times. The Perspective® system should be serviced if the problem persists.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message Advisory
GCU CNFG – GCU Config error.
Config service req’d.
GCU FAIL – GCU is inoperative.
MANIFEST – GCU software mismatch,
communication halted.
GCU KEYSTK – GCU [key name] Key
is stuck.
EIS
GMC 705 AFCS Control Unit
Comments
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Error in the configuration of the GMC 705.
A failure has been detected in the GMC 705. The GMC 705 is unavailable.
The GMC 705 has incorrect software installed. The Perspective® system should be
serviced.
A key is stuck on the GMC 705 bezel. Attempt to free the stuck key by pressing it
several times. The Perspective® system should be serviced if the problem persists.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Message Advisory
GMC CONFIG – GMC Config error.
Config service req’d.
GCU FAIL – GCU is inoperative.
MANIFEST – GMC software
mismatch, communication halted.
GCU KEYSTK – GCU [key name] Key
is stuck.
GMU 44 Magnetometer
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Comments
A fault has occurred in the #1 GMU 44. Heading is flagged as invalid. The AHRS uses
GPS for backup mode operation. The Perspective® system should be serviced.
A fault has occurred in the #2 GMU 44. Heading is flagged as invalid. The AHRS uses
GPS for backup mode operation. The Perspective® system should be serviced.
AFCS
The GMU 44 has incorrect software installed. The Perspective® system should be
serviced.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Message Advisory
HDG FAULT – AHRS1 magnetometer
fault has occurred.
HDG FAULT – AHRS2 magnetometer
fault has occurred.
MANIFEST – GMU1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MANIFEST – GMU2 software
mismatch, communication halted.
Miscellaneous
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
APPENDICES
Message Advisory
Comments
FPL WPT LOCK – Flight plan waypoint Upon power-up, the system detects that a stored flight plan waypoint is locked. This
is locked.
occurs when an navigation database update eliminates an obsolete waypoint. The
flight plan cannot find the specified waypoint and flags this message. This can also
occur with user waypoints in a flight plan that is deleted.
Remove the waypoint from the flight plan if it no longer exists in any database,
OR
update the waypoint name/identifier to reflect the new information.
FPL WPT MOVE – Flight plan
The system has detected that a waypoint coordinate has changed due to a new
waypoint moved.
navigation database update. Verify that stored flight plans contain correct waypoint
locations.
507
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Appendix A
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message Advisory
TIMER EXPIRD – Timer has expired.
DB CHANGE – Database changed.
Verify user modified procedures.
DB CHANGE – Database changed.
Verify stored airways.
EIS
FPL TRUNC – Flight plan has been
truncated.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
LOCKED FPL – Cannot navigate
locked flight plan.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
WPT ARRIVAL – Arriving at waypoint
-[xxxx]
STEEP TURN – Steep turn ahead.
INSIDE ARSPC – Inside airspace.
ARSPC AHEAD – Airspace ahead less
than 10 minutes.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near and
ahead.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near – less
than 2 nm.
APR INACTV – Approach is not active.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
SLCT FREQ – Select appropriate
frequency for approach.
SLCT NAV – Select NAV on CDI for
approach.
PTK FAIL – Parallel track unavailable:
bad geometry.
PTK FAIL – Parallel track unavailable:
invalid leg type.
PTK FAIL – Parallel track unavailable:
past IAF.
UNABLE V WPT – Can’t reach current
vertical waypoint.
INDEX
VNV – Unavailable. Unsupported leg
type in flight plan.
508
Comments
The system notifies the pilot that the timer has expired.
This occurs when a stored flight plan contains procedures that have been manually
edited. This alert is issued only after an navigation database update. Verify that the
user-modified procedures in stored flight plans are correct and up to date.
This occurs when a stored flight plan contains an airway that is no longer consistent
with the navigation database. This alert is issued only after a navigation database
update. Verify use of airways in stored flight plans and reload airways as needed.
This occurs when a newly installed navigation database eliminates an obsolete
approach or arrival used by a stored flight plan. The obsolete procedure is removed
from the flight plan. Update flight plan with current arrival or approach.
This occurs when the pilot attempts to activate a stored flight plan that contains
locked waypoint. Remove locked waypoint from flight plan. Update flight plan with
current waypoint.
Arriving at waypoint [xxxx], where [xxxx] is the waypoint name.
A steep turn is 15 seconds ahead. Prepare to turn.
The aircraft is inside the airspace.
Special use airspace is ahead of aircraft. The aircraft will penetrate the airspace within
10 minutes.
Special use airspace is near and ahead of the aircraft position.
Special use airspace is within 2 nm of the aircraft position.
The system notifies the pilot that the loaded approach is not active. Activate
approach when required.
The system notifies the pilot to load the approach frequency for the appropriate NAV
receiver. Select the correct frequency for the approach.
The system notifies the pilot to set the CDI to the correct NAV receiver. Set the CDI to
the correct NAV receiver.
Bad parallel track geometry.
Invalid leg type for parallel offset.
IAF waypoint for parallel offset has been passed.
The current vertical waypoint can not be reached within the maximum flight path
angle and vertical speed constraints. The system automatically transitions to the next
vertical waypoint.
The lateral flight plan contains a procedure turn, vector, or other unsupported leg
type prior to the active vertical waypoint. This prevents vertical guidance to the active
vertical waypoint.
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Appendix A
Comments
[PFD1, PFD2, or MFD1] CARD 2 REM
– Card 2 was removed. Reinsert card.
[PFD1, PFD2, or MFD1] CARD 1 ERR
– Card 1 is invalid.
[PFD1, PFD2, or MFD1] CARD 2 ERR
– Card 2 is invalid.
The SD card was removed from the bottom card slot of the specified PFD or MFD. The
SD card needs to be reinserted.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Message Advisory
VNV – Unavailable. Excessive
crosstrack error.
VNV – Unavailable. Excessive track
angle error.
VNV – Unavailable. Parallel course
selected.
NO WGS84 WPT – Non WGS 84
waypoint for navigation -[xxxx]
TRAFFIC FAIL – Traffic device has
failed.
STRMSCP FAIL – Stormscope has
failed.
FAILED PATH – A data path has
failed.
FAILED PATH – An autopilot servo
data path has failed.
MAG VAR WARN – Large magnetic
variance. Verify all course angles.
The current crosstrack exceeds the limit, causing vertical deviation to go invalid.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The current track angle error exceeds the limit, causing the vertical deviation to go
invalid.
A parallel course has been selected, causing the vertical deviation to go invalid.
EIS
The selected waypoint [xxxx] does not use the WGS 84 datum. Cross-check position
with alternate navigation sources.
The system is no longer receiving data from the traffic system. The traffic device
should be serviced.
Stormscope has failed. The Perspective® System should be serviced.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
A data path connected to the GDU or the GIA 63/63W has failed.
A data path connected to an autopilot servo has failed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The GDU’s internal model cannot determine the exact magnetic variance for
geographic locations near the magnetic poles. Displayed magnetic course angles may
differ from the actual magnetic heading by more than 2°.
SCHEDULER [#] – <message>.
Message criteria entered by the user is displayed
SVS – SVS DISABLED: Out of available Synthetic Vision is disabled because the aircraft is not within the boundaries of the
terrain region.
installed terrain database.
SVS – SVS DISABLED: Terrain DB
Synthetic Vision is disabled because a terrain database of sufficient resolution (9 arcresolution too low.
second or better) is not currently installed.
CHECK CRS – Database course for
Selected course for LOC1 differs from published localizer course by more than 10
LOC1 / [LOC ID] is [CRS]°.
degrees.
CHECK CRS – Database course for
Selected course for LOC2 differs from published localizer course by more than 10
LOC2 / [LOC ID] is [CRS]°.
degrees.
[PFD1, PFD2, or MFD1] CARD 1 REM The SD card was removed from the top card slot of the specified PFD or MFD. The SD
– Card 1 was removed. Reinsert card. card needs to be reinserted.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The SD card in the top card slot of the specified PFD or MFD contains invalid data.
APPENDICES
The SD card in the bottom card slot of the specified PFD or MFD contains invalid data.
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
509
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Appendix A
AFCS Status Annunciations
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following annunciations (listed in order of increasing priority) can appear on the PFD above the
Airspeed and Attitude indicators. Only one annunciation may occur at a time, and messages are prioritized by
criticality.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
AFCS Status Annunciation
Figure A-7 AFCS Status Annunciation
Alert Condition
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Rudder Mistrim Right
Rudder Mistrim Left
Aileron Mistrim Right
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Aileron Mistrim Left
Elevator Mistrim Down
Elevator Mistrim Up
Pitch Trim Failure
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Yaw Damper Failure
Description
Yaw servo providing sustained force in the indicated direction
Roll servo providing sustained force in the indicated direction
Pitch servo providing sustained force in the indicated direction
If AP engaged, take control of the aircraft and disengage AP
If AP disengaged, move MET switch to unstick
YD control failure
Roll Failure
Roll axis control failure; AP inoperative
Pitch Failure
Pitch axis control failure
System Failure
Preflight Test
APPENDICES
Annunciation
AP and MET are unavailable; FD may still be available
Performing preflight system test; aural alert sounds at completion
Do not press the AP DISC Switch during servo power-up and preflight system tests
as this may cause the preflight system test to fail or never to start (if servos fail
their power-up tests). Power must be cycled to the servos to remedy the situation.
INDEX
Preflight system test failed; aural alert sounds at failure
510
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Appendix A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Terrain-SVS Alerts
Annunciations appear on the PFD and MFD. Pop-up alerts appear only on the MFD. For more information
on Terrain-SVS, refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section.
Pop-Up Alert
(MFD Navigation Map
Page)
Reduced Required Terrain
Clearance Warning (RTC)
Imminent Terrain Impact
Warning (ITI)
Reduced Required Obstacle
Clearance Warning (ROC)
Imminent Obstacle Impact
Warning (IOI)
Reduced Required Terrain
Clearance Caution (RTC)
Imminent Terrain Impact
Caution (ITI)
Reduced Required Obstacle
Clearance Caution (ROC)
Imminent Obstacle Impact
Caution (IOI)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
PFD/MFD
TERRAIN-SVS Page
Annunciation
Alert Type
Aural Message
“Warning; Terrain, Terrain”
EIS
“Warning; Terrain, Terrain”
“Warning; Obstacle, Obstacle”
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
“Warning; Obstacle, Obstacle”
“Caution; Terrain, Terrain”
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
“Caution; Terrain, Terrain”
“Caution; Obstacle, Obstacle”
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
“Caution; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Terrain-SVS Status Annunciations
PFD/MFD
TERRAIN-SVS Page
Annunciation
System Test Fail
AFCS
Alert Type
Aural Message
“Terrain System Failure”
None
No GPS position or excessively
degraded GPS signal
“Terrain System Not Available”
None
None
None
APPENDICES
System Test in progress
System Test pass
GPS signal is re-established
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Terrain Alerting is disabled
Single Chime
“Terrain System Available”
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
511
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Appendix A
Terrain Awareness and Warning System (TAWS) ALERTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Annunciations appear on the PFD and MFD. Pop-up alerts appear only on the MFD when the TAWS-B page
is not in view. For more information on TAWS, refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Alert Type
Annunciation
(PFD/MFD
TAWS-B
Page)
“Pull Up”
Reduced Required
Terrain Clearance
Warning (RTC)
or
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”
or
“Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull Up”
or
Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull Up”
or
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”
or
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”
or
“Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up”
or
“Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up”
or
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”
or
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”
or
“Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”
or
“Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”
or
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”
or
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”
or
“Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”
or
“Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”
or
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Reduced Required
Obstacle Clearance
Warning (ROC)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Imminent Obstacle
Impact Warning (IOI)
Reduced Required
Terrain Clearance
Caution (RTC)
AFCS
Imminent Terrain
Impact Caution (ITI)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Reduced Required
Obstacle Clearance
Caution (ROC)
APPENDICES
Imminent Obstacle
Impact Caution (IOI)
Premature Descent
Alert Caution (PDA)
Altitude Callout “500”
Excessive Descent
Rate Caution (EDR)
INDEX
Aural Message
Excessive Descent
Rate Warning (EDR)
Imminent Terrain
Impact Warning (ITI)
Negative Climb Rate
Caution (NCR)
512
MFD Pop-Up Alert
(Except TAWS-B Page)
“Too Low, Terrain”
None
None
“Five-Hundred”
“Sink Rate”
or
“Don’t Sink”
or
“Too Low, Terrain”
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Appendix A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TAWS System Status Annunciations
None
“TAWS System Failure”
TAWS Alerting is disabled
None
None
No GPS position or excessively
degraded GPS signal
None
“TAWS Not Available”
System Test in progress
None
None
None
None
Single Chime
“TAWS Available”
System Test pass
GPS signal is re-established
None
None
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TAWS System Test Fail
EIS
Aural Message
Alert Type
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
MFD Pop-Up Alert
(Except TAWS-B Page)
Annunciation
(PFD/MFD
TAWS-B Page)
Flight plan Import/Export Messages
In some circumstances, some messages may appear in conjunction with others.
‘User waypoint database full. Not all loaded.’
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
INDEX
‘Flight plan successfully exported.’
‘Flight export failed.’
APPENDICES
‘One or more user waypoints renamed.’
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
‘Some waypoints not loaded. Waypoints
locked.’
AFCS
‘Too many points. Flight plan truncated.’
Description
A flight plan file stored on the SD card was successfully imported as a stored flight plan.
The file stored on the SD card did not contain a flight plan, only user waypoints. These
waypoints have been saved to the system user waypoints. No flight plans stored in the
system have been modified.
The SD card contains no flight plan data.
Flight plan data was not successfully imported from the SD card.
Some flight plan waypoints were successfully imported from the SD card, however others
had errors and were not imported. A partial stored flight plan now exists in the system.
The file stored on the SD card did not contain a flight plan, only user waypoints. One or
more of these waypoints did not import successfully.
The flight plan on the SD card contains more waypoints than the system can support. The
flight plan was imported with as many waypoints as possible.
The flight plan on the SD card contains one or more waypoints that the system cannot find
in the navigation database. The flight plan has been imported, but must be edited within
the system before it can be activated for use.
The flight plan file on the SD card contains user waypoints. The quantity of stored user
waypoints has exceeded system capacity, therefore not all the user waypoints on the SD
card have been imported. Any flight plan user waypoints that were not imported are
locked in the flight plan. The flight plan must be edited within the system before it can be
activated for use.
One or more imported user waypoints were renamed when imported due to naming
conflicts with waypoints already existing in the system.
The stored flight plan was successfully exported to the SD card.
The stored flight plan was not successfully exported to the SD card. The SD card may not
have sufficient available memory or the card may have been removed prematurely.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
‘File contained user waypoints only.’
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Flight Plan Import/Export Results
‘Flight plan successfully imported.’
‘File contained user waypoints only. User
waypoints imported successfully. No stored
flight plan data was modified.’
‘No flight plan files found to import.’
‘Flight plan import failed.’
‘Flight plan partially imported.’
513
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Appendix A
Blank Page
514
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Appendix B
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SD Card Use and Databases
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Perspective® System uses Secure Digital (SD) cards to load and store various types of data. For basic
flight operations, SD cards are required for database storage as well as Jeppesen aviation and ChartView database
updates.
CAUTION: Do not load Jeppesen navigation data (except ChartView) onto Garmin Supplemental Data
Cards.
NOTE: Loading a database in the system prior to its effective date will result in the expiration date on the
EIS
power-up screen and the effective date on the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page being displayed in yellow.
Jeppesen Databases
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Jeppesen navigation database is updated on a 28-day cycle. The optional ChartView database is updated
on a 14-day cycle. If the ChartView database is not updated within 70 days of the expiration date, ChartView
no longer functions.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Note: The Jeppesen aviation navigation database is now referred to as the ‘navigation database’. Previously
this database had been referred to as the ‘aviation database’.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The ChartView database should be copied to the Garmin supplied Supplemental Data Card which will reside
in the bottom card slot on the MFD. The navigation database must be installed from the Jeppesen or user
supplied SD data card. Contact Jeppesen (www.jeppesen.com) for subscription and update information.
NOTE: After the aviation database is installed, the card may be removed.
Updating the active Jeppesen navigation database (not using the Dual Navigation Database or
Automatic Database Synchronization Features):
AFCS
1) With the system OFF, insert the SD card containing the navigation database update into the top card slot of the
display (PFD or MFD) to be updated (label of SD card facing left).
2) Turn the system ON. A prompt similar to the following is displayed in the upper left corner of the display:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure B-1: Standby Navigation Database Prompt
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
INDEX
3) Press the NO Softkey to proceed to the active database update.
515
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Appendix B
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4) A prompt similar to the following is displayed, press the YES Softkey to update the active navigation
database.
Figure B-2 Database Update Confirmation
5) After the update completes, the display starts in normal mode.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) Turn the system OFF and remove the SD card.
7) During MFD startup, verify that the correct update cycle is loaded.
Dual Navigation Database FEATURE
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The dual navigation database feature allows each display to store an upcoming navigation database on the
bottom SD card so that the system can automatically load it to replace the active database when the new
database becomes effective (the next cycle becomes available seven days prior to its effective date).
AFCS
If a navigation database loader card is inserted into the top SD card slot of a display, and an SD card is in the
bottom slot, the system will prompt the user (upon on-ground power up) as to whether the database should
be stored on the bottom SD card as the standby database. If the user responds affirmatively, the system will
copy the navigation database from the top SD card to the bottom SD card. As long as the bottom SD card
remains in the card slot, this standby navigation database will be available for the system to use as the active
database as soon as it becomes effective.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The system checks the active and standby databases upon (on-ground only) power-up. If the standby
database is current and the active database is out of date, the display will upload the standby database
into the active internal database location. Uploading the standby database to the active location takes
approximately 45-55 seconds. The pilot is alerted that the update is complete by a system alert message,
‘NAV DB UPDATED’.
Loading a standby navigation database:
1) With the system OFF, insert the SD card containing the navigation database update into the top card slot of the
desired PFD or MFD.
INDEX
2) Verify that an SD card is inserted in the bottom slot.
516
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Appendix B
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3) Turn the system ON. A prompt similar to the following is displayed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Figure B-3 Standby Navigation Database Prompt
4) Press the YES Softkey, to start the update.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) After the navigation database files are copied to the bottom SD card. A prompt similar to the following is
displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure B-4 Active Navigation Database Prompt
6) Press the NO Softkey to allow the system to automatically update the active navigation database as applicable
per database effectivity.
AFCS
7) After the update, the display starts in normal mode.
8) Verify the effectivity of the active navigation database on the PFD and the MFD on the AUX-System Status
Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: The Perspective® system compares the active databases on the PFD and the MFD, and displays a
APPENDICES
system alert message ‘DB Mismatch’ if they are not identical. Similarly, if the standby databases on the PFD
and the MFD are not identical, the Perspective® system will display a ‘DB Mismatch’ alert for the standby
navigation databases. Garmin recommends enabling the automatic database synchronization feature to
protect against database mismatches.
Garmin Databases
The following databases are stored on Supplemental Data Cards provided by Garmin:
• Airport terrain
• SafeTaxi
• Terrain
• Obstacle
• FliteCharts
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
• Airport Directory
(AOPA)
INDEX
• Expanded basemap
517
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Appendix B
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
After subscribing to the desired database product, these database products will be downloaded to three
Supplemental Data Cards (with the exception of FliteCharts, which is loaded on only one card). Insert each
Supplemental Data Card into the correct location shown in Figure B-5. These cards must not be removed
except to update the databases stored on each card.
MFD
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
PFD
Figure B-5 Correct Database Locations
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Since these databases are not stored internally in the displays, a Supplemental Data Card containing identical
database versions must be kept in each display unit.
The basemap database contains data for the topography and land features, such as rivers, lakes, and towns.
It is updated only periodically, with no set schedule. There is no expiration date.
AFCS
The terrain database contains the terrain mapping data. The airport terrain database contains increased
resolution terrain data around airports. These databases are updated periodically and have no expiration
date.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The obstacle database contains data for obstacles, such as towers, that pose a potential hazard to aircraft.
Obstacles 200 feet and higher are included in the obstacle database. It is very important to note that not all
obstacles are necessarily charted and therefore may not be contained in the obstacle database. This database is
updated on a 56-day cycle.
NOTE: The data contained in the terrain and obstacle databases comes from government agencies. Garmin
APPENDICES
accurately processes and cross-validates the data, but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of
the data.
INDEX
The AOPA Airport Directory provides data on airports and heliports throughout the U.S., and offers detailed
information for over 5,300 U. S. airports, along with the names and phone numbers of thousands of FBOs. This
database is updated four times per year and has no expiration date.
The SafeTaxi database contains detailed airport diagrams for selected airports. These diagrams aid in following
ground control instructions by accurately displaying the aircraft position on the map in relation to taxiways,
ramps, runways, terminals, and services. This database is updated on a 56-day cycle.
518
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Appendix B
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The FliteCharts database contains procedure charts for the United States only. This database is updated on a
28-day cycle. If not updated within 180 days of the expiration date, FliteCharts will no longer function.
Updating Garmin Databases
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Garmin database updates can be obtained by following the instructions detailed in the ‘Aviation
Databases’ section of the Garmin website (fly.garmin.com). Once the updated files have been downloaded
from the website, a PC equipped with an appropriate SD card reader is used to unpack and program the
new databases onto the existing Supplemental Data Cards. Equipment required to perform the update is as
follows:
EIS
• Windows-compatible PC computer (Windows 2000 or XP recommended)
• SanDisk SD Card Reader, P/Ns SDDR-93 or SDDR-99 or equivalent card reader
• Updated database obtained from the Garmin website
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Existing Supplemental Database SD Cards (010-00330-41, -42, or -43) from both PFDs and MFD
In some cases it may be necessary to obtain an unlock code from Garmin in order to make the database
product functional. It may also be necessary to have the system configured by a Garmin authorized service
facility in order to use some database features.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
After the data has been copied to the appropriate data cards, perform the following steps:
1) Insert one SD card in the bottom card slot of the MFD and one in the bottom card slot of each PFD. The SD card
containing the ChartView or FliteCharts database must be inserted into the bottom slot on the MFD.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Apply power to the system. View the MFD power-up screen. Check that the databases are initialized and
displayed on the power-up screen. When updating the terrain and FliteCharts databases, an ‘in progress’
message may be seen. If this message is present, wait for the system to finish loading before proceeding to
step 3.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure B-6 Database Information on the Power-up Screen
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
519
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Appendix B
3) Acknowledge the Power-up Page agreement by pressing the ENT Key or the right most softkey.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page group on the MFD.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page.
Unselected
MFD1 DB Selected PFD1 DB Selected
Figure B-7 Display Database Softkey
EIS
6) Press the Display Database Softkey (Figure B-7) to place the cursor in the ‘Database’ box.
7) Turn either FMS Knob to scroll through the database list and check that all databases are current and there are
no errors.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Press the Display Database Softkey to view the Database info pertaining to the desired PFD or MFD.
9) Turn either FMS Knob to scroll through the database list and check that all databases are current and there are
no errors.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
10) Repeat steps 8 and 9 until all the databases in each applicable display have been verified.
11) Power down the system.
Automatic Database Synchronization Feature
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The automatic database synchronization feature automatically transfers the database from a single SD
database card to the SD cards on each PFD and the MFD to ensure that all databases are synchronized
throughout the system. After power-up, the Perspective® system compares all copies of each applicable
database. If similar databases do not match, the most recent valid database is automatically copied to each
card in the system that does not already contain that database.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The following databases are checked and synchronized: Standby Navigation, Basemap, Safetaxi, Airport
Terrain, Obstacle, Airport Directory (AOPA), and Terrain. This feature applies only to databases that are
stored on the SD card that resides in the bottom slot of each display. This feature does not apply to the active
navigation database which is stored internally in each display, or to the charts databases (FliteCharts and
ChartView) which are only required to be present on the MFD. The typical procedure would be to download
new databases to the MFD card, then synchronize the data to the PFD(s).
NOTE: The 9-arc second terrain database may take as long as 100 minutes to synchronize using this method.
APPENDICES
Therefore the user may want to transfer the data using a PC, or connect the Perspective® system to a ground
power source while performing the database synchronization.
INDEX
If the automatic database synchronization feature is enabled, the standby navigation database can be loaded
onto a single SD card (using the Dual Navigation Database Feature) and placed in the bottom card slot of
the MFD. After power-up, the system will transfer the standby navigation database from that card to the
bottom SD card in each PFD. After the sync completes, if the active navigation database is out-of-date and the
standby database is effective, the standby database will be transferred and used as the internal active database
upon the next power cycle.
520
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Appendix B
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The synchronization progress may be monitored on the AUX-System Status Page in the Sync Status section
of the Database Window (Figure B-8). This section shows the synchronization status of each applicable
database, including the percent complete, time remaining, and to which displays the databases are being
copied. When the synchronization is complete, the status is listed as ‘Complete’, followed by the displays to
which the databases were copied. This sub-section is only present when a sync is occurring or has occurred
on the current power-up.
An indication of ‘Complete’ still requires a power cycle before the synchronized databases will be used by
the Perspective® system.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure B-8 AUX-System Status Page, Database Window
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Display Database Softkey (Figure B-7) is used to place the cursor in the Database Window. Upon
first press of the Display Database Softkey, the softkey will change to a selected state (black text on gray
background) and the cursor will appear in the Database Window. At this point the user can scroll through
all databases in the Database Window to view status information. If the Display Database Softkey is pressed
repeatedly, the softkey will cycle through PFD1, PFD2, and MFD. Database status information in the Database
Window will reflect the database of the selected PFD or MFD. After a successful sync and restart, verify that
the proper databases are now in use on the AUX–System Status Page (Figure B-8).
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
521
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Appendix B
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If an error occurs during the synchronization, an error message will be displayed, followed by the affected
display in the Sync Status section of the Database Window (Figure B-9). If a synchronization completes on
one display, but an error occurs on another, the error message will be displayed with the affected diaplay
listed after it. When an error message (Table B-1) is displayed, the problem must be corrected before the
synchronization can be completed. A power cycle is required to restart synchronization when ‘Card Full’ or
‘Err’ is shown.
Database Synchronization Error Message
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure B-9 Synchronization Error Message
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Error Message
Canceled
Card Full
Err
Timeout
Description
An active synchronization has been canceled using the SYNC DBS Softkey
SD card does not contain sufficient memory
Displayed for all other errors that may cause the synchronization process to be halted
System timed-out prior to the database transfer completing
Table B-1 Database Synchronization Error Messages
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The SYNC DBS Softkey (Figure B-10) on the AUX–System Status Page allows the flight crew control over
the automatic database synchronization feature. When database synchronization is enabled, the SYNC DBS
Softkey is displayed as black text on gray background. When database synchronization is disabled, the
softkey is displayed as white text on black background. If the SYNC DBS Softkey is pressed while a database
synchronization is in progress, the current synchronization process will be canceled.
Enabled
Disabled
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure B-10 SYNC DBS Softkey
522
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Appendix B
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Performing a database synchronization:
1) Remove the MFD database card from the bottom card slot of the MFD.
2) Update the Garmin databases on the MFD card.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Insert the MFD database card into the bottom card slot of the MFD.
4) Apply power to the system, check that the databases are initialized and displayed on the power-up screen.
When updating the terrain and FliteCharts databases, an ‘in progress’ message may be seen. If this message is
present, wait for the system to finish loading before proceeding to step 5.
5) Acknowledge the Power-up Page agreement by pressing the ENT Key or the right most softkey.
EIS
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page group on the MFD.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Make sure the SYNC DBS Softkey is in the enabled state (Figure B-10).
9) Monitor the Sync Status in the Database Window, wait for all databases to complete synching.
10) Remove and reapply power to the system, select the AUX-System Status Page, and verify that all databases have
been synchronized.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Canceling an automatic database synchronization:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page group on the MFD.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the SYNC DBS Softkey (if needed) to disable (Figure B-10) automatic database synchronization.
4) Acknowledge the cancellation by pressing the ENT Key.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
523
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Appendix C
Glossary
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AACC
ACT, ACTV
ADC
ADF
ADI
AF
AFCS
AFM
AFMS
AFRM
AGL
AHRS
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
AIM
AIRMET
ALRT
ALT
ALT, ALTN
AMPS
ANNUNC
ANT
AOPA
AP
AP DISC
APR
APT
ARINC
ARSPC
ARTCC
ARV
AS
ASB
ASOS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
ATC
ATCRBS
ATIS
APPENDICES
ATK
AUTOSEQ
AUX
AWOS
INDEX
B ALT
BARO
BATT
BC
524
accuracy
active, activate
air data computer
Automatic Direction Finder
Attitude Direction Indicator
Arc to fix
Automatic Flight Control System
Airplane Flight Manual
Airplane Flight Manual Supplement
airframe
Above Ground Level
Attitude and Heading Reference
System
Aeronautical Information Manual
Airman’s Meteorological Information
alert
altitude
alternator
amperes
annunciation
antenna
Aircraft Owners & Pilots Association
autopilot
autopilot disconnect
approach
airport, aerodrome
Aeronautical Radio Incorporated
airspace
Air Route Traffic Control Center
arrival
airspeed
Aviation Support Branch
Automated
Surface
Observing
System
Air Traffic Control
ATC Radar Beacon System
Automatic Terminal Information
Service
along-track
automatic sequence
auxiliary
Automated Weather Observing
System
barometric altitude
barometric setting
battery
backcourse
Bearing
BFO
BKSP
BRG
C
ºC
CA
CALC
Calibrated Airspeed
CD
CDI
CDU
CF
CHT
CHKLIST
CHNL
CI
CLD
CLR
cm
CNS
CO
COM
CONFIG
COOL
COPLT
Course
Course to Steer
CR
CRG
CRNT
Crosstrack Error
CRS
CRS
CRSR
CTA
CTRL
The compass direction from the
present position to a destination
waypoint.
beat frequency oscillator
backspace
bearing
center runway
degrees Celsius
Course to Altitude
calculator
Indicated airspeed corrected for
installation and instrument errors.
Course to DME distance
Course Deviation Indicator
Control Display Unit
Course to Fix
Cylinder Head Temperature
checklist
channel
Course to Intercept
cloud
clear
centimeter
Communication, Navigation, &
Surveillance
carbon monoxide
communication radio
configuration
coolant
co-pilot
The line between two points to be
followed by the aircraft.
The recommended direction to steer
in order to reduce course error or
stay on course. Provides the most
efficient heading to get back to the
desired course and proceed along
the flight plan.
Course to Radial
Cockpit Reference Guide
current
The distance the aircraft is off a
desired course in either direction, left
or right.
course
Course to Steer
cursor
Control Area
control
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Appendix C
degrees Fahrenheit
Course From Fix to Altitude
Federal Aviation Administration
Full Authority Digital Engine Control
Final Approach Fix
failure
Course From Fix to Distance
Federal Communication Commission
forecast
Course From Fix to DME Distance
flight director
Fault Detection and Exclusion
fuel flow
Flight
Information
ServicesBroadcast
Flight Information Service Data Link
flight level
Flight Level Change
Course From Fix to Manual
Termination
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
AFCS
190-00820-03 Rev. A
FISDL
FL
FLC
FM
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
EGT
EIS
ELEV
ELEV
EMERGCY
EMI
ENDUR
empty, east
Engine Control Unit
A measure of fuel consumption,
expressed in distance per unit of
fuel.
Exhaust Gas Temperature
Engine Indication System
elevation
elevator
emergency
Electromagnetic Interference
endurance
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
E
ECU
Efficiency
ºF
FA
FAA
FADEC
FAF
FAIL
FC
FCC
FCST
FD
FD
FDE
FFLOW
FIS-B
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
density altitude
database
decibels ‘Z’ (radar return)
declutter
decrease fuel
degree
de-icing
departure
The desired course between the
active “from” and “to” waypoints.
DEST
destination
DF
Direct to Fix
DFLT
default
DGRD
degrade
DH
decision height
Dilution of Precision A measure of GPS satellite geometry
quality on a scale of one to ten (lower
numbers equal better geometry,
where higher numbers equal poorer
geometry).
DIR
direction
DIS
distance
Distance
The ‘great circle’ distance from the
present position to a destination
waypoint.
DME
Distance Measuring Equipment
DOP
Dilution of Precision
DP
Departure Procedure
DPRT
departure
DR
dead reckoning
DSBL
disabled
DTK
Desired Track
Flight endurance, or total possible
flight time based on available fuel on
board.
ENG
engine
ENGD
engaged
ENR
enroute
Enroute Safe Altitude The recommended minimum altitude
within ten miles left or right of the
desired course on an active flight
plan or direct-to.
ENT
enter
EPE
Estimated Position Error
EPU
Estimated Position Uncertainty
ERR
error
ESA
Enroute Safe Altitude
Estimated Position Error A measure of horizontal GPS
position error derived by satellite
geometry conditions and other
factors.
Estimated Time of Arrival The estimated time at which the
aircraft should reach the destination
waypoint, based upon current speed
and track.
Estimated Time Enroute The estimated time it takes to
reach the destination waypoint from
the present position, based upon
current ground speed.
ETA
Estimated Time of Arrival
ETE
Estimated Time Enroute
EVS
Enhanced Vision System
EXPIRD
expired
EIS
D ALT
DB, DBASE
dBZ
DCLTR, DECLTR
DEC FUEL
deg
DEIC, DEICE
DEP
Desired Track
Endurance
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The total of all legs in a flight plan.
Cockpit Voice Recorder
coverage
control wheel steering
cylinder
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Cumulative
CVR
CVRG
CWS
CYL
525
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Appendix C
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FMS
FOB
FPL
fpm
FREQ
FRZ
FSS
ft
Fuel Flow
EIS
Fuel On Board
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
G/S, GS
GA
gal, gl
GBOX
GDC
GDL
GDU
GEA
GEO
GFC
GIA
GLS
Ground Track
GRS
GS
GTX
glideslope
go-around
gallon(s)
gearbox
Garmin Air Data Computer
Garmin Satellite Data Link
Garmin Display Unit
Garmin Engine/Airframe Unit
geographic
Garmin Flight Control
Garmin Integrated Avionics Unit
Global Navigation Satellite Landing
System
Garmin Audio Panel System
Greenwich Mean Time
Garmin Magnetometer Unit
ground
gallons per hour
Global Positioning System
Grid Minimum Off-Route Altitude;
one degree latitude by one degree
longitude in size and clears the
highest elevation reference point in
the grid by 1000 feet for all areas of
the grid
The velocity that the aircraft is
travelling relative to a ground
position.
see Track
Garmin Reference System
Ground speed
Garmin Transponder
HA
HDG
Hold Terminating at Altitude
heading
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GMA
GMT
GMU
GND
gph
GPS
Grid MORA
INDEX
APPENDICES
Groundspeed
526
Flight Management System
Fuel On Board
flight plan
feet per minute
frequency
freezing
Flight Service Station
foot/feet
The fuel flow rate, expressed in units
of fuel per hour.
The total amount of usable fuel on
board the aircraft.
Heading
The direction an aircraft is pointed,
based upon indications from a
magnetic compass or a properly set
directional gyro.
HF
Hold Terminating at Fix
HFOM
Horizontal Figure of Merit
Hg
mercury
HI
high
HI SENS
High Sensitivity
HM
Hold with Manual Termination
Horizontal Figure of Merit A measure of the uncertainty in
the aircraft’s horizontal position.
hPa
hectopascal
HPL
Horizontal Protection Level
hr
hour
HSDB
High-Speed Data Bus
HSI
Horizontal Situation Indicator
HT
heat
HUL
Horizontal Uncertainty Level
Hz
Hertz
I
Inner Marker
IAF
Initial Approach Fix
IAT
Indicated Air Temperature
ICAO
International
Civil
Aviation
Organization
ICS
Intercom System
ID
Identification/Morse Code Identifier
IDENT, IDNT
identification
IF
Initial Fix
IFR
Instrument Flight Rules
IG
Imperial gallon
ILS
Instrument Landing System
IMC
Instrument
Meteorological
Conditions
in
inch
INACTV
inactive
INC FUEL
increase fuel
IND
indicated
Indicated
Information provided by properly
calibrated and set instrumentation
on the aircraft panel.
INFO
information
in HG
inches of mercury
INT
intersection(s)
INTEG
integrity (RAIM unavailable)
IrDA, IRDA
Infrared Data Association
KEYSTK
kg
kHz
key stuck
kilogram
kilohertz
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Appendix C
kilometer
knot
O
OAT
OBS
OFST
OXY
Outer Marker
Outside Air Temperature
Omni Bearing Selector
offset
oxygen
P ALT
PA
PA
PASS
PC
PFD
PI
PIT, PTCH
POSN
PPM
P. POS
PRES, PRESS
PROC
psi
PT
PTK
pressure altitude
Passenger Address
Proximity Advisory
passenger(s)
personal computer
Primary Flight Display
Procedure Turn to Course Intercept
pitch
position
parts per million
Present Position
pressure
procedure(s), procedure turn
pounds per square inch
Procedure Turn
parallel track
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
nearest
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
190-00820-03 Rev. A
north
navigation
NAVigation AID
Non-directional Beacon
Next Generation Radar
nautical mile(s)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MET
METAR
MEPT
Middle Marker
meter
Magnetic
Magnetic Variation
Missed Approach Hold Point
manifold pressure (inches Hg)
Manual Squelch
Missed Approach Point
Master Avionics Squelch
maximum
maximum speed (overspeed)
barometric
minimum
descent
altitude
manual electric trim
Meteorological Aviation Routine
manual electric pitch trim
N
NAV
NAVAID
NDB
NEXRAD
nm
NPT
NRST
EIS
M
m
MAG
MAG VAR
MAHP
MAN IN
MAN SQ
MAP
MASQ
MAX
MAXSPD
MDA
MFD
Multi Function Display
MGRS
Military Grid Reference System
MHz
megahertz
MIC
microphone
MIN
minimum
Minimum Safe Altitude
Uses Grid MORAs to determine
a safe altitude within ten miles of
the aircraft present position.
MKR
marker beacon
MOA
Military Operations Area
MOV
movement
mpm
meters per minute
MSA
Minimum Safe Altitude
MSG
message
MSL
Mean Sea Level
MT
meter
mV
millivolt(s)
MVFR
Marginal Visual Flight Rules
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
L
left, left runway
LAT
latitude
LBL
label
lb
pound
LCD
Liquid Crystal Display
LCL
local
LED
Light Emitting Diode
Left Over Fuel On Board The amount of fuel remaining
on board after the completion of
one or more legs of a flight plan or
direct-to.
Left Over Fuel Reserve The amount of flight time remaining,
based on the amount of fuel on
board after the completion of one or
more legs of a flight plan or directto, and a known consumption rate.
Leg
The portion of a flight plan between
two waypoints.
LIFR
Low Instrument Flight Rules
LNAV
Lateral Navigation
LO
low
LOC
localizer
LOI
loss of integrity (GPS)
LON
longitude
LPV
Localizer Performance with Vertical
guidance
LRU
Line Replacement Unit
LT
left
LTNG
lightning
LVL
level
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
km
kt
527
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Appendix C
PTT
PWR
Push-to-Talk
power
QTY
quantity
R
RAD
RAIM
right, right runway
radial
Receiver Autonomous Integrity
Monitoring
random access memory
reference
remaining (fuel remaining above
Reserve)
required
reserve (fuel reserve entered by
pilot)
reverse, revision, revise
Constant Radius Turn to Fix
Radio Magnetic Indicator
remote
range
runway
roll
read only memory
revolutions per minute
reset fuel
reserve (fuel reserve entered by
pilot)
right
reversionary
receive
EIS
RAM
REF
REM
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
REQ
RES
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
REV
RF
RMI
RMT
RNG
RNWY
ROL
ROM
rpm
RST FUEL
RSV
RT
RVRSNRY
RX
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
S
SA
SAT
SBAS
SCIT
APPENDICES
SD
sec
SEL, SLCT
SFC
SIAP
SID
SIGMET
INDEX
Sim
SLP/SKD
528
south
Selective Availability
Static Air Temperature
Satellite-Based
Augmentation
System
Storm Cell Identification and
Tracking
Secure Digital
second(s)
select
surface
Standard Instrument Approach
Procedures
Standard Instrument Departure
Significant
Meteorological
Information
simulator
slip/skid
SMBL
SPD
SPI
SPKR
SQ
SRVC, SVC
STAL
STAR
STATS
STBY
STD
SUA
SUSP
SVS
SW
SYS
symbol
speed
Special Position Identification
speaker
squelch
service
stall
Standard Terminal Arrival Route
statistics
standby
standard
Special Use Airspace
suspend
Synthetic Vision System
software
system
T
TA
TACAN
TAF
TAS
TAS
true
Traffic Advisory
Tactical Air Navigation System
Terminal Aerodrome Forecast
True Airspeed
Traffic Advisory System, true
airspeed
Total Air Temperature
Terrain Awareness and Warning
System
Terminal Control Area
Traffic Collision Avoidance System
telephone
temperature
terminal
Track Between Two Fixes
Temporary Flight Restriction
True Heading
Traffic Information System
Turbine Inlet Temperature
Track Angle Error
Terminal Maneuvering Area
Timer/Reference
topographic
Direction of aircraft movement
relative to a ground position; also
‘Ground Track’
The angle difference between the
desired track and the current track.
target
track
Terminal Radar Service Area
truncated
TAT
TAWS
TCA
TCAS
TEL
TEMP
TERM
TF
TFR
T HDG
TIS
TIT
TKE
TMA
TMR/REF
Topo
Track
Track Angle Error
TRG
TRK
TRSA
TRUNC
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Appendix C
UNAVAIL
USR
UTC
UTM/UPS
unavailable
user
Coordinated Universal Time
Universal Transverse Mercator /
Universal Polar Stereographic Grid
WGS-84
WPT
WW
WX
World Geodetic System - 1984
waypoint(s)
world wide
weather
XFER, XFR
XPDR
XTALK
XTK
transfer
transponder
cross-talk
cross-track
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
total
procedure turn
transmit
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TTL
TURN
TX
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
watt(s), west
Wide Area Augmentation System
warning (GPS position error)
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
W
WAAS
WARN
EIS
V, Vspeed
velocity (airspeed)
VA
Heading Vector to Altitude
VAPP
VOR approach
VAR
variation
VD
Heading Vector to DME Distance
Vdc
volts, direct current
VERT
vertical
Vertical Figure of Merit
A measure of the uncertainty in
the aircraft’s vertical position.
Vertical Speed Required The vertical speed necessary
to descend/climb from a current
position and altitude to a defined
target position and altitude, based
upon current groundspeed.
VFOM
Vertical Figure of Merit
VFR
Visual Flight Rules
VHF
Very High Frequency
VI
Heading Vector to Intercept
VLOC
VOR/Localizer Receiver
VM
Heading Vector to Manual
Termination
VMC
Visual Meteorological Conditions
VNAV, VNV
vertical navigation
VOL
volume
VOR
VHF Omni-directional Range
VORTAC
very high frequency omnidirectional
range station and tactical air
navigation
VPL
Vertical Protection Level
VPROF
VNV profile, vertical profile
VPTH
VNV path, vertical path
VR
Heading Vector to Radial
VS
vertical speed
VSI
Vertical Speed Indicator
VSR
Vertical Speed Required
VTF
vector to final
529
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Appendix D
Frequently Asked Questions
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If a particular aspect of the Perspective™ system operational capability is not addressed by these commonly
asked questions or in the index, contact Garmin (see the copyright page or back cover for contact information) or
a Garmin-authorized dealer. Garmin is dedicated to supporting its products and customers.
What is WAAS?
EIS
The Wide Area Augmentation System (WAAS) uses a system of ground stations to correct any GPS signal
errors. These ground stations correct for errors caused by ionospheric disturbances, timing, and satellite
orbit errors. It also provides vital integrity information regarding the health of each GPS satellite. The signal
correction is then broadcast through one of two geostationary satellites. This correction information can then
be received by any WAAS-enabled GPS receiver.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
WAAS is designed to provide the additional accuracy, availability, and integrity necessary to enable users to
rely on GPS for all phases of flight. WAAS is currently available in the United States, including Alaska and
Hawaii.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
How does WAAS affect approach operations?
Both LNAV/VNAV and LPV approaches use the accuracy of WAAS to include vertical (glide path) guidance
capability. The additional accuracy and vertical guidance capability allows improved instrument approaches to
an expanded number of airports throughout the U.S.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The implementation of LPV approaches further improves precision approach capabilities. LPV approaches
are designed to make full use of the improved GPS signal from the WAAS. This approach combines the LNAV/
VNAV vertical accuracy with lateral guidance similar to the typical Instrument Landing System (ILS). LPV
approaches allow lower approach minimums.
If WAAS is not available for the final approach course, the approach downgrades, as indicated by the “Approach
downgraded. Use LNAV minima.” message.
AFCS
What is RAIM and how does it affect approach operations?
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
RAIM is an acronym for Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring. RAIM is a GPS receiver function that
performs the following functions:
• Monitors and verifies integrity and geometry of tracked GPS satellites
• Notifies the pilot when satellite conditions do not provide the necessary coverage to support a certain phase
of flight
APPENDICES
• Predicts satellite coverage of a destination area to determine whether the number of available satellites is
sufficient to satisfy requirements
NOTE: If RAIM is not predicted to be available for the final approach course, the approach does not become
INDEX
active, as indicated by the “RAIM not available from FAF to MAP” message and the LOI annunciation
flagging on the HSI.
530
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Appendix D
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
For RAIM to work correctly, the GPS receiver must track at least five satellites. A minimum of six satellites is
required to allow RAIM to eliminate a single corrupt satellite from the navigation solution.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
RAIM ensures that satellite geometry allows for a navigation solution calculation within a specified protection
limit (2.0 nm for oceanic and en route, 1.0 nm for terminal, and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches). The
system monitors RAIM and issues an alert message when RAIM is not available (see Appendix A). Without
RAIM, GPS position accuracy cannot be monitored. If RAIM is not available when crossing the FAF, the pilot
must fly the missed approach procedure.
Why might there be no approaches available for a flight plan?
EIS
Approaches are available for the final destination airport in a flight plan or as a direct-to (keep in mind
that some VOR/VORTAC identifiers are similar to airport identifiers). If a destination airport does not have a
published approach, the system indicates “NONE” for the available procedures.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
What happens when an approach is selected? Can a flight plan with an approach, a departure, or an
arrival be stored?
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When an approach, departure, or arrival is loaded into the active flight plan, a set of approach, departure,
or arrival waypoints is inserted into the flight plan, along with a header line showing the title of the selected
instrument procedure. The original enroute portion of the flight plan remains active, unless the instrument
procedure is activated. This may be done either when the procedure is loaded or at a later time.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Flight plans can also be stored with an approach, a departure, or an arrival. Note that the active flight plan
is erased when the system is turned off. Also, the active flight plan is overwritten when another flight plan is
activated. When storing flight plans with an approach, a departure, or an arrival, the system uses the waypoint
information from the current database to define the waypoints. If the database is changed or updated, the
Perspective™ System automatically updates the information, provided the procedure has not been modified.
Should an approach, departure, or arrival procedure no longer be available, the flight plan becomes locked until
the procedure is deleted from the flight plan.
AFCS
Can “slant Golf” (“/G”) be filed using the Perspective™ system?
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
“/G” may be filed for a flight plan. GPS approaches are not to be flown with an expired database. See the
approved Pilot's Operating Handbook (POH) as well as the Aeronautical Information Manual (AIM) for more
information.
What does the OBS Softkey do?
APPENDICES
The OBS Softkey is used to select manual sequencing of waypoints. Activating OBS mode sets the current
active-to waypoint as the primary navigation reference and prevents the system from sequencing to the next
waypoint in a flight plan. When OBS mode is cancelled, automatic waypoint sequencing is continued, and
the system automatically activates the next waypoint in the flight plan once the aircraft has crossed the present
active waypoint.
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
531
Normal (OBS not activated)
• Automatic sequencing of waypoints
OBS
• Manual sequencing - ‘holds’ on selected
waypoint
• Manual course change on HSI not possible
• Manually select course to waypoint from
HSI
• Always navigates ‘TO’ the active waypoint
• Indicates ‘TO’ or ‘FROM’ waypoint
• Must be in this mode for final approach
course
• Cannot be set for final approach course or
published holding patterns
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Appendix D
532
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Appendix D
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
When OBS mode is active, the system allows the pilot to set a desired course to/from a waypoint using the
CRS/BARO Knob and HSI (much like a VOR).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The most common application for using the OBS Softkey is the missed approach. The system suspends
automatic waypoint sequencing (indicated by a ‘SUSP’ annunciation placed on the HSI) when the missed
approach point (MAP) is crossed. This prevents the system from automatically sequencing to the missed
approach holding point (MAHP). During this time, the OBS Softkey designation changes to SUSP. Selecting
the SUSP Softkey reactivates automatic waypoint sequencing. The OBS Softkey then resumes its normal
functionality.
Why might the Perspective™ System not automatically sequence to the next waypoint?
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The system only sequences flight plan waypoints when automatic sequencing is enabled (i.e., no ‘OBS’ or
‘SUSP’ annunciation on the HSI). For automatic sequencing to occur, the aircraft must also cross the bisector of
the turn being navigated. The bisector is a line passing through the waypoint common to two flight plan legs
at an equal angle from each leg.
How can a waypoint be skipped in an approach, a departure, or an arrival?
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The system allows the pilot to manually select any approach, departure, or arrival leg as the active leg of
the flight plan. This procedure is performed on the MFD from the Active Flight Plan Page by highlighting the
desired waypoint and selecting the ACT LEG Softkey then the ENT Key to approve the selection. The GPS
then provides navigation along the selected flight plan leg.
When does turn anticipation begin?
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The system smooths adjacent leg transitions based on a normal 15° bank angle (with the ability to roll up to
30°) and provides three pilot cues for turn anticipation:
• A waypoint alert (‘Next DTK ###° in # seconds’ or ‘Next HDG ###° in # seconds’) appears on the PFD 10
seconds before the turn point and flashes as it counts down to zero.
AFCS
• A flashing turn advisory (‘Turn [right/left] to ###° in # seconds’) appears on the PFD 10 seconds before the
turn and flashes as it counts down to zero. ‘Turn [right/left] to ###° now’ or ‘Next [DTK/HDG] to ###° now’
is displayed when the pilot is to begin the turn and the HSI (GPS mode) automatically sequences to the next
DTK or HDG value.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• The To/From indicator on the HSI flips momentarily to indicate that the midpoint of the turn has been
crossed.
When does the CDI scale change?
APPENDICES
Once a departure is activated, the Perspective™ Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) full scale deflection is set to
0.3 nm. The CDI scale changes to 1.0 nm (terminal mode) then ramps up to 2.0 nm (enroute mode) at 30 nm
from the departure airport. When 31 nm from the destination, the CDI scale smoothly transition from 2.0 nm
back to 1.0 nm (terminal mode). At 2.0 nm before the FAF during an active approach, the CDI scale transitions
down further based on the type of approach activated (LNAV, LNAV/VNAV, LPV). When a missed approach is
activated, the CDI is set to 0.3 nm. See the Flight Instruments Section for more details on CDI scaling.
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
533
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Appendix D
Why does the HSI not respond like a VOR when OBS mode is active?
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Unlike a VOR, the CDI scale used on GPS equipment is based on the crosstrack distance to the desired
course, not on the angular relationship to the destination. Therefore, the CDI deflection on the GPS is constant
regardless of the distance to the destination and does not become less sensitive when further away from the
destination.
What is the correct missed approach procedure? How is the missed approach holding point selected?
EIS
To comply with TSO specifications, the Perspective™ does not automatically sequence past the MAP. The first
waypoint in the missed approach procedure becomes the active waypoint when the SUSP Softkey is selected
after crossing the MAP. All published missed approach procedures must be followed, as indicated on the
approach plate.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
To execute the missed approach procedure prior to the MAP (not recommended), select the Active Flight Plan
Page and use the ACT LEG Softkey to activate the missed approach portion of the procedure.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
After a missed approach, how can the same approach be re-selected? How can a new approach be
activated?
NOTE: Do not attempt to reactivate the current approach prior to crossing the missed approach point
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
(MAP). If an attempt to do so is made, an alert message “Are you sure you want to discontinue the current
approach?” appears. The system directs the pilot back to the transition waypoint and does not take into
consideration any missed approach procedures, if the current approach is reactivated.
After flying the missed approach procedure, the pilot may reactivate the same approach for another attempt by
pressing the PROC Key. Once the clearance is given for another attempt, activate the approach by highlighting
‘Activate Approach’ using the large FMS Knob and pressing the ENT Key. The Perspective™ provides
navigation along the desired course to the waypoint and rejoins the approach in sequence from that point.
AFCS
To activate a new approach for the same airport, select the new procedure by pressing the PROC Key. Choose
‘Select Approach’, select the desired approach from the list shown, and press the ENT Key. Select the
desired transition, then activate the approach using the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To activate a new approach to a different airport, press the Direct-to Key and select the desired airport using
the FMS Knobs. Press the ENT Key to accept the selected airport, then follow the steps in the preceding
paragraph to select an approach for the new airport.
534
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Appendix E
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Map Symbols
Airports
Basemap
Item
Symbol
Unknown Airport
Interstate Highway
Non-towered, Non-serviced Airport
State Highway
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Item
Symbol
EIS
US Highway
Towered, Non-serviced Airport
National Highway
Non-towered, Serviced Airport
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
City
Towered, Serviced Airport
State/Province Border
Restricted (Private) Airport
Heliport
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
International Border
Road
Railroad
NAVAIDS
Symbol
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Item
Latitude/Longitude
Intersection
LOM (compass locator at outer marker)
Airspace Boundaries
Mode C Tower Area
VOR/ILS
VORTAC
Warning Area Prohibited Area
Alert Area
Restricted Area
Caution Area Training Area
Danger Area
Unknown Area
Class C
Terminal Radar Service Area
Mode C Area
APPENDICES
TACAN
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
VOR/DME
Symbol
AFCS
VOR
Item
ICAO Control Area
Class B Airspace
NDB (non-directional radio beacon)
Military Operations Area (MOA)
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
535
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Appendix E
Hazard Avoidance Features
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Feature
Symbol
Item
Terrain Proximity/TAWS-B display enabled
Non-threat Traffic
Traffic display enabled
Proximity Advisory
NEXRAD display enabled
Traffic Advisory, Out of Range
Cloud Top display enabled
EIS
Traffic
Symbol
Traffic Advisory
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Echo Top display enabled
XM Lightning display enabled
Miscellaneous
Item
Cell Movement display enabled
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SIGMETs/AIRMETs display enabled
METARs display enabled
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
City Forecast display enabled
Surface Analysis display enabled
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Freezing Levels display enabled
Symbol
ARTCC Frequency or FSS Frequency
Map Pointer (when panning)
Elevation Pointer
(on Topography Scale when panning)
Measuring Pointer
Wind Vector
Winds Aloft display enabled
Overzoom Indicator
County Warnings display enabled
User Waypoint
Cyclone Warnings display enabled
Vertical Navigation Along Track Waypoint
Loss of hazard avoidance feature
(loss of GPS position)
Parallel Track Waypoint
APPENDICES
Unanchored Flight Path Waypoint
Top of Descent (TOD)
INDEX
Bottom of Descent (BOD)
Navigating using Dead Reckoning
536
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Appendix E
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Obstacle Database
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL
Obstacle Location
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft
below the aircraft altitude
Yellow obstacle is between 100 ft and
1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
EIS
Gray obstacle is more than 1000 ft
below aircraft altitude
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Table E-1 Obstacle Colors
Terrain Avoidance Colors and Symbols
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Terrain Above Aircraft Altitude
Aircraft Altitude
100 ft Threshold
Red terrain is above
or within 100 ft below
the aircraft altitude
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1000 ft
Yellow terrain is between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
Black terrain is more than 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
AFCS
Figure E-1 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure E-2 TAWS Potential Impact Points
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
537
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Appendix E
Blank Page
538
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Index
EIS
B
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Backlighting-------------------------------------------------- 47
Barometric altimeter setting---------------------------50, 56
Bearing/distance, measuring------------------------------152
Bearing information--------------------------- 51, 62–63, 63
Bearing source----------------------------------------------- 63
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
C
Calibrated Airspeed-----------------------------------------250
CDI---------------------------------- 244, 257, 268, 276, 283
CELL MOV Softkey------------------------------------------303
Chart Not Available---------------------------------- 438, 458
Chart options----------------------------------------- 446, 465
Chart setup box-------------------------------------- 452, 468
ChartView--------------------------------------- 413, 437, 455
ChartView database----------------------------------------455
ChartView functions----------------------------------------437
ChartView plan view---------------------------------------447
ChartView profile view-------------------------------------448
ChartView softkeys-----------------------------------------437
Checklists--------------------------------------------- 482–483
Checklist softkeys-------------------------------------------482
CLD TOP Softkey--------------------------------------------301
Closest Point-------------------------------------------------232
COM channel spacing--------------------------------------112
COM Frequency Box----------------------------------------104
Command Bars----------------------------------------------370
Communication (COM) Frequency Window------------- 50
Comparator Window----------------------------51, 396, 492
COM tuning failure-----------------------------------------138
Controls
Softkeys------------------------------------------------ 14–17
Copy a Flight Plan------------------------------------------219
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)-----------------50, 64–65
Changing scale-------------------------------------------533
Course To Altitude------------------------------------------249
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT °F)--------------------- 82
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS)--------- 365–412
Alerts and annunciations------------------------ 411–412
Status Annunciations------------------------------------411
Status Box-------------------------------------------------369
Automatic squelch------------------------------------------113
Autopilot-----------------------------------------------------365
Autopilot Disconnect-------------------------- 367, 385, 395
Auto-tuning, COM------------------------------------------108
Auto-tuning, NAV------------------------------------ 117, 121
Auto Zoom---------------------------------------------------144
Auxiliary Pages (AUX)--------------------------------------- 36
AUX - system status page-434, 436, 455, 456, 470, 472,
474
Aviation Symbols------------------------------------- 157, 199
Avidyne TAS600---------------------------------------------349
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Activate a Flight Plan---------------------------------------219
Active channel-----------------------------------------------477
Active database-------------------------------- 515, 516, 520
Active frequency------------------------------------- 104, 114
AFCS Status Annunciation---------------------------------- 51
AFCS Status Box--------------------------------------- 50, 369
AHRS--------------------------------------------------- 506, 507
Air Data Computer-------------------------------------------- 1
Airport
Information-----------------------------------------------177
Airspace Alerts--------------------------------- 192, 193, 285
Airspeed Indicator---------------------------------------50, 52
Airways
Collapsed--------------------------------------------------232
Expanded--------------------------------------------------232
Alerting system----------------------------------------------491
Alert levels---------------------------------------------------493
Alerts---------------------------------------------------------491
Aircraft-----------------------------------------------------494
Audio voice-----------------------------------------------497
Along Track Offset----------------------------------- 223, 224
ALT------------------------------------------------------------281
Altimeter--------------------------------------------------50, 55
Altitude
Constraints----------------------------------------- 235, 268
Altitude alerting---------------------------------------------- 77
Altitude Hold Mode----------------------------------------374
Altitude Reference----------------------------- 373, 374, 381
Annunciations
AFCS Status-----------------------------------------------510
TAWS Status----------------------------------------------513
Test tone---------------------------------------------- 27, 492
Annunciator lights------------------------------------------131
AOPA Airport Directory------------------413, 473, 474, 518
Approach-----------------------------------------------------531
Activating-------------------------------------------------248
ILS----------------------------------------------------------406
Loading--------------------------------------- 216, 245, 247
Missed-----------------------------------------------------409
Removing--------------------------------------------------248
WAAS------------------------------------------------------408
Approach box-----------------------------------------------460
Approach Mode-------------------------------- 391, 406, 408
APR softkey------------------------------------------- 247, 253
Arc HSI--------------------------------------------------------- 60
Arrival procedure-200, 214, 242, 244, 245, 247, 266, 268,
277
Assist, engine leaning---------------------------------- 93–95
Attitude---------------------------------------------------------- 1
Attitude Indicator----------------------------------------50, 54
Audio alerting system------------------------------- 492, 493
Audio panel fail-safe operation---------------------------138
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
A
I-1
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Index
D
F
Databases------------------------------------------ 22, 27, 515
Database synchronization--------------517, 520, 522, 523
Data link-------------------------------------------------------- 1
Datalink receiver troubleshooting------------------------488
Data logging-------------------------------------------------486
Date and time------------------------------------------------ 39
Day/Night views-------------------------------------- 452, 468
Day view----------------------------------452, 453, 468, 469
Dead Reckoning---------------------------------------------- 79
Declutter, display--------------------------------------------- 80
Declutter maps-------------------------------------------15, 20
Delete Flight Plans------------------------------------------220
Deleting
An entire airway----------------------------------- 221, 222
An entire procedure------------------------------ 221, 222
An individual waypoint--------------------------- 221, 222
Flight Plan Items-----------------------------------------221
Density Altitude---------------------------------------------252
Departure
Procedure------------------------------212, 227, 239, 241
Select------------------------------------239, 242, 245, 248
Time--------------------------------------------------------250
Timer-------------------------------------------------------- 46
Digital audio entertainment---------------------------------- 4
Dilution of Precision (DOP)--------------------------------- 32
Direct-to-- 170, 194, 195, 196, 197, 198, 233, 234, 266,
268, 283
Display backup----------------------------------------------- 24
DME
HOLD mode-----------------------------------------------123
NAV1 mode-----------------------------------------------123
DME information-----------------------------------------51, 63
DME transceiver pairing-----------------------------------123
DME tuning window---------------------------------------123
DR mode------------------------------------------------------ 79
Dual navigation database---------------------------------516
Fail-safe operation------------------------------------------138
Field of View (SVS)------------------------------------------168
Flight director (FD)------------------------------------------365
Modes, vertical------------------------------------ 371–385
Flight ID------------------------------------------------------124
Flight Level Change Mode-------------------- 376, 402, 404
Flight plan
Closest point to reference------------------------------232
Storing-----------------------------------------------------531
Flight timer---------------------------------------------------- 45
FliteCharts-------------------------------------------- 413, 457
FliteCharts cycle---------------------------------------------470
FliteCharts database---------------------------------------471
FliteCharts expiration--------------------------------------471
FliteCharts functions---------------------------------------457
FPA----------------------------------------------------- 235, 273
Frequency
Nearest----------------------------------------------------190
Frequency spacing------------------------------------------112
Frequently asked questions--------------------------------530
Fuel
Calculations------------------------------------------------ 88
Efficiency--------------------------------------------------252
Endurance-------------------------------------------------252
Flow--------------------------------------------------------- 85
Remaining-------------------------------------------------252
Required---------------------------------------------------252
Statistics---------------------------------------------------252
Fuel calculations--------------------------------------------- 95
Fuel Flow (FFLOW GPH)------------------------------------ 82
Fuel on Board-----------------------------------------------252
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
E
INDEX
APPENDICES
ECHO TOP Softkey------------------------------------------300
Electronic checklists---------------------413, 482, 483, 484
Emergency checklist----------------------------------------483
Emergency Frequency--------------------------------------138
Engine Indication System (EIS)------------------------ 81–96
Entering Flight ID-------------------------------------------124
Entertainment inputs---------------------------------------135
Estimated Position Error (EPE)----------------------------- 32
Ethernet------------------------------------------------------- 23
Exhaust Gas Temperature (EGT)---------------------- 93–94
I-2
G
GDC 74A-------------------------------------------------------- 1
GDL 69/69A----------------------------------------------1, 287
GDU 1040------------------------------------------------------ 1
GEA 71---------------------------------------------------------- 1
GFC 700------------------------------------------------------365
GIA 63W-------------------------------------------------------- 1
Glidepath-----------------------------------------------------281
Glidepath indicator------------------------------------------ 58
Glidepath Mode (GP)-------------------------- 382, 391, 408
Glideslope----------------------------------------------------281
Glideslope indicator----------------------------------------- 58
Glideslope Mode------------------------------------- 384, 406
Global Positioning System (GPS)
Navigation----------------------------------------- 194–286
GMA 347-------------------------------------------------- 1, 22
GMU 44--------------------------------------------------------- 1
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Index
Jeppesen aviation database-------------------------------515
Key(s)--------------------------------------------------------- 8, 9
L
Mach number------------------------------------------------ 50
Magnetometer------------------------------------------------- 1
Map
Panning----------------------------------------------------147
O
APPENDICES
M
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Land Symbols------------------------------------------------156
Line Replaceable Units (LRU)------------------------------ 26
LNAV----------------------------------------------------------257
LO SENS------------------------------------------------------122
Low Altitude Annunciation--------------------------------- 77
LPV----------------------------------------------- 257, 283, 397
AFCS
K
National Weather Service----------------------------------310
Navigation
Database------------------------------------------- 235, 236
Map--------------------------------------------------------197
Navigation Mode----------------------- 389–390, 400–401
Navigation mode selection--------------------------------114
Navigation (NAV) Frequency Window-------------------- 50
Navigation source-------------------------------------- 64–66
Navigation Status Box-------------------------------------- 50
Nav radio selection-----------------------------------------114
Nearest
Airport-------------- 174, 175, 176, 177, 190–193, 247
Airport Minimum Runway Length---------------------177
Airports Page-------------------------------- 175, 176, 177
Airport Surface Matching-------------------------------177
VOR------------------------------------------------- 190–191
Nearest airports, frequency tuning-----------------------108
Nearest Pages (NRST)--------------------------------------- 36
NEXRAD Softkey--------------------------------------------296
Night view--------------------------------452, 453, 468, 469
Non-path descent------------------------------380, 404–405
Normal display operation----------------------------------- 23
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
J
N
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
IDENT function--------------------------------------- 126, 131
ID indicator--------------------------------------------------116
ILS approach-------------------------------------------------406
Indicated airspeed------------------------------------------- 52
Indicated Altitude-------------------------------------------250
INFO box-----------------------------------------------------461
Initialization (system)---------------------------------------- 22
Inset Map----------------------------------------------------- 51
Intercom system (ICS)--------------------------------------135
Intersection
Information---------------------------------------- 178–179
Inverting a flight plan--------------------------------------219
IOI------------------------------------------------------ 333, 343
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
I
EIS
Heading------------------------------------------------------- 50
Heading Select Mode--------------------------------------388
HI SENS-------------------------------------------------------122
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)--------------50, 59–70
HSI double green arrow------------------------------------114
HSI magenta arrow-----------------------------------------114
HSI single green arrow-------------------------------------114
Map pages---------------------------------------------------- 35
Map symbols------------------------------------------------535
Marker beacon----------------------------------------------122
Marker beacon annunciations----------------------------- 75
MASQ processing-------------------------------------------- 97
Measurement units, changing displayed----------------- 40
Menus--------------------------------------------------------- 33
Message advisories----------------------493, 500, 506, 507
Messages window------------------------------------------481
Minimum Descent Altitude (MDA)--------------------51, 78
MISCOMP----------------------------------------------------496
Missed Approach----------- 199, 249, 254, 257, 283, 409
MKR/MUTE--------------------------------------------------122
Mode S------------------------------------------------ 124, 125
Mode selection softkeys---------------------------- 124, 125
Morse code identifier---------------------------------------116
Multi Function Display (MFD)
Softkeys----------------------------------------------------- 19
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
H
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Go Around Mode------------------------------------ 409–410
GPS Window-------------------------------------------------522
GRS 77---------------------------------------------------------- 1
GTX 33---------------------------------------------------------- 1
GTX 33 Mode S Transponders----------------------------124
OBS Mode----------------------------------------------- 69–70
Obstacles---------------------------------------------- 502, 503
Oil Pressure (OIL PSI)------------------------------------82, 85
Oil Temperature (OIL °F)------------------------------------ 82
Omni Bearing Selector (OBS)----------------------- 531–532
Other Statistics--------------------------------------- 250, 252
INDEX
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
I-3
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Index
P
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Page groups--------------------------------------------- 34–37
Page menus--------------------------------------------------- 33
Parallel Track------------------------------------------ 225, 227
Passenger address------------------------------------------134
PA system----------------------------------------------------134
Pilot profiles--------------------------------------------- 41–42
PIT-------------------------------------------------------------496
Pitch Hold Mode--------------------------------------------372
Pitch indication----------------------------------------------- 54
Power-up page----------------------------------------------482
Primary Flight Display (PFD)
Softkeys------------------------------------------------ 14–16
Procedures
GFC 700-------------------------------------------- 397–412
Q
Quick tuning 121.500 MHz-------------------------------107
R
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
RAIM---------------------------------- 31, 244, 254, 255, 256
Ram Air Temperature (RAT)--------------------------------- 71
Range---------------------------------------------------------166
Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM)-31–32,
254, 530
Required
Vertical Speed--------------------------------------------274
Vertical Speed Indicator---------------------------------274
Reversionary Mode---------------------------------24–25, 28
Reversionary Sensor Window---------------------- 396, 493
ROC---------------------------------------------------- 333, 343
Roll Hold Mode---------------------------------------------387
RS-232----------------------------------------------------------- 4
RS-485----------------------------------------------------------- 3
RVSI---------------------------------------------------- 274, 275
RX indicator--------------------------------------------------105
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
S
INDEX
APPENDICES
SafeTaxi------------------------------------------ 413, 431, 434
SafeTaxi database-------------------------------------------435
SBAS--------------------------------------------------- 254, 256
Scheduler----------------------------------------413–414, 480
SD card-------------------------------------------------------- 21
Secure Digital (SD) card----------------------------- 482, 515
Selected Altitude-- 50, 77, 372, 373, 375, 376, 377, 381
Selected Altitude Capture Mode-372, 373, 374, 375, 377,
385
Selected Course----------------------------- 51, 60, 390, 392
Selected Heading--------------------------------- 51, 60, 388
Selecting a COM radio-------------------------------------104
Sensor--------------------------------------------------------496
Sequencing, automatic-------------------------------------533
Skywatch-----------------------------------------------------357
I-4
Slip/Skid Indicator----------------------------------------50, 54
Softkeys
LTNG-------------------------------------------------------302
MFD--------------------------------------------------------- 19
PFD-------------------------------------------------14–16, 50
Sort Flight Plans---------------------------------------------219
Speaker-------------------------------------------------------131
Split COM operation----------------------------------------134
Standby database------------------------------------ 516, 520
Standby frequency----------------------------- 104, 108, 114
Standby frequency field------------------------------------104
Stereo headsets---------------------------------------------131
Stormscope--------------------------------------------------316
Stuck microphone-------------------------------------------138
Sunrise--------------------------------------------------------251
Sunset--------------------------------------------------------251
SVS troubleshooting----------------------------------------487
Symbols, map------------------------------------------------535
Synthetic vision (SVS)------------------------------- 413, 414
System annunciations--------------------------------------491
System Page (EIS)-------------------------------------------- 95
System time--------------------------------------------------- 50
T
Tachometer (RPM)---------------------------------------82, 85
TAF------------------------------------------------------------305
Takeoff Mode------------------------------------------------385
TAS------------------------------------------------------------506
TAWS-------------------------------------------------- 512, 513
Terminal procedures charts------------------------- 438, 458
Terrain--------------------------------------------------------502
Color indications-----------------------------------------537
Terrain Awareness and Warning System (TAWS)-------512
Annunciation---------------------------------------------- 76
Terrain Proximity--------------------------------------------321
Terrain-SVS-------------------------------------- 326, 365, 412
Timer
Departure--------------------------------------------------- 46
Flight-------------------------------------------------------- 45
Timer, PFD generic------------------------------------------- 44
TOD---------------------------------------------- 273, 274, 280
TOPO DATA------------------------------------- 153, 154, 163
Top of Descent--------------------------------------- 273, 274
TOPO SCALE-------------------------------------------------155
Track----------------------------------------------------------- 59
Track Vector--------------------------------------------------164
Traffic
Annunciation------------------------------------------51, 75
Voice alerts------------------------------------------------- 75
Transponder code entry------------------------------------128
Transponder data box--------------------------------------- 97
Transponder ground mode--------------------------------125
Transponder mode field------------------ 97, 125, 126, 127
Transponder standby mode-------------------------------126
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Index
XM
Radio------------------------------------------------ 287, 475
Receiver troubleshooting-------------------------------488
XM Satellite Weather------------------------------------287
XM channel list----------------------------------------------477
XM radio-----------------------------------------------------477
XM radio entertainment-----------------------------------136
XM radio presets--------------------------------------------479
XM radio volume--------------------------------------------479
XM satellite radio------------------------------------ 475, 477
XM Service class--------------------------------------------476
XM weather/radio--------------------------------------------- 4
V
Z
Zoom
Auto--------------------------------------------------------144
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
VDI----------------------------------------------------- 274, 275
Vertical deviation-------------------------------------------379
Vertical deviation guidance-------------------------------236
Vertical Deviation Indicator-------------------------------274
Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI)----------------------51, 58
Vertical navigation------------------------------------------235
Direct-to---------------------------------------------------234
Vertical Navigation flight control------------------ 377–381
Vertical Path Tracking Mode------------------377–378, 403
Vertical speed guidance-----------------------------------236
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)--------------------------50, 58
Vertical Speed Mode---------------------------------------375
Vertical Speed Reference----------------------------------375
VFR code-----------------------------------------------------130
VNAV---------------------------------------------------------198
VNAV Target Altitude-------------------------------- 377–380
VNAV Target Altitude Capture Mode--------------------381
VNV----------------------------------------273, 508, 509, 529
VNV guidance
Disabling--------------------------------------------------233
Enabling---------------------------------------------------233
VNV indications, PFD---------------------------------------- 74
VNV Target Altitude----------------------------------------- 51
Voice alerts, TIS Traffic--------------------------------------363
Voice alerts, traffic------------------------------------------- 75
VOR
Nearest--------------------------------------------- 190–191
VOR selection------------------------------------------------114
VSI-------------------------------------------------------------275
Vspeed references------------------------------------------- 53
VS TGT------------------------------------------------- 235, 273
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Unable to display chart----------------------------- 438, 458
Updating Garmin databases------------------------------435
Updating Jeppesen databases----------------------------455
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
X
EIS
U
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Waypoint
Automatic sequencing--------------------------- 532, 533
Skipping---------------------------------------------------533
Waypoint Pages (WPT)-------------------------------------- 35
Waypoint Selection Submenu--- 195, 202, 203, 207, 254
Weather (real-time)-------------------------------------------- 4
Wind--------------------------------------------------- 142, 165
Wind data-------------------------------------------------51, 73
WIND Softkey------------------------------------------------309
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Transponder Status Box------------------------------------- 50
Trend Vector
Turn Rate--------------------------------------------------- 62
Trip Planning------------------------------------ 250, 251, 252
Trip statistics------------------------------------------ 251, 252
True Airspeed------------------------------------------- 52, 252
Turn anticipation--------------------------------------------533
Turn Rate Indicator--------------------------------------50, 62
TX indicator--------------------------------------------------105
W
190-00820-03 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
INDEX
WAAS-------------------------------------------- 257, 397, 503
WAAS precision approach---------------------------------408
Warranty--------------------------------------------------------- i
I-5
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Index
Blank Page
I-6
Cirrus Perspective® by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22
190-00820-03 Rev. A
®
Cirrus Perspective by Garmin
®®
Garmin AT, Inc.
2345 Turner Road SE
Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
p:503.391.3411
f:503.364.2138
Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House, Bulls Copse Road
Houndsdown Business Park
Southampton, SO40 9RB, U.K.
p:44/0870.8501241
f:44/0870.8501251
Garmin Corporation
No. 68, Jangshu 2nd Road
Shijr, Taipei County, Taiwan
p:886/02.2642.9199
f:886/02.2642.9099
Cirrus SR20/SR22
Garmin International, Inc.
1200 East 151st Street
Olathe, KS 66062, U.S.A.
p:913.397.8200
f:913.397.8282
www.garmin.com
190-00820-03
Revision 1TP
Cirrus SR20/SR22
Integrated Avionics System
Pilot’s Guide
System Software 0764.06 or later
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising